Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Magnetic Resonance
Operator Manual
Version syngo MR 2006T
0.0
medical
Manufacturers note:
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2005 Siemens AG
All rights reserved
0.0
Siemens AG
Wittelsbacherplatz 2
80333 Mnchen
Germany
0.0
0.0
Contact Information:
Siemens AG, Medical Solutions
Magnetic Resonance
Henkestrae 127
91052 Erlangen
Germany
0.0
0.0
0.0
AG 09.05
0.0
0.0
syngo MR
syngo MR 2006T
Summary of contents
Basics
Security Package
Patient Browser
Patient Registration
Examination
Viewing
3D Evaluation
Neuro 3D
Postprocessing Images
iii
Summary of contents
syngo MR
Vessel View
Composing
Filming
References
Index
0.0
iv
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Table of contents
A Basics
A.1
General Information
A.2
A.3
A.4
Service Functions
B Security Package
B.1
Introduction
B.2
B.3
B.4
System Manager
C.2
D Patient Browser
D.1
Introduction
D.2
D.3
D.4
Correcting Data
D.5
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
Table of contents
syngo MR
D.7
D.8
Reporting
E Patient Registration
E.1
Introduction
E.2
E.3
E.4
F Examination
F.1
F.2
F.3
F.4
Positioning Slices
F.5
F.6
F.7
F.8
F.9
F.10
Inline Display
F.11
Patient instructions
F.12
F.13
Printing protocols
0.0
vi
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Table of contents
F.14
F.15
F.16
F.17
F.18
Breast Biopsy
F.19
F.20
Quality measurement
G Viewing
G.1
Introduction
G.2
G.3
G.4
Processing Images
G.5
2D Evaluation
G.6
Position display
G.7
G.8
H 3D Evaluation
H.1
Introduction
H.2
Transferring Images to 3D
H.3
Working in 3D
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
vii
Table of contents
syngo MR
H.5
H.6
H.7
H.8
H.9
3D Editor
H.10 Fusion
H.11 Fly Through
H.12 Saving 3D Series and Images
H.13 Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images
H.14 3D Configuration
Introduction
J.2
J.3
J.4
J.5
J.6
J.7
0.0
viii
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Table of contents
K Neuro 3D
K.1
Introduction
K.2
Loading images
K.3
K.4
K.5
Neuro 3D Evaluation
K.6
L Postprocessing Images
L.1
Dynamic Analysis
L.2
L.3
L.4
L.5
L.6
M Vessel View
M.1
Introduction
M.2
M.3
Defining Vessels
M.4
Evaluating vessels
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
ix
Table of contents
syngo MR
N Composing
N.1
Introduction
N.2
N.3
Viewing images
N.4
Evaluations
N.5
O Filming
O.1
Introduction
O.2
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.3
O.4
O.5
O.6
Configuring Filming
P References
P.1
Scan Parameters
P.2
Index
0.0
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Special Information
0.0
N OT E
The magnetic resonance tomographs of the Magnetom
family are not devices with measuring functions.
0.0
Measured values obtained are for information only and
cannot be used as the sole basis for diagnosis.
0.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
xi
Revision Info
syngo MR
0.0
In comparison to the previous version new coils are used for the
MAGNETOMS Symphony and Trio. The corresponding coil
abbreviations are listed in Chapter Text Annotations in Medical
Images.
Page P.28
0.0
0.0
0.0
xii
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Revision Info
0.0
The syngo MR software and its predecessor Numaris (including Numaris 3.5) use different patient coordinate systems. 0.0
It is important to remember this when diagnosing MR images
acquired in Numaris under syngo MR .
0.0
If you have any questions about converting the different coordinate systems, please contact your applications specialist.
0.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
xiii
Revision Info
syngo MR
0.0
The slice positions are positive in the Feet, Anterior, and Left
directions as seen from the magnet isocenter.
0.0
0.0
xiv
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Revision Info
0.0
The slice positions are positive in the Left, Posterior, and Head
directions as seen from the magnet isocenter.
0.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
xv
Revision Info
syngo MR
+FAL
syngo MR
+LPH
If the slice position ascends, the slices move toward the positive
coordinates:
0.0
Numaris 3 and
Numaris 3.5
0.0
syngo MR
0.0
NOTE
Beginning with software version MRease VA12A, the
image text changes for the slice position. Instead of the sign
"+" or "-", directional abbreviations such as L, P or H, or R,
A or F are shown.
0.0
0.0
0.0
xvi
Operator Manual
PART
Basics
A.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A1
Contents
Basics
0.0
A2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
A.1
General Information
A.1
A.1
A.1
Operating system
A.1
A.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Impermissible or faulty manipulations or
changes of the hardware or software can cause the system
to malfunction.
A.1
Consequence: This can cause injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
A.1
Remedy: You are therefore not permitted to open or remove
the cladding of the equipment, to install third-party software
or to connect the system to a network.
A.1
Depending on the operating system there may be slight variations in the color display of dialog boxes and windows.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.11
General Information
Security in syngo MR
Basics
A.1
Security in syngo MR" provides the whole functionality necessary for the protection of patient data.
A.1
Privileges allow an user to execute syngo MR functions, such
as sending data over network or invoking the patient registration.
Log on
A.1
After you have switched on the computer and before you start
working you must log on as a user.
Page B.35, Logging on and off
A.1
A.1
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably.
A.1
Program start
A.1
A.1
0.0
A.12
Operator Manual
Basics
General Information
A.1
During startup of your system the main console and the satellite
consoles are also automatically started up. If you reboot the
main console manually, make sure to reboot the satellite consoles as well.
A.1
System administration
A.1
You find more information on security and system administration in Part B, Security Package.
A.1
Audit trail
A.1
A.1
All names and data of patients and institutions that are used in
this operator manual are entirely fictional.
A.1
Any resemblance to names of existing people or organizations
past or present is entirely coincidental.
A.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.13
General Information
Basics
Safety-related information
A.1
WA R N I N G
Indicates potential dangers that could cause injury or death
in extreme cases.
A.1
The syngo MR system was designed and built so that it cannot cause death if used properly.
A.1
C AU T I O N
Indicates potential (direct) dangers that could cause minor
injury or damage to the system.
A.1
A.1
N OT E
Notes regarding optimum use of the system and other
useful information.
A.1
0.0
A.14
Operator Manual
Basics
General Information
Warning messages
A.1
A.1
A.1
This type of warning message is application and task card specific. The message occurs within the active workflow/task and
requires your decision, but not immediately. You can confirm the
message and continue work, but you can also switch to another
task card and confirm the message later.
A.1
Information Messages
A.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.15
General Information
Basics
A.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Impermissible or faulty manipulations/
changes of the software or connection of the system to a
network
A.1
Consequence: Unauthorized access.
A.1
A.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Reduced system performance due to
overload of the network environment.
A.1
Consequence: Unexpected system behavior.
Remedy: Only use syngo MR in a secure and loadadapted network.
A.1
A.1
0.0
A.16
Operator Manual
Basics
General Information
Virus protection
A.1
As a user of a networked PC you should be aware of the possibility of an infection with computer viruses or other damaging
software.
A.1
Prevention
A.1
A.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.17
General Information
Suitable topology
Basics
A.1
0.0
A.18
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
A.2
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.21
Basics
A.2
After start up, the user interface of the program will appear on
your screen, with the Exam task card in the foreground.
The user interface is subdivided into the following areas:
A.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Menu bar
Image and workspace of the task cards
Tabs of the task cards
Tabs of the subtask cards
Stack of subtask cards
Status bar
0.0
A.22
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
The mouse
A.2
A.2
A.2
You can start actions of the program with the mouse buttons.
With the left button you select objects and start applications and
actions, with the right button you open popup menus and with
the center button you change the window values of images. A.2
With the mouse you can:
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.23
Basics
A.2
A.2
If you have lost sight of the mouse pointer, simply move the
mouse.
Depending on the application which is currently active and the
action you want to perform the appearance of the mouse
pointer can change.
A.2
Cursor
A.2
0.0
A.24
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
Single click
A.2
A.2
Double-click
A.2
A.2
Dragging
A.2
Press the mouse button and move the mouse while holding the
button down. With this action you can draw graphics, for example (left mouse button), or set window levels (center mouse button).
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.25
Basics
A.2
Click an object with the left mouse button, move it while holding
the mouse button down and release the mouse button again. A.2
A.2
Calling up the
popup menu
A.2
With the key combination Shift + F10 and a single click of the
right mouse button you can call up a pop menu for the selected
object or active area of the screen (except Viewing).
Page A.25, Using the mouse
A.2
0.0
A.26
Operator Manual
Basics
The keyboard
A.2
You use the keyboard to enter text and numbers. You can also
call up certain functions and start programs using key combinations and the keys of the numeric keypad.
A.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Function keys
Typewriter keyboard
Cursor keypad
Symbol keypad
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.27
Basics
A.2
A.2
Deleting characters
A.2
A.2
With the cursor keys you can move the text cursor
within a text entry field. With the keys Home and End you move
the cursor to the first and last position within the text.
A.2
Calling up help
A.2
Press the F1 key to call up the Online Help supplied with the
program.
A.2
A.2
0.0
A.28
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
The user interface of the Exam task card is divided into separate areas, e.g. image area or program control. If you want to
operate the program quickly via the keyboard you can activate
the input and operation tools of the interface separately, one
after the other. By doing this, you are placing a focus on a specific object on the user interface to enable input via keyboard.A.2
For this purpose, press the Tab key on your keyboard to jump
forwards.
Or
A.2
A.2
Press the Tab key until you reach the object that you want to
operate via the keyboard.
The object which currently has the keyboard focus is marked.A.2
Buttons are marked with a broken line border.
A.2
Entries in the program card are marked with a broken line border.
A.2
Entries in the program card are marked with a broken line border and have a blue background.
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.29
Basics
A.2
Paging through
card stacks
A.2
If the keyboard focus is on a card stack, you can also move individual cards to the foreground via keyboard commands.
A.2
Press keys Ctrl + or Ctrl + to jump to the left or to the
right.
If the card in the foreground is itself subdivided into cards, such
as the System parameter card, you can also move these cards
to the foreground via the keyboard.
A.2
To do this, press the Shift + Ctrl keys + or the Shift + Ctrl
keys + to jump to the left or to the right.
The keyboard focus is then on the previously set input object
that is marked as such.
A.2
A.2
You can move the keyboard focus using the tab key within
objects, e.g. program control or parameter cards.
A.2
0.0
A.210
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.211
Basics
0.0
A.212
Operator Manual
Basics
Mark (Num. 3)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.213
Using shortcuts
Basics
A.2
A.2
A.2
Alt + F4
Alt + Tab
Ctrl + Tab
Ctrl + Shift +
Tab
Ctrl + C
Copy
Ctrl + I
Import data
Ctrl + P
Ctrl + S
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + V
Paste
Ctrl + W
0.0
A.214
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
Windows
Windows + D
Windows + E
Windows + F
Windows + Ctrl + F
Windows + F1
Show help
Windows + R
Windows + Pause
Windows + Shift +
M
Windows + L
Lock workstation
Windows + U
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.215
Basics
A.2
Selecting objects
A.2
A.2
0.0
A.216
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
You select an object with the mouse and then press the Ctrl or
the Shift key.
A.2
With the Ctrl key you can select other individual objects.
A.2
A.2
Deselecting objects
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.217
Basics
A.2
A.2
A.2
0.0
A.218
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
Another way of moving objects is via the cut & paste or copy
& paste functions.
A.2
Select the object you want to move or copy.
Call up Edit > Cut or use the shortcut Ctrl + X if you want to
move the object (only Filming task card).
Or
A.2
Call up Edit > Copy or use the shortcut Ctrl + C if you want
to copy the object.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.219
Basics
A.2
Menus
A.2
You can also use the entries of the dropdown menus to pass
objects from one application to another.
A.2
Select the object(s) you want to pass onto another task card.
Call up the relevant menu item.
Page A.241, Using menus
0.0
A.220
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
A.2
Move the mouse pointer onto the image, press the center or
left mouse button and hold it pressed. If you now move the
mouse you change the way the image is displayed.
The mouse cursor changes shape for zooming (left cursor) and
panning (right cursor).
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.221
Basics
Entering text
A.2
If you click a text entry field with the mouse, the mouse pointer
becomes a text cursor (vertical bar).
A.2
A.2
Selecting words
A.2
Deleting text
A.2
You can mark text by moving the cursor across the text while
holding the left mouse button down. The text is displayed highlighted.
A.2
0.0
A.222
Operator Manual
Basics
Windows
A.2
Layout of windows
A.2
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.223
Basics
A.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
0.0
A.224
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
A.2
In the top right-hand corner of the title bar you will find three buttons with which you can change the size and position of windows.
A.2
With these buttons you can change the active window as follows:
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
Click on the Windows title button and select the corresponding entry in the menu.
Not all of these functions are available in all windows.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.225
Basics
A.2
Move the mouse pointer onto the border of the window and its
appearance changes. Depending on where you place the
mouse pointer it can take on one of the following shapes:
A.2
On the lower or upper edge it becomes a vertical double
arrow.
Now you can change the height of the window.
On the left or right edges it changes to a horizontal double
arrow.
Now you can change the width of the window.
On a corner of the border it becomes a diagonal double
arrow.
Now you can change the height and width of the window.
On the interior border line it becomes a broken double arrow
(if the window is subdivided).
You can change the height of the window sections.
Press the left mouse button and drag the border to the new
position while holding the mouse button down.
0.0
A.226
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
You can move the window to any position on the screen as long
as it is not maximized or minimized.
A.2
Click the title bar and drag the window to the new position
holding the mouse button down.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.227
Basics
A.2
On the scroll bars you will find the arrow buttons and a scroll box
with which you can move the content of the window. Depending
on whether the window is too short or too narrow to display its
content the scroll bar will appear on the right or below the window.
A.2
Click an arrow button (1) with the left mouse button. The
screen content is shifted a small distance in the direction of
the arrow.
Click the scroll box (2) and drag it with the mouse. The
screen content is moved continuously in the corresponding
direction.
Click on any point on the scroll bar with the mouse. The
screen content is moved toward this point by a distance
which is proportional to the distance of this point from the
scroll box.
0.0
A.228
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
Active window
A.2
Switching windows
A.2
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.229
Basics
Dialog boxes
A.2
A.2
In a dialog box you will find entry fields, selection lists, radio buttons or checkboxes to select options and buttons with which you
can accept or reject inputs.
A.2
0.0
A.230
Operator Manual
Basics
NOTE
A large window might be hiding smaller dialog or message
boxes.
In that case, move the large window until the small window
becomes visible.
A.2
Example:
The Patient Browser box is open. The system starts
burning a CD in multi-session mode. The dialog box
Enter label is hidden by the Patient Browser.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.231
Basics
A.2
Radio buttons
A.2
You can select options by clicking on them with the left mouse
button. Only one option can be selected at a time.
A.2
Check box
A.2
A.2
Selection list
A.2
Click the arrow to the right of the selection list using the left
mouse button to open the selection menu.
Move the mouse pointer down the list.
The entries are highlighted one after the other.
A.2
0.0
A.232
Operator Manual
Basics
Entry field
A.2
A.2
Click into the entry field with the mouse pointer. Then enter
the text at the text cursor.
Spin box
A.2
A.2
Click one of the arrows with the left mouse button to increase
the set value (up) or decrease it (down), or enter a value in
the entry field.
Combo box
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.233
Slider
Basics
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
By clicking on a button you start an action. A dialog box contains several buttons, for instance:
A.2
All the settings in the window become valid and the window
is closed. In some dialog boxes OK triggers an action, for
example, filming.
A.2
A.2
A.2
0.0
A.234
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
You can start many functions in the program both via the menus
or via the icon buttons.
A.2
You find icon buttons on the toolbars, on the subtask cards, or
in the control area of the task cards. They allow fast and intuitive
execution of functions quickly and intuitively, simply by clicking
on the buttons.
A.2
A.2
The icon is active, for example, you can now draw a ROI on an
image.
Tool tips
A.2
If you place the mouse cursor over an icon, a short text about
this function is displayed. The tool tip disappears again after a
few seconds.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.235
Basics
A.2
Tab cards are arranged in stacks so that you can place them in
the foreground easily by clicking on a tab. When you activate a
tab card it is placed in the foreground. You can only start a function from an active tab card.
A.2
A.2
The active tab card has a different background color than the
inactive tab cards.
A.2
The settings and data that you have entered on the tab card
which was previously active are not changed when it moves into
the background. When you call up this tab card again you will
find all the data and settings unchanged.
A.2
There are two types of tab cards:
A.2
Task cards
Subtask cards
0.0
A.236
Operator Manual
Basics
Task cards
A.2
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.237
Basics
You can also switch to each task card using the function keys.A.2
A.2
Switching to another
task card
A.2
You can switch to another task card. You simply select the
appropriate tab.
A.2
0.0
A.238
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.239
Basics
Subtask cards
A.2
On task cards you will find smaller cards, called subtask cards.A.2
They are used for the following purposes:
A.2
0.0
A.240
Operator Manual
Basics
Using menus
A.2
Application-specific menus
A.2
The menu bar changes with the task card that is currently active
or the window that is currently open. This way only the functions
are accessible which are relevant for the respective application.A.2
A.2
Patient Browser
menu bar
A.2
A.2
A.2
The menu bar of the Patient Browser window contains the following menu items:
A.2
The menu bar of the Viewing task card contains the following
menu items:
A.2
The menu bar of the Filming task card contains the following
menu items:
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.241
3D menu bar
Basics
A.2
The menu bar of the 3D task card contains the following entries:A.2
A.2
Optional applications
A.2
0.0
A.242
Operator Manual
Basics
A.2
Selecting a menu
A.2
Click on a menu item in the menu bar with the left mouse button.
The dropdown menu is opened. The menu item is highlighted.A.2
Move the mouse pointer down the menu bar and each dropdown menu opens and closes in turn.
Only the dropdown menu on which the mouse pointer is placed
remains open.
A.2
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.243
Selecting an action
Basics
A.2
A.2
A.2
Options
A.2
0.0
A.244
Operator Manual
Basics
Submenu
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.245
Basics
Popup menus
A.2
A.2
Selecting an action
A.2
0.0
A.246
Operator Manual
Basics
Status bar
A.2
The status bar at the bottom edge of the window shows you
messages and instructions and contains the storage capacity
icons.
A.2
It is subdivided into three columns:
A.2
Action history
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.247
Basics
Resource check
A.2
A.2
By the storage capacity icon you can see how much space has
already been taken up in the local database. If the filled capacity
rises above a configurable limit (default 95%), the icon changes
color from green to red.
A.2
If you move the mouse pointer to this icon, the percentage of
storage capacity already taken up is displayed.
A.2
Archive the patient and examination data in time and delete
them in the Patient Browser to ensure that sufficient capacity is always available.
Page J.21, Storing Data on an External Medium
0.0
A.248
Operator Manual
Basics
Virtual Memory
A.2
By the blinking storage capacity icon in the status bar you can
see that the virtual memory is already filled.
A.2
The message Resource Monitor is displayed.
A.2
A.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Insufficient memory or disk space may
lead to an instable or blocking system.
A.2
Consequence: System is not available in emergency
cases.
A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.249
Basics
A.2
0.0
A.250
Operator Manual
Basics
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.251
Basics
A.2
NOTE
Note the following changes to image text if you are using the
former Numaris software version to process images
acquired with syngo MR:
A.2
The image number is altered.
The sign for the slice position is reversed for the headfeet and anterior-posterior directions.
The scan time TA and the contrast agent/flow time are
not displayed.
"FS" appears instead of the scan option; "OTHER"
appears instead of the image type.
The image matrix is displayed instead of the acquisition
matrix.
The echo time and inversion time display is modified
(TE:TE 15.0/##, TI: 50).
A.2
NOTE
The image text for the slice position has changed in
software versions MRease VA12A and higher. The
designations for direction L, P or H, and R, A or F are now
displayed instead of the signs "+" and "-".
A.2
0.0
A.252
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
A.3
A.3
Calling up the
Configuration Panel
A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.31
Basics
A.3
A.3
A.3
A.3
A.3
0.0
A.32
Operator Manual
Basics
A.3
A.3
A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.33
Basics
0.0
A.34
Operator Manual
Basics
A.3
A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.35
A.3
Basics
A.3
NOTE
A restart of the system is necessary to apply the change of
the language.
A.3
A.3
A.3
A.3
0.0
A.36
Operator Manual
Basics
A.3
With the Image Text Editor you can define which text elements
will be displayed in the images.
A.3
A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.37
Image type
A.3
Basics
A.3
A.3
Select the type of image you require from the selection list
View Name.
The setting for this text selection is displayed.
A.3
0.0
A.38
Operator Manual
Basics
Number of texts
A.3
A.3
All Text
All available text information is displayed in the images.
No Text
No texts will be displayed in the images.
Customized Text
You can make a selection from the available texts.
NOTE
If you select the setting No Text,
no orientation marks or scale will be displayed either!
A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.39
Text selection
A.3
Basics
If you have selected the Customized Text option, you can put
together any text selection.
A.3
Activate or deactivate the required checkboxes.
Or
A.3
A.3
A.3
0.0
A.310
Operator Manual
Basics
Emphasizing image
texts
A.3
A.3
NOTE
If orientation labels are deselected the patient name will not
be displayed.
A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.311
Basics
A.3
As soon as you have changed settings in a configuration window, you can exit the configuration window with or without saving your changes.
A.3
A.3
A.3
Click on the OK button to save all your settings and exit the
configuration window.
Click on the Apply button to save your settings but leave the
window open.
A.3
A.3
0.0
A.312
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
A.4
Service Functions
A.4
The system provides a range of service functions for maintenance, checking, and configuring the system for authorized
users, i.e. system administrators.
A.4
For technical reasons, the user interface of the service functions is always in English independent of the national language selected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.41
Service Functions
Basics
A.4
A.4
0.0
A.42
Operator Manual
Basics
Service Functions
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.43
Service Functions
Basics
Local service
A.4
In addition to the user-specific configuration, there is a configuration level for authorized users which is protected by a password.
A.4
Select Options > Service > Local Service... to call up the
Authentication window.
0.0
A.44
Operator Manual
Basics
Service Functions
A.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.45
Service Functions
Basics
A.4
NOTE
As long as you have assigned full access rights to service,
i.e. maintenance is in progress, you cannot continue
working with your system.
A.4
Select Limited Access or No Access and click OK or
Apply to continue.
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Terminating remote service without
consultation with the service engineers.
A.4
Consequence: Terminating the remote service ends all
service processes and causes system malfunctions. A.4
Remedy: Always consult with a service engineer before
terminating remote service.
A.4
0.0
A.46
Operator Manual
Basics
Service Functions
Logbook
A.4
Your system has a logbook that records all system and application-relevant events, for example error messages.
A.4
Call up Options > Service > Event Log... to display the
Event Log dialog box.
You can select the type and date of the messages that you want
to display.
A.4
For further information, please contact your Siemens Service
or your system administrator.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
A.47
Service Functions
Basics
A.4
0.0
A.48
Operator Manual
PART
Security Package
B.0
B.1 Introduction
Terms and definitions in security ............................... B.15
syngo MR 2006T
B1
Contents
0.0
B2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
B.1
Data and Function
Security
Introduction
B.1
B.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.11
Introduction
B.1
B.1
NOTE
Security has to be set up on every workstation except for
satellite consoles, which take the security settings from
their main console. Therefore, you cannot configure the
security system on satellite consoles.
B.1
Furthermore, if the computer is connected to a hospital
network, all partner workstations have to be set up for
security, otherwise a security gap will exist.
B.1
Scope
B.1
Security in syngo MR provides the infrastructure that is necessary to protect patient data from unauthorized access. Only
persons who need to see certain data will have access to it, and
only persons with the necessary data access rights will be able
to modify data.
B.1
The security system consists of the following parts:
B.1
0.0
B.12
Operator Manual
Use Cases
B.1
Introduction
The following use cases show you some benefits of the syngo
MR user management and security system.
B.1
To ensure high throughput of patients, two assistants work
on one system at the same time. While one assistant prepares a patient for the next examination at the modality, the
other assistant sends the images from the previous examination to the store. The assistants can take over and log on
without a restart of the application or a significant delay being
caused due to a patient data unload.
A system can be shared between wards or hospitals, and
patient data is only visible to the staff of the ward/hospital
that has acquired the data.
A radiologist working in a radiology department of a hospital
can also have his or her own practice and use the hospitals
systems for examinations of own patients. For example,
depending on the current role (radiologist in hospital or
radiologist for private patients) he/she has access to a
wider or more restricted range of functions for post-processing images.
The presence of a VIP patient in the hospital is kept confidential. Data acquisition is carried out by the departmental
head and one assistant. The acquired images and even the
existence of the patients records is hidden from all other
users of the system.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.13
Introduction
Structure of the
Documentation
B.1
0.0
B.14
Operator Manual
B.1
Introduction
B.1
Authentication
B.1
Audit Trail
B.1
Authorization
B.1
Authorization means:
B.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.15
Introduction
B.1
0.0
B.16
Operator Manual
B.1
Introduction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.17
Introduction
B.1
NOTE
Because it is not possible to deny rights, the Everyone
group and role have but the user shall not, we recommend
to take special care when configuring the data access
permission and the functional privileges.
B.1
0.0
B.18
Operator Manual
Introduction
B.1
Permissions
B.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.19
Introduction
Privileges
B.1
Roles
B.1
Users having the same tasks are assigned a role (for example,
radiologists, administrators, or technicians). Then all users of a
role have the same right to execute functions, such as storing
data.
B.1
Establishing roles helps to efficiently assign execution rights to
users and reduces the time needed for configuration.
B.1
0.0
B.110
Operator Manual
Trusted Hosts
B.1
Introduction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.111
Introduction
0.0
B.112
Operator Manual
Information for
Administrators
CHAPTER
B.2
Administrators tasks
B.2
B.2
NOTE
User management has to be set up on every computer,
except for satellite consoles, which take the security
settings from their main console.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.21
B.2
User Authentication
B.2
User Authorization
B.2
The syngo MR user management and security system provides a highly configurable access control and ensures that
users obtain access only to application functions and patient
data they are authorized to work with.
B.2
The right to execute functions is granted via privileges.
The right to create, read, update, delete or protect data is
granted via permissions.
Permissions can be set on at the patient or the study level.
Series and instances inherit their permissions from the study
they belong to.
0.0
B.22
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.23
0.0
B.24
Operator Manual
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.25
LocalServiceUser
This account usually is set up to have restricted access to
patient data, but full functional privileges for checking and
maintaining the system.
B.2
To allow local service activities, an authorized user gets the
system to generate a temporary service password that automatically expires after a configurable number of days. The
user then gives the password to the service technician, so
that the technician has access to the system under the
LocalServiceUser account.
B.2
By default, this account is assigned both to the built-in group
and role called syngoServiceUsers. It also inherits rights
from the Everyone group and role (like all other accounts). B.2
In the default settings, the syngoServiceUsers group and
role have full access to all data. We therefore recommend
that you as administrator disable the rights for the syngoServiceUsers group and role that are not essential for service
activities.
B.2
0.0
B.26
Operator Manual
RemoteServiceUser
This account is used for remote service sessions.
B.2
By default, the security system is installed with a RemoteServiceUser account assigned to the group syngoServiceUsers and the role syngoServiceUsers.
B.2
Depending on national and local regulations, remote access
to patient data is prohibited. Keep in mind that the RemoteServiceUserinherits the rights of the Everyone group and
role and the syngoServiceUsers group and role. It is therefore necessary that the data access rights for these groups
and roles do not allow the violation of remote data access.
B.2
Emergency Access
To ensure emergency access to the system at all times, you
should create at least one special user account for common
emergency logon.
B.2
Typically, the emergency user account(s) are assigned to an
Emergency_Access group and assigned the Emergency_Access role, which are already built in by the security
configuration.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.27
Depending on national and local regulations and the hospitals security policies, the administrator has to define the correct permissions and privileges of the emergency access.
For example, emergency access should not allow modification, deletion or transfer of data. If this is in accordance with
the security policy, you may think about creating an emergency account without password.
B.2
To make this emergency logon information available for the
users, we suggest to give this information to the desk officer
or deposited in a safe place. Also, the users have to be
informed about the correct usage of this account and the
consequences of abuse.
B.2
Internal Users
B.2
Internal user accounts are essential for the system. They consist of built-in users of the Windows operating system and
syngo MR internal users.
B.2
The symbol user with exclamation mark indicates internal
users.
B.2
NOTE
Although it is possible to change the password of these
internal accounts, we strongly recommend not to modify
any of the internal users.
B.2
0.0
B.28
Operator Manual
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.29
DICOM Nodes
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.210
Operator Manual
TIP
Recommend the users to use the Log In Different User
function to switch the user quickly at the workstation. B.2
B.2
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.211
Preparatory steps
B.2
The following preparatory steps will help you to set up the security system from scratch. Depending on the options selected for
your security system, you do not have to perform all steps: B.2
Get a license for the security system.
Outline the intended user management system with the help
of a drawing similar to the one shown below.
As a basis, outline the intended daily workflow at the system.
For example, consider who can stand in as an acting physician and set up the necessary access rights accordingly. B.2
For basic user management you need user accounts and
groups. When using the functional check too, you also need
to think about the organization of roles.
B.2
For data access check, define data security levels in accordance with the security regulations of your hospital.
In the security configuration, you define patient groups and
assign them to users and groups. For example, Radiology
could be used for data that should only be visible to members
of the radiology department or VIP for patient data that
should only be visible to very few persons, such as the head
physician.
0.0
B.212
Operator Manual
For each patient group you can later grant groups and
users the permission to have full control or no access to
data that is marked with that patient group. You can also
grant the right to modify the assigned patient group.
Whenever a real user or a virtual DICOM node user
creates new patient data on your system, a patient group
that defines the access rights to the data can be applied.
Registration of new patients or data received from a
DICOM node are the most common ways new data is created.
If studies of a patient are already stored in the local database, the existing patient group assignment is also used
for any additional studies.
After switching the data access check option of the security system on, you will find all of your patient studies in the
STANDARD patient group.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.213
Develop a matrix that describes the permissions and privileges of the groups, roles and special user accounts.
Verify this model before activating the security system.
B.2
0.0
B.214
Operator Manual
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: Behavior of secured systems.
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.215
B.2
B.2
NOTE
You have to set up the security system on every syngo MR
workstation in your hospital except for satellite consoles,
which take the security settings from their main console. B.2
B.2
NOTE
In any case, the security system should never be configured
during an acquisition
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.216
Operator Manual
Create user accounts for every user who will work with the
workstation. Do not forget to create at least one user account
that is intended to stand in as both an administrator and
security administrator.
Page B.225
Please check the personal administrator account(s) intensively to make sure they work properly. After finishing and
testing the security configuration, we recommend to disable
the built-in Administrator or to set an individual password
for it.
Page B.41
Create the groups and roles of your user model. Add the corresponding users to those groups and roles. Do not forget to
assign the user account(s) intended as administrator both to
the groups and roles Administrators and SecurityAdmins.
Page B.235
Create patient groups to define the various data access
rights (= permissions). Assign them the desired user groups
and set up the default patient group. If necessary, you can
also set individual permissions at user level.
Page B.248
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.217
0.0
B.218
Operator Manual
B.2
By activating the syngo MR security system, the customer service technician turns your system into a system with high data
protection level. The service technician needs the appropriate
service key for service level 7.
B.2
Normally, the security system is not activated during the system
installation. To secure your system, you will have to instruct a
service technician as to which security options you want to be
enabled.
B.2
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: There is no undo!
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.219
B.2
0.0
B.220
Operator Manual
User management
Activates user management which is the basis for all other security options. When
activating any other security option, the user management will also be switched on
automatically.
Access to data is always provided in accordance with the current permissions. If this
check box is not selected, you cannot restrict any data access rights.
Functional check
Access to functions is always provided in accordance with the privileges granted to a user
role. If this check box is not selected, you cannot restrict the use of functions.
Auditing
Access to the system and configured actions are recorded in an audit trail.
If the workstation is connected to a network, select the
Enable trusted host functionality check box to establish a
secure system to your network partners and services.
Only trusted hosts will answer queries or allow data transfer.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.221
B.2
You need Administrator and SecurityAdmin rights to configure the security system.
B.2
Log on as administrator or as a user with administrative.
Page B.35
From any task card, choose the Options > Security Configuration menu item.
After authorization, the syngo MR Security Configuration
console is displayed.
B.2
By clicking an item in the tree view on the left-hand side, you
display the various pages for set-up.
0.0
B.222
Operator Manual
B.2
TIP
Use the Show/Hide Console Tree icon if the tree view
does not appear after start-up.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.223
TIP
The items to be recorded in the audit trail are configured in
the Audit Trail Viewer Console ( Page B.288) and
storing parameters are set up in the Audit Trail
Configuration dialog box ( Page B.277).
B.2
0.0
B.224
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
For every user who will work with the system, create a user
account and assign a password.
B.2
A user account that is no longer required, can be disabled or
deleted (for example, if the user quits).
B.2
B.2
NOTE
Always work in the syngo MR Security Configuration,
never use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to
create or to manage user accounts. syngo MR expands the
Windows-related security system by a data security
management and distinguishes between groups and
roles.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.225
B.2
The security system comes with some default and some internal user accounts, and automatically generates DICOM Node
user accounts.
B.2
Default users are delivered with the software and contain, for
example, the Administrator, the LocalServiceUser and the
RemoteServiceUser.
All internal users are essential for the system and indicated
as such. We strongly recommend not changing the passwords of these users.
DICOM nodes are required for remote network functions.
They are created as soon as you configure the DICOM services (AET). You can only change the password and the
group assignment of these users.
For a detailed list of the internal user accounts see
Page B.22.
B.2
0.0
B.226
Operator Manual
Handling of Passwords
B.2
B.2
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: User access may be prevented due to
forgotten or unknown accounts or passwords, or wrong
setup (for example, in case of an emergency).
B.2
Consequence: Inaccessible system.
B.2
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.227
B.2
NOTE
Misuse of the emergency account defeats the security
system!
B.2
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the User Management folder.
0.0
B.228
Operator Manual
Right-click the Users folder and choose New > User from
the context menu.
Or
B.2
Select the Users folder and choose the Action > New >
User menu item.
The User tab card is displayed:
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.229
Name
Name of the user account (= logon name). Note, that the name has to be unique within
the system. The user name is not case sensitive. Only alphanumeric characters are
allowed.
Full name
Information that helps to identify the user, for example, first, second name and title of the
user.
Description
New Password
The password that has to be entered by the user in order to log on to a workstation. The
password is case sensitive.
Confirm Password
Account is disabled
If selected, the user account is set up but the user cannot log onto the system. You may
use this option, for example, for users who are off-site for some time.
Password never
expires
This option is selected by default and cannot be changed: The users password does not
expire regularly (for example, this setting is important for the EmergencyAccess account).
If selected, the user cannot change the password on their own. For the
EmergencyAccess, we strongly recommend to disable the change of password.
To store, click Apply and continue to create other user
accounts.
Or
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.230
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
We strongly recommend not to change passwords of any
internal user accounts, otherwise important system
services may no longer work properly.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.231
0.0
B.232
Operator Manual
On the User tab card, you can change the Full Name and
the Description of the user account.
To change a password, type the desired password into the
New Password field and repeat it in the Confirm Password
field.
To disable/enable the account, select/clear the Account is
disabled check box.
To prevent users from changing their password, select the
User cannot change password check box.
The Member of tab card lists all groups (for data access) this
user is assigned to.
B.2
The Owner of tab card lists all roles (for use cases or functional
privileges) this user owns.
B.2
Click Apply to save the settings.
Or
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.233
B.2
B.2
B.2
NOTE
For reason of system integrity, it is not possible to delete
internal users, DICOM nodes, and special users.
B.2
B.2
Select the desired user account and choose the Action >
Delete menu item.
Confirm the security notice with Yes.
The user account is deleted.
B.2
0.0
B.234
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.235
No Group Hierarchies
B.2
Configuration Levels
B.2
B.2
Because groups and roles handled almost identically, their handling is described here together.
B.2
Take a look at your outline from the preparatory steps to create
the groups and roles.
B.2
It is not possible to create groups in groups or sub-roles to set
up a hierarchy of rules and rights.
B.2
0.0
B.236
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.237
B.2
0.0
B.238
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
The name has to be unique within the system. The name is
case sensitive. Special characters such as " / \\\\\\\\
[ ] : ; | = , + * ? < > are not allowed.
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.239
This symbol indicates accounts for DICOM nodes in the network. To restrict the remote data access to your workstation,
you should also assign these nodes to groups and roles.
B.2
0.0
B.240
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
Because you cannot rename groups or roles, you must
instead delete them and recreate them.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.241
B.2
B.2
Double-click the desired group or role in the tree on the righthand side.
The Group respectively the Role tab card is displayed.
B.2
0.0
B.242
Operator Manual
B.2
To delete a group/role:
B.2
B.2
Select the desired group or role and choose the Action >
Delete menu item.
Confirm the security notice with OK.
The group account is deleted; all members lose the corresponding privileges/rights.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.243
Access control
B.2
Access control in syngo MR security system consist of permissions (which users and user groups are allowed to access a
certain data set) and functional privileges (which user or roles
are allowed to execute a certain program module or function). B.2
B.2
NOTE
The different security levels applied to application functions
and patient data in the context of the clinical workflow are
normally defined in the hospitals security policy.
B.2
Privileges
B.2
Patient Group
Permissions
B.2
You define a list of patient groups according to the data security policy of your hospital. For example, create a patient
group Radiology for data that should only be visible to
members of the radiology department, or VIP for patient
data that should only be visible to very few persons, such as
the head physician.
0.0
B.244
Operator Manual
For each patient group, you can grant users and groups the
permission to access data that is assigned to this group. B.2
You can set permissions for the following types of access:
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.245
NOTE
To reduce your configuration efforts, define permissions on
group level and privileges on role level whenever possible.B.2
0.0
B.246
Operator Manual
Example
B.2
B.2
Inheritance of Permissions
and Privileges
B.2
The Everyone group is the top level of inheritance. The permissions set for the Everyone group are transferred to all
groups of your security system. The same rule applies to the
Everyone role.
B.2
Typically, a user belongs to at least one group and one role. But
you can also assign a user to more than one group or role. B.2
B.2
NOTE
Keep in mind that user rights are inherited. It is not possible
to assign someone function execution rights for a specific
group.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.247
Data Protections
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.248
Operator Manual
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.249
B.2
0.0
B.250
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
Select the Patient Groups item and choose the Action >
New > Patient Group menu item.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.251
B.2
0.0
B.252
Operator Manual
To allow a service technician access to any patient data protected by this patient group, select the Grant read access
for syngoServiceUsers in service sessions check box.
Click Apply to save the settings.
Or
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.253
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.254
Operator Manual
Setting up Permissions in
the Users View
B.2
At the top of the dialog box, select the level you want to set
up for the available patient groups:
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.255
Everyone
Shows the permissions for the special group Everyone. This is the top level for the rights
inheritance on all other groups and all users. This group is one reason that the effective
permissions often differ from the setup permission. The permissions in this group should
be the minimum permissions of all users.
Groups
Shows the permissions at the group level. This allows you to set up group access rights
one after the other.
Users
Shows the permissions at the user level. This allows you to set up individual access
rights. Note that users inherit their permissions from the Everyone group and from their
group memberships.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item represents a single user
account.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item represents DICOM
Nodes (AETs for networked DICOM services, but handled like
users).
B.2
0.0
B.256
Operator Manual
NOTE
To modify an existing configuration or to reduce the amount
of displayed groups and users, you can select the List only
objects with permissions assigned check box.
B.2
No Access
Prohibits any access to the data stored in this patient group. The data will not be visible
to the user or group.
Full Control
Allows all actions to the data assigned with this patient group: create, read, update,
delete, and execute change protection.
Check the Eff. Permission column to see which access
rights actually become valid.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration at
Everyone and normal user group level, or from a membership
in two or more different user groups, etc.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.257
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.258
Operator Manual
Setting up Permissions in
the Patient Groups View
B.2
From the Patient Groups list, select the patient group you
want to configure.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.259
TIP
To modify an existing configuration or to reduce the amount
of displayed groups and users, you can select the List only
objects with permissions assigned check box.
B.2
Below the Patient Groups list, select the type of objects you
want to set up for the selected patient group:
Everyone
Shows the permissions for the special group Everyone. This is the top level for the rights
inheritance on all other groups and all users. This group is one reason that the effective
permissions and the effective default differ from the permission set up for users or groups.
Groups
Shows the permissions at the user group level. This allows you to set up group access
rights one after the other.
Users
Shows the permissions at the user level, so that you can set up individual data access
rights.
0.0
B.260
Operator Manual
After your selection, the table shows the permissions the various users or user groups have for the selected patient group.
Each table row represents a single user or user group:
B.2
This symbol indicates that the row belongs to a user group.
B.2
No Access
Full Control
Allows all actions to the data stored in the patient group: create, read, update, delete, and
execute change protection.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.261
B.2
Whenever a user or group displayed in the permission table creates a new data object, by default the set of data protections
configured here is applied to that data.
B.2
You can configure the default protections for groups and users
here, so that it is possible to specify a default protection for each
user individually.
B.2
Select the check box Default for those user groups you want
to assign the selected patient group as default.
Check the Eff. Default column to see which default protection attributes are actually become true.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration on
user and group level, or from a membership in different user
groups, etc.
B.2
B.2
0.0
B.262
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
For the emergency role and user, we strongly recommend
not to grant any functional privileges that allow deletion or
export of patient data.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.263
The Privileges of... page is displayed, with the side tabs corresponding to the various syngo MR modules installed at your
system:
B.2
At the top of the dialog box, select the level of objects you
want to configure:
0.0
B.264
Operator Manual
Everyone
Shows the privileges at the Everyone level. This are the basic functional rights for all
roles and users.
Roles
Shows the privileges at the role level. This allows you to set up privileges for all members
of a role.
User
Shows the privileges at the user level. This allows you to set up the individual privileges.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item is a single user account.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.265
The explicit privileges for the selected item are marked in the
selection table.
B.2
Every syngo MR application is represented by a separate side
tab, for example, PatBrowser for the Patient Browser. syngo
MR provides the tabs as described below, but during installation
at your modality site, further module tabs are added.
B.2
B.2
NOTE
Please remember that the configuration of a user is also
influenced by the configuration of the role a user is
assigned.
B.2
Click the application tab with the functions you want to allow
or restrict for users or roles.
0.0
B.266
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
Use the double arrow at the bottom of the page to see
further application tabs.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.267
Archnet
Archive allows to store data on storage disks or in the central network archive server.
Export allows to export data on disks or to the file system. Send allows to send data to
other network nodes. The Query/Retrieve functionality is not protected but restricted to
trusted hosts.
AuditTrail
Archive allows to invoke the Audit Trail Archiving dialog box and the Audit Trail Archiving
Settings. Only users with this privilege are able to use the according menu items.
SetFilter allows to open the audit trail management and configure (filter) the events to be
logged in the audit trail. View allows to view logs. The privileges are intended for
administrators or experienced and instructed users. We recommend not to assign these
privileges to the emergency role or user.
Correct&Rearrange
Correct allows to change any patient and study data. History allows to open a dialog box
for the history of changes on the data. Rearrange allows to drag data objects in the
Patient Browser.
Filming
Expose allows to expose film tasks or single film sheets on a camera or to print them.
PatientBrowser
Delete allows to delete data objects in the Patient Browser. ModifyPatientGroups allows
to change the patient group assigned to data (and change this way the permissions on
data access). SetStateComplete allows to set this work status on data objects.
SetStateRead allows to set this work status.SetStateVerified allows to set this work
status.
Patient
Registration
0.0
B.268
Operator Manual
SecuritySystem
UserAutoStart
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.269
B.2
Screen Saver
B.2
Configuration
B.2
0.0
B.270
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.271
Administration
B.2
Configuration
B.2
0.0
B.272
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
You have to store the audit trail at regular intervals. Failure
to do this will cause the audit trail to fill up the disk partition,
causing the system to block until the audit trail has been
stored and removed.
B.2
Please ensure that stored audit files are kept according to
national and local regulations.
B.2
B.2
NOTE
The system informs the users when the size of the audit trail
exceeds the specified warning levels. It issues low level and
high level warnings by displaying colored icons in the status
bar. Any user recognizing the warning should inform the
system administrator immediately for storing the audit trail.B.2
Additionally, the resource monitor keeps track of storage capacity and memory size.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.273
Time synchronization
B.2
Time stamps for log file entries have to be consistent within all
log files in the audit trail. Therefore, time synchronization
between all system components is very important.
B.2
If you use a network of syngo MR systems, you can establish
a special NTP (Network Time Protocol) that ensures a synchronized time all over the network system. Ask the service technician to connect syngo MR to this.
B.2
B.2
NOTE
You carry the responsibility for maintaining the time server.
Ensure that you set the correct time, otherwise your service
licence may become outdated. This is because the license
manager only accepts a jitter of 24 hours. When the service
licence becomes invalid, the system must be completely
reinstalled.
B.2
0.0
B.274
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.275
B.2
0.0
B.276
Operator Manual
B.2
To define the parameters for the storing of the audit trail and the
common properties:
B.2
Open the Audit Trail Settings dialog box.
The Local Audit Trail Setup page appears. It summarizes the
B.2
current settings.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.277
B.2
B.2
This section displays the current settings for storing the logs of the audit trail.
0.0
B.278
Operator Manual
Select where the log files of the audit trail are to be stored:
CD-R drive
Selects the CD-R writer of your system for storing the audit trail. After clicking Next, you
will be guided to the CD-R page to set up the parameters.
Network Share
Defines that the audit trail is to be stored on a shared folder in the network. After clicking
Next, you will be guided to the Network Share page to set up the parameters.
B.2
B.2
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.279
0.0
B.280
Operator Manual
Single Session
Specifies that a CD-R is written once and then closed. You cannot use it for further
storing.
Multi Session
Specifies that you can store on a CD-R several times (until its capacity is full).
Finalize
Drive Letter
Select the drive letter of the CD Recorder. Use the same drive letter as for storing
patient data on CD-R.
Burning Speed
Select the speed the recorder is able to write data to CD-R. Example: Storing 200 MB
at 4x speed takes about 5 min.
Click Next to set up the common parameters of the audit trail.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.281
B.2
You need the server share name (not letter) and path to set up
the Network Share option. We recommend to use the Windows Explorer to check the connection.
B.2
If you have enabled the Network Share option in the Select
archive target page, the following page appears for configuration.
B.2
0.0
B.282
Operator Manual
User name
Enter the user name for logging to the network shared folder. This user must be
allowed to write the audit trail log files at the network node. Note that this user name
can derive from the local user name that is allowed to start the audit trail storing (and
has to have at least the AuditTrail > Archive privilege).
Domain
Password
Share name
Enter the server name and the path. Use the UNC convention to enter server name
and path (you cannot use drive letters).
Test
Click the Test button to check if the folder is available in the network.
B.2
NOTE
The syntax for a share name is:
\\servername\sharename\[folder]:
B.2
Example: \\deeparchive\archaudit_ws12\at2002
B.2
Make sure that the specified folder exists, and that it can be
written to.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.283
B.2
Enter the parameters to set up the path and size of the audit
trail as well as the warning levels.
0.0
B.284
Operator Manual
B.2
AuditTrail Directory
Enter the path for the folder in which the log files of the audit trail are stored. If the
path does not exist, the system creates it automatically. We recommend to use the
default path: %medhome%\log\Auditing. Keep in mind that the audit trail has to be
protected from normal users.
Enter or select the size of the audit trail. Default size is 1024 kBytes (=1 MByte).
When a log file reaches this size, it is closed, and a new log file is created.
Zipped
Select this check box to have the audit trail automatically compressed in a ZIP file.
In the Disk quota checks area, specify the warning levels in
case the size of the audit trail uses too much of the hard
disks capacity.
Warning level %
As soon as the given percentage of the hard disks capacity is reached, an orange
warning icon appears in the status bar. 70-75% may be useful values (70% is the
minimum value).
Quota limit %
As soon as this percentage of the hard disks capacity is reached, a red warning icon
appears in the status bar and the Audit Trail Archiver opens. Storing should be started
immediately. If the current user has no privilege to store, there is a message box
which informs the user about the situation and gives a hint what to do. 80-85% may
be useful values (80% is the minimum value).
In addition to the disc space check, there is a cyclic check of the
security system state. A blocked system (even if no disc space
limit was exceeded) also forces the Audit Trail Archiver to be
popped up. For storing in a blocked system, the user needs the
Archive and the BypassBlockedSystem privileges.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.285
B.2
NOTE
Inform the system users about what to do if audit trail
storing should be started. If the current user does not have
storage rights, the End Session dialog box calls the Log in
different user function to switch to a user account with
storage rights.
B.2
B.2
Event recording and the audit trail viewer are configured in the
syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.
B.2
Only authorized users can handle the log files of the audit
trail. They need the AuditTrail > View and the AuditTrail >
SetFilter privilege to open and use the syngo MR - Audit
Trail Management console.
To open this management console, choose the Options >
Audit Trail > Viewing menu item from any task card.
0.0
B.286
Operator Manual
With the Audit Filter folder, you can define the events to be
recorded.
B.2
With the Audit Trail Viewer item, you can view the various log
files of the audit trail.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.287
B.2
NOTE
Note that very detailed recording can slow down system
performance.
B.2
0.0
B.288
Operator Manual
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: The system blocks when the audit trail
is filled (too many records, or too much drive space
covered).
B.2
Consequence: In this case, it is not possible to work with
the system. Emergency access is also not possible. B.2
Remedy: To prevent system blockage, someone must store
the log files and remove them from the audit trail on a
regular basis.
B.2
When the audit trail blocks the system, proceed as
described in Page B.294. Note that then the
SecuritySystem > BypassBlockedSystem and the
AuditTrail > Archive privileges are needed.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.289
B.2
0.0
B.290
Operator Manual
B.2
B.2
TIP
Click the Reset button to clear your changes.
B.2
B.2
B.2
B.2
Only authorized users have access to the log files of the audit
trail. They need the AuditTrail - View privilege.
B.2
Open the syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.
In the tree on the left-hand side, click the Audit Trail Viewer
item.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.291
B.2
You must close the current log file before you can view it:
Click the New Audit Trail button.
The current log file is closed and a new log file is created immediately.
B.2
0.0
B.292
Operator Manual
Browse through by using the Files to view fields and doubleclick the log file (.xml or .xml.z) that you want to view.
The log files are formatted in XML. The contents of the selected
log file are displayed in the large area. The header gives general information about the institution and log file itself. This is followed by data recorded for every security-relevant transaction.
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.293
B.2
The audit trail storing method defines whether the log files are
stored to a remote shared disk or CD-R.
See Page B.277 for more information.
B.2
You must close the current log file before you can store it and
you must have stored a log file before you can delete it.
B.2
To store or to delete audit trail log files:
B.2
Only authorized users are able to store or delete the log files of
the audit trail. They need the Audit Trail Archive and AuditTrail Delete privileges.
B.2
From any task card, choose the Options > Audit Trail >
Archiving menu item.
0.0
B.294
Operator Manual
The Audit Trail Archiving dialog box appears. All audit trail log
files of your system are listed showing their current archive and
importance status. A green icon at the bottom left indicates that
the security system is running properly:
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.295
B.2
When storing to CD-R, insert a fresh CD-R, or a multi-session CD-R from previous audit trail archiving.
For storing on network shares, the connection must be established (use the Windows Explorer to check this).
Select the log files you want to store and click the Archive
button.
Multiple selections are possible.
B.2
B.2
NOTE
Stored log files obtain the status archived and are marked
with the archived icons.
B.2
The selected log files are saved to disk or to CD-R (as configured). The system issues a message upon completion.
B.2
0.0
B.296
Operator Manual
B.2
You can only delete log files that have been stored.
B.2
Select the log file you want to delete and click the Delete button.
The log file is deleted from the disk partition containing the audit
trail. The list is automatically updated.
B.2
B.2
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: The system blocks when the audit trail
is filled (too many records, or too much drive space
covered).
B.2
Consequence: In this case, it is not possible to work with
the system. Emergency access is also not possible. B.2
Remedy: To prevent system blockage, someone must store
the log files and remove them from the audit trail on a
regular basis. Note that the archiver needs the AuditTrail >
Archive privilege.
B.2
When the audit trail blocks the system, proceed as
described in Page B.294. Note that for operating a
blocked system, additionally the SecuritySystem >
BypassBlockedSystem privilege is needed.
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.297
B.2
0.0
B.298
Operator Manual
B.2
During the site-specific configuration of the local system, a service technician sets up the connection to network nodes, central archives, DICOM service providers and DICOM service
users.
B.2
To establish a secure system, all these network partners and
services have to be reliable.
B.2
One policy is to establish a trusted sites zone. A trusted zone
contains network nodes you trust-nodes that you believe you
can receive data from or send data to without worrying about
the security of computer or data.
B.2
To establish a trusted zone, you must assign nodes to this zone.
Then the syngo MR security features let the system:
B.2
Transfer and receive data, knowing that the computer and
confidential patient information are safe.
Only accept DICOM Query/Retrieve requests from trusted
hosts or applications. Requests from unknown workstations
or applications are rejected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.299
Security of Protocols
B.2
For security reasons, syngo MR follows a restrictive policy concerning ports and IP addresses. Data traffic through all unnecessary ports and addresses is blocked. Data exchange is
restricted to defined paths only.
B.2
After installation all ports and addresses are blocked except
for a few basic services, such as ports for the DICOM services.
By configuring DICOM network nodes in the Local Service
Software, the IP addresses become valid and the necessary
ports are unlocked.
If you need additional IP addresses for other reasons, you
should define them also as network nodes in the Local Service Software to enable them.
0.0
B.2100
Operator Manual
B.2
NOTE
This function must be enabled on all syngo MR
workstations with which you want to exchange data.
Additionally, it is also possible to communicate with
secured legacy systems (Secured by means of
restricted physical access).
B.2
B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.2101
0.0
B.2102
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
B.3
Security System
B.3
NOTE
The audit trail logs all activities you perform on sensitive
data in an audit trail. This also includes your identity. B.3
Except for emergency access, you are only allowed to work
with a syngo MR workstation if you are logged into your
personal user account.
B.3
The system administrator will notify you about your user
account and password.
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.31
B.3
B.3
B.3
0.0
B.32
Operator Manual
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.33
B.3
TIP
The user configuration depends on the security regulations
of your hospital. For questions about your rights, ask the
system administrator.
B.3
If you are asked to work temporarily in another department,
for example to take over from a sick colleague, the
administrator can temporarily assign you to this group. B.3
0.0
B.34
Operator Manual
B.3
NOTE
Logging off or locking a workstation does not interrupt or
abort running or queued background jobs, such as filming
images. Every background job is protocolled under the
identity of the user who initiated it.
B.3
The described functions are provided in the End Session dialog box. To open the dialog box, use the System > End Session menu item or press CTRL+ALT+DEL:
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.35
Lock Computer
B.3
0.0
B.36
Operator Manual
If you are the person who locked the workstation, you will find
your session as you left it.
B.3
If another user unlocks your computer and does not have the
appropriate access rights, a warning appears. Only after explicit
confirmation, any patient data is unloaded (without saving) and
the currently active application function is terminated.
B.3
B.3
NOTE
If a screen saver has been enabled on your workstation, it
is automatically activated whenever there has been no
mouse or keyboard activity for a certain period. The screen
saver has the same effect as Lock Computer.
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.37
B.3
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably.
B.3
0.0
B.38
Operator Manual
B.3
To switch the user at your workstation, click the Log in Different User button.
If you share the workstation with other users, you can hand over
the workstation quickly by using the switch user function.
B.3
The current user is logged off. The workstation can only be
used by the new user after logging on.
B.3
B.3
NOTE
If the new user has the same (or sufficient) access rights,
the current images are not unloaded.
B.3
If the new user does not have the appropriate access rights,
all patient data is unloaded and the currently active
application function is terminated. Unsaved data will be lost. B.3
If a measurement or an image calculation of a previous user
is still running in the background, the current user cannot
start his measurement until the previous users
measurement or image calculation is finished.
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.39
Change Password
B.3
B.3
0.0
B.310
Operator Manual
Emergency access
B.3
NOTE
Do not misuse the emergency access account to log on to
the system if you forget your password.
B.3
Patient data acquired and processed during emergency
access must be corrected and rearranged later. As a
consequence, the data will be assigned to the user who
carries out the alteration.
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.311
Failed log on
B.3
You cannot change your account name, but you can change
your own password. Only administrators are allowed to change
user accounts.
B.3
If you have been denied access to your workstation because
you have forgotten your user name or password proceed as follows:
B.3
Ask your administrator for your current account name. The
account name is not case sensitive.
Make sure that the Caps Lock key is not accidentally set.
Bear in mind that passwords are case sensitive: W56Xrad
and w56xrad are not the same.
Re-enter your account name and password.
If this does not lead to success, ask your administrator to
give you a new password.
0.0
B.312
Operator Manual
B.3
NOTE
You can set data protections at patient or study level. Series
and images inherit protections from the patient or the study
they belong to.
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.313
0.0
B.314
Operator Manual
Service access
B.3
In order to allow service activities, users with the according privilege must grant the service technician access to the computer.
The procedure differs for the local and remote service access.
B.3
Local access
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.315
Remote access
B.3
0.0
B.316
Operator Manual
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.317
0.0
B.318
Operator Manual
NOTE
Transfer the password as securely as possible to the
service technician. Sending passwords via unencrypted email or mail is not secure!
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.319
B.3
B.3
NOTE
Important! You carry the responsibility for all transactions
that have been performed under your user account. B.3
In your own interest, lock the computer or log off when you
have finished work or when leaving the workstation
unattended for a longer period.
B.3
B.3
0.0
B.320
Operator Manual
B.3
A full audit trail blocks the entire system. You cannot proceed
working. Emergency access is also not possible.
B.3
When the storage space reaches the warning level, an yellow icon appears in the status bar of all task cards.
When the storage space reaches the quota limit, a red icon
appears in the status bar. Additionally, the system displays a
message when the audit trail exceeds a certain limit.
Clicking the red icon opens either a warning message box
if you dont have the storing privilege or the Audit Trail
Archiving dialog box provided you have the appropriate
privileges.
Do not ignore these warnings, inform your system administrator
immediately.
B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.321
0.0
B.322
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
B.4
Service Access Rights
B.4
B.4
For any service activities to take place, you must ask a user or
the system administrator to allow local access to the workstation.
B.4
Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for
carrying out local service activities.
If there is no personal account for the service technician
available, you can only access syngo with the LocalServiceUser account, which provides the service account rights.
The service account is not deleted when the password
expires. For subsequent service activities, it is merely necessary to request a new password.
Audit Trail
B.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.41
Service access
Different Types of Access
B.4
B.4
If service personnel needs access to patient data, or the configuration of the system has to be changed during a remote service session, this has to be enabled by the local user first.
B.4
Remote access to the syngo MR system for service purposes
is only possible from trusted systems (a system with a proved
certificate) There is only are very small number of systems set
up for remote access.
B.4
Trusted systems are systems with a certificate from a root
CA which is in the server certificate trust list (client authentication).
The use of SSL and HTTPS are mandatory for this connection.
To add certificates, the standard mechanism of the operating
system is used.
Together with the syngo MR installation, the certificate of the
root CA of the RDIAG (remote service server) is delivered.
syngo MR generates a self signed certificate, therefore, the
RDIAG is not able to identify a syngo MR system via the certificate (no server authentication).
The RDIAG server connects to syngo MR via HTTPS.
0.0
B.42
Operator Manual
Local access
B.4
Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for carrying out local service activities.
B.4
To log on to syngo MR for service activities when an individual
account is not available:
B.4
Ask a user or the system administrator to generate a password for the service account.
The password expires after a predefined number of days.
B.4
B.4
Enter both parts of the service key necessary for the desired
service level.
The service key decides with which service level the Service
Software will open.
B.4
Enter the service password.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.43
NOTE
The detailed view of the Resource Monitor is only
available after you have logged on to the Service
Software.
B.4
0.0
B.44
Operator Manual
Remote access
B.4
B.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.45
B.4
NOTE
Because the Remote Service Access Control may be
closed on the local system at the time, you should call the
local user to get the confirmation.
B.4
0.0
B.46
Operator Manual
B.4
To avoid the loss of configuration data, ask the service technician to back up the system.
B.4
Backups and restores are done within the Service Software
package of syngo MR.
B.4
Update/Upgrade
B.4
NOTE
Do not forget to store the audit trail before software update
or upgrade. The audit trail has to be saved separately. The
backup and restore functionality under Local Service does
not store the audit trail.
B.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
B.47
0.0
B.48
Operator Manual
PART
C.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C1
Contents
0.0
C2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
C.1
System Manager
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.11
System Manager
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.12
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
You can shut down the entire system at once (the console, the
MR scanner, and the image reconstruction system), for example, at the end of the day or to disconnect the system from the
power supply for service work or reinitialization of the hardware
and software.
C.1
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.13
System Manager
C.1
0.0
C.14
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
C.1
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.15
System Manager
C.1
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.16
Operator Manual
System Manager
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.17
System Manager
Forced shutdown/reboot
C.1
If errors occur in the operating system or in the syngo MR application, you may respond either by properly shutting down the
software or forcing the system to shut down. Following a forced
shutdown, the system will be operational again in a short time.C.1
Select the Forced Mode option in the system manager.
Click the Reboot button on the System Manager/Host card.
Or
C.1
C.1
C.1
C.1
C AU T I O N
After a forced system shut down, all unsaved data and
unfinished filming or storage jobs will be lost. All
background activities are forced to terminate.
C.1
0.0
C.18
Operator Manual
System Manager
Handling applications
C.1
C.1
running
The application is in progress.
not running
The application is not running.
undefined
The application status has not been received shortly after
starting the system manager.
not responding
It is not possible to communicate with this software component.
unknown name
Certain components of the application are not available.
stop in progress
The application is being shut down.
startup in progress
The application is being started up.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.19
System Manager
Stopping an application
C.1
Starting an application
C.1
Restarting an application
C.1
You can shut down and restart applications, e.g. if they are no
longer responding.
C.1
Select the application from the list.
Click the Restart Applications button.
0.0
C.110
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
If you have to leave the workstation for a short time, you can
protect the data on the computer from unauthorized access
without having to log off.
C.1
This function is available only if the syngo security system is
activated on your system.
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.111
System Manager
Logging off
C.1
When you have finished working with the system, you must log
off.
C.1
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1
C.1
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are irretrievably
lost.
C.1
Always check for unsaved data and save any data you want
to keep before logging off.
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.112
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
A new user can log onto the system even if the current user has
not logged off.
C.1
This function is available only if the syngo security system is
activated on your system.
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.113
System Manager
C.1
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.114
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.115
System Manager
The status bar of the system contains an icon indicating the status of the image reconstruction system:
C.1
C.1
In the event of a fault, you can shut down and reboot the entire
image reconstruction system.
C.1
0.0
C.116
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
The Component Control window of the Image Reconstr. System card shows which software components of the image
reconstruction system are running and what status they have.C.1
If a software error occurs during scanning or image reconstruction, you may restart the components of the image reconstruction system separately.
C.1
Restarting software
components
C.1
If errors occur during image calculation, all software components running on the image reconstruction system, except the
Peripherie Server (peripheral server), will be shut down and
restarted.
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.117
System Manager
C.1
The Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component establishes the connection with the MR scanner and is restarted separately.
C.1
0.0
C.118
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.119
System Manager
OK
C.1
Not OK
All the components of the MR scanner are listed under Component Name.
C.1
C.1
C.1
The helium fill level is shown below the list on the MR Scanner
card. The display is in % (percentages).
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.120
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
C.1
C.1
NOTE
After switch-over to standby, it is not possible to start a new
scan.
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.121
System Manager
This dialog allows you to determine whether and how the image
processor should be shut down.
C.1
0.0
C.122
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
Option
Consequences
Proceed
Cancel
End Now
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.123
System Manager
Tools
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.124
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.125
System Manager
C.1
The most important system files are checked every time the
system boots.
C.1
0.0
C.126
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
C.1
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.127
System Manager
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Product name
Series number
Software used
Software version
Software name
Information about license holder; name, hospital or practice, and product identification number (product ID)
0.0
C.128
Operator Manual
System Manager
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.129
System Manager
C.1
0.0
C.130
Operator Manual
C.1
System Manager
The Disk list displays all physical (e.g. CD-ROM) and logical
(e.g. network drives) drives. The capacity and free space still
available is listed next to them.
C.1
The following information about these drives is displayed:
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.131
System Manager
C.1
C.1
0.0
C.132
Operator Manual
System Manager
Network information
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.133
System Manager
C.1
If the dialog window has been open for a while, you may refresh
the network information display.
C.1
0.0
C.134
Operator Manual
System Manager
Displaying patents
C.1
The Patents card lists all the patents used by syngo MR.
C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.135
System Manager
C.1
If the Info... dialog window has been open for a while, you may
refresh the data displayed.
C.1
0.0
C.136
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.21
C.2
Opening a protocol
C.2
You may view and edit (if required) the automatic adjustment
parameters on the System parameter card.
C.2
Go to the System parameter card.
C.2
NOTE
All system adjustment settings made on the System
parameter card only apply to the protocol currently open. C.2
0.0
C.22
Operator Manual
Settings on the
Adjustments card
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.23
C.2
0.0
C.24
Operator Manual
Performing adjustments
with the body coil
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.25
Adjustment in silicone
mode
C.2
C.2
The TxRef/Ref display field shows a list of reference amplitudes for the selected primary or secondary nucleus.
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.26
Operator Manual
C.2
Imaging protocols
C.2
Spectroscopy protocols
C.2
NOTE
Protocols that do not require shim adjustment
measurements (e.g. tune-up mode) or water suppression
adjustment use a fixed adjustment volume in the form of a
large central cuboid.
This saves time since readjustment is not necessary after
slice positioning.
Of course, you may also manually adapt the adjustment
volume at any time.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.27
C.2
During graphic slice positioning, you may display the adjustment volume as an additional graphic object in the reference
images.
C.2
Click this button on the Position Toolbar.
The adjustment volume is shown as a green rectangle in each
C.2
reference image and may now be edited graphically.
0.0
C.28
Operator Manual
Adjustment volume
selecting
C.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.29
C.2
C.2
Press the left mouse button and drag the adjustment volume
to its new position.
Or
C.2
0.0
C.210
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
Press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the handle in the desired direction.
The size of the adjustment volume is increased/decreased
symmetrically.
C.2
The center of the adjustment volume remains unchanged.
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.211
C.2
The volume element may be rotated about its center point. The
rotational axis is now perpendicular to the reference image. C.2
Place the mouse pointer on the contour line of the adjustment volume, but not on a handle.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
C.2
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the contour line of
the volume element in the desired direction.
The adjustment volume may only be rotated about the center in
one spatial direction.
C.2
C.2
The volume element can be tilted about an axis that runs parallel to the reference image and through the center point.
C.2
Press the Alt key and drag the contour line in the required
direction.
The tilting axis is perpendicular to the movement of the
mouse.
C.2
0.0
C.212
Operator Manual
Adjustment volume
rotating freely
C.2
Free rotation of the adjustment volume is a combination of rotation and tilting and is supported in all three spatial directions. C.2
Click a contour line of the adjustment volume if the adjustment volume handles are not yet visible.
Press the Ctrl key and drag a handle or a contour line.
Drag the adjustment volume tangentially towards the adjustment volume to rotate it.
Or
C.2
tangential movement
radial movement
The rotational axis runs through the center of the volume element and is perpendicular to the reference image.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.213
Adjustment volume
set numerically
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.214
Operator Manual
Finally, enter a translation of the edge length of the adjustment volume in the R >> L direction (right to left).
C.2
C.2
Click the image area with the mouse to update the graphic
display.
Settings
the warning signal
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.215
Adjustment parameter
display in the protocol
C.2
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
C.216
Operator Manual
The left side of the parameter card displays the values of the
last successful transmitter tuning:
C.2
the MR system frequency under Frequency
the pulse amplitude calibration under Ref. amplitude
the factor for water suppression under Correction factor
All pulse amplitudes are calculated from the reference amplitude and, if necessary, the correction factor.
C.2
This parameter card also allows you to overwrite the automatically corrected pulse amplitudes by entering new values.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.217
Undoing changes
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.218
Operator Manual
C.2
Special adjustments are performed automatically for each protocol. To avoid having to perform a complete adjustment each
time, the system checks the adjustment status and uses adjustment results from a previously scanned protocol, if possible. C.2
The results can normally only be applied if the following parameters of the two protocols remain unchanged:
C.2
Dependencies between
adjustments
C.2
When adjusting the system, the sequence of adjustment operations is important since some adjustments may invalidate the
results of previously performed adjustments. After 3D-shim, for
example, frequency adjustment is automatically performed
again because changing the magnetic field causes the system
frequency to change.
These dependencies are always taken into account by automatic adjustments.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.219
C.2
The adjustment parameters obtained after successful adjustment may be used for further protocols. They become invalid in
the following cases:
C.2
a new patient is registered
the parameters are invalidated explicitly
Page C.271, Rejecting all adjustment results
the coils on the patient table are changed
As already mentioned, dependency on the coil elements can be
avoided by selecting Adjust with body coil. The dependency
on the adjustment volume may be avoided via the shim mode
tune-up without water suppression.
Page C.23, Settings on the Adjustments card
C.2
This reduces the number of adjustment steps and saves time.C.2
0.0
C.220
Operator Manual
Manual adjustment
C.2
C.2
NOTE
Manual adjustment of the system should only be performed
by experienced users and should not be performed during
routine operation.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.221
Opening a protocol
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.222
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.223
(1)
(6)
(2)
(7)
(8)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
0.0
C.224
Operator Manual
C.2
The frequency currently used is displayed in the field underneath for comparison.
C.2
The temporary frequency that you may enter yourself is only
used for adjustment scans. The system frequency is used for
examinations.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.225
Amplitude
C.2
You can enter the transmit amplitude to be used for the scan.
Range display
C.2
You can use the range display to verify whether your inputs for
the frequency and amplitude are correct. You have to correct
them if they are out of range.
C.2
When you enter the amplitude, the labeling of the range display is modified accordingly. It will then show the amplitude
values.
0.0
C.226
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.227
C.2
You may set the receive gain to match the intensity of the measured signal.
C.2
Click the Low button if the receive signal is strong.
Or
C.2
Starting to scan
C.2
After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment.
C.2
Click the Go button.
Canceling the
measurement
C.2
0.0
C.228
Operator Manual
Results display
C.2
Numeric results
C.2
The results are listed below the running numbers. The following
parameters are displayed:
C.2
No.; running number of the measurement
Freq. [MHz]; transmit frequency in MHz
Ampl. [V]; transmit amplitude of the adjustment measurement
Pos.; position of the largest "peak" of the amplitude in the
frequency domain (in units of the signal graph)
Diff [Hz]; Difference between the transmit frequency and the
calculated "better" frequency
C.freq. [MHz]; calculated, "better" frequency
A.; transmit frequency successfully adjusted (Yes/No)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.229
Graphic results
C.2
The results are displayed graphically in both the time and the
frequency domain. The maximum values of the raw data set are
displayed numerically in the graphics.
C.2
If available, the "resonance peak" is highlighted.
C.2
Vertical marker
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.230
Operator Manual
A context menu is available when the mouse pointer is positioned inside the graphic display of the frequency domain.
C.2
C.2
You can invert the default display of all frequency axes (from left
to right) or zoom into the detected peak. If no peak is available,
the program zooms into the center of the graphic.
C.2
When you select a new patient, the default display of the frequency axes is restored. Any zoom applied is reset when you
perform a new measurement.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.231
Receive channel
selecting
C.2
C.2
Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.232
Operator Manual
Transmitter adjustment
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.233
(1)
(2)
(7)
(8)
(3)
(9)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(11)
(6)
(12)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
C.234
Operator Manual
C.2
Start amplitude
C.2
The Start amplitude text field shows the amplitude value (specific parameter of the transmitter coil) used for the first iteration.C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.235
Range display
C.2
C.2
The range displayed shows the range available for the reference amplitude. If your entry is outside the range, you have to
correct it accordingly.
C.2
You can set the receiver gain depending on the signal intensity.
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2
Starting to scan
C.2
After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment.
C.2
Click the Go button.
Canceling the
measurement
C.2
0.0
C.236
Operator Manual
Results display
C.2
Numeric results
C.2
The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed:
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.237
Graphic results
C.2
C.2
Receive channel
selecting
C.2
C.2
Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment
C.2
Within a certain range, you can also enter a reference amplitude and manually transfer it to the system without adjustment
scanning.
C.2
Click the Apply button.
The amplitude is used as the reference amplitude for the following scans.
C.2
0.0
C.238
Operator Manual
3D Shim
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.239
(1)
(7)
(5)
(8)
(2)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(3)
(4)
(11)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
C.240
Operator Manual
Before you can perform the 3D shim, you first have to enter the
necessary parameters. The system suggests a default value.
C.2
C.2
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.241
C.2
Alternatively, you can load the parameters from the last system
tune up as temporary parameters.
C.2
Click the Load Tune Up button.
Or
Loading system
parameters
C.2
C.2
Mode selection
C.2
0.0
C.242
Operator Manual
C.2
You can set the receiver gain to match the intensity of the measured signal (low/high).
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2
Starting to scan
C.2
After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment. The scan takes approximately 20 seconds.
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.243
C.2
The field map is displayed in the image area of the dialog box.
images are shown with a maximum resolution of
64 64 pixels.
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.244
Operator Manual
Windowing images
C.2
If the window values of the images are not optimally set, you
may readjust them manually using the two sliders in the bottom
right-hand corner of the image area.
C.2
Move the vertical slider to adjust the contrast.
Move the horizontal slider to adjust the width.
Selecting magnitude or
phase image
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.245
Shim parameters
calculating
C.2
After scanning has been completed and the results are displayed, you may calculate the new shim parameters.
C.2
Numeric results
C.2
The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed:
C.2
NOTE
The three-dimensional field-map scan always shows the
entire homogeneity volume of the magnet independent of
the adjustment volume.
The adjustment volume is taken into consideration and the
field homogeneity is optimized during the calculation of the
shim parameters. For this reason, changing the adjustment
volume also results in different shim parameter settings for
the same field map.
C.2
0.0
C.246
Operator Manual
C.2
The temporary field map (valid locally for the adjustment) may
be applied to the scan system.
C.2
Click the Apply button in the upper section of the dialog box.
C.2
Click the Apply button in the lower part of the dialog box.
Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment
You can also enter shim parameters and apply them to the scan
system without performing a scan or calculation.
C.2
C.2
Click the Apply button in the lower part of the dialog box.
The parameters will be applied to the scan system.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.247
Interactive shim
C.2
Similar to 3D shim adjustment, interactive shimming compensates for inhomogeneities of the magnetic field. You can enter
the shim parameters and monitor the measurement of the MR
signal on the screen in real time. If you enter new parameters,
the changes are reflected in the results of the following MR signal measurement. You may continue shimming the magnetic
field until it meets your requirements.
C.2
After interactive shimming, you have to readjust the frequency. The frequency is automatically adjusted by the system if you do not do this yourself.
Preparing for adjustment
C.2
0.0
C.248
Operator Manual
(1)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(11)
(12)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Numeric results
Display of best shim Result
Amplitude of the measurement signal in the time domain
Real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
Amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
(6) Phase of the measurement signal in the frequency domain
(7) Transmit amplitude
(8) Physiological parameters
(9) Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic display
(10) Temporary shim parameters and shim parameters currently used by the system
(11) Sensitivity when changing shim parameters
(12) Range display for entering the amplitude or the shim
parameters
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.249
Physio selection
C.2
For the adjustment scan, you may apply physiological measurement parameters from the relevant parameter card of the protocol.
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.250
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
The range display indicates at what interval you can change the
transmit amplitude or shim parameters.
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.251
Starting to scan
C.2
Display of
results
C.2
When the measurement is complete, the results for each measurement are displayed numerically and graphically.
C.2
The following parameters are displayed numerically:
C.2
0.0
C.252
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
Changing parameters
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.253
Undoing changes
C.2
Loading stored
parameters
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.254
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
You may delete the "best" shim parameters obtained in the current scan, making them invalid. The corresponding display is
deleted.
C.2
Click the Reset Best button.
Applying parameters to
the scan system
C.2
You can transfer the optimal shim parameters for the measurement to the measurement system.
C.2
Stopping the
measurement
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.255
C.2
There are special RF pulses that are used for water suppression during scans. With this adjustment, you determine a correction factor for the transmitter amplitude for these RF pulses.
Within the adjustment volume, the flip angles are set for optimal
suppression of the water signal.
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.256
Operator Manual
(1)
(12)
(2)
(11)
(10)
(3)
(9)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.257
Certain parameters have to be entered prior to the measurement and checked after each measurement.
C.2
C.2
For the first iteration, the system suggests an amplitude correction factor of 1.0 which you may edit.
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.258
Operator Manual
C.2
You can set the receiver gain depending on the signal intensity.
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2
Starting to scan
C.2
After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment.
C.2
Click the Go button.
The scan takes several seconds.
C.2
Canceling the
measurement
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.259
Results display
C.2
Numeric results
C.2
The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed:
C.2
No.; running number of the adjustment measurement
CorrFac.; correction factor of the adjustment scan
Signal (CorrFac - Delta); signal strength for measurement
with correction factor minus transmitter increment
Signal (CorrFac); signal strength for scan with correction
factor
Signal (CorrFac + Delta); signal strength for scan with correction factor plus transmitter increment
NewCorrFac; calculated "better" correction factor
0.0
C.260
Operator Manual
Graphic results
C.2
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.261
C.2
C.2
After successful adjustment, the correction factor is automatically loaded into the measurement system.
C.2
Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment
C.2
0.0
C.262
Operator Manual
Undoing changes
C.2
You have performed all adjustments and now want to undo the
settings.
C.2
A Reset button is available for this purpose on every card
(except 3D Shim).
C.2
Click Reset.
The parameters displayed when the dialog box was opened are
re-loaded.
C.2
System parameters that were changed during the adjustment
cannot be restored to their initial settings before the adjustment.
Completing adjustment
Exit the adjustment platform with the Close button.
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.263
C.2
All adjustments planned in the selected protocol may be manually started without starting the following protocol.
C.2
Open the protocol first.
Select Options > Adjustments.
Go to the Viewing card.
Then click the Adjust All button.
The adjustments are performed.
C.2
Aborting adjustment
C.2
0.0
C.264
Operator Manual
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.265
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.0
C.266
Operator Manual
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.267
C.2
C.2
The frequency currently used is displayed in the field underneath for comparison.
C.2
The temporary frequency that you may enter yourself is only
used for adjustment scans. The system frequency is used for
examinations.
0.0
C.268
Operator Manual
Range display
C.2
Receive channel
selecting
C.2
Use the range display to verify the accuracy of the selected frequency. If it is out of range, correct it accordingly.
C.2
Canceling the
measurement
C.2
You may stop the examination if you are not satisfied with the
frequency spectrum.
C.2
Click the Cancel button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.269
C.2
0.0
C.270
Operator Manual
NOTE
This list is usually provided for diagnostic purposes
handled by Siemens Service.
C.2
C.2
You can update the scan results displayed on the card after
each adjustment.
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.271
Adjustment vector
C.2
C.2
C.2
0.0
C.272
Operator Manual
Adjustment type
C.2
C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
C.273
0.0
C.274
Operator Manual
PART
Patient Browser
D.0
D.1 Introduction
Databases and drives .................................................... D.12
Data levels ..................................................................... D.14
Calling up the Patient Browser ....................................... D.16
The Patient Browser window ......................................... D.17
Customizing the Patient Browser window ............... D.110
Image stamps .............................................................. D.116
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D1
Contents
Patient Browser
0.0
D2
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Contents
D.8 Reporting
Basics ............................................................................ D.83
Layout ........................................................................ D.84
Creating a report ............................................................ D.86
Editing a report............................................................... D.87
Opening a report ........................................................ D.88
Navigating in the report ........................................... D.810
Editing a report ........................................................ D.812
Saving a report ........................................................ D.822
Printing a report ........................................................... D.824
Opening the print preview ........................................ D.824
Close the print preview ............................................ D.826
Starting to print ........................................................ D.827
Sending a report .......................................................... D.829
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D3
Contents
Patient Browser
0.0
D4
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.1
Introduction
D.1
D.1
Security-Privileges
D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.11
Introduction
Patient Browser
D.1
Scheduler
D.1
D.1
0.0
D.12
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Connected drives
Introduction
D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.13
Introduction
Patient Browser
Data levels
D.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Database
Patient
Study
Series
Instances
Depending on the database, the work status of each database entry is displayed as an abbreviation. You will find information about the processing status on
Page D.62, Defining the work status
0.0
D.14
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Patient
Introduction
D.1
Study / Procedure
D.1
D.1
Instances
D.1
D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.15
Introduction
Patient Browser
D.1
You can call up the Patient Browser window either from the
main menu or by using the symbol keypad.
D.1
Main menu
D.1
D.1
Or
Symbol keypad
D.1
D.1
D.1
NOTE
If a dialog box is open and active the button Patient
Browser might not function.
D.1
D.1
NOTE
If you call up the Patient Browser on the satellite console,
it will not be updated automatically.
D.1
To update it, select View > Refresh.
0.0
D.16
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Introduction
D.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.17
Introduction
Tool bar
Patient Browser
D.1
You can work on the data you have selected using the menus
or the icon buttons on the tool bar.
D.1
In Browser Configuration you can define which buttons the
tool bar contains.
Page D.72, General settings
You can hide the toolbar by deselecting View > Toolbar.
Navigation area
D.1
Information area
D.1
In the information area you can see brief information about the
patient and study selected. When the navigation area is hidden,
you can also see which database is open and which data level
is displayed.
Page D.112, Showing and hiding window sections
D.1
0.0
D.18
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Content area
Introduction
D.1
In the content area you will see a list of the studies or procedures for the patient selected in the navigation area. If you
select the lower data levels, you can see which series or procedure steps are stored for a study and which images or action
items are stored for a series or procedure step.
D.1
In Browser Configuration you can define which information
is to be displayed for each entry.
Page D.72, General settings
In the content area you can also select patient and examination
data for further processing.
D.1
You can toggle between a list display or image stamp display.
Page D.113, Display of lists and image stamps in the content area
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.19
Introduction
Patient Browser
D.1
You can alter the display of the Patient Browser window and in
this way optimize it for your way of working. For example, you
can have a certain area enlarged in order to view as much data
as possible at one time.
D.1
D.1
You can enlarge, reduce, and pan the Patient Browser window
on your screen as you require.
Page A.225, Resizing and moving a window
D.1
0.0
D.110
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Introduction
D.1
You can change the height of the navigation and content areas
with respect to one another using the mouse. The larger you
make the navigation area the smaller the content area will
become and vice versa.
D.1
Move the mouse cursor to the border of the navigation area.
The cursor changes shape to a small vertical double arrow.
D.1
Drag the line down to enlarge the navigation area and reduce
the content area.
Or
D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.111
Introduction
Patient Browser
D.1
You can have the tool bar, navigation area, and information area
either displayed or not, in order to create more room in the
Patient Browser window.
D.1
D.1
0.0
D.112
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Introduction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.113
Introduction
Patient Browser
D.1
The names of the submenu entries depend on the configuration of your system.
0.0
D.114
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Introduction
D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.115
Introduction
Patient Browser
Image stamps
D.1
If View > Image Stamps is activated, all data objects are displayed as image stamps on the image/data level.
D.1
D.1
Data objects
D.1
This is a selection of possible data objects. (The range of possible objects is continuously expanded with each software version.)
D.1
Symbol
D.1
Object
D.1
Description
D.1
Image
Raw data
Report
Result
0.0
D.116
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Introduction
Symbol
D.1
Object
D.1
Description
D.1
Fusion
Registration
Matrix
Fly Path
Contains the coordinates of the threedimensional Fly path created and stored
during a Fly Through session.
Radiotherapy
Object
Broken Image
Black Image
Black images are special images containing graphics, tables, histograms or reports.
Loading image
Waveforms
D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.117
Introduction
Patient Browser
0.0
D.118
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.2
D.2
In the Patient Browser window you can view all the patient and
examination data stored in the databases of your system and
on external archiving media.
D.2
You can search for patient data to examine a patient again or to
review, film, or save his or her images.
D.2
You can search for patient data in the Patient Browser by navigating through the data levels of the window by mouse click or
using the keyboard.
D.2
You can speed up your search by sorting the data displayed,
e.g. alphabetically by the last name of the patient, or by filtering
the data displayed and only viewing a certain subset.
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.21
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
D.2
D.2
In the content area you can see a list of all studies that are available for that patient.
D.2
Click on another patient to hide the first patients data tree
and view the information levels of the other patient instead.
0.0
D.22
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Or
D.2
Call up the popup menu with the right mouse button (or Shift
+ F10) and click on Open Subtree.
The function Open Subtree is especially useful if you have
selected several patients simultaneously.
If you select the icon for a database or drive the Open Subtree menu item and the button remain dimmed. At this level
you cannot open the data tree.
Closing a subtree
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.23
D.2
Patient Browser
If your system is connected to an HIS/RIS system, the scheduler is automatically updated at regular intervals with information from the registration depending on the service configuration. You can also start this updating operation manually. In this
way you can ensure that you are always working with the latest
data.
D.2
Select View > Update Worklist to update the scheduler.
Or
D.2
Click on the icon for the scheduler to update it and then open
it.
Depending on the configuration, the Worklist Time Range
window is displayed in which you can limit the time frame for
your query.
Page E.33, Defining the worklist time range
In the Patient Browser, all patients who are preregistered for
examination on your system are now displayed.
D.2
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.24
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
Call up View > Refresh to update the display of the navigation and content areas.
Or
D.2
NOTE
If you are working on a satellite console, you must update
the database with Refresh key.
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.25
Patient Browser
D.2
You can search for a patients examination data in the databases in order to process it further.
D.2
After you have called up the Patient Browser window for the
first time the local database will open. All the patients stored in
it are listed in the navigation and content area.
D.2
The data levels of the first patient are displayed in the navigation area.
D.2
If you call up the Patient Browser again later, it appears in
the display last set.
0.0
D.26
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Now select a database in the navigation area and search for the
patient you require. You then open the lower levels of information until you have found the data you are looking for of the
patient concerned.
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.27
Example
D.2
D.2
Patient Browser
For example, to select certain images of a patient for processing you can open the information levels patient, study, and
series one after the other until the images you require are listed
or displayed (as image stamps) in the content area.
D.2
Click on the icon for the database in which the patient is
stored in the navigation area.
If necessary, scroll through the list of patients using the scroll
bar until you have found the patient you require.
You will find the patient you are looking for even faster if you
press the key for the first letter of the patient's name on the
keyboard. The selection then jumps to the first patient entry
with this initial letter.
D.2
D.2
Click on the patient you are looking for in the navigation area
to view the information levels stored for this patient as icons.
All the studies of this patient are displayed in the content
area.
Click on a study in the navigation area to select it and to view
all the associated series.
Click on a series in the navigation area to select it and to
obtain an overview of all the images contained in it in the
content area.
D.2
0.0
D.28
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
Using the keyboard you can reach various data entries in the
Patient Browser very quickly. The key assignment for the
selection options in the active area (navigation or content area)
is summarized in the following table.
D.2
D.2
Key
Selection
Key
Selection
Home
First entry
End
Last entry
Page up
Page down
Entry one
line up (same
level)
Entry one
line down (same
level)
Tab
or
Shift + Tab
Toggle between
the navigation
and content area
Letter
When you press and hold the Ctrl key and click the data input
with the mouse, you are selecting the inputs exclusively. However, when you press the Shift key and click data inputs with
the mouse, you are selecting the inputs inclusively (standard
Windows functionality).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.29
Multiple selection
D.2
Patient Browser
D.2
0.0
D.210
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Filtering data
D.2
D.2
When filtering your data you can use filter criteria that are
offered by default by your system. These are available to you on
the menu bar or with the buttons on the toolbar.
D.2
In Browser Configuration, you can add standard filters to or
remove them from the menu bar or toolbar.
Page D.18, Tool bar
Filter menu
D.2
Or
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.211
Patient Browser
D.2
Not Archived
Only the data which have not been saved are displayed.
Not Printed
Only the data which have not yet been printed are displayed.
Not Sent
Only the data which have not yet been sent in the network are
displayed.
Not Marked
Only the data which are not marked are displayed.
Marked
Only marked data are displayed.
0.0
D.212
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
D.2
Call up Filter > Off or click on the icon button to have all the
data displayed again (unfiltered).
D.2
Using the Patient Browser you can also create your own filter
criteria in order to filter the database according to a combination
of target items.
D.2
If you keep self-defined filters general, you can use them more
frequently to have a certain subset of the data displayed in a
quick and uncomplicated manner.
D.2
If you define very specific filters, you can search for patient and
examination data in a direct and time-saving way.
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.213
Creating a filter
D.2
Patient Browser
0.0
D.214
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
Enter target items in the input fields combined with and that
must all be fulfilled.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.215
D.2
Patient Browser
This filter only selects marked series that have already been
completed, filmed, and archived and that were acquired with a
slice position between 0 and 100.
D.2
0.0
D.216
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Saving a filter
D.2
D.2
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.217
Removing user-defined
filters
D.2
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Or
D.2
0.0
D.218
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Sorting data
D.2
You can sort the data displayed in the Patient Browser by various criteria. This enables you to output the data in a certain
sequence and makes it easier to find certain patient and examination data.
D.2
Depending on the selected data level, different sorting criteria
will be active in the Sort menu.
D.2
You can define your own sort schemes with up to three sort levels for sorting the images.
D.2
The selected sort criteria or sort scheme is marked by a checkmark next to the menu item. The checkmark remains until you
select another criteria.
D.2
You can reverse the sorting order for each selected sort criteria.D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.219
Patient Browser
Sorting patients
D.2
You may sort the list of patients in the local database or scheduler.
D.2
Select the Local database or the Scheduler.
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.220
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Sorting examinations
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.221
Patient Browser
Sorting series
D.2
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.222
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Sorting images
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.223
Sorting in the
content area
D.2
D.2
D.2
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
D.2
D.2
D.2
MR images and data may also be sorted by further sorting criteria and schemes.
D.2
Selecting a sort criteria from the menu under Sort > Modality Specific Data > ....
D.2
Anatomical
Multiple standard sort scheme for localizer and anatomical
examinations.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Triggered
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for triggered examinations.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Chronological
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for sorting by time of creation
of the images.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
0.0
D.224
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Instance Oriented
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for sorting by image number.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Echo Time (TE)
Series that have been acquired with multiple echo protocols,
contain images based on different contrasts (e.g. T2 images,
proton density images). You can use sorting to separate
these images by echo time.
Repetition Time (TR)
The images of a series are sorted by TR.
Inversion Time (TI)
The images of a series are sorted by TI.
Trigger Time (TT)
The images of a series are sorted by TT.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.225
Multiple sorting
D.2
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.226
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.227
Patient Browser
D.2
If your system is connected to a printer, you can print out examination data in the form of a list. On printing out, the information
displayed in the content area is displayed.
D.2
Display the required patient and examination data in the content area.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
To print out the content area, you can work both in the tree
display and in the single display.
Page D.112, Showing and hiding window sections
You can even print data lists of you have already stored the
patient data, for example, for archiving or transfer to a local
data medium.
Page D.55, Printing patient data from data media
D.2
Call up Patient > Print Preview... to have the printout displayed in a preview.
Click on Close window to close the print preview again.
0.0
D.228
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
Call up Patient > Print List to print out the data listed in the
content area.
In a list of patients, the content and date of creation of the list is
stated in the header of the printout. For all other data levels, the
content of the information area is also printed.
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.229
Changing printer
settings
D.2
Patient Browser
You can change the printer settings (e.g. page margins) in the
Windows NT/Windows XP print dialog.
D.2
Call up Patient > Print... and make the required settings in
the dialog box shown.
D.2
0.0
D.230
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Data media
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.231
D.2
D.2
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Showing/hiding data
sources
D.2
With View > Source, you can hide or display archiving media
individually in the navigation area.
Page D.114, Showing and hiding databases and drives D.2
0.0
D.232
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Selecting data
D.2
Importing data
D.2
You can import the patient and examination data selected in the
archive medium into the local database, e.g. to evaluate it, to
send it through the network, or to store it on another data
medium.
D.2
Call up Transfer > Import to import the selected data from
the data medium or network node into your local database.
Or
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.233
Patient Browser
D.2
Calling up standard
patient search
D.2
You can perform your data search in the Search window. There
you enter the search criteria, start the search, and select the
data to import.
D.2
Call up Patient > Search... in the main menu.
Or
D.2
0.0
D.234
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.235
Patient Browser
D.2
You search for the patients, studies or series you want to import
into your local database by entering patient, study or series
details in the input fields of the Patient Search dialog.
D.2
Network node
D.2
D.2
Patient details
Select the network node on which the data searched for are
located.
D.2
Enter the last name, ID and date of birth of the patient you are
searching for.
The following characters are not permitted: ^ = \
The search distinguishes between upper and lower case!
Enter the characters correctly.
If you only know part of the name or the patient ID, you can
also use the character * as wildcard.
Page E.35, Wildcards for patient name and ID
0.0
D.236
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Select Any from the dropdown list if you do not want the sex
to be considered for the search.
Select the Sex from the dropdown list.
Examination details
D.2
When you select an item from the dropdown list the corresponding study date range is automatically entered.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.237
Study details
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Enter the series details or select a body part and a performing physician from the dropdown list.
If you only use series details the search may be retarded.
The items of the dropdown lists are configurable.
Page D.244, Configuring Patient Search
Page E.42, Defining entries in the selection list
0.0
D.238
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Start Search
D.2
D.2
Search result
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.239
Patient Browser
D.2
N OT E
If the Patient ID is not unique, studies may be listed which
do not belong to the patient selected and displayed in the
information area.
D.2
Image List
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.240
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Search Selected
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.241
Patient Browser
Importing data
D.2
D.2
Select one or more patients, studies or series from the information or search output area of the Search dialog.
Or
D.2
D.2
In case you selected only one patient, study or series, double-click it.
The selected data are copied from the network node to your
workstation and displayed in the navigation and content area of
the Patient Browser.
D.2
If the selected objects exceed a certain limit a warning message appears.
Click the Import Stop key if you want to cancel the import.
0.0
D.242
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Checking data
transmission
D.2
Restarting search
D.2
D.2
Click Clear if you want all entries to be cleared, stop the current search and start a new one.
All input fields, the information area and the result output list are
cleared.
D.2
D.2
D.2
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.243
Patient Browser
D.2
You can adapt the user interface of the Search dialog window
to your method of working. The dropdown lists of the search criteria Modality and Body Part are configurable.
D.2
Call up the Numaris 4 Configuration Panel by activating
Options > Configuration in the main menu.
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.244
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Select or deselect the desired items by clicking or deselecting the corresponding check box.
Click OK to save the settings.
Or
D.2
D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.245
Patient Browser
D.2
0.0
D.246
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.2
D.2
Or
D.2
D.2
If you click with the mouse outside the EPR Web browser, the
window is placed in the background.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.247
Patient Browser
You can call up the Web browser with the same patient data
again.
D.2
Or
D.2
D.2
D.2
0.0
D.248
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.3
D.3
You have found the patient and examination data you require in
the Patient Browser window and would now like to make use
of this data in another application.
D.3
You would like to examine the patient again.
You would like to view and possibly review the patients
stored images.
You would like to process and evaluate images three-dimensionally for special diagnostic problems.
You would like to process patient and examination data in
other application programs that you have set.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.31
Patient Browser
D.3
D.3
Click on the required patient entry in the navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Or
D.3
D.3
D.3
D.3
D.3
0.0
D.32
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.3
With the Patient Browser you can transfer the images of one
or more patients from the local database to the Viewing task
card for viewing and editing.
D.3
Depending on which data level you are in, you can transfer the
following image material to the Viewing card:
D.3
All images of one or more patients
All images of one or more studies
All images of one or more series
One image or more than one image
For transferring images to the Viewing task card you can either
use the menu bar or the toolbar or you simply double-click the
images or drag & drop them onto the Viewing task card with
the mouse.
D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.33
D.3
Patient Browser
Select the patient, study, or series in the navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Patient > Load to Viewing or click on the button on
the toolbar to transfer the associated images to the Viewing
task card.
Or
D.3
D.3
Select more than one image in the content area and transfer
it to the Viewing card with Patient > Load to Viewing or the
Load to Viewing button on the toolbar.
Page D.210, Multiple selection
0.0
D.34
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.3
In addition to the methods described above you can also transfer images to the Viewing task card by drag & drop. In this way
you can determine in which segment the first of your selected
images is to be displayed.
D.3
Reduce and/or move the Patient Browser window so that
you can see the image area of the Viewing task card.
Drag the selected images to the desired segment on the
Viewing task card.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.35
Patient Browser
If the task card is not in the foreground you can also drag the
images from the Browser onto the corresponding tab. The
task card moves into the foreground and the images are
loaded into the image area.
Closed after Loading
D.3
0.0
D.36
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.3
D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.37
D.3
Patient Browser
D.3
NOTE
Due to safety standards splitting of the images may take
some time. This process runs in the background and is
accomplished even if the current user logs off or if the user
changes.
D.3
0.0
D.38
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Canceling splitting of
mosaic images
D.3
NOTE
To cancel a running spiltting process when the user
changes is only possible if the different user disposes of the
corresponding access rights.
D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.39
Processing images in 3D
Patient Browser
D.3
D.3
D.3
D.3
Call up Applications > 3D > MinIP to start minimum intensity projection (MinIP).
Or
D.3
D.3
Call up Applications > 3D > VRT to start the volume rendering technique as the image processing.
0.0
D.310
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
If you have selected more than one suitable series or an especially large series, the Series List dialog box is displayed. As
soon as you have decided on a series there, you can perform
three-dimensional image processing on the 3D task card.
Chapter H.2, Transferring Images to 3D
D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.311
Private applications
Patient Browser
D.3
0.0
D.312
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.4
Correcting Data
D.4
D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.41
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
D.4
You can correct or add to the personal data of a patient or information about that patients studies in the local database.
D.4
If you want to change stored data or data from another workstation, you must first import it into the local database. However,
the original data remain unchanged.
Page D.231, Reading data from storing media
D.4
D.4
NOTE
As long as you have not generated all the Position Display
images of a patients examinations, you must not change
the respective patient and examination data.
D.4
Otherwise the reference of the scanned images gets lost
and it is not possible to use the Position Display in the
Viewing task card.
D.4
0.0
D.42
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Correcting Data
Close the patient in all task cards (Patient > Close Patient).
When Security is activated, you can correct data only if you
are authorized to do so.
Select the patient, study, series or images that you want to
correct in the navigation or content area of the Patient
Browser.
Call up Edit > Correct.
Or
D.4
D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.43
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
0.0
D.44
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Correcting Data
Selected patient
D.4
Content display
D.4
On the title bar of the Correct window, you can see which
patient and data you have selected.
D.4
In the first line of the window of the header line, the number of
studies, series, and images which are selected for correction is
displayed.
D.4
Entering data
D.4
In the input and selection fields of the Correct window you can
see the information that has been stored for the selected patient
or selected study or series so far.
D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.45
Correcting Data
Updating a current
examination
Patient Browser
D.4
D.4
D.4
0.0
D.46
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Saving changes
Correcting Data
D.4
D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.47
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
D.4
A patient whose name was spelled incorrectly during an examination or who was once registered as an emergency patient is
stored in the database twice.
D.4
As soon as you save the corrected patient name, the dialog box
asks you whether you want to merge the examination data of
the two patient entries or not.
D.4
D.4
D.4
D.4
0.0
D.48
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Correcting Data
D.4
If you change patient and examination data that you have previously imported into your local database (e.g. from another
archiving medium) or that was imported into your system (e.g.
via HIS/RIS), the Losing External References message box is
displayed.
D.4
D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.49
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
Moving data
D.4
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Correcting/rearranging objects with
references.
D.4
Consequence: References may be lost.
D.4
0.0
D.410
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Restrictions
Correcting Data
D.4
If you want to move linked external objects, select this function with multiple selection because otherwise the reference
to the unselected objects will be lost.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.411
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
D.4
You can move data either with the mouse (drag & drop) or using
the Edit menu (cut & paste).
D.4
If you accidentally cut and move data by drag & drop, you can
cancel the operation at any time with the Esc key.
Select the study or studies, series, images, or the one image
that you want to move.
Drag the selected data to the target position and release the
mouse button.
Or
D.4
D.4
Call up Edit > Cut or click on the icon button on the toolbar.
Click on the target position.
D.4
Call up Edit > Paste or click on the icon button on the toolbar.
D.4
0.0
D.412
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Correcting Data
D.4
D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.413
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
D.4
D.4
0.0
D.414
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Correcting Data
Depending on the data level of the selected data different information is listed in the Correct & Rearrange History window:D.4
Title
Here you can see the data record to which the logged
changes belong.
Attribute
This column lists the corrected entries.
Original Setting and Corrected Setting
These two columns show you the corrected entry before and
after the change.
Date & Time
This column of the table shows you the date and time of the
change.
Modifiers Name
In the last column in the table you can see who has made the
corrections.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.415
Correcting Data
Patient Browser
D.4
0.0
D.416
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.5
D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.51
Patient Browser
D.5
Inserting CD
D.5
Storing data on CD
D.5
D.5
0.0
D.52
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.5
D.5
D.5
Or
D.5
D.5
D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.53
Selecting a destination
D.5
Patient Browser
D.5
D.5
D.5
0.0
D.54
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.5
D.5
D.5
To show the data in the print preview, select Patient > Print
Preview.
To print out the data list, select Patient > Print List.
The content and date of creation of the list appears in the
header of the list of patients. For all other data levels the content of the information area is also printed out.
The list is always printed in English.
D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.55
Patient Browser
D.5
0.0
D.56
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Filming
D.5
You can use the Patient Browser to send single images or all
images of one or more patients, studies or series to the Filming
task card.
D.5
Transferring images to
Filming
D.5
Or
D.5
Click the Filming card to the top of the stack and double-click
on the entries that you want to film in the Patient Browser.
Or
D.5
Drag the selection to the Filming task card with the mouse
(drag & drop).
Just like loading the images into the Viewing task card you can
determine in which segment of the film sheet the images are to
appear.
Page D.35, Drag & drop
D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.57
Patient Browser
With one of the above commands, all the selected images are
transferred to the Filming task card. Depending on whether
Auto Expose has been activated there, the images are
exposed on film immediately, as soon as a film sheet is full, or
they are first collected in a film job.
Chapter O.2, Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
D.5
Film preview
D.5
D.5
D.5
0.0
D.58
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.5
You can expose or print a patients images that you have collected in a film job from the Patient Browser. To do that you do
not have to switch to the Filming task card first.
D.5
Call up Patient > Expose Film Task to transfer all images in
the film job to the camera or printer.
Or
D.5
D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.59
D.5
Patient Browser
You can obtain an overview of all film jobs that have already
been sent to a camera or printer and, for example, change the
sequence in which they are to be processed.
Page O.53, Viewing and manipulating film jobs
D.5
Call up Patient > Film Task Status to display the Film Task
Status dialog box with a list of all pending film jobs.
Or
D.5
D.5
0.0
D.510
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.6
D.6
If you maintain your data collection regularly you can keep your
data management clear and access times to the databases
short. This is an important contribution to the efficiency of daily
examinations.
D.6
You can obtain information about the work status of patient
and examination data and can edit it. In this way you can
record the processing stage that a patients images are at.
You can mark important examination data so that you will find
it more easily later on.
You can delete patient or examination data that has already
been stored from the local database.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.61
Patient Browser
D.6
Abbreviations
(e.g. com/p/a/s/e/r/h)
D.6
0.0
D.62
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.63
Patient Browser
0.0
D.64
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.6
D.6
Call up Edit > Set State and select the work status that you
want to assign.
Or
D.6
D.6
com
rea
ver
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.65
Patient Browser
D.6
Marking items
D.6
D.6
D.6
Or
D.6
0.0
D.66
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.6
Unmarking items
D.6
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.67
Patient Browser
D.6
After completion of an examination and all associated evaluations, you can document the work you have done in a performance report. This report can then be used, for example, for
invoicing the costs.
D.6
Your system creates the performance report during patient registration. During examination and postprocessing of the examination results, the report is updated.
D.6
D.6
D.6
0.0
D.68
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.69
MPPS status
Patient Browser
D.6
As soon as you select a series the MPPS status in the field Status is displayed. It consists of three parts (e.g. "COMPLETED"/
"HIS"/"S"):
D.6
0.0
D.610
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
"HIS", if the planned working step has been assigned via the
HIS/RIS system,
"LOC" if the working step has been planned locally,
" ", if you are on the Patient/Study level.
The third part provides information about the work status in a
message to the HIS/RIS-System:
D.6
"s", if creation of the performance report has been successfully sent to the HIS/RIS system,
"S" if COMPLETED/DISCONTINUED has been successfully
sent to the HIS/RIS system,
" " if you are on the Patient/Study level.
Checking data
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.611
Patient Browser
D.6
In the lower part of the window Modality Performed Procedure Step, the examination data are listed on three subtask
cards ordered by different aspects. You can select them by
clicking on their tab.
D.6
Examination steps
D.6
D.6
Cost information
D.6
D.6
0.0
D.612
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.6
D.6
D.6
Or
Concluding
D.6
D.6
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.613
Patient Browser
Or
Exiting as discontinued
D.6
D.6
D.6
D.6
D.6
D.6
0.0
D.614
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.6
The Modality Performed Procedure Step window is automatically closed if you conclude, save, or send a report. If you have
only opened the report to view it, close it without changes. D.6
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.615
Patient Browser
Deleting data
D.6
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: The flags A (Archive) and S (Send)
respectively only indicate the receipt of the images. They do
not indicate successful storage in the intended archive. D.6
Consequence: The data may be lost if it is deleted by the
sender e.g., by an auto delete mechanism and if it cannot
be stored by the receiver.
D.6
Remedy: Before deleting data from your local database
ensure that this data is safely stored in the intended archive.
Always use 'storage commitment' if supported by sender
and receiver of data.
D.6
Please note
D.6
D.6
0.0
D.616
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Select the data that you want to delete in the navigation area
or content area.
Call up Edit > Delete in the main menu of the Patient
Browser or open a popup menu and select Delete there.
Or
D.6
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.617
Patient Browser
0.0
D.618
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.6
If you attempt to delete data for which the work status does not
allow deletion, a message box is displayed.
D.6
In this message box you can see why you cannot delete the
selected data. For example, because it is first necessary to perform a number of processing steps before it can be deleted. D.6
In the Browser Configuration you can define in which work
status you are allowed to delete data.
Page D.72, General settings
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.619
Patient Browser
D.6
D.6
D.6
Click on Yes to All if you have selected more than one data
record for deletion and you want to delete all the records
regardless of their work status.
Or
D.6
D.6
D.6
D.6
0.0
D.620
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.6
D.6
Or
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.621
Patient Browser
D.6
Patient and examination data that are assigned delete protection can be identified by the list entry Prot in the Mark Status
column in the content area. This entry appears on the patient
level only. It does not appear on the study or series level.
D.6
Removing delete
protection
D.6
D.6
0.0
D.622
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Clear Scheduler
D.6
D.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.623
Patient Browser
D.6
0.0
D.624
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.7
D.7
With the Browser Configuration dialog box you can adapt the
Patient Browser to your method of working.
D.7
You can change the following settings:
D.7
General settings such as the layout of the toolbar and the display of the work status.
The hierarchical view of the information levels (patient, study,
series, image) in the navigation and content area.
The display of the individual information levels (study, series,
image) in the content area.
Only research customers are allowed to use the selection of
syngo programmed user-defined applications in the Private
Applications menu.
D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.71
General settings
Patient Browser
D.7
On the General tab card you can configure the toolbar of the
Patient Browser, define which work status is displayed for the
examination data, and set the influence of the work status on
delete permission.
D.7
Click the General tab card into the foreground to activate this
card.
0.0
D.72
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Toolbar
D.7
You can place buttons for the functions of the Patient Browser
that you require frequently on the toolbar and remove rarelyused functions.
D.7
In a later software version you can also configure functions of
other applications in the Patient Browser toolbar by using
the application selection list (dimmed in this version).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.73
Patient Browser
Work status
D.7
In the middle part of the General tab card you can define which
work status is displayed in the content area for the examination
data and in which processing state data is released for deletion.D.7
Display of work status
D.7
Select the check box for a work status if you want this work
status to be displayed in the content area of the Patient
Browser.
You will find information about the work status on
Page D.62, Defining the work status
Delete authorization
D.7
Select the check box of a work status. Data without this status cannot be deleted without explicit confirmation in a message box.
0.0
D.74
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Delete confirmation
D.7
D.7
Click on the Confirm Deletion check box to have a confirmation box displayed every time before data is deleted.
A check mark in the check box shows that deletion confirmation
is activated.
D.7
Or
D.7
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Deletion confirmation deactivated.
D.7
D.7
D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.75
Patient Browser
D.7
On the Tree View tab card you can define what information is
listed in the content area of the Patient Browser in the hierarchy levels (e.g. patient). You can also hide hierarchy levels in
the navigation and content areas. You can also configure the
icon display of series and images.
D.7
D.7
D.7
Pick Database from the selection list of databases to configure the local database view.
The names and information that appear on the card Tree
View for the different data levels differ depending on the database that you have called up (e.g. Study in the local database
corresponds to Procedure in the scheduler).
0.0
D.76
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.7
D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.77
Patient Browser
D.7
0.0
D.78
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.79
Patient Browser
List entries
D.7
You can make the content area of the Patient Browser clearer
by having your own selection of information listed.
D.7
D.7
D.7
0.0
D.710
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Modality-specific entries
D.7
In series (local database), the information displayed in the content area is modality dependent. Depending on the modality
you can also define specific entries in the content area.
D.7
Select a modality on the data level Series if you want to create list entries in the content area.
Or
D.7
D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.711
D.7
Patient Browser
D.7
0.0
D.712
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.7
D.7
D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.713
Patient Browser
D.7
For display of series and images in the content area you can
choose between display as a list and display as image stamps.
You can label the image stamps with up to two entries. To
assign these entries proceed exactly as for definition of the list
entries in the content area.
Page D.710, List entries
D.7
0.0
D.714
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
D.7
In the card Single View, define to which hierarchy level data are
to be displayed if the navigation area is hidden. Each data entry
is displayed in exactly one line.
D.7
Click the Single View tab card into the foreground and select
the database you want to configure.
Page D.76, Selecting a database
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.715
D.7
Patient Browser
In the single view, the content area always shows the same data
level.
D.7
Select the data level that you want to have displayed when
switching from the Tree View to the Single View in the content area.
It depends on the data level that you have set for the single view
of the content area what information can be displayed about the
list entries. For example, if you have set the Series level to be
displayed, you can have information from the levels patient,
study, and series displayed in the list of series.
D.7
D.7
You can configure the single view of the content area in a similar
way as the hierarchical view of the navigation and content area.
Page D.76, Hierarchical view in the navigation and content
area
D.7
You can combine list entries of different information levels by
varying the data level for the pool in the Heading Pool from
which you then select the required entries.
D.7
Define the data level in the selection list from which you want
to take list entries for the content area in the Heading Pool.
0.0
D.716
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
The Heading Pool now contains all the possible list entries
from the selected information level.
D.7
Click on a list entry in the Heading Pool and move it into the
Heading Settings with the arrow down key or remove a list
entry from the Heading Settings with the arrow up key.
Now select another Level, if necessary, to place list entries
of another data level from the Heading Pool into the Heading Settings.
For the Series data level, you can set up modality- or data
type-specific list entries for the content area.
Page D.711, Modality-specific entries
Page D.712, Data type specific entries
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.717
Configuring user-defined
applications
Patient Browser
D.7
0.0
D.718
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.8
Reporting
D.8
Purpose
D.8
D.8
D.8
N O TE
In this version of syngo MR, this functionality is only
available for Argus reporting.
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.81
Reporting
Identification of a report in
the Patient Browser
D.8
Patient Browser
D.8
D.8
0.0
D.82
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
Basics
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.83
Reporting
Patient Browser
Layout
Content items
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
Unless content items are suitably linked, they are of little use.
For this reason a DICOM report provides information items in a
hierarchical structure.
D.8
The "document title" item is at the top of the hierarchy. Below it,
the remaining items of information can be placed in different
relationships to each other in a complex tree structure.
D.8
For example, the following relationships between content items
of a report are possible:
D.8
Configuration within the hierarchy
Property of a higher-level information item
Conclusions from higher-level information items
Reference for a higher-level information item
0.0
D.84
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Codes in general
Reporting
D.8
Diagnostic codes
D.8
D.8
syngo MR allows you to select a standard code scheme designator for reporting/diagnostics or for defining your own code
scheme designator.
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.85
Reporting
Patient Browser
Creating a report
D.8
Reports can be created from the Argus task card. They are
stored in the local database.
D.8
Medical images are linked to the report as references.
D.8
0.0
D.86
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
Editing a report
D.8
D.8
N OT E
Regularly save changes to a report during editing. Make
sure that you have saved your changes before you log off.
The dialog box will be closed and unsaved changes will be
lost.
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.87
Reporting
Patient Browser
Opening a report
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
Legend
D.8
0.0
D.88
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.89
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
Going directly to
information items
D.8
The line below the report heading lists the information items it
contains. The names of the items listed are directly linked to the
information item in the report.
D.8
Alternatively, you can go to a position in the report (information item) by scrolling via the scroll bar or by paging via the
keyboard.
0.0
D.810
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
A link takes you from the part of the report displayed directly
back to the beginning of the report.
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.811
Reporting
Patient Browser
Editing a report
The opened report is automatically displayed in edit mode.
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
D.812
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
N OT E
Once a report has been assigned the Complete status, it
has to be saved as a new report. It is no longer possible to
save changes to the existing report.
D.8
D.8
D.8
N OT E
The verification status is for internal information only. It is
not of legal consequence.
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.813
Reporting
Patient Browser
Some parts of the report contain input fields for recording additional comments.
D.8
Empty text input fields are not displayed in full. Instead, a plus
sign is shown in front of the name of the input field. To display
the input field, you only need to click the plus switch.
Click the relevant comment field in the selected part of the
report.
0.0
D.814
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Setting diagnostic
codes
Reporting
D.8
N OT E
A diagnostic encoding scheme must be preset in the report
configuration before a report is edited for the first time. This
enables you to define the appropriate code either by
selecting it or entering it manually.
Page D.836, Create and edit diagnostic encoding
schemes
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.815
Reporting
Patient Browser
If a diagnostic code does not include the scheme set, enter the
code manually in the Add Codes line.
D.8
Select the empty item from the Conclusion selection list.
0.0
D.816
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
N OT E
When the report is saved, the manually entered diagnostic
code is assigned to the code scheme that you preset in the
Configuration. The code can now be edited again in the
configuration.
D.8
D.8
Enlarged display of
images and tables
The default display shows images and tables with reduced size. D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.817
Reporting
Patient Browser
0.0
D.818
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.819
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
0.0
D.820
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
You can undo all changes made in the report since it was last
saved.
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.821
Reporting
Patient Browser
Saving a report
D.8
You can save changes in a report at any time. However, the way
the report is saved depends on its completion status. In case of
a partial completion status, changes are saved in the current
report.
D.8
However you had set the completion status to Completed or
Verified the last time you saved, a new version of the report will
automatically be stored with the new version number.
D.8
Additionally, a new version of the report is created, if the report
in the database is marked with one of the following flags:
D.8
Printed
Archived
Archived + Verified
Archived + Committed
Sent
Sent + Committed
Exported
Received
0.0
D.822
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
N OT E
Save the changed report before printing it out. If you
subsequently close the print preview without saving it in edit
mode, all changes to the report are lost.
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.823
Reporting
Patient Browser
Printing a report
D.8
Before you print a report, you can look at the contents of the
report again in the print preview.
D.8
If you want to make changes to the report, you can go back to
the edit window from the print preview at any time.
Page D.826, Close the print preview
D.8
D.8
D.8
D.8
N OT E
Print mode is only available to users who have activated a
print privilege for the report in their user account.
D.8
If you do not have a print privilege, the Print Mode button is
deactivated.
D.8
0.0
D.824
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.825
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
D.826
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
D.8
Starting to print
D.8
You can only start printing a report from the print preview (print
mode).
D.8
Click the Print button.
A print dialog box opens. You can make the necessary print settings here.
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.827
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
0.0
D.828
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
Sending a report
D.8
N OT E
Referenced images are not automatically sent with the
report. They must be sent separately.
D.8
D.8
N OT E
After a report has been sent, any subsequent changes to it
can only be saved as a new report. It is no longer possible
to save changes to the sent report.
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.829
Reporting
Standard address
Patient Browser
D.8
Or
D.8
D.8
Selecting a destination
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
D.830
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.831
Reporting
Patient Browser
Opening a configuration
D.8
You can select the configuration of the reports from the Applications menu in the Patient Browser.
D.8
Select Applications > Report Tools > Configuration from
the main menu of the Patient Browser.
The Report Configuration dialog box opens:
D.8
0.0
D.832
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
D.8
You are able to predefine the language used in the report on the
General Settings subtask card. This configuration setting
applies to all subsequent new reports.
D.8
D.8
N OT E
The language set only applies to the reports and may differ
from the language set on the system.
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.833
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
You can insert your own user logo into the report from the CDROM or diskette drive of your station.
D.8
Before the system can use your logo, the following requirements have to be met:
D.8
the logo has to be stored in GIF format.
the name of the logo has to be Logo.gif.
To install the logo, proceed as follows:
D.8
0.0
D.834
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
The logo is now imported and will be used in all reports stored
after successful completion of the automatic installation.
D.8
If installation is successful, this message is displayed:
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.835
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
0.0
D.836
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
Configuration options:
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.837
Reporting
Changing or creating a
new diagnostic code
Patient Browser
D.8
0.0
D.838
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
In all other lines, you can define the codes you require, one
code per line. Example of code entry:
D.8
N11.1:chronic obstructive pyelonephritis
D.8
Display format
Identifier
The identifier for the display format is changed in the line DisplayFormat =.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.839
Reporting
Patient Browser
To activate the settings made in the text editor, you have to save
them in the text editor (not to be confused with the Report
Configuration dialog box).
D.8
Open File > Save in the text editor.
After that, you can close the text editor.
D.8
0.0
D.840
Operator Manual
Patient Browser
Reporting
D.8
D.8
D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
D.841
Reporting
Patient Browser
D.8
D.8
0.0
D.842
Operator Manual
PART
Patient Registration
E.0
E.1 Introduction
Calling up Patient Registration ....................................... E.13
The Patient Registration window ................................... E.14
syngo MR 2006T
E1
Contents
Patient Registration
0.0
E2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
E.1
Introduction
E.1
Before you can examine a patient with your system, you must
register him or her.
E.1
Registration means that you give your system all the information about a patient that it requires for an examination.
E.1
Depending on how registrations are organized in your hospital
and how much time you have for registration, you can choose
between different patient registration procedures.
E.1
Registration
E.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.11
Introduction
Preregistration
Patient Registration
E.1
HIS/RIS query
E.1
Security - Privileges
E.1
0.0
E.12
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Introduction
E.1
E.1
E.1
Buttons
E.1
Or
E.1
E.1
E.1
Symbol keypad
E.1
E.1
E.1
NOTE
The button Patient Browser may not function if a dialog box
is open and active.
E.1
Click on the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or
close the dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.13
Introduction
Patient Registration
E.1
0.0
E.14
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Personal data of
the patient
Introduction
E.1
In the PATIENT area, you can enter all the personal details and
any additional information about the patient.
E.1
.
NOTE
Patient name, patient ID, date of birth and sex
are used for unique identification of a patient in the
databases or storage media.
E.1
E.1
Referral data
E.1
Study-specific data
E.1
Institution data
E.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.15
Introduction
Patient Registration
0.0
E.16
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
E.2
E.2
Your system does not yet contain data for a patient who has not
yet been examined in your hospital or practice.
Information on new patients must therefore be entered prior to
the examination.
E.2
Registration
E.2
If you enter the patients data and want to examine the patient
immediately then you must fill in at least those input fields
whose names are displayed bold.
E.2
Preregistration
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.21
Patient Registration
0.0
E.22
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.23
Patient Registration
0.0
E.24
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Your system has already calculated the age of the patient from
the date of birth you entered above.
E.2
Check the age shown. If it is incorrect you must correct the
date of birth.
If you do not know the date of birth you can enter the estimated age here. The system then calculates a date of birth
from the current date. In the selection field next to it you can
enter whether the age is in years, months or days (for example for infants).
E.2
NOTE
Check once more that the patient name, patient number,
date of birth, and sex are correct to avoid confusion with
other patients.
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.25
Patient Registration
E.2
Calling up an overview
E.2
For a better overview, you can check the text you have entered
again in a larger format.
E.2
Click on the button Blow up in the field Additional info.
0.0
E.26
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.27
Patient Registration
E.2
Depending on the modality, it may be necessary to display additional patient data and information.
E.2
Click on the button Details....
The window Additional Patient Attributes is displayed.
E.2
0.0
E.28
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.29
Patient Registration
0.0
E.210
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
In the HOSPITAL area you can enter information about admission of the patient to your practice.
E.2
Enter the name of the physician (e.g. family doctor) who referred the patient or select one from the selection list.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.211
Patient Registration
E.2
E.2
0.0
E.212
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.213
Patient Registration
Or
E.2
Scroll through the study list with the scroll bar until you find
the required region of the body.
Click on the + symbol in front of this entry to display all the
studies grouped together for this region.
The + symbol becomes a - symbol.
Click on the - symbol to hide the studies again.
Click on the study you require in the selection list.
It then appears in the Study input field.
E.2
0.0
E.214
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
Select the patient position for the first study in the selection
list. The patient position is defined as direction - position.
E.2
Direction:
E.2
Head First
The patient is lying with his or her head toward the examination unit.
Feet First
The patient is lying with his or her feet toward the examination unit.
E.2
Position:
E.2
Left Lateral
The patient is lying on the left-hand side.
Right Lateral
The patient is lying on the right-hand side.
Supine
The patient is lying on his/her back.
Prone
The patient is lying on his/her stomach.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.215
Patient Registration
E.2
If you have compiled a study list, the following data refer to all
studies in the list.
E.2
0.0
E.216
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.217
Patient Registration
E.2
After you have entered all the necessary patient data in the
Patient Registration window, you can assign a certain patient
group to the patient data, register the patient for the ensuing
examination or preregister him or her for examination later on.E.2
E.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Registering a patient twice.
E.2
E.2
0.0
E.218
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
E.2
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.219
Patient Registration
E.2
E.2
E.2
E.2
0.0
E.220
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Or
E.2
E.2
E.2
When you have confirmed the patient data the system checks
whether a patient with this personal data has already been preregistered or is stored in the local database. If so, the Patient
not unique dialog box is displayed.
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.221
Patient Registration
Or
E.2
E.2
E.2
0.0
E.222
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Or
E.2
WA R N I N G
If you register and examine the patient with the weight you
have entered, SAR limit values may be exceeded.
E.2
Depending on your configuration the system checks during registration whether the relation between the age and the weight is
plausible. If the system finds a mismatch, registration is canceled. You then return to the Patient Registration window and
you can correct your entries.
E.2
After successful completion of all checks, the following message appears in the footer of the Patient Registration window:E.2
Transferring patient to examination.
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.223
Patient Registration
Preregistering a patient
E.2
You can preregister the patient with the data entered if you want
to conduct the examination later on. When you start the
examination you then call up the data entered and therefore
save time during routine examinations.
Page E.31, Registering a Known Patient
E.2
Preregistration
E.2
E.2
0.0
E.224
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.2
You can cancel entering patient data any time. All data that are
entered in the Patient Registration window are lost.
E.2
E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.225
Patient Registration
0.0
E.226
Operator Manual
Registering a Known
Patient
CHAPTER
E.3
E.3
HIS/RIS-query
E.3
If the data of the patient has already been entered via an HIS/
RIS system, you can call up that data from the hospital network
and place it in the scheduler. The patient is then preregistered.
E.3
Preregistered patient
E.3
If the patient is preregistered you call up the data entered previously and add to it, if necessary. After that you register the
patient for examination.
E.3
E.3
You can use the personal data from the database for a patient
who has already been examined. Check the data, correct it, if
necessary, and enter the new examination data. Next, register
the patient for the ensuing examination or preregister the
patient if you want to examine him or her later.
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.31
Patient Registration
E.3
Automatic query
E.3
Manual query
E.3
You can also query the HIS/RIS system manually at any time.E.3
Before you start looking through the patient data in the databases, make sure that the scheduler contains all the patient
data required for the examination.
Call up View > Update Worklist in the Patient Browser or
double-click on the Scheduler symbol.
Page D.24, Updating the scheduler
0.0
E.32
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.3
Enter the start and end point (date and time) of your worklist
query.
Click on Get Worklist to call up the updated worklist for the
defined period.
Page E.37, Search list
Or
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.33
Patient Registration
E.3
You can search for patient data in the databases from the
Patient Registration window and then use the data for registration.
E.3
E.3
Enter the data known to you in the fields Last name and
Patient ID.
Page E.23, Entries in the PATIENT area
It does not matter whether your entries contain upper or lower
case letters.
0.0
E.34
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.3
If you know only part of the name or part of the ID of the patient
you are looking for, you can also use an asterisk * as a wildcard.
E.3
A wildcard stands for any number of characters (letters and/or
numbers).
E.3
You can use up to two asterisks * as wildcards in the input
field, before and/or after the known part of the name or ID.
If you leave one or more fields empty, the search is performed
as if you had entered a *.
If you enter first and last names of a patient for the search,
you must separate them by a "*".
Example of a patient
name
E.3
If you enter Mill*, the names Miller and Mill, but not Hamilton will be found.
E.3
Example of a patient ID
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.35
Patient Registration
Starting a search
E.3
You can start the search once you have entered the patients
name and/or the patient ID.
E.3
E.3
Click on Search.
The Search button will turn into the Abort button.
E.3
The databases of your system are now searched for the patient
with the name and/or ID entered.
E.3
In Registration Configuration you can define which databases (e.g. local database, archive) are to be searched.
Page E.45, Configuring the patient search
Cancelling a search
E.3
You can cancel a search at any time, for example, if you have
made a mistake entering the name.
E.3
E.3
Click on Abort.
The search is canceled and you return to the Patient Registration window. No data will be transferred. The Abort button will
turn into the Search button.
E.3
0.0
E.36
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Search list
E.3
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.37
Patient Registration
E.3
E.3
If only one patient has been found at the end of the search, his
or her personal data are automatically placed in the Patient
Registration window.
E.3
For a preregistered patient, all data previously entered are
transferred to the Patient Registration window.
E.3
E.3
If more than one patient is found, select the patient you require
from the search list and transfer that patients data.
E.3
Select the patient in the search list and click on OK.
Or
E.3
E.3
0.0
E.38
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
NOTE
If the patient found was examined using the previous
Numaris software, not all the registration information will be
displayed in the Patient Registration window
(e.g. Request ID, Referring Physician, 1.Performing
Physician).
E.3
E.3
If the hit list does not contain the required patient or if no patient
has been found, you may have incorrectly entered the name or
patient number, or the data of the patient may be stored in a
database that you have not searched.
E.3
Click on Cancel if the patient you require is not displayed in
the hit list.
The Patient Search window will close and you will return to the
Patient Registration window again.
E.3
Repeat your search with changed entries and/or extend the
search to further databases.
In Registration Configuration you can define which databases to include in the search.
Page E.45, Configuring the patient search
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.39
Patient Registration
E.3
You can also use the Patient Browser to search for a patient in
the scheduler, local database, and archive. The patients data
can then be transferred to the Patient Registration window.
You can simplify your search by filtering and sorting the patient
data.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
Page D.246, Calling up additional information about a
patient
E.3
First select the database from which you want to transfer the
patient data.
Search and select the required patient in the navigation area
or in the content area of the Patient Browser.
Or
E.3
Select the study or studies of the patient that you want to perform or repeat.
Or
E.3
0.0
E.310
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Transferring data to
registration
E.3
E.3
E.3
E.3
Registering a patient
directly
E.3
You can also register a preregistered patient for the examination directly if all the data required for the examination have
been entered.
E.3
Double-click on the procedure or the procedure step in the
scheduler.
You can select procedure steps of different procedures by
pressing the Ctrl or the Shift button.
The data are directly transferred to the examination card.
E.3
Once all the data required for registration have been entered,
and depending on the configuration, the window Registration
Confirmation appears in which you must confirm entries such
as patient name or date of birth, etc.
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.311
Patient Registration
0.0
E.312
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.3
After you have transferred the patient data you searched for into
the Patient Registration window, check that it is correct and if
necessary add the missing data before registering the patient.
Page E.211, Entering admission data
Page E.212, Entering examination data
Page E.217, Entering institution data
E.3
E.3
E.3
E.3
Or
Preregister
E.3
E.3
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.313
E.3
Patient Registration
If you have transferred the patient from the local database and
made corrections to that patients personal data in the Patient
Registration window, this message box appears.
E.3
0.0
E.314
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.315
Patient Registration
E.3
The patient worklist query allows you to search the whole HIS/
RIS system for patient data. The search is performed according
to the following entries:
E.3
As empty fields are treated like "wildcards", you should complete at least one of the fields so that the search result is better manageable.
You will find information about "wildcards" for a patient search
on
Page E.35, Wildcards for patient name and ID
You cannot use a patient ID entered automatically as a
search term.
0.0
E.316
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
Starting a search
E.3
E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.317
Patient Registration
E.3
E.3
E.3
You can cancel a search at any time, e.g. if you have made a
mistake entering the name.
E.3
In that case, click on Cancel.
The search is canceled without any data being transferred.
E.3
0.0
E.318
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.3
The patient data found in the HIS/RIS system are listed in the
window Results of the Patient Based Worklist Query. The
search list is also displayed if only one patient has been found.E.3
All the data found for a particular patient is automatically preregistered in the Scheduler for the intended modality.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.319
Patient Registration
E.3
E.3
E.3
If you have not found the patient you are looking for, correct your
entries, if necessary, and start the search again.
E.3
0.0
E.320
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
E.4
Configuring Patient
Registration
E.4
E.4
The card HIS/RIS is only displayed if your system is connected to the HIS/RIS system and configured and licensed
accordingly.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.41
Patient Registration
E.4
You create selection lists in the Entering Data tab card. You
can access these entries during patient registration. In this way,
you save time during data entry and avoid typing errors.
E.4
Click the Entering Data tab card into the foreground.
0.0
E.42
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.4
You can change and add to the selection lists for the following
input fields if these fields are shown on the Patient Registration window:
E.4
Referring physician
Admitting diagnosis
Name of the institution
Name of the performing physician
Name of the operator
Creating entries
E.4
E.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.43
Patient Registration
Default entries
E.4
For each selection list you can define whether and which
entries are preselected in an input field when you call up patient
registration.
E.4
Choose one of these three options:
No default
When you call up the patient registration the input field is
empty.
Use first entry as default
When you call up the patient registration the first entry from
the selection list is already in the input field.
Keep selection from previous (pre-)registration as
default
When you call up the patient registration the entry you
selected for the last patient you (pre-) registered is already in
the input field.
0.0
E.44
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.4
The Searching tab card lets you define which databases are to
be searched during a patient search, after how many hits the
search is terminated, and what information the search list is to
contain.
E.4
Click the Searching tab card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.45
Patient Registration
Databases
E.4
Scheduler
(contains all preregistered patients)
Local database
(contains all patients who have been examined in the past
and whose data have not yet been archived)
Local archive
(contains all patients stored on the data media currently
inserted)
0.0
E.46
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.47
Patient Registration
E.4
Here you can select which data of the patients found will be
listed in the Patient Search window and how the data should
be displayed.
You can have the following information displayed:
E.4
Personal data
You can have some or all of the information entered in the
PATIENT area displayed in the search list.
Admission data
Information about the referring physician and ward from area
HOSPITAL.
Information about hospital/practice
The name of the hospital/practice that you have entered in
area INSTITUTION.
Location
The network node where the data of the patient displayed in
the search list are stored.
Enter in which column of the search list you want to have this
information displayed.
0.0
E.48
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.49
Patient Registration
E.4
0.0
E.410
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.4
You can regularly update the scheduler with new patient data by
calling up the menu entry View > Update Worklist or by double-clicking on the Scheduler symbol.
E.4
Search area
E.4
E.4
E.4
Automatic update
E.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.411
Time range
E.4
Patient Registration
If you query the HIS/RIS system manually you can limit the
extent of the worklist to a defined time range.
Page E.33, Defining the worklist time range
E.4
0.0
E.412
Operator Manual
Patient Registration
E.4
You can additionally update the scheduler with new patient data
by a patient based query in the Patient Registration window.E.4
Search area
E.4
E.4
Besides patient data intended for your workstation you can also
call up data that are intended for other workstations of the same
modality in the HIS/RIS system.
E.4
Click on the option field Whole RIS to query all the data of
the RIS system.
Or
E.4
Click on the option field Local site to query all the data
intended for your workstation.
Or
E.4
Time range
E.4
You can limit the extent of the worklist to a defined time range.E.4
Click on the control box to narrow down the worklist, for
example, to the patient entries for the current day only.
E.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
E.413
Patient Registration
0.0
E.414
Operator Manual
PART
Examination
F.0
syngo MR 2006T
F1
Contents
Examination
0.0
F2
Operator Manual
Examination
Contents
syngo MR 2006T
F3
Contents
Examination
0.0
F4
Operator Manual
Examination
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F5
Contents
Examination
F6
Operator Manual
Examination
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F7
Contents
Examination
F8
Operator Manual
Examination
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F9
Contents
Examination
F10
Operator Manual
Examination
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F11
Contents
Examination
F12
Operator Manual
Examination
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F13
Contents
Examination
0.0
F14
Operator Manual
Introduction to the
MR Examination
CHAPTER
F.1
F.1
After you register a patient, you'll make the necessary preparations in the examination room.
F.1
Preparations in the
examination room
F.1
Position the patient in the orientation entered during patient registration. Observe the information regarding patient safety provided in the System Manual. Position the coil(s) and connect
the coil cables to the connectors on the patient table. Mark the
center of the region to be examined with the laser light localizer
and move the patient into the magnet isocenter.
see System Manual
F.1
F.1
Next, start scanning from the console in the control room. For
this purpose, use the Exam task card. This card enables you to
select, control, and monitor examination procedures.
F.1
You are able to observe the patient through the window in the
control room during the examination. Use the intercom system
on the intercom console to listen or give instructions to the
patient.
F.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.11
Examination
F.1
(2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
0.0
F.12
Operator Manual
Examination
F.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.13
Examination
F.1
F.1
Scanning reference images is the first program step, and usually starts automatically. The acquired reference images are
displayed in the image area.
F.1
Preparing a protocol
(Chapter F.4, F.5)
As the next step you prepare the next protocol in the program
control. You graphically position the slices or slabs to be
acquired on the reference images. Use the parameter cards to
check or change the measurement parameters of the protocol.
F.1
F.1
During the scan you may prepare the next protocol, e.g., by
positioning the slices and adjusting the measurement parameters. Alternatively, you may view the images acquired by the
previous protocol.
F.1
0.0
F.14
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.15
Important terms
Examination
F.1
It is very important to be familiar with the following terms associated with the examination procedure.
F.1
Sequence
F.1
Scan protocol
F.1
Scan pause
F.1
Scan pauses (Pauses) are planned interruptions in an examination procedure, e.g. for contrast agent administration.
F.1
Program instructions
F.1
Scan protocols and scan pauses are known collectively as Program instructions.
F.1
0.0
F.16
Operator Manual
Examination
Scan program
F.1
A Scan program (Program) contains a list of program instructions suitable for clarifying diagnostic problems in a specific
region of the body.
F.1
For greater clarity, the numerous scan programs are assigned
to specific examinations and regions.
F.1
Examination
F.1
Examination region
F.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.17
Examination
0.0
F.18
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.2
F.2
After the preparations in the examination room, check the information you entered for the examination and region during
patient registration.
F.2
Select the scan program required for your examination and load
it into the program control.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.21
Examination
F.2
When you select the Exam task card, the Programs parameter
card is in the foreground. The region and examination selected
during patient registration are entered here.
F.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Region
Available examinations for the selected region
Selected scan program
List of all available scan programs for the selected examination
(5) Program instructions for the selected scan program
(6) Sum of scan times of the individual protocols in the
selected scan program
0.0
F.22
Operator Manual
Examination
F.2
Select a different examination region from the Region selection list, if required.
The Region properties dialog box allows you to view the
properties of the selected region (e.g. the short description or
assignment to a body region). Select Properties from the
context menu.
Changing the
examination
F.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.23
Examination
F.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.0
F.24
Operator Manual
Examination
F.2
The Tree object properties dialog box provides further information about the selected scan program (short description,
time of last change, etc.). Select Properties from the context
menu.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.25
Examination
F.2
Switch to the Exam Explorer if you are unable to find a particular examination or scan program on the Programs parameter
card. All examinations and scan programs are clearly listed
there, and you can also access the Siemens tree, if necessary.
Page F.161, Managing scan programs
F.2
Select Explorer from the context menu.
The Exam Explorer dialog box is displayed. You may now
search for the appropriate scan program in the Exam Explorer
and then transfer it to the program control.
Page F.1612, Finding a scan program
Page F.1666, Transferring a scan program to the program
control
F.2
You may close the Exam Explorer when you are finished using
it.
F.2
To do this, select Object > Close in the Exam Explorer.
F.2
N OT E
Make sure that no program instruction is selected on the
Programs parameter card. Otherwise the context menu will
not contain the Explorer item.
F.2
0.0
F.26
Operator Manual
Examination
F.2
F.2
F.2
F.2
F.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.27
Examination
Or
F.2
Click the required program and drag & drop it in the program
control.
0.0
F.28
Operator Manual
Examination
The program control displays a sequence of program instructions with their expected scan time and the processing status of
the protocols.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.29
Examination
F.2
F.2
F.2
F.2
0.0
F.210
Operator Manual
Examination
Viewing protocol
parameters
F.2
If you are not sure which scan protocol to transfer, you may view
the measurement parameter settings first.
F.2
Select a protocol from the Programs parameter card.
Select Edit > View Protocol from the main menu.
Or
F.2
F.2
F.2
In the Protocol view, you may view (but not change) the measurement parameters of the protocol on the parameter cards.
Protocol or pause
properties
F.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.211
Examination
F.2
Select additional program instructions or another scan program from the Programs parameter card (or in the Exam
Explorer, see Page F.26).
Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.
Or
F.2
F.2
F.2
0.0
F.212
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.3
F.3
N OT E
To perform the examination, you need to have full access
rights.
F.3
Please refer to the information in
Part B, Security Package
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.31
Examination
F.3
The localizer starts automatically as the first program instruction after you load a scan program into the program control. F.3
While scanning is in progress, the localizer protocol has a white
background in the program control.
F.3
Or
0.0
F.32
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.33
Examination
F.3
Requirements
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.34
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
You can use either the program control or the Patient Browser
to load images and series into the image area of the Exam task
card.
F.3
F.3
You can also load images or series from the program control,
even though the underlying protocol has not been fully processed at this point in time.
Page F.67, Symbols of series in program instructions
Select a protocol in the program control that has been processed either in part or in full.
Select Queue > Load Series from the main menu.
Or
F.3
F.3
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.35
Examination
(1)
(2)
0.0
F.36
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
You can use the Patient Browser to load images for graphic
slice positioning. Images already loaded into the image area will
be ignored during this process.
F.3
Open the Patient Browser.
Select the images or series in the Patient Browser.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
Drag & drop the images or series into one of the image segments.
Or (if only one image or series has been selected)
F.3
F.3
Each time you load series or images with a different table position, the currently loaded images are cleared from the image
area.
Page F.338, Table position and reference images
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.37
Examination
F.3
Three-segment layout
F.3
Select a three-segment layout if you want to display three reference images side by side.
F.3
Select View > 3 Segments from the main menu.
Two-segment layout
F.3
e.g. Tra
e.g. Sag
0.0
F.38
Operator Manual
Examination
Maestro layout
(optional)
F.3
Select the Maestro layout for improved management and evaluation of cardiac series. The acquired series are displayed in
stamp segments below the three image segments.
Page F.172, Maestro layout
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.39
Distributing images
across segments
Examination
F.3
If the image area is empty, the loaded images will be distributed across the image area so that every segment displays
at least one image.
If only one series has been loaded into the empty image
area, the images of this series will be distributed across the
available segments (2 or 3).
If multiple series have been loaded, one image representing
a series will be displayed in each segment.
If all the image segments are filled, the remaining series will
be loaded in the background. You can bring these series to
foreground by scrolling with Series-/Series+.
Page F.318, Scrolling within image segments
Representative image
F.3
The image in the center of the anatomy is used as the representative image for a series with different slice positions.
F.3
If all images in a series use the same slice position, the first
image of the current sequence is used as the representative
image.
Page F.313, Defining the scroll order
F.3
0.0
F.310
Operator Manual
Examination
Example 1
F.3
All three image segments are empty. A localizer with one sagittal, two coronal, and three transverse overview images has just
been completed.
F.3
The images are distributed across the image segments as follows:
F.3
The series is duplicated twice and displayed in all three segments. The left segment shows the sagittal image, the center
segment shows the first coronal image, and the right segment
shows the first transverse image.
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.311
Example 2
F.3
Examination
All three image segments are empty. Two series of the current
series block are dragged & dropped from the Patient Browser
to the center segment.
F.3
The images are distributed across the image segments as follows:
F.3
The first series is loaded into the target segment (center segment), the second series is loaded into the right segment. The
second series is duplicated and displayed in the left segment.
The system automatically searches for another suitable image
in the second series to be used as the representative image for
the first segment.
F.3
0.0
F.312
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.313
Sort criteria
F.3
Examination
F.3
F.3
Abbreviation
Example
MO
SP
TT
TA
TE
TD
BV
NR
--
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.314
Operator Manual
Examination
Select the sort criterion for the first sort level from the Image
sorted by selection list.
Select the sort criterion for the second sort level from the
then by selection list.
Select the sort criterion for the third sort level from the then
by selection list.
The sort criterion of the second level is used if the sort criterion
values of the first level are identical.
F.3
The sort criterion of the third level is used if the sort criterion values of the first and second levels are identical.
F.3
Select a different sort criterion for each sorting level. Exception: If you select the Load Order criterion for the first level,
the then by fields will be grayed out. You cannot define additional sort criteria.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.315
Examination
You can cancel the definition of the sort scheme and close the
dialog box.
F.3
Click Cancel.
The previous setting is still applied to the order of the images
within the series.
F.3
You can apply the new sort scheme and close the dialog box.F.3
Click OK.
F.3
You may select from five different Siemens sort schemes for the
order of images within a series.
F.3
F.3
Name
Sort scheme
Application
Anatomical
SPTTTANR
Triggered
MOTTTDSP
Chronological
MOTASPNR
as Numbered
NRSP
as Loaded
0.0
F.316
Operator Manual
Examination
Select a sort scheme from the menu under Scroll > Display
Order > .......
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.317
Examination
F.3
After loading images into the image area, you can scroll the
images within an image segment. This helps you select the
images most suitable for slice positioning.
F.3
F.3
Input focus
0.0
F.318
Operator Manual
Examination
Keyboard focus
F.3
Scrolling between
images
F.3
F.3
F.3
When you reach the last image of the series, Image+ scrolls
to the first image of the series. Image- scrolls to the first
image to the last image of the series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.319
Parallel scrolling
F.3
Examination
0.0
F.320
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.321
Examination
F.3
F.3
F.3
Explicit selection
F.3
F.3
F.3
Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking multiple images.
0.0
F.322
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the first image
within the range. Press and hold the Shift key as well. Click
the last image within the range.
You can select multiple series explicitly.
F.3
Implicit selection
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.323
Examination
F.3
F.3
Center +
Width(contrast)
Width+
Center (brightness)
Release the mouse button once the window values are set to
your requirements.
0.0
F.324
Operator Manual
Examination
Or
F.3
These symbol keys are mainly for fine adjustment. You may
use the mouse for fast windowing.
F.3
F.3
Auto windowing
F.3
F.3
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.325
Examination
F.3
You may want to reduce images for a better overview. You may
want to enlarge images for a better view of details. After enlarging images, it is often helpful to pan them to move the relevant
structure into the center of the screen.
F.3
F.3
You can enlarge, reduce or pan images using the mouse. This
requires you to switch the functionality of the left mouse button
from "Select" to "Enlarge/Reduce/Pan".
F.3
F.3
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.326
Operator Manual
Examination
To enlarge the image, press and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer upward.
To reduce the image, press and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer downward.
Panning with the mouse
F.3
Next, you can use to the mouse to pan the enlarged or reduced
image section in the image segment.
F.3
Position the mouse pointer in the inner area of the image.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.3
To pan the image contents, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the mouse upward, downward, to the right,
or to the left.
Zooming
Moving
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.327
Applying zooming/panning
to the series
F.3
Examination
You can change the menu settings so that the changes to the
visible image section are automatically applied to all images in
the series.
F.3
Activate the Zoom/Pan On Series option under Image
Tools.
This setting remains active even after the system is rebooted.
F.3
F.3
F.3
Segment size
0.0
F.328
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
Use the Fit to Segment Height function to fit the height of the
reference image precisely to the height of the segment.
F.3
Select an image.
Select Image Tools > Fit to Segment Height.
Fit to
segment height
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.329
Examination
F.3
You can flip images in the image segments horizontally and vertically and rotate them clockwise by 90.
F.3
These functions are mainly used for improved viewing of breast
biopsy images.
Page F.181, Breast Biopsy
F.3
Flipping images
horizontally and
vertically
Horizontal flipping swaps the top and bottom of the image. The
axis of rotation is horizontal.
F.3
F.3
Vertical flipping swaps the left and right side of the image. The
axis of rotation is vertical.
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.330
Operator Manual
Examination
Flipping horizontally
Flipping vertically
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.331
Rotating images
about 90
Examination
F.3
Rotating about 90
degrees
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.332
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.333
Examination
F.3
You can display the position of the mouse pointer within the
image as coordinates in the patient coordinate system.
F.3
Select Image Tools > Modify Graphics.
The functionality of the mouse is switched from Zoom/Pan to
F.3
Modify Graphics.
Position the mouse pointer on the region of interest in the
image.
Press and hold the left mouse button.
The coordinates in the patient coordinate system are displayed
without sign.
F.3
The coordinates of the table position are shown in the second
line if the image was not acquired using the original table position of the series block, but after a relative table movement. F.3
Press and hold the left mouse button while moving the
mouse pointer.
The new coordinates for the image position are displayed.
F.3
0.0
F.334
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
In Modify Graphics mode, you can measure the relative distance between two image positions.
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.335
Measuring angles
F.3
Examination
0.0
F.336
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
You can clear the images from all segments if you no longer
need the reference images loaded in the image area.
F.3
F.3
F.3
You can view and evaluate the measured images in the image
segments.
F.3
You can repeat the complete scan of a protocol if, for example,
the result images for a breath-hold scan are of poor quality. F.3
Select the poor quality image.
Select Append To Queue from the context menu.
Or
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.337
Examination
F.3
0.0
F.338
Operator Manual
Examination
Series block
F.3
F.3
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.339
Examination
F.3
F.3
Localizer measurement
F.3
F.3
Open the next protocol and plan the slices to be scanned on the
reference images.
F.3
This protocol will be scanned at the same table position as the
reference images.
F.3
F.3
Protocols are scanned at the current table position if no reference images are displayed or you have cleared the reference
images from the image area at the time of scan preparation. F.3
This usually corresponds to the position of the light localizer
marking (original table position). In this case, the protocol does
not have a defined table position. The localizer is a typical protocol using an undefined table position.
F.3
0.0
F.340
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
You can set the offset of the patient table using the table position of the reference images or the Position of the scan reg.
protocol parameter on the System Common parameter card.
F.3
NOTE
The table position of the reference images overwrites the
table position parameters of the open protocol.
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.341
Examination
The image area is empty, e.g., because you have cleared the
reference images from the segments. A protocol is opened. F.3
Enter a patient table offset on the System Miscellaneous
parameter card.
Page P.181, Position of the scan region
The protocol now has a defined table position. As soon as you
start running a protocol, the patient table will move to the new
position.
F.3
F.3
N OT E
If protocols have been scanned at various table positions
within a series block, only one automatic adjustment will be
performed for each table position.
F.3
The adjustment results are stored and reused if additional
scans are performed at the known table position.
F.3
0.0
F.342
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
After transferring the scan program from the Program parameter card to the program control, the first localizer is scanned
automatically at the original table position.
F.3
Once the first localizer is completed, the corresponding reference images are displayed in the image area. The patient table
will automatically move to the preset table position of the second localizer.
F.3
The second localizer starts automatically at this position. After
scanning, the series icon will indicate that reference images
have been reconstructed for this localizer as well.
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.343
Examination
F.3
The images of the first localizer are still displayed in the image
area.
F.3
Position the slices for the first angio protocol on these localizer images.
Start scanning the first angio protocol.
The patient table will move back to the position of the first localizer (original table position). The first angio protocol will be
scanned at this position.
F.3
Load the reference images of the second localizer into the
image area while the first angio protocol is running.
0.0
F.344
Operator Manual
Examination
Open the second angio protocol and plan this protocol on the
images of the second localizer.
Start the second angio protocol.
The patient table will move to the second table position. The
second angio protocol will be scanned at the second table position.
F.3
Scanning will finish after all images have been reconstructed.F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.345
Examination
F.3
F.3
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are irretrievably
lost.
F.3
Always check for unsaved data and save any data you want
to keep before logging off.
F.3
0.0
F.346
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.347
Examination
F.3
The Exam task card allows you to group a number of series and
save them in one new series. These series must be part of the
same series block and acquired at the same table position.
F.3
F.3
A name for the new series is suggested. You can modify the
suggested name.
F.3
Select the Save images in new series option.
Modify the new series name if necessary.
Click OK.
0.0
F.348
Operator Manual
Examination
Appending images to
an existing series
F.3
In the list, select the series to which the GSP images should
be appended.
Click OK.
The new images of the series have image numbers 5000 and
up. This usually allows you to distinguish between old and
new images within the series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.349
Appending an image
to a reference series
F.3
Examination
You can append the GSP image with the input focus to the existing reference series in one step.
F.3
Make sure the input focus is on the correct segment.
Select Patient > Copy Selection.
The selected GSP image will be appended to the existing reference series.
F.3
0.0
F.350
Operator Manual
Examination
F.3
You can directly transfer images and series from the Exam task
card to another opened task card for postprocessing.
F.3
This helps you save time, for example, when loading images
into a postprocessing application.
F.3
Make sure that the tab of the respective task card is visible.
Explicitly select the images or series on the Exam task card.
Drag & drop your selection onto the tab.
The selected images will be transferred to the task card. The
Exam task card will remain in the foreground.
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.351
Examination
F.3
F.3
Copying images to
the film sheet
F.3
You can copy images directly from the Exam task card to the
virtual film sheet when editing or evaluation has been completed.
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.352
Operator Manual
Examination
Sending images
F.3
F.3
Exporting images
F.3
F.3
F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.353
F.3
Examination
Select Transfer > Organize Local Jobs or Transfer > Organize Network Jobs.
Or
F.3
F.3
F.3
0.0
F.354
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.4
Positioning Slices
F.4
After you have scanned and loaded reference images and optimized their display according to your diagnostic question, you
are able to use them for defining the position, scope, and orientation of the region to be examined.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.4
Depending on the protocol, the system will scan slices or slabs
for subsequent reconstruction.
F.4
You can plan saturation regions to avoid motion artifacts.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.41
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
Opening a protocol
F.4
F.4
completed scan
current scan
opened protocol
0.0
F.42
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Scan time
PAT Acceleration factor
Voxel size (rounded up to the next 1/10 mm)
Relative signal-to-noise ratio
Sequence type
If you keep the mouse pointer near the voxel size display, a
tool tip will be displayed stating the exact voxel size.
The graphic objects of the protocol (slices, slabs, navigators,
and saturation regions) are displayed in the reference images
in the image area.
F.4
Canceling slice
positioning
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.43
Positioning Slices
Position toolbar
Examination
F.4
F.4
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.44
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
Graphic objects
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.45
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
In 2D scanning, you use slice groups to define the extent, position, and orientation of the examination area to be scanned.
Slice groups are composed of individual slices used for subsequent reconstruction of one or more tomographic images.
F.4
Slices always belong to a slice group. During graphic slice positioning you have to select an entire slice group. You are not able
to select individual slices. The only exception is a slice group
that consists of one slice only.
F.4
All slices of a group are located in parallel, have the same slice
thickness, slice distance and field of view (FoV) as well as the
same phase-oversampling factor (for reducing artifacts).
F.4
Slice thickness
Slice distance
Phase FOV
Read FOV
0.0
F.46
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
Factor > 0
Factor 0
Factor < 0
Factor -1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.47
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
Slab thickness
Read FOV
Phase FOV
0.0
F.48
Operator Manual
Examination
Slab groups
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
F.4
> 0%
There is a distance between the slabs of a group.
0%
The slabs of the group are contiguous (without any distance
between them).
< 0%
The slabs of the group overlap.
Similar to a slice group, a 3D slab group may only be positioned
as a unit.
F.4
Page F.473, Increasing the distance between slices/slabs
Page F.472
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.49
Positioning Slices
Examination
Saturation regions
F.4
A saturation region (sat for short) is a volume where the MR signal is suppressed by an RF saturation pulse.
F.4
Standard saturation
regions
F.4
0.0
F.410
Operator Manual
Examination
Parallel saturation
regions
Positioning Slices
F.4
Parallel saturation regions may be positioned in pairs or individually (positive or negative sat). They are associated with and
parallel to a slice or slab group. The distance from the saturation region to the outermost slice is set via a protocol parameter.
Page P.119
F.4
If you translate, rotate, or change the particular slice or slab
group, the two saturation regions are adjusted accordingly. F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.411
Positioning Slices
Examination
Sagittal preferred
Parallel R (right)
Parallel L (left)
Coronal preferred
Parallel A (anterior)
Parallel P (posterior)
Parallel F (feet)
Parallel H (head)
Transverse preferred
0.0
F.412
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
You are able to plan tracking sat regions only for certain protocols. These protocols use sequences for sequential multi-slice
scans and scan one slice group or slab group only.
F.4
A tracking sat region is associated with and parallel to the slices
of a slice or slab group. It may be positioned on either side of
the slice or slab group.
F.4
The tracking sat region passes through the slice/slab group in
either the ascending or descending direction. To avoid shifting
the slice into a region that is already saturated, the sequential
direction is always away from the sat band. For example, for
transverse slices with the sat band above the slice, the excitation order (series) must be descending. Remember that DICOM
defines 'ascending' as moving from foot to head. The name of
the sat depends on the preferred direction of the slice/3D slab
group. Suitable sats may be selected from the list on the Geometry parameter task card.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator
F.4
F.4
Order of RF excitation
Sat name
Sagittal preferred
Ascending
Tracking R -> L
Sagittal preferred
Descending
Tracking L -> R
Coronal preferred
Ascending
Tracking A -> P
Coronal preferred
Descending
Tracking P -> A
Transverse preferred
Ascending
Tracking F -> H
Transverse preferred
Descending
Tracking H -> F
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.413
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.414
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
Navigator Objects
F.4
F.4
Navigator cuboid
finite cuboid volume
Navigator pen
infinitely long "pen"
Parameter of navigator
objects
F.4
Navigator pen
Navigator cuboid
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.415
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.416
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
Intersecting or
projection areas
Example:
Sagittal slices in a transverse image.
F.4
When graphic objects intersect the reference images at a shallow angle (30),they are projected onto the reference image.
In this case, a projection area is displayed instead of intersecting lines.
F.4
In a graphic object located parallel to the reference image, the
projection area corresponds exactly to the dimensions of the
field of view (FoV).
F.4
Example:
Sagittal slices in a sagittal image.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.417
Positioning Slices
Examination
Upon request, Siemens Service will modify the default for the
limit angle (30). For CSI slices, the default for the limit angle
is 45.
If several graphic objects intersect the image at a shallow angle
and one of these objects is selected, only the projection area of
the selected object is displayed.
F.4
0.0
F.418
Operator Manual
Examination
Angle of intersection
Reference
image
Perpendicular intersection
Positioning Slices
F.4
Reference
image
Single-oblique intersection
Reference
image
Double-oblique intersection
F.4
NOTE
Intersections shown as a continuous or dashed line provide
information only about the position of the intersection
with respect to the reference image.
F.4
The display does not provide information regarding the
position of the planned slice or slab to standard
anatomical views, since oblique or double-oblique
intersections may be used as reference images as well. F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.419
Positioning Slices
Single-oblique
intersection
Examination
F.4
0.0
F.420
Operator Manual
Examination
Double-oblique
intersections
Positioning Slices
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.421
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
Box mode
Package mode
0.0
F.422
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.423
Positioning Slices
Display in line or
box mode
Examination
F.4
Box mode
Line mode
0.0
F.424
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
The box mode shows the actual intersection surface and therefore the anatomical region covered by the slice.
F.4
In line mode you are able to see the center line of an intersection area.
F.4
F.4
Select View > Display > Line mode ON /Off from the menu.
Line mode is activated.
F.4
Select View > Graphics > Line mode ON / OFF again from
the menu.
The Box mode is activated.
F.4
Display in
Package mode
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.425
Positioning Slices
Examination
Box mode
Package mode
0.0
F.426
Operator Manual
Examination
Display of saturation
regions
Positioning Slices
F.4
Saturation regions that intersect the reference image are displayed as cross-hatched bars.
F.4
Saturation regions that are perpendicular to the reference
image have a continuous border. Oblique saturation regions
have a dashed line border.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.427
Positioning Slices
Display of navigator
objects
Examination
F.4
0.0
F.428
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.429
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
0.0
F.430
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.431
Positioning Slices
Examination
Display of phase
oversampling
F.4
Phase oversampling is recommended to prevent aliasing artifacts. The field of view (FoV) is symmetrically expanded in the
phase-encoding direction on both sides of the initial FoV.
F.4
This addition to the FoV is not visible in the final images The
phase-oversampled area is displayed as dashed lines in the reference image.
F.4
Box mode
15%
100%
Phase-encoding direction
Package mode
15%
15%
100%
15%
Phase-encoding direction
0.0
F.432
Operator Manual
Examination
Display of slice
oversampling
Positioning Slices
F.4
Slice oversampling is suitable for 3D scans only. Slice oversampling defines an area of a slice protruding on both sides (of a 3D
slab). This additional area is excited during the scan.
F.4
25 %
100 %
25 %
Phase-encoding direction
Phase-encoding direction
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.433
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
The position lines of the reference image make it easier for you
to orient the images in space and plan the slices correctly for
subsequent scans.
F.4
F.4
Coil elements
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.434
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
You can select and deselect coil elements both via the mouse
in the image segment or on the System parameter card.
Page F.535, Parameter card System-Coils
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.435
Positioning Slices
Projection display
Examination
F.4
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.436
Operator Manual
Examination
Adjustment volume
Positioning Slices
F.4
In some cases it may be useful to display the adjustment volume in the reference images.
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.437
Positioning Slices
Shadow lines
Examination
F.4
F.4
Shadow On/Off
0.0
F.438
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
Explicit selection
Implicit selection
("Implicit selection by direct manipulation")
Explicit selection
F.4
F.4
Select an object from the Slice Group, Slab Group, or Navigator list on the Geometry or Routine parameter card.
The graphic object is now highlighted. The handles are displayed.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.439
Positioning Slices
Examination
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(1)
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.440
Operator Manual
Examination
Implicit selection
Positioning Slices
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.441
Positioning Slices
Examination
Moving objects
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.442
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.443
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.444
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
You can move slice groups by half the distance between slices
in the positive or negative slice-selection direction.
F.4
This greatly simplifies the task of positioning a second scan to
fill the gaps between the slices of the first scan. This is particularly helpful when the number of slices in one scan does not suffice to provide for a contiguous anatomic coverage of a specific
volume (e.g., some breath-hold exams).
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.445
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
Unlike with the Gap filling function, you are able to move a slice
group by the thickness of the entire group in one step. This function is especially suitable for multiple breath-hold scans.
F.4
F.4
Stack+
0.0
F.446
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
You are able to move the centers of slice/slab groups and navigator objects precisely into the reference plane (image plane of
the reference image).
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.447
Positioning Slices
Examination
Shift to Image
0.0
F.448
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
Rotating objects
F.4
Rotating using
the mouse
F.4
Click on the selected object with the left mouse button and
rotate it about its center.
The rotational axis is now perpendicular to the reference image.F.4
Rotating
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.449
Positioning Slices
Examination
Or
F.4
Rotating a navigator
cuboid
F.4
F.4
Press the left mouse button and drag it in the desired direction of rotation.
Rotating a regular
saturation region and
navigator pen
Regular saturation regions and navigator pens are rotated similar to slice and slab groups.
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.450
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
You can rotate slice and 3D block groups in the plane. These
objects must be projection areas (flat section with reference
image).
F.4
Press the Ctrl key and move the cursor over the object.
The pointer changes shape when placed over the delimitation
lines.
F.4
Hold the left mouse button down, press the Ctrl key, and
rotate the object about its center.
The rotational axis runs through the center of the graphic object
and is perpendicular to the object.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.451
Positioning Slices
Rotation of oblique
intersections
Examination
F.4
When you rotate slices the center of which is not in the plane of
rotation (intersections inclined in one or two axes), the center of
the slice moves as you rotate the slice.
F.4
If the object has a rectangular FOV, you may find that the intersection lines in the result display are noticeably longer or
shorter than originally, because of the realigned phase-encoding direction of the FoV.
F.4
Example:
A mostly transverse slice group becomes a mostly coronal slice
group.
F.4
Rotating
0.0
F.452
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
Swapping phases
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.453
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
When you tilt a slice group by 90, the intersection line appears
rotated counterclockwise by 90.
F.4
F.4
Tilting a group
0.0
F.454
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
F.4
Aligning perpendicularly
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.455
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.456
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
Orthogonal
The Perpendicular function is used to align objects to the reference image plane. The Orthogonal function is used to
align the selected slice to the reference slice.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.457
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
If the slice or slab groups shown in the reference images are not
suitable to your diagnostic question, other groups may be
added.
F.4
The number of slice or slab groups that you can add depends
on the protocol selected.
Page F.571, Soft limits and extended limits
F.4
The order in which new slices or slabs are drawn and edited
does not affect the order of scanning or numbering reconstructed images.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.458
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.459
Positioning Slices
Freely positioning
slice groups
Examination
F.4
Use the mouse to move new slice or slab groups into any position in the reference image.
F.4
Hold the mouse button down and rotate/move the new slice or
slab group with the mouse. direction. Click the image again to
create the next slice/3D slab group.
F.4
0.0
F.460
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning graphic
objects in the center
of the image segment
Positioning Slices
F.4
You are able to insert new objects in the center of the selected
image segment. The center of the newly created slice or slab
group is positioned precisely in the image plane of the reference
image.
F.4
F.4
You may also position a new slice/slab group along an orientation line. To this end, draw the line into the reference image
using the mouse. The slice/slab group is then positioned along
the line and is located perpendicularly to the reference image.
The center of the new slice/slab group is in the plane of the reference image and positioned exactly between the start and end
point of the orientation line.
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.461
Positioning Slices
Examination
You can change the direction and length of the line, as long as
you hold the mouse button down.
F.4
Release the mouse button.
The new slice/slab group is displayed.
F.4
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.462
Operator Manual
Examination
Adding a slice/slab
group in 3 point mode
Positioning Slices
F.4
This mode allows you to use random reference images to determine 3 points that define a plane. You are now adding a new
slice or slab group. The center slice or slab of this group passes
exactly through this plane. You can also align an existing slice
or slab group to this plane.
F.4
When selecting the 3 points, you may scroll through the reference images or load new ones.
F.4
Ensure that no graphic objects are selected. Select Edit >
Deselect All.
If you want to change an existing slice or slab group, verify
that it is not selected.
Click the Create Slice (Slab) Group (3 point) button to activate this mode.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.463
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
0.0
F.464
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
After you have defined the position of the third point, the new
slice or slab group will appear in the reference images and/or
the previously selected slice will be aligned with the 3 points. F.4
If you have created a new group, it will be selected automatically. You can orient it by specifying 3 points.
You can add additional groups in three-point mode as follows. F.4
Deselect the last group you created.
Click three positions successively in one or more reference
images.
Finally, press the Esc key to deactivate Create Slice (Slab)
Group (3 points) mode.
Or
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.465
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
Creating a regular
saturation region in the
center of the image
segment
The new saturation region appears perpendicular to the reference image with a vertical intersection area.
F.4
0.0
F.466
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.467
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
You may also place a regular saturation region along an orientation line. The saturation region is then located perpendicularly
to the reference image.
F.4
Position the mouse pointer at the starting point of the orientation line.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse cursor
in the direction you want to place the saturation region.
Release the mouse button.
The new saturation region is displayed.
F.4
F.4
You can exit Create Sat mode if you do not want to draw additional saturation regions.
F.4
Press the Esc key.
The mouse is now in the Modify Graphics mode.
F.4
Or
F.4
0.0
F.468
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
Use the mouse to change the following slice and slab groups
parameter settings as well as edit standard saturation regions: F.4
Slice thickness or slab thickness
Number of slices or slabs per group
Distance between slices or slabs within a group
Slice oversampling
As an alternative, you may change these parameters numerically on the Geometry card.
F.4
Page F.524, Geometry Common parameter card (2D)
Ensure that the mouse is in the Modify Graphics mode. If
necessary, press the Esc key to ensure that you are in that
mode.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.469
Positioning Slices
Examination
Or
F.4
F.4
Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required direction.
To increase the thickness of the slices/slabs, drag the extent
handle away from the group.
F.4
To reduce the thickness of the slices/slabs, drag the extent handle toward the group.
F.4
The thickness will be displayed in millimeters on the reference
image as long as you keep the mouse button pressed.
F.4
Release the mouse button once the slices/slabs have the
required thickness.
0.0
F.470
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required direction.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.471
Positioning Slices
Examination
Drag the extent handle (mark) away from the group to increase
the number of slices.
F.4
To decrease the number of slices drag the extent handle (mark)
toward the group.
F.4
The number of slices will be displayed on the reference image
as long as you hold the mouse button down.
F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as you have generated
the required number of slices or slabs.
The maximum possible number of slices is limited by other protocol parameters (for example, by TR). It is not possible to
exceed this limit by dragging the extent handles. The highlighted display indicates when you have reached the limit (thick
line).
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.472
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
Or
F.4
Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required Keep the mouse button
pressed.
Drag the extent handle away from the group to increase the distance between slices.
F.4
To reduce the distance between slices, drag the extent handle
toward the group.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.473
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.474
Operator Manual
Examination
Changing slice
oversampling
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Slice Oversampling.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4
Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required Keep the mouse button
pressed.
To increase the slice oversampling, drag the extent handle
away from the group.
F.4
To reduce the slice oversampling, drag the extent handle toward
the group.
F.4
Slice oversampling is displayed on the reference image as long
as you hold the mouse button down.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.475
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.476
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
Select the slice or slab group whose field of view (FoV) you
want to change.
Drag the FoV handle in the phase-encoding direction.
If you drag the FoV handle in the readout direction, the icon
(shown) will appear next to the mouse pointer.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.477
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
You may continue enlarging the field of view in the phaseencoding direction until you obtain a square field of view.
You can only enlarge the field of view in the readout direction
as a function of the FOV aspect ratio. The ratio between the
length in the phase-encoding and readout direction remains
constant. If you enlarge the field of view in the readout direction, the field of view will be enlarged as well in the phaseencoding direction.
0.0
F.478
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
You may only reduce the field of view in the readout direction
in conjunction with the phase-encoding direction. The FOV is
also proportionally reduced in the phase-encoding direction
to maintain a constant FoV aspect ratio.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.479
Positioning Slices
Changing phase
oversampling via
the mouse
Examination
F.4
F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Phase Oversampling On.
Select the slice or slab group whose phase oversampling
factor you want to change.
Drag the FoV handle in the phase-encoding direction.
The current value of the phase oversampling factor will be displayed on the reference image as long as you keep the mouse
button pressed.
F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as the phase oversampling has been enlarged/reduced as required.
0.0
F.480
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.481
Positioning Slices
Regular saturation
regions changing
Examination
F.4
You are able to move saturation regions, or change their orientation or thickness with the mouse. The procedure is the same
as for processing slice and slab groups.
F.4
Parallel or tracking
saturation regions
changing
F.4
You can change the position and orientation of a parallel/tracking saturation region via the slice/slab group associated with
this slice group. The distance between slice/slab groups
remains constant.
Page F.442, Moving objects
F.4
0.0
F.482
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.483
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
0.0
F.484
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
Deleting selected
objects
Select Edit > Delete from the main menu or Delete from the
context menu.
Or
F.4
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.485
Positioning Slices
Examination
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.486
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.487
Positioning Slices
Examination
Nearest
F.4
F.4
0.0
F.488
Operator Manual
Examination
Positioning Slices
F.4
After you have correctly positioned the graphic objects, you may
release the protocol for scanning.
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.489
Positioning Slices
Examination
0.0
F.490
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.5
Adjusting Measurement
Parameters
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.51
Examination
NOTE
Detailed descriptions of the individual measurement
parameters and notes on settings are provided in the
reference section.
Page P.11
F.5
F.5
NOTE
The parameter cards for spectroscopy scans are included
in the operator manual MR Spectroscopy operating
manual.
F.5
F.5
NOTE
This chapter also describes sequences and functions of
optional applications packages.
F.5
0.0
F.52
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.53
Examination
Selecting a parameter
card for editing
F.5
0.0
F.54
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
Routine parameter
card (2D)
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.55
Routine parameter
card (3D)
Examination
F.5
0.0
F.56
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction,
Page P.148
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.149
TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excitations, Page P.137
TE
Echo time, time between RF pulse and measured echo,
Page P.138
Averages
Number of scans, repetitions to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio, Page P.140
Filter
Filters selected, Page P.168
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given number of scans to avoid cross-talk, Page P.134
Coils
Coil elements
Coils to be used for this protocol,
Page P.185
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.57
F.5
Examination
Slice group
Number of the slice group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slices
Number of slices in this group, Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between the slices of the group as a percentage of
the slice thickness, Page P.15
Slice thickness
Slice thickness (in mm), Page P.16
Position
Position of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18
Phase enc. dir.
Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts, Page P.114
0.0
F.58
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
Slab group
Number of the slab group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slabs
Number of slabs in this slab group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between slabs as a percentage of the slab thickness, Page P.15
Slice thickness
Thickness of the individual slices of the slabs,
Page P.16
Slices per slab
Number of slices per slab,
Page P.17
Position
Position of the slab group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slab group in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.59
Examination
0.0
F.510
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.511
F.5
Examination
TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excitations,
Page P.137
TE
Echo time, time between RF pulse and measured echo
Page F.574, Displaying and editing parameter groups
and Page P.138
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins,
Page P.140
0.0
F.512
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
The actual scan should be preceded by an RF pulse (spin preparation) when you want to change the contrast or suppress certain signals (for example, for an inversion recovery sequence).F.5
Magn. preparation
Magnetization preparation for inversion recovery (IR) and
saturation recovery (SR) sequences,
Page P.141
TI
Inversion time,
Page P.139
Increasing signals
F.5
Averages
Number of scans, repetitions to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio,
Page P.140
Restore Magn.
Signal raising with T2 weighting by acceleration relaxation of
the longitudinal magnetization,
Page P.146
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.513
Suppressing
signals
F.5
Examination
The MR signal comprises the sum of signals from water and fat
protons. This may result in chemical shift artifacts. Motion artifacts may be enhanced, and contrast may degrade.
F.5
Signal suppression may be used to decrease these effects.
F.5
Fat suppression
Suppression of the fat signal,
Page P.143
FatSat mode
Degree of fat suppression,
Page P.144
Water suppression
Suppression of the water signal,
Page P.145
MTC
Presaturation due to magnetization transfer,
Page P.146
For some types of sequences, the Geometry Saturation
parameter card contains the Saturation mode parameter. If
you select the Quick option for this parameter, the options for
fat and water saturation change to Q-fat sat. and Q-water
sat.
0.0
F.514
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
The Contrast card lets you select the image types for reconstruction:
F.5
F.5
Magnitude
images
Phase images
Real images
N OT E
Reconstruction of image types is not possible in every
protocol and every sequence.
F.5
F.5
Reconstruction
Selection of reconstruction mode and image type or types,
Page P.142
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.515
F.5
Examination
TD
Pause (for example, for breath-holding commands)
Page F.574, Displaying and editing parameter groups
and Page P.139
Infinite measurement
The number of scans for realtime sequences is set to the
maximum value,
Page P.177
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178
Delay in TR
Time between consecutive scans for all ep2d sequences,
Page P.179
Multiple series
The images of each measurement are stored as a separate
series,
Page P.180
0.0
F.516
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
The image resolution lets you determine the size and the level
of detail shown by the images calculated from raw data. The
higher the image resolution, the longer the acquisition time. F.5
The Resolution parameter card consists of two subcards:
F.5
Common
All parameters affecting image resolution are located on the
Resolution Common parameter card.
The Resolution Common parameter card differs for 2D and
3D measurements.
iPAT
The parameters for the PAT reconstruction method to
shorten the scan time are located on the Resolution iPAT
(PAT = parallel acquisition technique) parameter card.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.517
Resolution Common
parameter card (2D)
F.5
Resolution Common
parameter card (3D)
F.5
Examination
0.0
F.518
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction,
Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.147
Slice thickness
Slice thickness (in mm),
Page P.16
Base resolution
Number of readout steps,
Page P.150
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151
Phase partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in phase-encoding
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.156
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.519
F.5
Examination
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Slice thickness
Individual slice thickness for all slabs (partitions),
Page P.16
Base resolution
Number of readout steps, Page P.150
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151
Slice resolution
Resolution ratio in slice selection direction,
Page P.154
Phase partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in phase-encoding
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.156
Slice partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in slice selection
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.157
Filter
F.5
Interpolation
F.5
Filter
Selection of filter,
Page P.168
Interpolation
Increasing the image matrix to double the size,
Page P.153
0.0
F.520
Operator Manual
Examination
Resolution iPAT
parameter card
F.5
F.5
iPAT mode
Selection of PAT reconstruction mode,
Page P.158
Accel. factor PE
Acceleration factor in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.160
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.521
Examination
0.0
F.522
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
F.5
Common
This card contains all parameters for positioning and
expanding the slices or slabs to be scanned. This parameter
card differs for 2D and 3D measurements.
Saturation
This card displays the parameters relevant to the inclusion of
regional or fat/water saturation.
Navigator
This card displays the parameters for navigator objects. It is
only used for special navigator sequences.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.523
Geometry Common
parameter card (2D)
F.5
Geometry Common
parameter card (3D)
F.5
Examination
0.0
F.524
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
Slice group
Number of the slice group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slices
Number of slices in this group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between the slices of the group as a percentage of
the slice thickness,
Page P.15
Position
Position of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slice group in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18
Phase enc. dir.
Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.114
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.525
F.5
Examination
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Slice thickness
Thickness of the individual slices (2D) or thickness of the
individual slices of the slabs (3D),
Page P.16
TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excitations,
Page P.137
Multi-slice mode
Sequential (slice by slice) or interleaved (row by row) scanning method,
Page P.131
Series
Excitation sequence of slices,
Page P.133
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given number of scans to avoid cross-talk,
Page P.134
0.0
F.526
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
Slab group
Number of the slab group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slabs
Number of slabs in this slab group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between slabs as a percentage of the slab thickness, Page P.15
Position
Position of the slab group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slab group in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.527
F.5
Examination
0.0
F.528
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
Geometry Saturator
F.5
Saturation mode
F.5
Saturation mode
Saturation pulses before each scan or only as often as necessary.
The Quick saturation mode is available for some sequences.
This mode ensures a shorter scan time and is used both for
fat and water saturation, as well as for single and parallel saturation regions.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.529
Signal suppression
fat/water
F.5
Examination
Saturation regions
F.5
0.0
F.530
Operator Manual
Examination
Special Sat
Selection of a parallel or tracking saturation region,
Page P.119
If you have selected the Quick saturation mode, a Quick
option is available for all parallel saturation regions (for example, Q Parallel H). Tracking saturation regions cannot be
planned in Quick mode.
Gap
Distance between parallel or tracking saturation slice and
slice group,
Page P.119
Thickness
Thickness of the parallel or tracking saturation slice,
Page P.119
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.531
Parameter card
Geometry-Navigator
Examination
F.5
0.0
F.532
Operator Manual
Examination
Navigator
Type of navigator object currently displayed,
Page P.121
Position
Position of the navigator object in the patient coordinate system,
Page P.122
Orientation
Orientation of the navigator object in the patient coordinate
system,
Page P.122
Rotation
Angle by which the navigator object is rotated in the slice
plane defined by the orientation,
Page P.123
Base size phase
Extent of the navigator object in the phase-encoding direction, Page P.123
Base size read
Extent of the navigator object in the readout direction,
Page P.123
Thickness
Thickness of the navigator slice,
Page P.123
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.533
Examination
F.5
F.5
Coils
This subcard shows the stylized patient and the positions of
the coils connected. The area above the patient displays the
coils with positions not (yet) known, the area underneath the
patient displays the coils with known positions. These coil
elements are shown in the GSP as well.
Miscellaneous
This subcard is used to define the position of the scan
region. You may perform the scan using the current table
position or define a different position.
The selection lists for image numbering allow you to define
the order in which the reconstructed images are numbered.
Adjustments and Transmitter/Receiver
These two parameter cards contain the settings for system
adjustment. These cards are normally not used during routine operation. The adjustment settings should be changed
only under special circumstances by highly experienced
users.
Chapter C.2, Adjusting the System
0.0
F.534
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
System-Coils
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.535
Examination
NOTE
Coil selection is linked to the position of the scan region.
Therefore, the coil selection of the protocols already
processed and completed is automatically applied when
opening consecutive protocols sharing the same position of
the scan region.
F.5
NOTE
When you copy using copy reference, the target protocol
inherits the coil configuration of the source protocol. The
new coil configuration is stored at the corresponding
position of the scan region.
F.5
0.0
F.536
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
System Miscellaneous
F.5
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.537
Examination
Save uncombined
Saves array images uncombined. Two series are created:
one containing the uncombined images of the individual coil
elements and one containing the combined images (original
images).
Page P.182
Scan at current LP.
The protocol is run using the current table position,
Page P.182
If you click the control box, the following two fields Position
of the Scan region M. and Scan reg. Storage are not visible.
Scan region position
Setting the position of the scan region,
Page P.183
Scan region memory
Selecting a scan region position from the positions of the current series block,
Page P.184
F.5
N OT E
The patient table is moved to adjust the position of the scan
region. Depending on the patient positioning, the table will
move toward the magnet or out of the magnet by the
distance specified.
F.5
0.0
F.538
Operator Manual
Examination
MSMA (Multi Slice Multi Angle) lets you define the order for
numbering the scanned images with regard to their slice orientation (primary order).
Page P.135
Use the Sagittal, Coronal and Transversals selection lists
to define whether the scanned images are numbered
according to ascending or descending slice positions (secondary order).
Page P.135
F.5
NOTE
The settings for image numbering are linked to the position
of the scan region.
The image numbering settings of previously processed and
completed protocols are therefore automatically applied
when opening consecutive protocols that have the same
position of scan region.
F.5
F.5
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.539
Examination
F.5
F.5
Signal 1
The Physio Signal 1 parameter card lets you set the parameters for the 1st physiological signal.
For a detailed description of the Physio Signal 1 parameter
card, please refer to chapter "Scans using physiological triggering", Page F.151
Cardio
The Physio Cardiac parameter card lets you set the parameters for cardiac examinations.
PACE (Prospective Acquisition CorrEction)
The Physio PACE parameter card lets you set the parameters for suppression of respiratory artifacts.
0.0
F.540
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
Physio-Cardiac
F.5
Cardiological sequences are used to examine and display cardiac functions. The resulting image data can be evaluated using
the Argus task card.
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.541
Examination
Tagging
Show orientation lines, Page P.1123
Distance
Distance between orientation lines, Page P.1124
Angle
Angle of orientation lines, Page P.1124
Magn. preparation
Magnetization preparation for inversion recovery (IR) and
saturation recovery (SR) sequences,
Page P.141
Fat suppression
Suppression of the fat signal,
Page P.143
Dark blood
Blood appears dark, Page P.1123
TI
Inversion time, Page P.139
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151
0.0
F.542
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
Physio-PACE
F.5
The PACE parameter card allows you to set parameters for suppression of respiratory artifacts.
F.5
Resp. control
Mode for compensating for the effects of breathing,
Page P.124
Scout mode
Preparation phase where only the navigator signal is measured, Page P.126
Scout duration
Length of the preparation phase, Page P.126
Scout TR
TR of the navigator pulse, Page P.126
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.543
Examination
Acceptance window
Permitted deviation from the tolerance center,
Page P.127
Position Accept Window
Position Accept Window,
Page P.128
Accept. position (green)
Centering position of the acceptance window,
Page P.128
Accept. position
Centering position of the acceptance window on triggering,
Page P.128
Search window
Size of the search window,
Page P.129
Search position (red)
Centering position of the search window,
Page P.129
Store profile images
Stores the navigator signal time curve as an image,
Page P.129
Tracking factor
Connection between the movement of the diaphragm and
the anatomy to be scanned,
Page P.130
Chronological Position
Time when the navigator was used,
Page P.130
0.0
F.544
Operator Manual
Examination
RF Pulse Type
Radio frequency pulse type, Page P.197
Trigger pulse
Trigger pulse, Page P.1137
Slices / respiratory cycle
Slices per respiratory cycle, Page P.1140
Cardiac trigger / repiratory cycle
Cardiac trigger per respiratory cycle, Page P.1140
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given number of scans to avoid cross-talk, Page P.134
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.545
Examination
F.5
Time-of-flight angiography
Contrast-enhanced angiography
Phase contrast angiography (2D and 3D)
Flow quantification
F.5
Angio Common
Includes the parameters specific to one of the examinations
mentioned above.
Angio Inline
Includes the parameters for dynamic image evaluation for
angiography examinations.
Page F.558
0.0
F.546
Operator Manual
Examination
Angio Common
parameter card for
time-of-flight
angiography
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins, Page P.140
Inflow
Inflow speed of blood, which defines the shape of the TONE
excitation pulse, Page P.1102
Flow direction
Direction of blood flow, Page P.1102
MTC
Presaturation due to magnetization transfer,
Page P.146
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.547
Examination
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins, Page P.140
3D centr. reordering
Center of raw data space is measured as quickly as possible,
Page P.1103
Time to Center
Time until k space center is reached, Page P.1103
0.0
F.548
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.549
Examination
Flow mode
Flow-encoding mode, Page P.1104
Encodings
Number of flow sensitivities to be set (flow velocity encoding),
Page P.1105
Velocity enc.
Definition of flow sensitivities in cm/s,
Page P.1105
Direction
Flow-sensitive axis, Page P.1105
Rephased images
Magnitude image (flow-rephased), Page P.1106
Magnitude images
Magnitude images (either per flow direction or per flow sensitivity), Page P.1106
Magnitude sum
Magnitude sum image, Page P.1106
Phase images
Phase images (either per flow direction or per flow sensitivity), Page P.1106
0.0
F.550
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.551
Examination
t-Test
Enabling or disabling t-test evaluation,
Page P.1120
Threshold
Threshold value for calculating overlaid images,
Page P.1121
Window
t-Test calculation range,
Page P.1121
Dynamic t-cards
Switching on/off storage of generated t-card,
Page P.1120
Starting ignore meas
Number of initial scans excluded from the evaluation,
Page P.1116
Paradigm size
Number of entries in the paradigm table,
Page P.1121
Paradigm table
Table of individual BOLD scans indicating stimulation,
Page P.1122
0.0
F.552
Operator Manual
Examination
Motion correction
Activates or deactivates motion correction,
Page P.1117
Interpolation
Interpolation method used for motion correction,
Page P.1118
Spatial filter
Activates or deactivates the Gaussian filter,
Page P.1119
Filter setting
Window width of the Gaussian filter,
Page P.1119
Infinite measurement
The number of scans for realtime sequences is set to the
maximum value, Page P.177
Measurements
Number of measurements,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178
Delay in TR
Time between consecutive scans for all ep2d sequences,
Page P.179
Multiple series
The images of each measurement are stored as a separate
series, Page P.180
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.553
Examination
F.5
0.0
F.554
Operator Manual
Examination
Diffusion mode
Diffusion-sensitive direction, Page P.1107
Diff. weightings
Number of diffusion weightings, Page P.1108
b-value
Value for diffusion weighting, Page P.1109
Diff. weighted images
Reconstruct original images with diffusion weighting,
Page P.1109
Trace weighted images
Isotropically diffusion-weighted images, i.e. images are averaged in all spatial directions,
Page P.1110
Average ADC maps
Gray-scale values of images show diffusion coefficients
averaged over different directions, Page P.1110
Individual ADC maps
Gray-scale values of images show diffusion coefficients
along a gradient axis, Page P.1111
Noise level
Threshold value of the pixel intensity for calculating ADC
maps, Page P.1111
Diffusion moment (psif sequence only)
Measurement for the strength of diffusion weighting,
Page P.1111
Diff. directions
Number of diffusion-encoding directions
Can be selected only in MDDW mode, otherwise predefined
by the diffusion mode parameter,
Page P.1112
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.555
Examination
F.5
0.0
F.556
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.557
Examination
F.5
F.5
Common
Breast
Parameter card
Inline-Common
F.5
The Inline Common parameter card allows you to set parameters for dynamic image evaluation.
F.5
In case of scan protocols for angiography examinations, the
Inline parameter card is displayed as Angio Inline subcard.
In case of scan protocols for BOLD scans, diffusion-weighted
scans, or perfusion scans, the Inline parameter card is not
part of the parameter card stack.
0.0
F.558
Operator Manual
Examination
Subtract
Activates or deactivates subtraction,
Page P.1125
Saving images
Saving result images of subtraction,
Page P.1126
Autoscaling
Automatic scaling of result images of subtraction,
Page P.1126
Scaling factor
Entering a scaling factor for the result images of subtraction,
Page P.1127
Offset
Entering an offset value for the result images of subtraction,
Page P.1127
Subtrahend
Defines the series to be subtracted,
Page P.1128
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.559
Examination
Std-Dev-Sag
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the sagittal
direction, Page P.1129
Std-Dev-Cor
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the coronal direction, Page P.1129
Std-Dev-Tra
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the transverse direction, Page P.1130
Std-Dev-Time
Calculation of standard deviation result images in chronological sequence, Page P.1130
MIP-Sag
Calculation of MIP images in the sagittal direction,
Page P.1131
MIP-Cor
Calculation of MIP images in the coronal direction,
Page P.1131
MIP-Tra
Calculation of MIP images in the transverse direction,
Page P.1132
MIP-Time
Calculation of MIP images in chronological sequence
(with Inline-Common cannot be activated if MIP-Time is
already activated on the Inline-Breast parameter card),
Page P.1132
Save original images
Saves original images, Page P.1133
0.0
F.560
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
Inline-Breast
F.5
Wash - In
Switching on or off calculation of the signal change in the
starting range of the dynamic measurement series,
Page P.1114
Color table
Color palettes to color-code the parameter cards,
Page P.1115
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.561
Examination
First measurement
First measurement used for the wash-in or wash-out calculation,
Page P.1115
Last measurement
Last measurement used for the wash-in or wash-out calculation,
Page P.1115
Highest value
Defines whether the value of the last measurement or the
highest value between the first and last measurement will be
used for calculation of the wash-in parameter image,
Page P.1115
Wash - Out
Parameter for signal change in the end range of the dynamic
measurement series,
Page P.1116
TTP
Display of the time to signal peak for each voxel,
Page P.1113
0.0
F.562
Operator Manual
Examination
PEI
Positive enhancement integral, area under a signal intensity
- time curve,
Page P.1116
MIP-Time
MIP images, highest pixel value along the time axis,
Page P.1132
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.563
Examination
F.5
F.5
A tool tip including the name and type of sequence used will
be displayed if you hold the mouse pointer over the sequence
name.
0.0
F.564
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
Sequence Part 1
F.5
Introduction
Initial knocking signal of the gradient coil,
Page P.188
Dimension
Setting for 2D or 3D scanning, Page P.189
Elliptical scanning
Elliptical k space scanning, Page P.189
Phase stabilization
Prevents phase errors and improves image quality,
Page P.190
Compensate T2 decay
Prevents negative effects of T2 decay,
Page P.190
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.565
Examination
Averaging mode
Method for averaging multiple scans,
Page P.191
Multi-slice mode
Scanning method for multislice acquisition: sequential (slice
by slice) or interleaved (row by row),
Page P.131
Sorting
Acquisition sequence for lines of raw data, Page P.191
Asymmetric echo
Defines whether echo asymmetry is permitted in readout
direction, Page P.192
Contrasts
Number of contrasts, Page P.192
Bandwidth
Readout bandwidth for contrasts, Page P.193
Flow comp.
Flow compensation of moving spins in readout and/or slice
selection direction, Page F.574, Displaying and editing
parameter groups and Page P.194
Allowed delay
Maximum delay until the start of the next scan,
Page P.193
Manual echo spacing
Allows you to define echo spacing, Page P.195
Echo spacing
Distance between echoes in the pulse train, Page P.195
0.0
F.566
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter card
Sequence Part 2
F.5
Turbo factor
Number of echoes per RF excitation for turbo spin echo
sequences, Page P.196
EPI factor
Number of refocused gradient echoes per RF excitation,
Page P.196
Segments
Number of lines of a raw data matrix acquired during one TR,
Page P.196
Combined echoes
Combination of echoes with different T2 weighting for an
image, Page P.197
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.567
Examination
RF Pulse Type
Radio frequency pulse type, Page P.197
Gradient mode
Gradient performance used, Page P.198
Excitation
Mode for radio frequency pulse, Page P.1100
RF spoiling
Spoiler RF pulse for destroying phase coherence of gradient
echo sequences, Page P.1100
0.0
F.568
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
F.5
After opening a scan protocol, the following information is displayed in the protocol info line (directly above the parameter
card stack).
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.569
Examination
0.0
F.570
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.571
Examination
Within the so-called Extended Limits (red bar), you are still
able to change parameter values. However, changes within
extended limits require that you adjust other measurement
parameters as well.
F.5
If you exceed the Soft Limits, the Scan Assistant dialog box
will open.
F.5
It informs you about the necessary adjustments to other measurement parameters and allows you to decide how to proceed:
F.5
0.0
F.572
Operator Manual
Examination
Restrictions when
selecting options
F.5
On the +/ buttons, the "+" and "" signs are displayed in red.F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.573
Examination
F.5
This example shows the parameter settings for a slice group. F.5
Expand the selection list of the Slice group field.
You can see how many slice groups are contained in the scan
protocol.
F.5
Select another slice group to display the corresponding slice
parameters.
You can change the parameters of the second group.
F.5
0.0
F.574
Operator Manual
Examination
Click the arrow buttons in the lower left corner to scroll the
echo times for the protocol.
The echo time currently displayed is indicated by square brackets.
F.5
Click the arrow buttons of the spin box to change the value of
the echo time currently displayed.
Press the Return key or switch to another input field to confirm your parameter change.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.575
Examination
F.5
F.5
0.0
F.576
Operator Manual
Examination
Deleting a group
or region
F.5
F.5
Select Delete from the context menu for graphic slice positioning.
F.5
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.577
Examination
Or
F.5
Select the tilt direction (single slice) and enter a flip angle.
Page P.18
Enter a flip angle for the direction of the third orientation
plane if you want to generate a double-oblique slice.
Close the dialog box to confirm your settings.
0.0
F.578
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
Click the button next to the selection list to display the Position dialog box.
NOTE
During volume positioning (e.g., VOI, adjustment volume),
you always work in L-P-H mode.
The Position mode selection list is not available.
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.579
Examination
0.0
F.580
Operator Manual
Examination
C AU T I O N
When exchanging image data generated with the Numaris
predecessor software, please note the following: syngo MR
and Numaris use different patient coordinate systems. As
a result, the slice position and orientation may have different
signs.
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.581
Examination
Keyboard operation
F.5
You can use both the mouse and the keyboard to select parameter cards from the stack or select and edit parameters.
F.5
The table below lists all actions in the parameter card stack that
may be performed via the keyboard as well.
F.5
F.5
Action
Keyboard operation
Tab
Shift + Tab
Up arrow
Down arrow
Home
End
Activate/deactivate checkbox
Enter
Up/down/right/left arrow
or Home - to first entry
or End - to last entry
0.0
F.582
Operator Manual
Examination
Action
Select button (e.g., for coil selection)
Toggle checkbox or disable button selection
Keyboard operation
Enter or space bar
Press Esc key while at same time pressing
Return or Space bar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.583
Examination
F.5
After adapting the measurement parameters of the open protocol to your requirements, save the new settings and close the
protocol.
F.5
F.5
F.5
Select Edit > Apply from the main menu or Apply from the
context menu of the program control (right mouse button).
When protocol reaches the top of the job list, it is loaded into the
scan system. Depending on the start mode selected, the system starts scanning automatically or waits for your start command.
F.5
0.0
F.584
Operator Manual
Examination
Copying measurement
parameters
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.585
Examination
F.5
Parameter groups
F.5
The following table lists the parameters of the different parameter groups.
F.5
Please note that some parameters are assigned to several
parameter groups.
0.0
F.586
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
Parameter group
Parameters
Center of slice/
slab groups & sat. regions
Coil elements
Position, orientation of slices or slabs
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction
Center of slice/
slab groups & sat. regions with
plane rotation
Coil elements
Position, orientation, and rotation of slices or slabs
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.587
Parameter group
Examination
Parameters
Measurement parameters
Coil elements
Phase FOV
Read FOV
Slice thickness
Base resolution
Phase resolution
Phase oversampling
Slices per slab
Slice resolution
Slice oversampling
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor, phase-encoding direction
of the slice/slab groups
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Number of sat. regions
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Special sats (parallel or tracking saturation regions)
including thickness and distance (gap)
Saturation mode
VOI (for spectroscopy scans)
Interpolation resolution (for CSI protocols)
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction
Slices
Coil elements
Slice thickness
Slices per slab
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor of the slice/slab groups
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction
0.0
F.588
Operator Manual
Examination
Parameter group
Parameters
Saturation
Coil elements
Slice thickness
Slices per slab
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor of the slice/slab groups
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Number of sat. regions
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Special sats (parallel or tracking saturation regions)
including thickness and distance (gap)
Saturation mode
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction
Adjustment volume
Shim mode
Position, orientation, extent of the adjustment volume
Everything
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.589
Inconsistencies
F.5
Examination
F.5
F.5
F.5
0.0
F.590
Operator Manual
Examination
F.5
You can save a scan program in the joblist under a new program
name after adapting its protocols. This allows you to reuse protocols adapted during the examination for subsequent examinations.
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.591
Examination
F.5
Instead of the entire job list, you can also save individual protocols in the job list. This involves transferring the protocol to the
Exam Explorer.
F.5
Call up the Exam Explorer.
Page F.163, Calling up the Exam Explorer
In its navigation area, open the data level for the scan program where you want to save the protocol.
Page F.1612, Finding a scan program
You can only save the protocol in a scan program of the customer level (USER).
Click the required protocol in the job list of the Exam task
card.
0.0
F.592
Operator Manual
Examination
Select Object > Save from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.593
Examination
0.0
F.594
Operator Manual
Performing a routine
examination
CHAPTER
F.6
F.6
Routine scan
procedure
F.6
Once you have finished adapting the parameters of the first protocol, apply the new settings.
F.6
The protocol is closed and the system automatically starts running this protocol. Once this protocol has been completed, the
system automatically starts running the next protocol unless it
is marked by an icon as not ready for measurement.
F.6
F.6
Protocols usually take some time to run. This time can be used
to prepare the following protocols or for postprocessing tasks.F.6
After the initial scans have started, you can edit the portion of
the job list not yet measured using the program control. You can
complete the parameters of pending protocols and plan the
examination sequence.
Page F.639, Processing the job list while scans are being
performed
F.6
You can also use the time to view, evaluate, comment, or film
images of a series that has already run.
Part G, Part H, Part O
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.61
Stopping an examination
F.6
Examination
Repeating scans
F.6
F.6
Breath-hold scans to prevent motion artifacts are started manually. The protocol is automatically loaded into the scan system
but does not start until you manually give the command.
F.6
For kinematic examinations, you can run protocols any number
of times. In this case, start a protocol manually and run it as
many times as required to complete all necessary scans.
F.6
Contrast agent
examinations
F.6
0.0
F.62
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Automatic position
suggestion
F.6
Jobs
F.6
Conflict management
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.63
Examination
F.6
The program control allows you to trace and modify the course
of an examination including all scans.
F.6
The program instructions are color-coded depending on the
processing status:
F.6
Executed protocols have a dark-gray background
Protocols that are currently running are shown with a white
background
Opened protocols are marked with bars in light gray that are
pushed to the right
Protocols that are pending are shown against a light gray
background
completed protocol
Series
icon
current scan
open scan
pending protocols
0.0
F.64
Operator Manual
Examination
Tooltip
F.6
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the name of a
program instruction, a tool tip displays the following information:
F.6
The full name of the program instruction.
A short comment if entered in the properties dialog box.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.65
Examination
If you have planned a contrast agent pause for your scan program, the subsequent scans will be marked with a syringe icon
indicating contrast agent scans.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.6
On a protocol with this icon, patient instructions are automatically played before and/or after scanning.
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.66
Operator Manual
Examination
Copy references crossed out in red are not valid. Invalid copy
references occur when parameters change or when there are
parameter conflicts between the source and target protocol.
They cannot be included in a scan.
F.6
When you load a scan program into the job list for the first time,
the estimated scan time is displayed in addition to all program
instructions. Protocols displaying scan times are pending.
The scan time displayed next to a multiple-loading protocol indicates the duration of a single repetition.
The scan time is also shown in the Exam Explorer and the protocol overview.
Symbols of series in
program instructions
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.67
Examination
Information in the
status bar
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.68
Operator Manual
Examination
Range markers
F.6
Within the job list, range markers provide information about different properties that are valid across multiple protocols.
F.6
These range markers indicate whether (and which) image comments have been entered for the scanned images.
Page F.913, Editing an image comment
F.6
This range marker indicates that a job exists for the examination.
Page F.95, Editing a work step in the instruction area
F.6
The range marker for a step can have one of the following
modes:
F.6
The step has been completed.
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.69
F.6
Examination
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.610
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
After completing the graphic slice positioning for the first protocol, you close the protocol. It is loaded into the scan system.
Scanning will start automatically.
F.6
While the scan is in progress, the protocol is displayed with a
white background in the job list. The remaining scan time is indicated in the status bar.
F.6
The images of the protocol are reconstructed immediately while
scanning is in progress. After image reconstruction has been
completed, the series icon is displayed.
F.6
If the next protocol has executable status (no construction
worker icon), it will start immediately following the first protocol.F.6
Series
icon
current scan
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.611
Examination
F.6
A protocol cannot be started automatically unless the slice positions have been adjusted in the reference images.
F.6
These protocols are marked by a construction worker icon in
the job list.
F.6
Incomplete protocols ready to be run are opened automatically.
F.6
Position the slices or slabs.
Make necessary parameter changes on the cards of the
parameter card stack.
Click the Apply button.
The protocol is closed and the scan is started.
F.6
0.0
F.612
Operator Manual
Examination
Setting a protocol to
executable without
checking
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.613
Examination
Or
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.614
Operator Manual
Examination
NOTE
If you set a protocol to executable without checking to start
the protocol immediately, the table immediately moves to
the table position entered in the protocol if it does not match
the table position currently set.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.615
Examination
F.6
F.6
Select Queue > Voice Output > Play... from the main menu
or Voice Output from the context menu in the outer area of
the program control.
The Voice Output dialog box opens.
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.616
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Recording patient
instructions
F.6
If the list of voice outputs does not contain the patient instruction you require, you can record it.
Page F.1121, Changing a voice output
F.6
Voice outputs can be recorded or edited only if no patient is currently registered.
F.6
If you have already registered the patient to be examined,
close the examination again if necessary.
Page F.620, Closing a patient
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.617
Examination
F.6
All protocols
completed
All program instructions are now marked with the series icon. F.6
F.6
Series
icon
You can close the examination after determining that you do not
have to perform additional scans or repeat protocols.
F.6
0.0
F.618
Operator Manual
Examination
Use the Table Positioning dialog box or move the patient table
using the buttons on the control unit near the magnet bore.
Chapter F.8, Positioning the Patient Table and System
Manual
F.6
F.6
Job
completing
F.6
After all scans of the examination and all planned postprocessing steps have been completed, and the series have been
transferred to the film sheet or printed, you can complete the
procedure step.
Page F.620, Closing a patient
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.619
Closing a patient
F.6
Examination
If you release the last patient at the end of the working day,
reset the program control to its original state.
F.6
Select Patient > Close Patient from the main menu.
Or
F.6
0.0
F.620
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Protocols that have to be started manually are marked by a flagman icon in the job list.
F.6
Flagman
The start mode of a protocol (manual or automatic) can be set
using the Execution subtask card in the Protocol step properties dialog box.
F.6
N OT E
You always start multiple breath-hold scans from the Inline
Display.
Page F.1026, Starting multiple breath-hold scans F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.621
Examination
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.622
Operator Manual
Examination
Give the breath-hold instructions. Subsequently, start the measurement via Continue or the F12 key. The system does not
have to load parameters or perform adjustments. This saves
time and reduces patient stress.
F.6
You can give breath-hold instructions automatically before or
after the scan.
Page F.129, Playing back voice output
Starting the
measurement
F.6
F.6
Click the Close button to close the Exam paused dialog box.
And
F.6
F.6
Click the Skip button to close the Exam paused dialog box.
The loaded protocol is not run and the next program instruction is initiated.
The protocol is marked "canceled."
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.623
Examination
F.6
0.0
F.624
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
F.6
The Exam paused dialog box closes and reopens once the
system is ready for the next scan.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.625
F.6
Examination
Completed protocol
0.0
F.626
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.627
Examination
0.0
F.628
Operator Manual
Examination
Interrupting scanning
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.629
Or
Examination
F.6
Cancellation icon
0.0
F.630
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.631
F.6
Examination
You may stop a scan in progress and immediately start the next
scan. This is used, e.g. during contrast agent uptake to subsequently start a high-resolution protocol.
F.6
You can monitor the contrast agent uptake with the first localizer. As soon as it becomes visible in the image, you can start
the next high-resolution sequence for imaging.
F.6
Use the Stop button or the menu items to stop the scan in
progress.
F.6
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.632
Operator Manual
Examination
Skipping a program
instruction
F.6
You may skip a program instruction in the job list that has not
yet run and is open for editing.
F.6
Click the Skip button.
Or
F.6
Select Skip Next Step from the context menu in the left margin of the program control.
The skipped program instruction is marked with a canceled icon
(lightning) and has a dark gray background.
F.6
You can now resume the examination with the next program
instruction.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.633
Examination
Repeating scans
F.6
You may repeat individual as well as entire sections of previously processed program instructions.
F.6
In some cases (e.g., if you need to reposition the patient), it may
be necessary to scan the entire job list again.
F.6
Repeating a canceled
protocol
F.6
F.6
Repeating previously
processed protocols
F.6
0.0
F.634
Operator Manual
Examination
Repeating multiple
program instructions
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.635
Examination
F.6
Select Patient > Reset Table Position from the main menu.
F.6
Or
F.6
0.0
F.636
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
For examinations with scans that differ only slightly in their protocol parameters (e.g. for cardiac and angio applications), you
may perform the scans with an open protocol.
F.6
When you repeatedly scan an open protocol, it is not necessary to close protocols following each parameter change with
Apply and then reopen the job list again.
Change your parameters as required.
Select Queue > Scan Opened Protocol from the main
menu or Scan Opened Step from the context menu in the
left (outer) margin of the program control.
Or
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.637
Examination
0.0
F.638
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Completing protocols
F.6
While the first protocols are in progress, you may check and
complete the parameter settings of subsequent protocols. This
allows you to avoid unnecessary pauses between individual
scans.
F.6
Opening a protocol
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.639
Examination
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.640
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Or
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.641
Viewing parameters of
protocols previously run
F.6
Examination
You may also view the parameters of protocols that have been
run already. This enables you to compare the parameters of
previous protocols with the program instructions to be run. F.6
Double-click a previously scanned protocol.
Or
F.6
0.0
F.642
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
To apply the parameter settings of one protocol to another protocol, copy the parameter settings or set a copy reference.
F.6
Copying parameters
from a protocol
F.6
First open the (target) protocol into which you want to copy
the parameters (double-click).
Select the (source) protocol from which you wish to transfer
the settings (single-click).
Select Queue > Copy Parameter from the main menu or
Copy Parameter from the context menu.
In the Copy Parameter Groups dialog box, select the
parameter group with the settings you want to copy.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters
It does not matter if the source protocol is positioned behind
the target protocol in the job list.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.643
F.6
Examination
You may also select a GSP segment for copying parameter settings, if the GSP segment contains an image, the protocol of
which is still pending in the job list.
F.6
First open the (target) protocol into which you want to copy
the parameters (double-click).
Place the mouse pointer on the GSP segment containing the
image.
Select Copy Parameter from the context menu in this segment.
In the Copy Parameter Groups dialog box, select the
parameter group with the settings you want to copy.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters
0.0
F.644
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.645
Examination
F.6
0.0
F.646
Operator Manual
Examination
Reference symbol
The number next to the reference symbol identifies the source
protocol with the settings to be copied.
F.6
You cannot see which parameter group has been applied. To
view this information you need to reopen the properties window.
Parameter conflicts may occur when setting copy references. A
message box will indicate the conflict.
Page F.649, Inconsistencies in parameter settings
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.647
Updating a copy
reference
F.6
Examination
If a target protocol has a copy reference, the referenced parameter settings are copied and updated from the source protocol
to the selected program instruction.
F.6
Select the target protocol with a reference icon.
Select Queue > Update Copy Reference from the main
menu or Update Copy Reference from the context menu.
The copy reference will be updated and used in the scanning
process.
F.6
Parameter conflicts may occur when you update parameter settings from a source to a target protocol. A message box will indicate the conflict.
Page F.649, Inconsistencies in parameter settings
F.6
0.0
F.648
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
The Confirm Parameter Changes message box will be displayed in case of inconsistencies between the source and target protocol for the parameter settings, that is, parameter settings are not valid or executable.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.649
Parameter change by
copying
Examination
F.6
F.6
Click OK.
The new settings are applied. This resolves the inconsistency.F.6
Or
F.6
Click Cancel.
The new settings are not applied.
F.6
Parameter change
by copy reference
Click OK.
F.6
Or
F.6
Click Cancel.
The new settings are not applied. The copy reference has been
F.6
recorded by the system, however, it is not valid.
0.0
F.650
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.651
F.6
Examination
F.6
F.6
0.0
F.652
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
You can add further program instructions in the job list in addition to the given scan program.
F.6
F.6
F.6
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.653
Examination
F.6
Or
F.6
Press the mouse button and drag the required protocol from
the Program parameter card or the Exam Explorer to the
job list (drag & drop).
Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer is at the
correct position.
If you drag the protocol into the empty part of the program
control, the program instruction will be placed at the end of
the job list.
0.0
F.654
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
A message box opens if the voice outputs are not available. The
protocol is then marked with a crossed out loudspeaker icon in
the job list.
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.655
Examination
F.6
0.0
F.656
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Select Queue > New Pause from the main menu or New
Pause from the context menu in the outer margin of the Program Control.
The Pause step properties dialog box is displayed.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.657
Examination
F.6
You may reconstruct a new protocol from acquired series or single images and add it to the job list. For this purpose, you may
select images from different sources (stamp segments, large
segments, or Patient Browser).
F.6
Select a series or image from the stamp segments of the
Maestro layout, from the large image segments, or from the
Patient Browser.
F.6
NOTE
For images ore series scanned with a different software
version, or generated at another Magnetom, the protocols
used for this purpose have to be converted.
Page F.659, Reconstructed protocol by conversion F.6
Press the mouse button and drag your selection into the program control (drag & drop).
Or
F.6
0.0
F.658
Operator Manual
Examination
Reconstructed protocol
by conversion
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.659
Examination
F.6
Moving a program
instruction
F.6
0.0
F.660
Operator Manual
Examination
Cutting/copying and
pasting a program
instruction
Select Edit > Copy from the main menu or Copy from the
context menu to copy the entry.
Or
F.6
Select Edit > Cut from the main menu or Cut from the context menu to cut the entry.
Or
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.661
Examination
F.6
0.0
F.662
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
Deleting a program
instruction
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.663
Deleting a complete
program instruction list
F.6
Examination
Select Queue > Clear All from the main menu or Clear All
from the context menu.
All program instructions are deleted from the job list.
F.6
0.0
F.664
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
F.6
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.665
Examination
F.6
0.0
F.666
Operator Manual
Examination
Numbering of reconstructed
images
F.6
Numbering rules
F.6
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.667
Examination
You can define the primary order (for example, cor - tra - sag
as one of six possible combinations) and the secondary order
(ascending or descending) when you adapt the protocol
parameters.
The images are numbered by default in the primary order
sag - cor - tra and in the secondary order R >> L, A >> P,
F >> H.
F.6
NOTE
The settings for image numbering are linked to the position
of the scan region.
The image numbering settings of previously processed and
completed protocols are automatically applied when
opening consecutive protocols that have the same position
of scan region.
F.6
0.0
F.668
Operator Manual
Examination
Example
F.6
You are planning a scan with 3 slice groups. You can move or
rotate the slice groups without changing the numbers of the
slice groups.
F.6
F.6
After the scan, you may view the numbering of the reconstructed images in the Position Display of the Viewing task
card, in the image area of the Viewing task card, or in the
Patient Browser.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.669
Examination
In the Position Display you can see the position and numbers
(right side) of the reconstructed images.
F.6
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
F.670
Operator Manual
Examination
NOTE
If you have configured the position display not to label all
cut, lines, overlapping cut lines can cause incorrect
assignment, between cut lines and invisible image numbers
may lead to an incorrect allocation of cut lines and invisible
image numbers. To be on the safe side in such cases, select
the settings for the cut line labeling in the position overview
so that all cut lines and image numbers are displayed. F.6
Page G.616, Configuring the display of the cut lines
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.671
Examination
F.6
F.6
The protocol requires coils different from the ones plugged into
the patient table. A message box will appear if one or more coils
is not connected.
F.6
0.0
F.672
Operator Manual
Examination
Click OK.
Open the scan protocol (double-click).
Since the required coils are not plugged in for this protocol, the
system automatically adjusts the coil configuration.
F.6
The message box Confirm Parameter Changes appears.
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.673
Examination
Coils with a
undefined
position
Coils with
a defined
position
F.6
0.0
F.674
Operator Manual
Examination
F.6
NOTE
However, do not move the table completely out of the
magnet (not into the HOME position!).
Otherwise the examination is considered completed.
F.6
You will not be able to perform any more scans, and you will
have to start the entire examination again from the
beginning (patient registration, overview scan, position
slices... etc.).
F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.675
Examination
0.0
F.676
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.7
F.7
Contrast agents may be required for a variety of MR examinations. Paramagnetic contrast agents (usually Gd compounds)
enhance the signal of many pathological structures.
F.7
If you want to run a protocol with contrast agent, use a scan program that already contains pauses for administering contrast
agent.
Page F.24, Selecting a scan program
F.7
All protocols after this pause are marked with a syringe icon in
the job list.
F.7
If no contrast agent pauses are planned in a scan program, you
can insert them into the job list while the examination is in
progress. Or, you may utilize other unrelated pauses in the
examination sequence to administer contrast agent to the
patient and to document it accordingly.
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.71
Examination
F.7
0.0
F.72
Operator Manual
Examination
You can also use the injector to administer the injection in the
magnet.
F.7
F.7
N OT E
Move the table out of the magnet
(but not into the HOME position).
Otherwise the examination is considered completed.
F.7
You are not able to perform additional scans, and you will
have to start the entire examination again from the
beginning (patient registration, overview scan, position
slices... etc.).
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.73
Examination
Start the first contrast agent protocol during the exam pause,
e.g. via Continue or the F12 key.
All program instructions after the pause will be marked as contrast agent scans via a syringe icon to the left of the protocol
name.
F.7
The syringe icon will be displayed next to the patient's name
above the Program Control.
F.7
0.0
F.74
Operator Manual
Examination
F.7
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.75
Examination
F.7
Click Yes.
The table is moved. The table is moved to the position entered
and scanning is started.
F.7
0.0
F.76
Operator Manual
Examination
F.7
Select Job list > Contrast agent from the main menu.
Or
F.7
Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
Or
F.7
Select Contrast Agent from the context menu in the lefthand (outer) margin of the program control.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed.
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.77
Examination
F.7
The input fields for volume and contrast agent names are activated.
F.7
Enter the name and quantity of the contrast agent administered.
Or
F.7
F.7
To document a scan as a contrast agent scan, it is not mandatory to specify the name and quantity of the contrast agent.
Contrast agent administration is identified by the image text.
0.0
F.78
Operator Manual
Examination
F.7
F.7
Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed.
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.79
Examination
F.7
Click OK.
0.0
F.710
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.711
Examination
F.7
If you notice that the contrast agent no longer affects the image
contrast during scanning, you may remove the syringe icon for
all subsequent scans.
F.7
Select Job list > Contrast Agent from the main menu or
Contrast Agent from the context menu in the left (outer)
margin of the program control.
Or
F.7
Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed.
F.7
F.7
The Exam Paused dialog box opens again if an additional contrast agent pause is planned as the next step in the job list. F.7
Deselect the Contrast agent administration checkbox.
Subsequent scans are now no longer marked as contrast agent
F.7
scans.
0.0
F.712
Operator Manual
Examination
F.7
To make your work easier, you can enter all substances used
as contrast agents in scans in the catalog. You can also add or
remove contrast media during an examination.
F.7
F.7
F.7
Enter a name for the contrast agent, the code value, the
active component, concentration, dilution and, possibly, a
comment.
You need the code if you want to document the contrast agent
used via the HIS (hospital information system) The data are
entered as consumed materials.
Page F.91, Job
Click the Apply button.
The newly entered contrast agent is now included in the catalog.
F.7
The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box remains open.
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.713
Examination
F.7
F.7
F.7
0.0
F.714
Operator Manual
Examination
F.7
Select Job list > New Pause from the main menu.
F.7
Or
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.715
Examination
0.0
F.716
Operator Manual
Examination
F.7
Contrast agent administration is also documented in the properties window for contrast agent pauses already positioned in
the job list.
F.7
Select the pause from the section of the job list that still
needs to be run.
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu.
Or
F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.717
Examination
F.7
F.7
Select the contrast agent you want to administer from the list.
Or
F.7
0.0
F.718
Operator Manual
Examination
Scanning stops as soon as the pause reaches the top of the job
list. The Exam Paused dialog box is displayed.
F.7
Administer the contrast agent and start the contrast agent
scan with Continue.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.719
Examination
0.0
F.720
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.8
F.8
You will have to move the patient table at various points during
the examination to, for example, administer contrast agent. F.8
You can control the patient table movement by using either the
control panel next to the magnet bore or the software at the console in the control room.
F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.81
Examination
F.8
F.8
F.8
The current table position is displayed, and you can control various horizontal movements of the patient table.
F.8
0.0
F.82
Operator Manual
Examination
NOTE
When performing table movements at the console, ensure
that the table is not simultaneously moved via the operating
panel at the magnet bore.
F.8
F.8
F.8
F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.83
Examination
F.8
Enter the distance you want to move the patient table in the
Move table by field.
Then click this button to move the patient table into the magnet (i.e. toward the isocenter) by the specified distance.
Or
F.8
Click this button to move the patient table out of the magnet
by the specified distance.
F.8
NOTE
The Current position and Move table by displays (as well
as the buttons for moving the patient table by a certain
distance) are only available if you have the corresponding
license.
F.8
0.0
F.84
Operator Manual
Examination
F.8
F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.85
Examination
F.8
F.8
0.0
F.86
Operator Manual
Examination
F.8
Some examinations require you to set or switch the tunnel lighting on/off.
F.8
Click this button to switch on the magnet opening lighting, if
it is off.
Click the Lighting of magnet opening button several times
in quick succession to set the intensity of the lighting (3 levels: low, medium, high).
The current setting for magnetic opening lighting is shown to the
right of the button.
F.8
You may set the magnetic opening lighting to three different
brightness levels. The more times you click the button, the
brighter the lighting. Once maximum brightness has been
reached, clicking the button again will dim the lighting.
F.8
To switch the magnet opening lighting off, first set the lighting
to the lowest brightness level.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.87
Examination
F.8
You can adjust the ventilation of the magnet opening from the
console in the control room.
F.8
Click the Ventilation of magnet opening button to switch on
the ventilation in the magnet opening, if it is off.
Click the Ventilation of magnet opening button several
times in quick succession to adjust the ventilation (3 levels:
low, medium, high).
The current setting for tunnel ventilation is shown to the right of
the button.
F.8
To switch the magnet opening ventilation off, first set the ventilation to the lowest level.
0.0
F.88
Operator Manual
Examination
F.8
NOTE
Never move the patient table into the HOME position if you
want to resume the examination afterward.
F.8
Clicking the Move to HOME button always terminates the
current examination.
F.8
The system assumes that you now want to register and
examine the next patient.
F.8
All reference images are removed from the image area.
F.8
F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.89
Examination
0.0
F.810
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.9
F.9
F.9
Job
Body region
Image comment
Job
F.9
With the necessary license and connection to a hospital information system (HIS), you can access the HIS via the network
to receive jobs for your MR system in the form of work steps. A
job reference is created in the job list during patient registration.
All acquired series and contrast agent administrations will be
automatically entered in the job. You are also able to enter
results series (e.g. from post-processing) or consumables on
your own. The procedure step information is now available for
further processing within the hospital.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.91
Body region
F.9
Examination
Image comment
F.9
0.0
F.92
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
When you select your scan program, the first range marker for
the body region is defined automatically.
F.9
F.9
If you decide to examine another body region during the examination, you may change the region setting.
F.9
Select Queue > Change Body Part Examined in the main
menu.
Or
F.9
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.93
Examination
F.9
If you position the mouse pointer over the range instruction, the
new scan region of the program instructions will be displayed as
a tool tip.
F.9
F.9
F.9
0.0
F.94
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
As soon as a patient is registered, a range marker is automatically generated for the work step determined. The step causes
all scans and material consumed (e.g. contrast agent administration) belonging to the examination to be available for further
editing within a license-dependent hospital information system.
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.95
Examination
F.9
Select Queue > Change Work Step from the main menu.
Or
F.9
F.9
F.9
The dialog box contains a list of predefined work steps. You can
apply one of the work steps offered or create a new one.
F.9
0.0
F.96
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
F.9
F.9
You may define the newly created work step from the program
control.
F.9
Select the newly inserted range marker.
Select Properties from the context menu.
The Executed Work Steps dialog box is displayed.
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.97
Examination
0.0
F.98
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
A message box will appear when you start a protocol, if no procedure step exists or if the procedure step has already been
completed. It indicates that the following scans will not be
recorded in a job for billing.
F.9
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.99
Examination
F.9
Select the range marker and Cancel from the pop-up menu
of the Program Control.
Or
F.9
F.9
F.9
F.9
0.0
F.910
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
You can complete the procedure step when the last scan of the
examination and all planned postprocessing operations have
been completed, and the series has been printed or transferred
to a film sheet.
F.9
F.9
F.9
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.911
Examination
F.9
You can delete a procedure step from the job list of the program
control.
F.9
Select the range marker you want to delete.
Select Delete from the context menu of the program control.
The work step is deleted but is retained in the patient database.
0.0
F.912
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.913
Examination
F.9
Select Queue > Set Image Comment from the main menu.
Or
F.9
F.9
F.9
0.0
F.914
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
F.9
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.915
Examination
F.9
F.9
F.9
F.9
Select the image comment in the input field and overwrite it.
Click the OK button.
The images acquired in subsequent protocols will include the
new image comment.
F.9
The current image comment will also be used if you repeat
protocols previously scanned with a different comment.
0.0
F.916
Operator Manual
Examination
F.9
F.9
Select the icon for the image comment with image text you
want to delete.
Select Delete from the context menu.
The image comment icon is removed from the job list of the program control.
F.9
Images acquired in subsequent protocols are assigned the previous image comment or stored without an image comment, if
none is available.
F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.917
Examination
0.0
F.918
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.10
Inline Display
You can use Inline Display for the following applications:
F.10
F.10
You are able to view the reconstructed images during scanning. This allows you to decide when to intervene in a scan
by checking the acquired images.
You can locate the required slice position and orientation of
a real-time protocol interactively using the space mouse.
Inline Display lets you trace contrast agent build-up in CARE
bolus scans before starting the high-resolution protocol.
You are able to trace the navigator signal (respiratory curve)
and start a multiple breath-hold scan.
You are able to monitor the MR spectrum and stop scanning
as soon as an adequate signal-to-noise ratio is attained.
You are able to filter the display of BOLD images to display
just the images of a certain slice.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.101
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
Or
F.10
0.0
F.102
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.103
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.104
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
F.10
The number of the protocol steps as well as the images displayed in the Inline Display, appear on the Inline Display title bar
and as a tool tip in the bottom left corner of the Inline Display
(drag & drop area).
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.105
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.106
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
You can set the size of the Inline Display freely or select one of
three predefined sizes.
F.10
F.10
Selecting a predefined
size
F.10
You are able to select the following predefined sizes for the
Inline Display:
F.10
Inline
The Inline Display has the size of a GSP segment in the
three-segment layout.
Large
The Inline Display is as high as the monitor. This setting is
useful for examinations with intervention.
Full screen
The Inline Display fills the entire monitor.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.107
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
Set the required size with Set Size in the pop-up menu.
Switching to another
task card
F.10
0.0
F.108
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
Image display
F.10
F.10
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.109
Inline Display
Restarting image
display
Examination
F.10
You are able to resume image display at any time. The image
displayed next is the last one reconstructed. Images that have
been reconstructed since the display has been paused are no
longer available for Inline Display.
F.10
Click the Display Pause On button.
Or
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1010
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
The images are transferred from image calculation using standardized window values and aspect ratios.
F.10
You can modify this image display: You may window, zoom, and
pan the images during Inline Display.
F.10
F.10
NOTE
If displayed very quickly on the Inline Display, your changes
may not be visible due to windowing, zooming, or
panning.
F.10
In this case, pause the display.
F.10
NOTE
The changed settings for image display in the Inline Display
are not stored.
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1011
Inline Display
Examination
Image windowing
F.10
F.10
Windowing images up
to the end of the series
F.10
Using the mouse, you are able to automatically apply the new
window values of an image to subsequent images in the
respective series.
F.10
Select Window OnSucceeding On from the context menu.
0.0
F.1012
Operator Manual
Examination
Automatic image
Windowing
Inline Display
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1013
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
The images shown in Inline Display are shown to fit the segment size. You can change this display.
F.10
Select Zoom/Pan On from the pop-up menu.
Position the mouse pointer in the outer area of the image.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse pointer
up to enlarge the image or down to reduce the image.
Position the mouse pointer in the inner area of the image.
To pan the image contents, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the mouse upward, downward, to the right,
or to the left.
Zooming images up to
the end of the series
F.10
You can change the menu settings so that the changes to the
visible image section are automatically applied to all images in
the series.
F.10
Select Zoom/Pan On Series from the pop-up menu.
Resetting changes
F.10
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1014
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
F.10
F.10
Removing an image
F.10
For example, if you have interrupted a scan and the image displayed last remains in the image area.
F.10
Right-click the Inline Display.
Select Clear Segment from the context menu.
The image currently displayed will be cleared from the image
area.
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1015
Inline Display
Examination
Saving images
F.10
The calculated images in Inline Display are usually automatically stored in the Patient Browser.
F.10
In some cases you may deactivate automatic storage and manually store single images from the Inline Display.
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1016
Operator Manual
Examination
Disabling automatic
image storage
Inline Display
F.10
You will disable automatic storage if the images are not necessary for diagnostic purposes (e.g., in case of real-time scans).
Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading
F.10
Click the Store Images On/Off button.
Or
F.10
C AU T I O N
If you deactivate automatic storage, image data may be
lost!
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1017
Inline Display
Enabling automatic
image storage
Examination
F.10
If you require all images for diagnosis, you can enable automatic image storage.
F.10
Click the Store Images On/Off button in the Inline Display.
Or
F.10
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1018
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
You are able to copy the slice position and orientation of the current image in Inline Display to the protocol opened in the program control.
F.10
This position and orientation are then transferred to the
selected graphic object of the opened protocol. If no graphic
object is selected, the position and orientation will be transferred to the first slice group of the protocol.
F.10
The slice position and orientation are also stored in a buffer.
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1019
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
F.10
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1020
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1021
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
0.0
F.1022
Operator Manual
Examination
Interactive scanning
procedure
Inline Display
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1023
Inline Display
Examination
0.0
F.1024
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
F.10
F.10
NOTE
Using the keyboard provides you with the advantage of
focussing on the Inline Display instead of the mouse
pointer.
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1025
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
0.0
F.1026
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1027
Inline Display
Examination
TIP
If the keyboard focus (dashed border) is on the Scan
Breathhold button, you may want to press the spacebar to
start scanning.
F.10
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1028
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
NOTE
When you cancel a protocol with multiple Scans, all images
from the current scan are lost.
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1029
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
You may use the Inline Display to track the MR spectrum while
a scan is in progress. The current and accumulated spectroscopy data are displayed as a vector graphic in the Inline Display
window.
F.10
F.10
For spectroscopy sequences, the Store Images On/Off button is not available, because it is not possible to deselect the
Auto store images option in the protocol properties.
0.0
F.1030
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
F.10
When you close Inline Display, you are no longer able to view
reconstructed images or graphics of a scan (online or offline).F.10
Click the Close Window button in the top right corner of the
Inline Display.
Or
F.10
Click the Inline Display button again on the tool bar of the
Exam task card.
Or
F.10
F.10
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1031
Inline Display
Examination
F.10
In the pop-up menu, you can set that the Inline Display will
close automatically as soon as image calculation has been
completed.
F.10
F.10
0.0
F.1032
Operator Manual
Examination
Inline Display
F.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1033
Inline Display
Examination
0.0
F.1034
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.11
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
A single spoken instruction to the patient. Instructions are available in various languages.
F.11
Label
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.111
Patient instructions
Examination
N OT E
Never insert a commercial music CD into the CD drive of
the host computer. The copy protection on the CDs could
cause the system to crash and damage the drive.
F.11
0.0
F.112
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
Select Joblist > Voice Output > Play... or select Voice Output from the context menu of the program control.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.113
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
F.11
0.0
F.114
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.115
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
You can stop if you do not want to play back an entire voice output or have selected the wrong voice output.
F.11
Click the STOP button.
Playback of the voice output stops.
F.11
0.0
F.116
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.117
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
F.11
F.11
0.0
F.118
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
N OT E
It is not possible to change the patient language once
scanning has started.
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.119
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
You can use the same newly selected language again for the
next patients.
F.11
Click the Set as Default checkbox to save the selected language as the default language.
The changed default language setting will become the default
in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
F.11
You can redefine the default language in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
Page F.1129, Configuring voice output
F.11
0.0
F.1110
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
The volume of voice outputs is also preset in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output configuration window. You may
change the volume set in the Voice Output Properties dialog
box.
F.11
F.11
After you have selected the language and set the volume, you
are able to select and play back a voice output for test purposes.
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1111
Patient instructions
CV/CBT switch
Examination
F.11
F.11
0.0
F.1112
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1113
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
0.0
F.1114
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
The files available on your system are shown with a loudspeaker icon in the Instruction selection list in the Organize
Voice Outputs dialog box. You may record additional instructions, if required.
F.11
F.11
To create a new voice output, you first have to create a label for
the instructions and then start recording.
F.11
Select the language for the new instructions in the Organize
Voice Outputs dialog box.
Click the New button in the Organize Voice Output dialog
box.
The Edit Label dialog box is displayed. The input field is empty.F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1115
Patient instructions
Examination
0.0
F.1116
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
To record a voice output you will need to use both the Record
Voice dialog box and your system's intercom.
F.11
Click the Record button in the Organize Voice Output dialog box.
The Record Voice dialog box opens.
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1117
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
N OT E
To ensure good recording quality, we recommend
maintaining a distance of 30 cm from the microphone and
speaking in a normal voice. You can also adjust the
recording volume with the Record Volume slider during
configuration. The volume slider in the exam room has no
effect on the recording volume.
F.11
0.0
F.1118
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1119
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
You can play back the new patient instructions after recording
the voice output to test comprehensibility.
F.11
After the recording the Play button will be active.
F.11
F.11
0.0
F.1120
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
Select the instructions to be modified from the Labels selection list in the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box.
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1121
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
F.11
0.0
F.1122
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1123
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
When you no longer require a voice output, you can delete it.
However, remember that voice outputs may have been linked to
program instructions for automatic playback. If the deleted
voice output does not exist when a protocol is running, a message appears and you have to deliver the patient instructions
via the intercom system.
F.11
It is not possible to delete standard pre-installed voice outputs.
0.0
F.1124
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1125
Patient instructions
Examination
0.0
F.1126
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1127
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
N OT E
The changes you make in the Organize Voice Outputs
dialog box are implemented immediately. It is not possible
to undo them.
F.11
0.0
F.1128
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
You can configure the voice output in the Voice Output Properties dialog box or in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
F.11
The settings in the Voice Output Properties dialog box only
apply to the current patient.
Page F.118, Setting playback of voice outputs
F.11
The settings in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box are global. These defaults will be used when all patients
are registered.
F.11
You are able to perform the following settings:
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1129
Patient instructions
Examination
F.11
0.0
F.1130
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
F.11
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1131
Patient instructions
Examination
After you have selected the language and set the volume, you
are able to select and play back a voice output for test purposes.
F.11
F.11
You can set the volume for playback of the voice outputs you
have recorded.
F.11
0.0
F.1132
Operator Manual
Examination
Patient instructions
F.11
After you have entered your settings, you may save them.
F.11
F.11
Or
F.11
Click Cancel.
The Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output box closes. All
settings remain unchanged.
F.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1133
Patient instructions
Examination
0.0
F.1134
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.12
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.121
Examination
F.12
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.12
F.12
F.12
F.12
0.0
F.122
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
F.12
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.123
Examination
F.12
When you first open the Protocol step properties dialog box,
the Standard card is in the foreground. Enter a name and
description for the protocol on this card.
F.12
Give the protocol a unique name. The name of the protocol is
used as a series description for the images acquired with this
protocol and is shown, for example, in the Patient Browser. A
unique name should also clarify the function that the protocol
has in the scan program.
F.12
0.0
F.124
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.125
F.12
Examination
F.12
F.12
0.0
F.126
Operator Manual
Examination
Starting scanning
manually
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.127
Examination
0.0
F.128
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
Communicating with patients is an essential part of an examination. You need to tell the patient when scanning starts and
ends and give instructions such as breath-hold commands. Frequently required patient instructions are stored in your system
as voice outputs.
F.12
The Execution card is used to define whether a voice output
will be played back before scanning. Actual scanning then
starts automatically. You can also play back a voice output after
the end of scanning.
Chapter F.11, Patient instructions
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.129
Examination
F.12
0.0
F.1210
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1211
F.12
Examination
F.12
You can automatically load an acquired series into a GSP segment of the Exam task card after reconstruction and set automatic starting of movie display (inline movie).
Page F.1713, Movie display
F.12
Select the Load images to graphic segments checkbox.
Select the required GSP segment from the selection list.
F.12
If you want to view the scanned images in movie display, activate inline movie.
F.12
Select the Inline movie check box.
0.0
F.1212
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1213
Examination
F.12
0.0
F.1214
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1215
Examination
F.12
If a protocol has been modified by a software update, the Protocol step properties dialog box will contain the Upgrade Info
subtask card. This tells you what software update changed the
current scan protocol and who made the changes (change
information).
F.12
Protocols with upgrade info are marked by an underscore
under their name in the scan program.
Go to the Upgrade Info subtask card to view the change
information.
0.0
F.1216
Operator Manual
Examination
Once you have read the change information, you can tell the
system not to display the Upgrade Info subtask card for this
protocol again.
F.12
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1217
Examination
F.12
The new settings are applied after you have finished editing
protocol properties on all subtask cards.
F.12
F.12
F.12
You can also close the Protocol step properties dialog box
without applying your changes.
F.12
Click the Cancel button.
0.0
F.1218
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
Scan pauses allow you to plan short interruptions in the examination sequence. You can use scan pauses to administer contrast agent, connect additional coils, or allow the patient to take
a short break.
F.12
The properties of a pause is changed in the Pause Step Properties dialog box. You can call this dialog box from the Exam
Explorer or from the job list.
F.12
The pause properties can only be processed in the part of the
job list that has not yet been executed.
Calling from the Exam
Explorer
F.12
F.12
F.12
F.12
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1219
F.12
Examination
F.12
F.12
F.12
F.12
0.0
F.1220
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
When you first open the Pause step properties dialog box, the
Standard card is on top. You can enter a name and comment
for the pause.
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1221
Examination
The pause name you enter should describe the purpose of the
pause in the scan sequence.
F.12
0.0
F.1222
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1223
Examination
You can also select the contrast agent from the Contrast Agent
Catalog.
F.12
F.12
0.0
F.1224
Operator Manual
Examination
If the contrast agent you want is not listed, you may enter it.
F.12
F.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1225
F.12
Examination
The steps are similar for deleting contrast agents you no longer
need.
F.12
Select the contrast medium you want to delete.
Click the Delete agent button.
F.12
F.12
0.0
F.1226
Operator Manual
Examination
F.12
New settings are applied after you have finished editing pause
properties.
F.12
You may also close the Pause Step Properties dialog box without applying your changes.
F.12
Click the Abort button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1227
Examination
0.0
F.1228
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.13
Printing protocols
F.13
You are able to either print out the parameter overview of protocols, contents of scan programs, examinations, and regions, or
write them to a PDF file (export).
F.13
N OT E
To print out material, connect the printer to your system
either locally or via a network. The program uses the default
settings of this printer. If no printer is connected, it is only
possible to output to a file (export).
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.131
Printing protocols
Examination
Printing
This is the procedure for printing protocols:
F.13
F.13
F.13
You may select one or more protocols, scan programs, examinations, or regions for printing and then open the print dialog
box.
F.13
If necessary, you are able to print an entire protocol tree in the
Exam Explorer. However, preparing such a large volume of
data for printing would take an inordinate length of time.
0.0
F.132
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
F.13
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.133
Printing protocols
Examination
F.13
F.13
0.0
F.134
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
F.13
You set the print scope and the print options in the lower part of
the Print dialog box.
F.13
Print scope
F.13
You can restrict the print scope with the Only programs with
archive flag option. In this way, only protocols with changed
scan programs are printed.
F.13
This option is only activated if you have selected one or more
scan programs, examinations, or regions.
Changed scan programs are marked by an archive flag in the
properties dialog box of the Exam Explorer.
Page F.1629, "Archive" option
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.135
Printing protocols
Examination
F.13
F.13
F.13
F.13
Print option
Explanation
Protocols
Table of contents
N OT E
When setting print output, remember that printing a large
selection of objects can take some time. If necessary, see if
you can reduce the number of objects selected.
F.13
0.0
F.136
Operator Manual
Examination
Setting page
numbering
Printing protocols
F.13
Format
Explanation
Page only
Use the Print total number of pages option to set the page
numbering format.
F.13
If you want to see the total number of pages, select the Print
total number of pages option.
If you do not want to see the total number of pages, deselect
the option again with a mouse click.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.137
Printing protocols
Examination
F.13
F.13
0.0
F.138
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
The print data are prepared and displayed in the Preview window.
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.139
Printing protocols
Examination
F.13
You can change display of the print preview via buttons (in the
lower part of the dialog box).
F.13
F.13
Function
Description
These arrows allow you to jump one page forward
or backward.
These arrows allow you to jump to the beginning
or the end of the report.
These buttons provide various zoom levels
enabling you to view fine details on the display.
The + button enlarges views by a factor of 2, the button reduces views by a factor of 2, the 1:1 tool
resets the display to the default zoom setting.
F.13
0.0
F.1310
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
You can print the displayed data directly from the preview.
F.13
F.13
F.13
Alternatively, you can close the preview and print from the
print dialog box. In this case the print data would have to be
prepared again.
Click the Print button.
The displayed data are printed via the default printer of the sysF.13
tem.
If no default printer is set on your system, the Print button is
dimmed and printing cannot be started. The printer needs to
be installed.
F.13
F.13
F.13
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1311
Printing protocols
Examination
Starting to print
F.13
F.13
0.0
F.1312
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
F.13
You are able to print protocols and lists of contents directly into
a PDF file. This is useful if the system does not have a printer
or if you want to take the data to another location for printing.F.13
The procedure for exporting protocol data into a PDF file differs
only slightly from printing data.
F.13
Open the print dialog box.
Page F.132, Opening the print dialog box
Select the Print to item from the Adobe PDF File selection
list.
The File name input box is active. Example:
F.13
N OT E
The first time you export data, the File Name input box is
empty. On subsequent exports, it always suggests the path
used for the previous export.
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1313
Printing protocols
Export settings
Examination
F.13
F.13
You can store the data in the default directory T:\. This
default directory is the local directory C:\temp on your system.
You can store the data on a diskette in drive A:\.
You can place the data in the directory for data to be
recorded on CD-ROM. This directory is on drive U:\. The
data on drive U:\ can be burned onto CD-ROM later.
You can place the data on another (accessible) network
drive.
0.0
F.1314
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
F.13
N OT E
The storage dialog box allows you to create subdirectories
on drives A:\, T:\, and U:\. Similarly, you may delete
subdirectories and files.
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1315
Printing protocols
Examination
Enter a name for the export file in the File name field.
The next step is to transfer the settings back to the print dialog
box.
F.13
Click the Save button.
The storage dialog box closes and the settings (storage directory, name of export file) are entered as the path in the File
name field.
F.13
F.13
Further settings
F.13
Starting to export
F.13
Once you have made all settings, you can start exporting.
F.13
0.0
F.1316
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
F.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1317
Printing protocols
Examination
0.0
F.1318
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.14
F.14
F.14
Avoiding physiological
effects
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.141
Operating modes
Examination
F.14
SAR and stimulation monitoring may be performed in two operating modes. Normal mode and First level controlled operating mode.
F.14
F.14
F.14
0.0
F.142
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.143
Examination
Stimulation monitoring according to the SAFE model is performed on a regular basis. Depending on country-specific
guidelines, the dB/dt model may be additionally applied.
F.14
F.14
NOTE
SAR and dB/dt monitoring of the limit values is performed
automatically by the system software.
F.14
Correct automatic monitoring presupposes compliance with
the prescribed sequence of operations.
F.14
0.0
F.144
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
The status bar shows you the operating mode used for the current sequence.
F.14
The abbreviations represent the operating modes for stimulation monitoring (Stimu) and SAR monitoring (SAR):
NM (Normal mode)
The limit values for Normal mode are being observed.
FL (First level mode)
The controlled First level mode is active. The SAR values or
dB/dt values can exceed the limits of Normal mode.
SP (stimulation possible)
This mode is only possible with stimulation monitoring
according to the SAFE model. Stimulation can occur during
the scan in progress.
Switching to the First level mode is possible e.g. during automatic SAR or stimulation monitoring.
Page F.1414, Switching modes
Page F.1433, Switch to First level mode
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.145
Examination
F.14
The weight, age, sex, and position of the registered patient are
used directly to calculate the SAR monitoring. For this reason,
it is important to enter the patient data correctly during patient
registration.
F.14
The expected SAR values will be calculated as soon as you
load a new protocol. It not possible to start scanning unless all
limit values are observed.
F.14
During the scan, your system monitors compliance with the limit
values using the transmitting power which is measured continuously. If the permissible transmitting power is exceeded, the
system will shut down immediately. This eliminates the possibility of exceeding the limit values.
F.14
We recommend to set the temperature of the examination room
to 21C, since a higher ambient temperature may lead to SAR
limits that are too low.
F.14
0.0
F.146
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.147
F.14
Examination
0.0
F.148
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.149
Examination
F.14
0.0
F.1410
Operator Manual
Examination
Changing measurement
parameters in the dialog
box
F.14
The lower part of the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! window recommends parameters you can use to avoid exceeding the SAR
limit values.
F.14
While recommendations are made for one parameter each (TR,
images or flip angles), the parameter depends on the values of
other parameters.
If tolerated by the program, you are able to add a pause after
the protocol has been measured.
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1411
Examination
If a change option is dimmed, this means that no change suggestion is available for that particular protocol parameter.
0.0
F.1412
Operator Manual
Examination
Opening a measurement
parameter in the protocol
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1413
Examination
Switching modes
F.14
WA R N I N G
The increased RF load in First level mode may pose a
hazard to the health of the patient.
F.14
Always use Normal mode to examine patients with
impaired heat regulation, patients with a higher than
normal body temperature or pregnant patients.
Always use Normal mode for examinations of fetuses,
testicles, and eyes using local transmitter coils. In addition, please note the special restrictions applying to
these coils.
F.14
WA R N I N G
The increased RF load in First level mode may pose a
hazard to the health of the patient.
F.14
In First level mode, you must monitor the patient carefully (e.g. using a squeeze bulb or pulse sensor).
Ensure that the climate in the examination room is controlled accordingly.
0.0
F.1414
Operator Manual
Examination
N OT E
Normal mode is activated automatically as soon as you
register a new patient.
F.14
First level mode remains active while you are examining
the current patient until you switch modes manually. F.14
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1415
Examination
F.14
0.0
F.1416
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
Switching back to
Normal mode
F.14
You may set Normal mode in the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dialog box as follows.
F.14
F.14
N OT E
The load on the patient may be above the Normal mode.
To ensure that the load status of the patient returns to the
Normal mode level, a pause of at least 3 minutes must be
observed. Otherwise, scanning is shut down by online
monitoring. The online monitoring evaluates the patient
load and shuts down when a permissible limit is violated. F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1417
Examination
F.14
F.14
0.0
F.1418
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
If a task card other than Exam is open and the SAR limit is
exceeded, scanning will be stopped or not even started. The
Warning: Examination interrupted! window is displayed. F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1419
Examination
F.14
Your system allows you to view the data of the current protocol
that is relevant to SAR monitoring.
F.14
SAR meter
F.14
The SAR button on the tool card for the task card Exam contains a level indicator. This indicator lets you determine to what
degree the estimated (look ahead) highest and therefore limiting SAR value of the measurement approximates the critical
SAR limit.
The SAR display is not updated during the measurement; for
this reason it does not show the current SAR load for the
patient.
Dialog box
SAR information
F.14
F.14
0.0
F.1420
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1421
Examination
F.14
The subtask card Prediction displays the SAR values estimated for the current scan for all monitored anatomical areas. F.14
Click the Prediction subtask card to foreground.
0.0
F.1422
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
F.14
SAR values are shown as relative SAR values. The percentages provided refer to the respective SAR limits.
F.14
If one of the values exceeds 100%, the respective SAR limit
value is exceeded. This may be the case, e.g. when you select
a high-performance RF protocol in the Normal mode.
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1423
Bar display
F.14
Examination
A bar displays the SAR value that is currently the highest (the
one that should be limited).
F.14
0.0
F.1424
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1425
Examination
F.14
Ensure that the patient data are correct before the SAR limits
are calculated. You can check the patient data on the Patient
subtask card. If the data are incorrect, you have to register the
patient again.
F.14
Go to the Patient subtask card to display the patient data relevant to the SAR.
0.0
F.1426
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
SAR weight
F.14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Patient Name
Sex of the patient
Age of patient
The body weight entered during patient registration
Weight actually used for SAR monitoring
Patient orientation with respect to magnet
Accumulated specific RF dose
In certain cases, the SAR body weight may differ from the registered body weight.
F.14
The system compares the Registered body weight with statistical population data and corrects it in case of deviations. The
corrected weight is the SAR body weight.
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1427
Examination
F.14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
F.1428
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
The subtask card Current displays the current SAR values for
all monitored anatomical areas.
F.14
Click the Current subtask card into foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1429
Examination
0.0
F.1430
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
F.14
Every time you load a new protocol, the system uses the stimulation models to check whether stimulation may occur during
scanning.
F.14
When stimulation monitoring is active in the Normal mode, it is
not possible to start a scan that would exceed the stimulation
threshold. Nerve stimulation is not expected in Normal mode.F.14
If the system switches to Stimulation possible (SP) mode, the
higher limits will be taken into account. In this case, nerve stimulation may occur during scanning. However, it is not possible
to start a protocol if the system precalculates that the stimulation limit would be exceeded. In this case, you have to e.g. lower
the dB/dt values by making appropriate changes to the measurement parameters.
F.14
Even during scanning, stimulation monitoring is active and controls the actual value gradient signals. If the stimulation limits
are exceeded, active scanning is stopped immediately and the
gradient currents are reset. This eliminates the possibility of
exceeding the limit values.
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1431
Examination
F.14
The following dialog box will appear if your system detects that
the pending scan exceeds the stimulation threshold.
F.14
0.0
F.1432
Operator Manual
Examination
Switch to First
level mode
F.14
F.14
F.14
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1433
Examination
F.14
To continue running the protocol, you can modify the parameters in 3 different ways:
F.14
Have the system calculate suitable parameter changes and
display them in the Stimulation Monitor - Recommendations dialog box. Apply these parameter changes.
Change the gradient mode of the protocol in the Stimulation
Monitor - Recommendations dialog box.
Open the protocol and change one or more measurement
parameters on the parameter cards so that the stimulation
limit is no longer exceeded.
0.0
F.1434
Operator Manual
Examination
Calculating parameter
changes
F.14
Have the system calculate recommended changes to the measurement parameters that are below the stimulation limit.
F.14
Click the Calculate button in the Stimulation Monitor
Stimulation Limit Exceeded! dialog box.
The Stimulation Monitor - Recommendations dialog box is
displayed.
F.14
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1435
Examination
You may also set a new, slower gradient mode. The system will
modify the gradient slope iteratively until the simulation limit is
no longer exceeded. As a result, changes are made to the TE,
TR, and measurement time.
F.14
Change the gradient mode by activating the Adapt to option.
The modified gradient mode in a protocol is marked by an asterisk on the Sequence/Part2 parameter card.
Page F.567, Parameter card Sequence Part 2
F.14
F.14
0.0
F.1436
Operator Manual
Examination
F.14
If there are no changes for the current protocol, the dialog box
Stimulation Monitor - Recommendations is displayed along
with the message "Measurement not possible!" Change the
protocol."
F.14
You may only modify the parameters on the parameter cards.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters
F.14
Click Open Protocol.
You may combine several parameter changes in the parameter
cards.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters
F.14
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1437
Examination
F.14
The scan will not start if you are working on a task card other
than the Exam card and your system precalculates that the
stimulation limit would be exceeded.
F.14
0.0
F.1438
Operator Manual
Examination
Or
F.14
F.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1439
Examination
F.14
Select System > Stimulation Monitor - Information to display information about stimulation monitoring.
The Stimulation Monitor - Information window opens with the
SAFE subtask card and (depending on country-specific
approval) the dB/dt card.
F.14
F.14
The SAFE subtask card contains a list of calculated and measured parameters that are taken into account in the SAFE
model.
Page F.143, Limit values according to stimulation models F.14
To query the stimulation parameters according to the SAFE
model, go to the SAFE subtask card.
0.0
F.1440
Operator Manual
Examination
The left-hand side of the subtask card displays the precalculated parameter values of the stimulation monitoring. The measured data is shown on the right. The data refer to the protocol
in progress or just completed.
F.14
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1441
Examination
F.14
0.0
F.1442
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.15
Physiologically Controlled
Scans
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.151
Examination
N OT E
You can only perform physiologically controlled scans if
your system includes a PMU display.
F.15
0.0
F.152
Operator Manual
Examination
Preparing a physiologically
controlled scan
F.15
Applying sensors
F.15
Position sensors on the patient prior to a physiologically triggered scan. These sensors pick up the signals used for physiologically triggering.
Refer to the System Manual
F.15
ECG electrodes for recording the ECG
Pulse sensor for recording the pulse curve
Respiratory cushion for recording the respiratory curve
PMU display
F.15
The signal curves of the sensors are shown on the PMU display
integrated in the housing of the magnet. This allows you to
check whether the quality of the signals is satisfactory while you
are in the examination room.
F.15
You monitor the physiological signals on the Physiological
Display dialog box in the control room.
Page F.155, Monitoring signals on the physiological displayF.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.153
Trigger indication
F.15
Examination
You can listen to the trigger signal (a short beep) via the intercom system. Use the slide switch on the console to adjust the
volume of the beep.
see System Manual
F.15
F.15
0.0
F.154
Operator Manual
Examination
F.15
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.155
Changing window
display
F.15
Examination
0.0
F.156
Operator Manual
Examination
Displaying physiological
signals
F.15
F.15
F.15
F.15
Slow
Medium
Fast
The speed at which the signals move across the image area
may be set to one of three levels.
F.15
Click one of these buttons to select a recording speed.
Or
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.157
Selecting a signal
F.15
Examination
You may only select up to two signals for display in the Physiological Display window, even if more than two sensors are connected.
F.15
F.15
Displaying a second
signal
F.15
You may have two signals displayed. The tracks for the two signals are synchronized in time.
F.15
F.15
Signal 1
Signal 2
0.0
F.158
Operator Manual
Examination
F.15
F.15
F.15
Long-term statistical
values
F.15
F.15
Long-term statistics
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.159
F.15
Examination
F.15
Faulty contact
F.15
The system detects poor sensor contact. Relevant error messages are displayed on the status bar of the Physiological Display window when Border display mode is set:
F.15
Lead error (with ECG)
Sensor not connected (with pulse sensor)
Current ECG El. are connected
0.0
F.1510
Operator Manual
Examination
F.15
The various time ranges of a scan are indicated during scanning in a bar below the first signal curve in the Physiological
Display window.
F.15
Each time range is assigned a different color:
F.15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1511
Display of trigger
information
Examination
F.15
0.0
F.1512
Operator Manual
Examination
Setting parameters
F.15
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1513
F.15
Examination
Click the Physio tab to move the parameter card into foreground.
The Physio parameter card is divided into several subtask
cards. Different subtask cards are shown depending on the
installed and configured PMU and on the sequence the protocol
is based on.
F.15
Signal 1
Use the Signal 1 subtask card to set the parameters for the
1st physiological signal.
Cardio
Use the Cardio subtask card to set the parameters for cardiac examinations.
PACE
This subtask card is used to set additional parameters to correct breath-hold motion and for multiple breath-hold scans.
F.15
0.0
F.1514
Operator Manual
Examination
F.15
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1515
Examination
0.0
F.1516
Operator Manual
Examination
The ECG Signal shows the action potential of the heart in the
form of a curve.
F.15
The individual curve phases correspond to the respective contraction or relaxation phases of the heart. The R wave in the
QRS complex is used as triggering point for the scan.
F.15
P
Q S
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1517
Examination
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.0
F.1518
Operator Manual
Examination
Average cycle
F.15
Your system calculates the Average cycle from statistical values. This value indicates the time that has elapsed between two
trigger events.
F.15
The average cycle is recalculated and updated continually. You
cannot change this value.
F.15
When Averag. cycle displays No Signal, then either no sensors are connected or the sensors are not providing a usable
signal.
F.15
Captured cycle
F.15
You can have the acquisition window calculated from the current cycle.
F.15
Click the Captured cycle contour button.
The value of the current average cycle is displayed on the button and used to calculate the acquisition window. Protocol
parameters may have to be adjusted.
F.15
The Captured Cycle parameter is reset as soon as you edit the
value for the acquisition window.
F.15
Target RR
F.15
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1519
Acquisition window
F.15
Examination
The Acquisition window parameter represents the time available for data acquisition after a trigger pulse in a physiologically
triggered scan.
F.15
The delay time, number of phases, and repetition time are proportional to the size of the Acquisition window.
F.15
Place the mouse pointer over the Acquisition window input
field for a few seconds to display a tool tip. It shows the value
recommended by the system.
Enter a time (in ms) in the spin box.
Please also note the difference in meaning between the terms
system acquisition time and scan acquisition time:
F.15
System acquisition time
Calculated by the system; difference between the average
cycle and twice the standard deviation.
The acquisition window cannot be larger than the system
acquisition time.
Scan acquisition time
The time actually used by the system for data acquisition.
0.0
F.1520
Operator Manual
Examination
Number of triggers
F.15
The Trigger pulse field lets you define whether every trigger
event or only every nth event should trigger a scan.
F.15
Delay time
Entering
F.15
You may enter a delay time for the ECG/Trigger signal This
parameter defines the delay before the system starts the scan
after the trigger signal has been received. For example, for an
adult patient with a pulse rate of 70/min, you will obtain an
image of the systole with a 0 second delay time, and an image
of the end diastole with a 250 to 350 ms delay time. This allows
you to acquire images at any point in the signal cycle.
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1521
Repetition time TR
F.15
Examination
Concatenations
F.15
Segments
F.15
With the segments, you may define the number of rows in the k
space that are measured for an image during a TR interval. F.15
Enter the number of segments in the Segments spin box.
0.0
F.1522
Operator Manual
Examination
Phases
F.15
Arrhythmia detection
F.15
Trigger window
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1523
Graphic display of
the time ranges
F.15
Examination
The top right areas of the parameter card shows the physiological signal and the time ranges resulting from the parameters
set.
Page F.1511, Graphic display of time ranges
F.15
Unlike the Physiological Display dialog box, a frozen image is
displayed on the Physio parameter card.
F.15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Delay time
Repetition time
Twice the standard deviation
Scan acquisition window
If e.g. the scan acquisition time set is longer than the time
between two trigger events, the scan acquisition window will
overlap the following trigger section. The time overlap is shown
in red.
F.15
If the input focus is on the trigger delay or TR, the corresponding time range has a blue border.
F.15
0.0
F.1524
Operator Manual
Examination
F.15
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The first pulse wave ("premature pulse wave") is used for triggering. This wave corresponds to the systolic blood pressure.
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1525
Examination
F.15
(1)
(2)
(1) Expiration
(2) Inspiration
Select Resp./Trigger from the Signal 1/Mode subtask card.
0.0
F.1526
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1527
Average cycle
F.15
Examination
Acquisition window
F.15
The Acquisition window shows the time used for the scan
after a trigger pulse in a physiologically triggered scan.
F.15
Enter a time in ms in the Acquisition Window spin box.
Place the mouse pointer over the Acquisition window input
field to display a tool tip. It shows the value recommended by
the system.
Threshold
F.15
0.0
F.1528
Operator Manual
Examination
Respiratory phases
F.15
F.15
F.15
Concatenations
F.15
F.15
F.15
After you have set and checked all parameters, you may start
scanning.
Page F.1534, Starting the scan
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1529
Examination
F.15
You can set the same parameters on the Signal 1 subtask card
as on the ECG/Trigger card.
F.15
0.0
F.1530
Operator Manual
Examination
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1531
Examination
F.15
0.0
F.1532
Operator Manual
Examination
Calculated phases
F.15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1533
Examination
F.15
Loading parameters
F.15
F.15
0.0
F.1534
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.16
Managing scan
programs
F.16
F.16
Copying scan programs from the Siemens tree into the customer tree. You can then use these programs to perform
examinations.
Changing scan programs of the customer tree. For example,
you can re-organize, delete, or add new program steps or
make permanent changes to the measurement parameters
of a protocol.
Exchanging scan programs or protocols with other syngo
MR systems. In an intermediate step, you will be required to
use external data media (diskette) or a file system.
You cannot change the existing scan programs in the Siemens tree.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.161
Examination
You can only edit entries in the customer tree of the Exam
Explorer (e.g. delete exams or change measurement parameters of a protocol), if you have the appropriate authorization.
Page B.31, Information for Users
F.16
You will generally work offline with the Exam Explorer, i.e. not
during an examination in progress. In some cases, you may use
the Exam Explorer to search for scan programs or protocols
during an examination and transfer them directly into the
queue.
F.16
The Exam Explorer is primarily a tool for managing and maintaining your scan programs. If you want to change a scan program immediately prior to an examination (and for this particular examination only), use the joblist in the program control
instead.
F.16
The Exam Explorer provides a print dialog for you to print protocols with an overview of parameter settings and lists of protocol contents.
F.16
0.0
F.162
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
Click this button on the tool bar of the Exam task card.
Or
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.163
Examination
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
F.164
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
The program window of the Exam Explorer is similar to Windows Explorer. You will be able to intuitively use the Exam
Explorer in a short time.
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
To optimize the display, you may move the border between the
navigation area and content area.
F.16
Place the cursor on the border line between the two window
areas.
The cursor changes shape.
F.16
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the border line to
the left or to the right.
The size of the content area will increase and the size of the
navigation area will be reduced, or vice versa.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.165
Examination
Data levels
F.16
0.0
F.166
Operator Manual
Examination
Level 3: Examination
An Examination contains all scan programs for a certain body
part or anatomical structure of a body region.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.167
Examination
F.16
If you select the customer/Siemens tree, a region, or an examination in the navigation area, its content will be listed in the
content area.
F.16
Scan program
Examination
Examination region
Customer/Siemens level
Scan program
Program instructions
0.0
F.168
Operator Manual
Examination
Tool bar
F.16
Cut
F.16
Copy
F.16
Paste
F.16
Delete
F.16
Move selection up
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.169
Examination
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1610
Operator Manual
Examination
You may use the Protocol View and the Protocol Properties
dialog box to obtain information regarding the parameters and
properties of the unlicensed protocols.
Page F.1644, Viewing protocol parameters
Page F.122, Editing protocol properties
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1611
Examination
F.16
Selecting an examination
tree
F.16
First decide whether you are looking for a scan program in the
Siemens tree or in the customer tree.
F.16
Click the + symbol in front of the entry in the navigation area.
The folder level expands to show the examination region stored
in the Siemens or customer tree. The + symbol becomes a symbol.
F.16
Selecting an examination
region
F.16
0.0
F.1612
Operator Manual
Examination
Selecting an examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
If you the scan program you a looking for is not in the open
folder, just look in one of the other folders.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1613
Examination
F.16
Select Tools > Find from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
0.0
F.1614
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1615
Examination
0.0
F.1616
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1617
Examination
Processing entries
F.16
You may copy regions, examinations, scan programs and protocols, delete them, or rename them. You can also change the
order of the lists.
F.16
You cannot make changes in the Siemens tree. You may only
view the objects (regions, examinations, programs, and program steps) and copy them to the customer tree.
If modify the content of any scan programs, a message box
will be displayed as you exit the content area. You will be
prompted to save the scan program with the changes or in its
original state.
0.0
F.1618
Operator Manual
Examination
Moving entries
F.16
First open the examination tree, examination region, examination, or the program whose content you want to re-order.
Select the entry that you want to move in the content area.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1619
Moving up
Examination
F.16
Select Edit > Move Up from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
Select Edit > Move Down from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
Hold down the left mouse button down and drag the entry to
its new position.
0.0
F.1620
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
You may transfer examination regions, examinations, scan programs and program instructions from the Siemens tree to your
customer tree by copying them.
F.16
You can also use the copy function to reorganize the program
instructions, scan programs, examinations, and examination
regions in your customer tree.
F.16
Copy
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1621
Cut
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1622
Operator Manual
Examination
Pasting
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1623
Examination
Deleting entries
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1624
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1625
Examination
This subtask card shows the name, a brief description, and path
of the selected entry. You can also see the date and time this
entry was last changed.
F.16
0.0
F.1626
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
Or
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1627
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1628
Operator Manual
Examination
"Archive" option
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1629
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1630
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Select Object > New from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1631
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1632
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Select the required body region from the Body part examined selection list.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1633
Examination
F.16
The Body part examined selection list shows all the body
regions of your system.
F.16
The regions are grouped as follows:
F.16
DICOM regions
DICOM regions are regions defined in the DICOM standard.
SIEMENS regions
SIEMENS regions are regions defined by SIEMENS and
published in compliance with DICOM specifications.
Customer regions
Customer regions are regions users can define for themselves.
You may only edit the customer regions in the list of body
regions. You may not modify DICOM and SIEMENS regions.
Click the Organize button to edit the list of the body regions.
The Organize Body Part Examined list dialog box opens.
F.16
0.0
F.1634
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
Customer region
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1635
Examination
F.16
Enter a name for the new body region in the input field.
The name must consist of no more than 16 characters. The
permitted characters are capital letters, figures, blanks, and
underscores.
Click the Add button.
The new customer region will appear as a new entry in the list.
F.16
Deleting a customer
region
F.16
You may remove from the list any customer regions that are no
longer required.
F.16
Select the customer region in the list.
Click the Delete button.
The entry will be deleted from the list.
F.16
0.0
F.1636
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Select the region for which you want to create a new examination.
Select Object > New from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1637
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
Enter a name for the new scan program and confirm with
OK.
The new program is appended to the list of scan programs of
the open examination.
F.16
0.0
F.1638
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
You may add existing scan protocols and pauses to a scan program.
F.16
All steps are performed in the content area of the Exam
Explorer.
F.16
Please note:
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1639
Examination
Finding a protocol
F.16
The protocols you insert will usually be from other scan programs. You can make use of any program steps from customer
and Siemens programs.
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1640
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1641
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1642
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1643
Examination
F.16
Before you insert a protocol into your scan program, you can
review the protocol parameters.
F.16
Select a protocol.
Click the View Protocol button.
The View Protocol window opens.
F.16
You will find the parameter card stack in the protocol view. You
can view all cards and measurement parameters of the protocol, but you may not change them.
F.16
0.0
F.1644
Operator Manual
Examination
Inserting a protocol
F.16
Select the protocol that you want to transfer to your scan program.
If you want to transfer two or more protocols from a program,
you may extend your selection with the Ctrl and Shift keys.
Page A.217, Selecting several objects
Click the Insert button.
Or
F.16
Close the Insert Program Steps dialog box once you have
copied all required protocols into your scan program.
F.16
Click the Close button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1645
Examination
F.16
Sequences are sequences of commands for controlling scanning: they control the RF fields (RF pulses), magnetic field gradients, data acquisition, and image reconstruction. Protocols,
on the other hand, contain the measurement parameter settings for a sequence.
F.16
You can access a sequence and create a new protocol for the
current scan program.
F.16
Select Insert > Sequence.
The Insert Sequences dialog box opens.
F.16
0.0
F.1646
Operator Manual
Examination
Go to the Folder selection list. You may either insert a Siemens sequence or a sequence from the customer tree.
The Sequences display field now lists all sequences from the
Siemens and customer trees in alphabetical order.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1647
Checking sequences
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1648
Operator Manual
Examination
Selecting sequence(s)
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1649
Examination
F.16
N OT E
It is only possible to create a new protocol from a series or
image if the series or image was acquired on your system
or on a system of the same type
(same hardware configuration, software version syngo MR
2006T and higher).
F.16
0.0
F.1650
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Or
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1651
Reconstructed protocol
by conversion
Examination
F.16
If the images or series were not acquired with the same software version or on the same system type, you can attempt to
convert the images.
F.16
Select a series or image from the stamp segments of the
Maestro layout, from the large image segments, or from the
Patient Browser.
Press and hold the Shift key, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag & drop the series or image into the Exam
Explorer.
Do not press the Shift key too early because then drag & drop
might not work.
A scan protocol is created from the image/series and added to
the scan program, if conversion was possible.
F.16
The changes caused by conversion are identified as upgrade
info.
Page F.1216, Displaying upgrade info
F.16
If conversion fails, an error message appears.
F.16
0.0
F.1652
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1653
Examination
The pause is inserted in the list and the Pause Step Properties
dialog box opens. Enter a name and comment for the pause in
this dialog box. If the pause is for administering contrast agent,
you can also enter information regarding the contrast agent.
Page F.1219, Editing pause properties
F.16
0.0
F.1654
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1655
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1656
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Use the System task card to define the coil elements required
for the scan protocol.
Page P.185, Coils and coil elements Routine, System
Coils
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1657
Examination
Use the special selection list to set one coil for each of the four
coil plug-ins. The list shows only coils that can be connected to
the plug.
F.16
Example: Selection list for coil plug 1
F.16
0.0
F.1658
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
You can apply the new coil configuration and all other parameter changes to the protocol.
F.16
Click the OK button.
Your changes are applied and the Protocol Editor closes.
F.16
You can also close the Protocol Editor without applying your
changes.
F.16
Click the Cancel button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1659
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1660
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Once you have inserted all protocols and scan pauses into your
scan program, organized them in the desired sequence, and
edited your measurement parameters, you will save the result.
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1661
Examination
0.0
F.1662
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
Use the selection list to select a region for your scan program.
You may also create a new region.
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1663
Examination
NOTE
If you save your program under an existing name, a
message window asks whether you want to overwrite the
selected scan program. If you confirm that you do, the
previous scan program will be replaced. You will no longer
be able to access the old version of the program.
F.16
NOTE
See notice above.
F.16
The program is saved and the dialog box remains open so that
you can continue editing.
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1664
Operator Manual
Examination
F.16
You can also save the changed scan program under the old
name.
F.16
Select Object > Save from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1665
Examination
F.16
You can also use the Exam Explorer to find a scan program
and transfer it to the queue.
F.16
Transferring a scan
program
F.16
0.0
F.1666
Operator Manual
Examination
Or
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1667
Examination
F.16
F.16
F.16
Select Tools > Filming Study Layouts from the main menu
of the Exam Explorer.
0.0
F.1668
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1669
Examination
Importing/exporting examination
database objects
F.16
0.0
F.1670
Operator Manual
Examination
Importing objects
F.16
Select Object > Import from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1671
Examination
F.16
0.0
F.1672
Operator Manual
Examination
All edx files in the selected folder are now displayed in the content window.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1673
Examination
0.0
F.1674
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1675
Examination
To shorten the time required for conversion, exclude the nonexecutable programs that you do not want to import.
F.16
0.0
F.1676
Operator Manual
Examination
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1677
Examination
Exporting objects
F.16
F.16
F.16
F.16
0.0
F.1678
Operator Manual
Examination
The content window now shows all "edx" files present in the target directory.
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1679
Examination
NOTE
The exported objects are retained on your system. The
export function only copies the objects to the target drive or
network address.
F.16
0.0
F.1680
Operator Manual
Examination
Printing protocols
F.16
From the Exam Explorer, you can print or write to a PDF file
(Adobe Portable Document Format) protocols as an overview
of all parameter settings and lists of protocol contents.
F.16
The parameter overview enables you to directly compare the
parameter settings of the protocols. The lists of contents help
you find you way round the numerous available exams and scan
programs and make it easier for you to organize and maintain
the Exam Explorer.
F.16
The print option is based on your object selection. Individual
protocols you select are printed. If you have selected an object
containing more than one protocol (e.g. a scan program), all
protocols are printed.
F.16
If a selected object contains more than one scan program, you
can only print user-defined programs.
Page F.131, Printing protocols
F.16
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1681
Examination
Exam Explorer
Closing
F.16
Select Object > Exit from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or
F.16
Click the Close window button in the upper right of the title
bar of the Exam Explorer.
0.0
F.1682
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.17
F.17
You can load the series from the stamp segments into the large
image segments and view them in movie display.
F.17
This provides a life-like impression of the morphology and physiology of the examination region and might provide initial diagnostic results even before the examination is completed.
F.17
There are numerous ways of configuring and controlling movie
display.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.171
Examination
Maestro layout
F.17
F.17
(7)
(1)
(6)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
0.0
F.172
Operator Manual
Examination
(1) Determine which series are suitable for slice positioning for
the following protocols and load them into the large image
segments using Drag & Drop.
(2) Drag & drop a series into the program control to repeat a
scan.
(3) Sort series into the stamp segments.
(4) Transfer the series for filming.
(5) Transfer the series from the stamp segments directly to
other task cards for postprocessing.
(6) Save the series together in a new series or append them to
an existing series.
(7) Export the series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.173
Examination
F.17
Loading manually
F.17
Loading automatically
F.17
0.0
F.174
Operator Manual
Examination
F.17
You can change the layout of the series in the stamp segments
as desired.
F.17
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over a stamp segment containing a series, a tool tip displays information about
the loaded series.
F.17
You can load series from stamp segments into the large image
segments to position slices or start movie display.
F.17
Mark the large image segment.
Double-click a stamp segment.
The series in this stamp segment is loaded into the previously
selected image segment.
F.17
Or
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.175
Examination
F.17
F.17
F.17
You can save the series to a new series directly from the stamp
segments, append them to an existing series, film, export, or
load them into other post processing cards.
F.17
The procedure is similar to the one described for images and
series in the large image segments.
Page F.346, Saving, exporting, and transferring images F.17
0.0
F.176
Operator Manual
Examination
F.17
You may load any number of series into the stamp segments. A
maximum of 12 series are displayed.
F.17
Small arrow buttons are displayed in the far left segment if more
than 12 series are loaded.
F.17
Navigating between
series
F.17
You can move the input focus by one segment to the left or
right.
F.17
Press the left or right arrow key on your keyboard.
If the input focus was on the far left or far right segment, a hidden series will be moved into the visible area.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.177
Examination
You can move all series by one position to the left or right.
F.17
F.17
Click one of the two arrow buttons in the far left segment.
Or
F.17
Press the Ctrl + left arrow or Ctrl + right arrow key combination.
You can shift the series in the stamp segments so that the first
series is displayed in the far left segment.
F.17
Press the Home key on your keyboard.
You can shift the series in the stamp segments so that the last
series is displayed in the far right segment.
F.17
Press the End key on your keyboard.
0.0
F.178
Operator Manual
Examination
Shifting series by 12
segments
F.17
F.17
You can shift all series in blocks of 12 segments. This hides all
series previously visible.
F.17
Press the Page or Page key on your keyboard.
F.17
Page
Scrolling images in a
stamp segment
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.179
Examination
F.17
Suppose you are viewing the series in the stamp segments and
determine that some of the series have to be rescanned. You
can remove the existing series and sort the rescanned series
back into the stamp segments.
F.17
Removing series
F.17
The series are removed from the stamp segments only. They
are still available in the Patient Browser.
F.17
Select the required stamp segments.
Page F.322, Selecting images explicitly and implicitly
Selecting a stamp segment automatically selects the whole
series.
Select Remove Segment from the context menu.
The selected series will be removed. The adjacent series on the
right will be shifted to the left to fill the gap.
F.17
Removing a segment
0.0
F.1710
Operator Manual
Examination
You can also remove the series while retaining the empty segments.
F.17
Select Edit > Clear Document(s) from the main menu.
Inserting an empty
stamp segment
F.17
Inserting a segment
If you want to load multiple series requiring several empty segments, you may repeat this step as often as necessary.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1711
F.17
Examination
You may load series from the program control, the Patient
Browser, or the large image segments.
F.17
Select the series to be loaded.
Drag & drop your selection into an empty stamp segment.
F.17
N OT E
If the target segment is not empty, the existing series will be
replaced by the first series loaded using Drag & Drop. F.17
0.0
F.1712
Operator Manual
Examination
Movie display
F.17
During a scan or scan pause, you can start the movie display
and check the quality of the images being acquired, and gather
preliminary diagnostic information.
F.17
A large image segment is used for movie display. The images
included in a movie are always from a single series.
F.17
You can optimize the movie display according to your own
requirements by:
F.17
F.17
N OT E
The movie quality may be affected by processes running in
background.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1713
Examination
F.17
Series are grouped for movie display to provide a better overview. Movies display the images of one group. However, it is
possible to jump from group to group.
F.17
F.17
F.17
A series is broken down into multiple groups if the current display order results in consecutive images with the same primary
sort criterion but a different secondary sort criterion.
F.17
Example: Multi-slice multi-phase series (cardiac imaging)
Sort scheme SP >> TT >> TA
This series is divided into n groups because it contains images
of n different slice positions and different trigger times.
F.17
The first group contains all images with slice position 1 and different trigger times. The second group contains all images with
slice position 2, etc.
F.17
0.0
F.1714
Operator Manual
Examination
F.17
F.17
Place the input focus on the segment you want to use for
movie display.
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie ON from the main menu.
Or
F.17
F.17
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1715
F.17
Examination
0.0
F.1716
Operator Manual
Examination
F.17
You can start, pause, and stop the movie display via the keyboard, mouse, main menu or context menu. The Movie Control
dialog box provides additional features.
F.17
F.17
running
Movie display is active and running. You can advance to the
next group or series.
paused
Movie display is active, but paused.
You can view image text or scroll between images.
stopped
Movie display is not active. Series divided into groups are
ungrouped.
stopped
Sp
ac
eb
ar
Es
c
c
Es
Spacebar
paused
running
Spacebar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1717
F.17
Examination
F.17
F.17
F.17
0.0
F.1718
Operator Manual
Examination
Menu control
F.17
F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie ON from the main menu or
Movie ON from the context menu while movie display is running or paused.
Movie display stops. The checkmark next to the menu item disappears.
F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie Paused ON from the main
menu while movie display is running.
Movie display pauses. A checkmark appears next to the menu
item.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1719
Examination
F.17
You can use the Movie Control dialog box to define the speed
and order of movie display. You can define the range displayed,
jump to the next group, and switch to realtime mode.
F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie Control.
The Movie Control dialog box opens.
F.17
0.0
F.1720
Operator Manual
Examination
The Movie Properties dialog box lets you specify that the
Movie Properties dialog box will be opened automatically
every time the movie display is started.
Page F.1732, Configuring movie display
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1721
F.17
Examination
0.0
F.1722
Operator Manual
Examination
Display order of
the images
F.17
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1723
F.17
Examination
You can set the number of images (frames) displayed per second in movie display either numerically or using a slider.
F.17
Enter an integer between 1 and 99 and press Enter.
Or
F.17
F.17
If you enter a higher speed in the input field, the value range
of the slider is adjusted accordingly.
When you move the slider, the value in the input field is
updated dynamically.
The position of the slider remains unchanged during movie
mode, i.e. the slider always indicates the speed set by the
user, not the actual speed.
The actual speed is displayed in the bottom right corner of the
Movie Control dialog box.
F.17
0.0
F.1724
Operator Manual
Examination
F.17
Realtime mode can be used to display series of images with different time parameters.
F.17
In realtime mode, images are played back in movie display
according to the time interval at which they were acquired. F.17
In realtime mode, the movie display speed is determined by this
time parameter.
F.17
If the time interval between images is very short, you may find
that the realtime speed is greater than the maximum speed
technically possible.
F.17
In this case, you can skip images in movie display.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1725
LED display
Examination
The color of the LED indicates the status of the movie display.F.17
F.17
F.17
Color
Status
gray
stopped or paused
green
yellow
red
F.17
0.0
F.1726
Operator Manual
Examination
Navigating in movie
display
F.17
The range display in the center of the Movie Control dialog box
shows the range of the current group.
F.17
In paused status, the position of the slider indicates the position
of the current image within the group.
F.17
You can drag the slider beyond the boundary of the group. If
you switch to running status afterwards, the movie range will
be set to the beginning and end of the group associated with
the current image index.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1727
Scrolling between
images
F.17
Examination
F.17
F.17
0.0
F.1728
Operator Manual
Examination
Scrolling between
groups
F.17
In running or paused status, you can use buttons, menu commands or the symbol keys to scroll between groups.
F.17
You may also move from the last group of series A to the first
group of series B.
F.17
If the series in the movie segment contain only one group, you
will scroll between series.
Click this button.
Or
F.17
F.17
F.17
F.17
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1729
Examination
0.0
F.1730
Operator Manual
Examination
After you have started the movie display, the "from" marker will
be at the beginning and the "to" marker at the end of the group
to be displayed.
F.17
If a series contains only one group, the "from" marker will be at
the leftmost position and the "to" marker at the rightmost position in the range display.
F.17
Move the slider so that the last image of the new movie
sequence is displayed in the movie segment.
Click this button.
The "to" marker will be assigned to this position.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1731
Examination
F.17
F.17
F.17
0.0
F.1732
Operator Manual
Examination
All dialog elements have tool tips. Position and hold the
mouse pointer over a dialog element to display the corresponding tool tip.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1733
Examination
F.17
F.17
0.0
F.1734
Operator Manual
Examination
Displaying additional
information
F.17
If the references lines are activated in the menu (View > Reference Lines ON) and in the Movie Properties dialog box, the
position of the current image in the movie segment will be indicated by a reference line in the non-movie segments and continuously updated in running or paused status.
F.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1735
Examination
If this option is activated, all GSP objects and all orientation aids
selected via the menu (reference lines, adjustment volume, coil
elements, etc.) will be displayed in the movie segment in running or paused status.
Page F.431, Displaying orientation aids
F.17
F.17
F.17
F.17
F.17
You check the parameter settings and apply them if they are
suitable for the current movie display.
F.17
Click Apply.
The settings are now applied to the movie display. The Movie
Properties dialog box remains open.
F.17
0.0
F.1736
Operator Manual
Examination
Changing a predefined
parameter set
F.17
You can change the parameters sets and store them permanently so that they are available after you reboot the system. F.17
Select a parameter set from the list.
Change the settings in the Movie Properties dialog box.
Click Store.
The current settings in the Movie Properties dialog box are
assigned to the selected parameter set. The current movie display is not updated.
F.17
Applying temporary
settings
F.17
You can define the parameters and apply them to the current
movie display without assigning these settings to a parameter
set or saving them.
F.17
Define the parameters in the Movie Properties dialog box.
Click Apply.
The current movie display is updated. The parameter set disF.17
played in the Store Set list is not changed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1737
Canceling the
configuration
F.17
Examination
You can cancel the configuration and close the dialog box without applying the changes.
F.17
Click Close.
Or
F.17
F.17
Or
F.17
0.0
F.1738
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.18
Breast Biopsy
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.181
Breast Biopsy
Requirements
Examination
F.18
0.0
F.182
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
You start the Breast Biopsy examination from the Exam task
card.
F.18
Load the required thorax images into the image area.
Select Image Tools > Breast Biopsy from the main menu.
The Breast Biopsy dialog box opens.
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.183
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
Switching area
You'll edit the reference images, set markers, and calculate
the data for the biopsy.
Data area
The text fields are used to display the current patient data
(name, date of birth) and the data calculated on the basis of
the angulation used.
The functions for graphic slice positioning are not active while
the Breast Biopsy dialog box is open.
When you open the Breast Biopsy dialog box, the system
checks the patient position. If another patient position than the
"head first, prone" position is used, a message box appears and
the examination is aborted.
F.18
0.0
F.184
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
The first time you open the Breast Biopsy dialog box, it is positioned in front of the parameter cards. You can move it to any
position on the screen.
F.18
It is also possible to minimize the Breast Biopsy dialog box to
keep your screen uncluttered.
F.18
If you switch back to the Exam task card from another task
card, the dialog box is restored to full size.
Switching to another
task card
F.18
If you switch to another task card (e.g. Viewer, 3D), the Breast
Biopsy dialog remains open in background.
F.18
As soon as you select the Exam task card again, the Breast
Biopsy dialog box will be displayed again. Both the previous
position as well as the contents of the Breast Biopsy dialog
box remain the same.
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.185
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
F.18
F.18
F.18
0.0
F.186
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
After you have registered a patient and completed the first scan
(localizer), the reference images will be displayed in the image
area of the Exam task card.
F.18
F.18
You are able to scroll images and series to search for images
suitable for reference and lesion markers.
F.18
Image-by-image scrolling
F.18
F.18
F.18
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.187
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
F.18
F.18
Selecting images
F.18
0.0
F.188
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
Once you have selected images for the Breast Biopsy examination, you may optimize the image display.
F.18
The following methods are available:
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.189
Breast Biopsy
Flipping images
horizontally and
vertically
Examination
Horizontal flipping swaps the top and bottom of the image. The
axis of rotation is horizontal.
F.18
F.18
Vertical flipping swaps the left and right side of the image. The
axis of rotation is vertical.
F.18
F.18
Flipping horizontally
Flipping vertically
0.0
F.1810
Operator Manual
Examination
Rotating images
about 90
Breast Biopsy
F.18
Rotating about 90
degrees
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1811
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
The buttons in the Breast Biopsy dialog box are used to calculate the path of the biopsy needle.
F.18
F.18
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
0.0
F.1812
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
After you have adjusted the reference image to your requirements, set the reference marker at the predefined starting position of the biopsy needle.
F.18
Click the Cross hair button in the Breast Biopsy dialog box.
Click the position in the segment where you want to set the
reference marker.
The cross hair is displayed.
F.18
Confirm the correct position of the cross hair with respect to the
reference marker.
F.18
Click the Store Marker Position button in the Breast
Biopsy dialog box.
Predefined
starting position
Reference marker
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1813
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
The system uses the position of the reference marker to calculate the coordinates in the patient coordinate system and enters
them in the window next to the Store Marker Position button.
The coordinates are displayed in metric units. At the same time
a check mark appears next to the Store Marker Position button. The position of the reference marker is stored.
F.18
F.18
0.0
F.1814
Operator Manual
Examination
Moving a reference
marker
Breast Biopsy
F.18
Or
F.18
Click the cross hair and drag it to a new position while keeping the left mouse button pressed.
The new coordinates of the reference marker are shown in the
display window. The new position of the reference marker is
stored.
F.18
F.18
You may zoom or pan the image to determine the position of the
reference marker.
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1815
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
F.18
0.0
F.1816
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
As with the reference marker, you are able to move the lesion
marker and zoom or pan the reference image.
F.18
You are also able to change the order in which you set the
markers.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1817
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
When you open the Breast Biopsy dialog box, "Lesion 1" is
entered as the default name in the Image Comment display
field.
F.18
The lesion name is used for generating a series name as well
as for image annotation.
F.18
The text index increases in increments of 1 following each calculation, e.g. "Lesion 2".
F.18
The lesion name also appears on the printed worksheet.
F.18
F.18
You may change the lesion name to any name you wish.
F.18
0.0
F.1818
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
After you have set the reference and lesion markers, you start
the calculation of the biopsy channel.
F.18
Starting calculation
F.18
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1819
Breast Biopsy
Displaying the
series name
Examination
F.18
One new series per angle is generated. The series name, e.g.
"Biopsy 15: Lesion 1" includes the following:
F.18
"Biopsy" for the examination
"15" for the angle
"Lesion 1" content of the Image Comment text field
If a series with this name already exists (you can check it in the
Browser), a running number is appended to the series name,
e.g. "Biopsy 15: Lesion 1_1". The series name is also indicated
by an image comment in the stored images.
F.18
F.18
0.0
F.1820
Operator Manual
Examination
Displaying a biopsy
channel
Breast Biopsy
F.18
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1821
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
The value in the Angle field is set to "0" upon opening the
Breast Biopsy dialog box.
F.18
F.18
F.18
F.18
0.0
F.1822
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
F.18
Before printing a worksheet, you can decide whether the worksheet will be printed with the complete shift data. As an alternative, you can keep the most important patient data anonymous
when printing; i.e. the Patient name, Date of birth, and Series
name are not printed.
F.18
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1823
Breast Biopsy
Examination
0.0
F.1824
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
N OT E
To ensure that the printed worksheets required for the
biopsy examination are up to date, do not change the
position of the reference or lesion markers after calculation
of the offset data.
F.18
F.18
F.18
F.18
F.18
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1825
Breast Biopsy
Examination
F.18
F.18
Completing a worksheet
F.18
0.0
F.1826
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
SIEMENS
F.18
Patient:
Date:
Date of Birth:
Comment:
Approach An-
Reference Position
deg.
F.18
Lesion Position
F.18
F.18
Horizontal Move:
mm
mm
Vertical Move:
mm
mm
mm
mm
F.18
F.18
Depth:
mm Delta Value:
mm
F.18
mm
F.18
mm
Series Name:
Abs. Reference Position:
Abs. Lesion Position:
Real Approach:
Needle Type:
Performing Physician:
F.18
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1827
Breast Biopsy
Examination
Performing a biopsy
examination
F.18
You have saved the images with the reference and lesion markers and printed the worksheet. The values for the puncture
depth, horizontal and vertical move have been calculated by the
system. You can now manually configure the biopsy device
using the worksheet and begin the biopsy examination.
F.18
After you have performed a biopsy examination, the reference images may no longer be used for marking or calculation.
F.18
You have to ensure that the calculated output data are correct.
You may check the output data by running the open protocol
again.
Page F.637, Scanning an open protocol more than once F.18
0.0
F.1828
Operator Manual
Examination
Breast Biopsy
F.18
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1829
Breast Biopsy
Examination
0.0
F.1830
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.19
Automatic Position
Suggestion
F.19
Together with a standard brain atlas, AutoAlignTM enables precise orientation of measurement objects during head examinations independent of the position of the head.
F.19
The use of AutoAlign, requires a license.
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.191
Basics
Examination
F.19
F.19
Atlas
F.19
F.19
The translation and rotation, or AutoAlign matrix (AAM), are calculated from the 3D volume sets generated with the AAS as a
function of the atlas of the patient's head.
F.19
The AAM is applied to all graphical objects of the following protocols if there is a minimum fit between the patient data and the
atlas.
F.19
0.0
F.192
Operator Manual
Examination
Requirements
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.193
Examination
F.19
AutoAlign activated
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
F.194
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
F.19
The AutoAlignScout (AAS) measuring the images for computing the AAM is started automatically. The successfully calculated matrix is then applied to the graphical objects of the following protocols. Adjusted in this manner, the protocols are now
executed.
After the AAS, the program automatically starts the measuring
of survey images via the localizer.
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.195
Examination
When you insert an AAS in the job list, the patient's age is
checked automatically. A message informs you if the patient
is too young.
Page F.1913, Checking the patient's age
Acquiring an AutoAlign
Scout
F.19
NOTE
For the Siemens AutoAlign program, the coils required are
stored for each program. Usually the body coil is used for
AAS.
F.19
However, when, e.g. opening the AAS in the queue, the
adverse possibility exists that the head matrix coil selected
for a previous measurement will be transferred to the
current one.
F.19
Check the coil allocated to AAS and, if necessary, select
the body coil on the parameter card System Coils
again.
Two image data sets are acquired with different flip angles.
They are not loaded into the large image segments after calculation. The system calculates the AAM from these data sets. F.19
0.0
F.196
Operator Manual
Examination
Scanning a Standard
localizer
The first survey starts automatically after measuring the AAS. F.19
F.19
These reference images are loaded into the large image segments of the Exam task card once the localizer measurement
and image calculation have been completed.
F.19
Three reference images are displayed: with sagittal, transverse,
and coronal orientation.
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.197
Examination
F.19
AutoAlign active
F.19
0.0
F.198
Operator Manual
Examination
Applying positioning
F.19
NOTE
If you position the graphical objects of the next protocol
during AAS scanning, these objects will be rotated after the
AAM has been calculated.
F.19
F.19
F.19
If you are not satisfied with the slice positioning corrected by the
AAM, you can position the slices manually as usual.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.199
Examination
F.19
You can close the examination after determining that you do not
have to perform additional scans or repeat protocols.
F.19
After you have performed the AutoAlign examination and reconstructed the series, AutoAlign remains activated.
F.19
Move the patient table out of the magnet and allow the
patient to leave.
Select Patient > Close Patient from the main menu.
Or
F.19
0.0
F.1910
Operator Manual
Examination
Deactivating AutoAlign
F.19
Manually deactivating
AutoAlign
F.19
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1911
Examination
F.19
Each table movement deactivates AutoAlign, since the calculated AAM refers to a fixed table position.
F.19
If the table moves or the light localizer is enabled, e.g., to initiate
repositioning, a new series block is started.
F.19
You can see that AutoAlign has been deactivated because
both the button and Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign menu item
are dimmed.
F.19
0.0
F.1912
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1913
Examination
0.0
F.1914
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1915
Examination
F.19
AutoAlign may be performed only when the head first supine positioning has been assigned during patient registration.
F.19
If this is not the case, the program control is blocked for additional measurements. The following message appears:
F.19
F.19
0.0
F.1916
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1917
Examination
Click OK.
The protocols of the job list continue to be executable. You may
continue scanning as usual.
F.19
The AutoAlign button and the Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign
menu item are dimmed.
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
F.1918
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1919
F.19
Examination
If the patient moved his head after the AAS was scanned, a second AAS can be inserted in the job list to correct the slice position again.
F.19
0.0
F.1920
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
You can modify the AutoAlign scan program in the job list as
usual.
Page F.639, Processing the job list while scans are being
performed
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1921
Examination
F.19
N OT E
The AAM is applied to the target protocol only if the copy
reference contains slices.
F.19
0.0
F.1922
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1923
Examination
F.19
Press the mouse button and drag your selection into the job
list (drag & drop).
Or
F.19
F.19
NOTE
Phoenix is available for all MAGNETOM systems with
syngo MR 2002B. It works with all images that have been
generated with this or future software versions.
F.19
Protocols of images or series that have been scanned with
a different software version or that are from a different
MAGNETOM, must be converted.
Page F.1925, Reconstructed protocol by conversion F.19
0.0
F.1924
Operator Manual
Examination
Reconstructed protocol by
conversion
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1925
Examination
F.19
There are various ways of creating a new AutoAlign head program and saving it as a new AutoAlign program in the user area
of the Exam Explorer.
F.19
F.19
You can create your own AutoAlign head program in the usual
way in the Exam Explorer.
F.19
Insert an AAS into any head scan program or create a head
program from selected protocols and add an AAS to it.
Page F.1638, Creating a new program
F.19
0.0
F.1926
Operator Manual
Examination
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1927
Examination
F.19
Registering a planning
patient
F.19
F.19
Click OK.
The window closes.
F.19
0.0
F.1928
Operator Manual
Examination
Program control in
planning mode
F.19
F.19
F.19
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.1929
Adjusting AutoAlign
protocols
Examination
Now open the protocols and position the slices on the atlas
images.
Click the Apply button.
The changes are applied to the opened protocols.
F.19
F.19
After you have positioned the graphical objects, you can save
the edited protocols in the Exam Explorer.
Page F.1927, Exporting executed programs to the Exam
Explorer
Page F.666, Saving a job list as a new program
F.19
Quitting planning
mode
Or
F.19
F.19
0.0
F.1930
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
F.20
Quality Measurement
F.20
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.201
Quality Measurement
Examination
F.20
F.20
0.0
F.202
Operator Manual
Examination
Quality Measurement
F.20
Click the Coil Check checkbox if you want to check the signal-to-noise ratio and signal uniformity.
Click the Calc Artefacts checkbox if you would like to test
the body coil for artifacts.
Starting Quality
measurement
F.20
Click Go.
A help window is displayed that describes the position of the
phantom holder and phantoms for the selected coil.
F.20
Follow all positioning instructions.
Connect the coil to the MR system.
The quality measurement can be aborted at this point by
clicking Cancel.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.203
Quality Measurement
Examination
Message
To do
Running
Explanation
Measurement not yet performed
Measurement is in progress
Done
Measurement finished
Parameters correspond to specifications
NotOK
Error
0.0
F.204
Operator Manual
Examination
Quality Measurement
F.20
Click Abort.
If the message Error or NotOK appears, repeat the quality
measurement.
F.20
Optimize the position of the phantom.
Optimize marking with the laser light localizer.
Repeat the quality measurement.
If the results of the quality measurement are still unsatisfactory, contact Siemens Service.
End Quality
measurement
F.20
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
F.205
Quality Measurement
Examination
0.0
F.206
Operator Manual
PART
Viewing
G.0
G.1 Introduction
Calling up the Viewing task card .................................... G.12
The image area .............................................................. G.14
The control area ............................................................. G.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G1
Contents
Viewing
G.5 2D Evaluation
Evaluating regions ......................................................... G.54
Rectangular and circular ROIs .................................. G.54
Drawing freehand ROIs............................................. G.57
Evaluating ROIs ...................................................... G.513
Calculating a histogram........................................... G.516
0.0
G2
Operator Manual
Viewing
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G3
Contents
Viewing
0.0
G4
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.1
Introduction
G.1
On the Viewing task card, you can view the results of an examination and evaluate it or prepare it for diagnostics.
G.1
You can also use the Viewing task card to compare image
material of different examinations and, depending of configuration, of different patients.
G.1
G.1
You can first load the images using the Patient Browser or from
the 3D task card into the Viewing task card. Here you can
select one of various ways of arranging the image material and
displaying it in the clearest way for your diagnostic problem.
G.1
On the Viewing task card, you can then process and evaluate
the images:
G.1
You can change window values, enlarge, pan, rotate, and flip
images.
You can highlight regions of interest (ROIs) using drawing
tools (circles, rectangles, lines), provide them with comment
texts, and evaluate them statistically.
You can display measured values for pixel points or ranges
and measure distances and angles on the images.
G.1
You can then save the images you have processed and evaluated, you can print them or expose them on film or send them
to other locations in your hospital.
G.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.11
Introduction
Viewing
G.1
As soon as you have loaded images into the Viewing task card,
the task card moves into the foreground. But you can also
switch to other applications at any time and resume image processing on the Viewing task card later.
G.1
G.1
0.0
G.12
Operator Manual
Viewing
Introduction
(4)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Image area
Control area
Status bar for system messages
Menu bar with specific entries for viewing and processing
images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.13
Introduction
Viewing
G.1
In the image area, the images that you have loaded into the
Viewing task card are displayed. Depending on the division of
the screen and the number of images loaded, you can only see
some of the images. The remaining images are in the background.
G.1
G.1
The image area is subdivided into segments. One image is displayed in each segment.
G.1
Depending on whether you want to see an overview of the
loaded images, or whether you require a display which is suitable for reporting, you can choose between different layouts: G.1
In a small format layout, several images are displayed at
once.
In a large format layout, you can only see a few images on
the screen, but these images are displayed large enough for
you to see details.
0.0
G.14
Operator Manual
Viewing
Introduction
G.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.15
Introduction
Image orientation
Viewing
G.1
G.1
0.0
G.16
Operator Manual
Viewing
Introduction
G.1
In the control area, you will find all the tools you need to select
image material, arrange the screen display and process
images.
G.1
Here you can also control data exchange with other parts of the
program and call up other applications.
G.1
You can call up these functions easily using buttons and work
much faster than via the menu bar.
G.1
Patient information
G.1
In the upper part of the control area, you can see the names of
the patients whose images are currently loaded in the Viewing
task card. Up to three patients (depending on the system configuration) can be loaded into the Viewing task card at one
time.
Here you can select the image data of a patient you want to process next.
G.1
The open patient folder shows you whose images are currently
visible in the image area.
G.1
If you use the option for comparing examination data of different patients, this group folder is labeled with the names of the
loaded patients (e.g. "Meier, Neumann" if the group folder
contains the data of two patients, or "Meier, Neumann..." if it
contains the data of three or more patients).
For longer names only the first part is displayed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.17
Introduction
Subtask cards
Viewing
G.1
On the subtask cards, you can see the buttons which you use
to call up the processing tools, define display modes, transfer
image data and switch to other applications.
G.1
The stack of cards in the center of the control area contains the
Tools, Image and View subtask cards.
G.1
The left-hand card of the stack is called Tools and contains
buttons for image evaluation and commenting.
On the center card, Image, you will find buttons for image
processing.
The right-hand card, View, contains buttons for setting the
layout.
0.0
G.18
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.2
G.2
In the Viewing task card, you can view and process examination images that are stored in the local database of your system,
an archive medium or a network node.
G.2
In the Patient Browser window, you have access to this data.
You can search for patients, studies, series or individual images
and load them onto the Viewing task card.
G.2
You can also transfer images and series from the Exam task
card to the Viewing task card immediately after an examination.
G.2
Moreover, you can view and process the images that you have
generated in the 3D task card and transferred to the Viewing
task card.
Page H.133, Transferring images to the Viewing task cardG.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.21
Viewing
G.2
You can search for image data that you have stored in the local
database or in the archive using the Patient Browser and then
load it onto the Viewing task card.
G.2
As soon as you load image material you decide whether you
want to view or evaluate the images or series of one patient, or
whether you want to compare the image material of different
patients. You transfer a patient to a patient folder. If you want to
compare the examination results of different patients you create
a group folder.
G.2
0.0
G.22
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
G.2
G.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.23
Viewing
Or
G.2
Drag your selection onto the Viewing task card with the
mouse (drag & drop).
0.0
G.24
Operator Manual
Viewing
Before you load the image data of a patient with drag & drop,
you must first open a new (empty) patient folder. The images
of any patient folder already open are otherwise removed
from the Viewing card if this folder is not in Multi View Mode.
If you drag & drop images into a folder (Multi View Mode) they
are added to the existing ones.
Page G.210, Load the folder
If the task card is not in the foreground you can also drag the
images from the Patient Browser onto the corresponding
tab. The task card moves into the foreground and the images
are loaded into the image area.
Close after loading
G.2
The Patient Browser will be closed if the Closed after Loading option has been selected.
Page D.36, Closed after Loading
G.2
The Patient Browser remains open when you load images
by drag & drop.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.25
Stopping loading
G.2
Loading a large series with many images can take a long time.
You can then see a progress indicator showing you how far the
loading progress has progressed.
G.2
Viewing
G.2
0.0
G.26
Operator Manual
Viewing
Loading multiframe
images
G.2
G.2
You can also load color images into the Viewing task card (True
Color and Pseudo Color). If the images cannot be displayed,
you obtain an error message.
G.2
Please contact your system administrator.
Before you start evaluating the first loaded images, you can first
transfer all the examinations and patients that you want to view
and edit in a single session into the Viewing task card.
G.2
Click on a closed patient folder in the upper control area of
the Viewing task card to open it.
Select the images of another patient from the Patient
Browser and pull them onto the Viewing task card
(drag & drop).
The new images are transferred to the opened folder. The
patient name appears next to the open folder.
G.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.27
G.2
Viewing
Last
session:
Patient D
Patient A
10:05
Patient B
10:20
Patient C
10:50
Load
patient D
Patient B
Patient C
0.0
G.28
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.29
Viewing
G.2
G.2
G.2
G.2
0.0
G.210
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
On the Exam task card you can specify that the images are to
be automatically loaded into the Viewing task card after scanning and reconstruction.
G.2
To do that, click on the option Load images to Viewer on the
Auto load card in dialog box Protocol step properties.
Page F.1211, Loading images into the Viewing card
G.2
NOTE
When you select the option Load images to Viewer, the
images that you have just scanned are not automatically
displayed in the Viewer. Instead, you will see the previous
series in the patient folder that is currently open.
G.2
Scroll to the next series to view the images that you have
just scanned.
Page G.312, Scrolling from series to series
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.211
Viewing
G.2
After you have loaded images into the Viewing task card, you
can choose between different views.
G.2
In this way, you can arrange the display of the image material in
the way which is most helpful for your diagnostic problem.
G.2
G.2
0.0
G.212
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.213
Viewing
G.2
0.0
G.214
Operator Manual
Viewing
Image area
Background
Study 1
Study 2
S2B3
Study 3
Study 4
...
Deselect the option View > Multi View, or click on the button
again to return to normal mode.
If you created a group folder when you loaded your images,
i.e. loaded the examinations of several patients in a folder,
study comparison mode is already activated. In that case, you
cannot switch to normal mode.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.215
Viewing
G.2
NOTE
The stack can be displayed in formats
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 9:1, and 16:1.
Image-stripe display
G.2
G.2
G.2
G.2
0.0
G.216
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
A1
A4
If more than one series of a patient is loaded, you can see the
first images of series A. To view the images of the other series,
you must first scroll to them.
G.2
Image area
Background
A1
A2
A5
A6
B3
C1
C4
A3
A4
B1
B2
C2
C3
C6
C5
Background
Study 1
S1A1 S1A2
S1A3 S1A4
S1B1 S1B2
S1B3 S1B4
Study 2
S2A1 S2A2
S2A3 S2B1
S2B2 S2B3
S2B4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.217
Stack display
G.2
Viewing
G.2
G.2
G.2
0.0
G.218
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
Image area
Image area
A1
B1
Scrolling through
series B and C
C1
A1
B3
C6
Study 1
Study 2
S2A1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.219
Viewing
G.2
With the division of the image area, you define the number and
size of the segments in the image area.
G.2
Switch to a large format display with just a few images on the
screen if you want to see diagnostic details. Select a small format display to obtain an overview.
G.2
G.2
Or
G.2
0.0
G.220
Operator Manual
Viewing
When you select a new layout, the division of the image area is
changed, but the sequence of the images displayed remains
the same.
G.2
If you selected images before you selected a new layout, you
will see the loaded images in the new view starting with the first
selected image.
Page G.332, Selecting images
G.2
In study comparison mode different layouts are used.The
non-comparison layouts are dimmed.
Layout change for
image-stripe display
G.2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
A1
A2
A3
A4
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
A3
A4
A5
A6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.221
Study 1
Viewing
Study 2
Study 3
Study 1
S1A2
S1A3
Study 2
S2A1
S2A2
Study 1
S1A3
S1A4
Study 2
S2A2
S2A3
Study 1
Study 2
Study 3
0.0
G.222
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
A1
B1
C1
D1
A1 B1
C1 D1
E1
G1
F1
C1 D1
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
Layout change in normal mode with explicitly selected image (no input focus)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.223
Study 1
Study 2
S1A1
S2A1
S1B1
S2B1
Viewing
Study 1
S1A1 S1B1S1C1S1D1
Study 2
Study 3
Study 4
S4A1 S4B1
Study 1
Study 2
S1A1
S2A1
S1B1
S2B1
Study 1
Study 2
Study 3
Study 4
S4A1 S4B1
0.0
G.224
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
Text blocks
G.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(7)
(4)
(6)
(5)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.225
G.2
Viewing
G.2
Select View > No Text to hide all image texts, the scale bar
and the orientation marks.
Or
G.2
0.0
G.226
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.2
A scale bar is displayed along the right-hand edge of each segment indicating the scale of the image in cm.
G.2
The size of the scale bar changes to match the current zoom
settings.
G.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.227
Viewing
0.0
G.228
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.31
Viewing
Scrolling
G.3
NOTE
If a dialog box in the Viewing task card is open and active,
the keys of the symbol keypad might not function.
G.3
Click into the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or
close the dialog box.
0.0
G.32
Operator Manual
Viewing
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.33
Viewing
G.3
Within a study, you can scroll through the loaded images and
series image by image.
G.3
The order of the loaded images depends on whether you have
loaded the images via the Patient Browser or automatically
from the Exam card:
G.3
The order of the images loaded via the Patient Browser is
determined by the sorting criterion.
Page D.219, Sorting data
The order of the images loaded automatically from the examination card is determined by the order of image reconstruction.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images
G.3
G.3
Scroll with the Image+ key (Num 2) or the Image- key (Num
1) on the symbol keypad.
Explicitly selected images remain selected even if the images
are moved into the background.
If you execute Image+, the image in the top left segment is
moved into the background. All the following images are moved
on by one segment. One image from the background moves
into the bottom right segment. If there is no image in the background, the segment remains empty.
G.3
Image- reverses this process, moving an image from the background into the top left segment.
G.3
0.0
G.34
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
G.3
Image+
Image-
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.35
G.3
Viewing
Press the Ctrl key and click on the stacks that you want to
scroll through. If you click on a stack again, you deselect it.
With the Scroll menu, the buttons or the symbol keypad
scroll forward (Image+) or backward (Image-) through the
selected stacks by one image at a time.
If you have not selected a stack, you only scroll through the
stack which is in the input focus.
The dog ears only allow you to scroll through one stack at a
time.
A1
C1
B1
Image+
A2
B1
C2
0.0
G.36
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.37
G.3
Viewing
Press the End key to display the last page of the study.
Press the Home key to jump to the first page of the study.
The image area is filled with images. The first image of the
series is displayed in the top left-hand corner of the image
area.
Page-by-page scrolling
with the image stripe
display
G.3
0.0
G.38
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.39
G.3
Viewing
0.0
G.310
Operator Manual
Viewing
Click on the scroll arrow for the first or last page to jump to
the beginning or end of the loaded series.
Click on the scroll arrow for the next or previous row or page.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A3
A4
A5
A6
A1
C1
B1
A2
B2
C2
Drag the slider up or down with the mouse until the page you
require is displayed (the page number is also displayed).
If you click the scroll bar above or below the slider, you scroll
backward or forward by one page.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.311
Viewing
G.3
G.3
0.0
G.312
Operator Manual
Viewing
Normal mode
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.313
Viewing
G.3
G.3
0.0
G.314
Operator Manual
Viewing
Normal mode
G.3
Study +
S1A1
S1 A1 = Series A1 of Study 1
S1 A2 = Series A2 of Study 1
and so on
S2A2 S3A3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.315
Viewing
G.3
Study 1
...
Study 2
...
Study 3
Study 1
...
Study 2
...
Study 3
S1 A1 = Series A1 of Study 1
S1 A2 = Series A2 of Study 1
and so on
G.3
0.0
G.316
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
Patient-
Patient+
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.317
Viewing
G.3
N OT E
While running a movie it is not advisable to activate any
correct and rearrange actions.
G.3
G.3
N OT E
syngo MR is not a real-time based system. It can therefore
not be ensured that the movie runs at real-time conditions.
There may be delays resulting from processes running
simultaneously in the background.
G.3
0.0
G.318
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
Select the stack display (View > Stack) if you want to view
only one series as a movie.
Or
G.3
Select the image stripe display (View > Stripe) if you want to
view all the series of a study one after the other as a movie.
After that, select a sufficiently large layout to be able to see
all the details.
We recommend:
G.3
1:1
The movie takes up the whole screen.
4:1
You can compare the movie with up to 3 still images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.319
Viewing
G.3
G.3
Place the mouse cursor on the image with which you want to
begin.
Hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse up to
playback the movie forward.
Or
G.3
Hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse down
to playback the movie backward.
Forward
Backward
0.0
G.320
Operator Manual
Viewing
When the movie reaches the last image of the series or study,
it jumps back to the first image of the series or study and
starts again (Loop).
Interrupting a movie
G.3
You can interrupt the movie at any time, for example to take a
better look at an image.
G.3
Just release the left mouse button.
The current image is displayed in the movie segment with all its
text information, drawing elements and evaluations.
G.3
In image stripe display, the images before and after the current
image are displayed in the remaining segments.
G.3
Resuming a movie
G.3
Ending a movie
G.3
Click on the image area again, hold the left mouse button
down, and drag the mouse vertical over the image area to
continue playback of the movie.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.321
Viewing
G.3
0.0
G.322
Operator Manual
Viewing
Starting a movie
G.3
G.3
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.323
Viewing
G.3
0.0
G.324
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
Or
G.3
Enter a playback speed via the spin box in the field Frame
Rate.
Or
G.3
G.3
Or
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.325
G.3
Viewing
G.3
G.3
G.3
G.3
Excluding initial/final
images
G.3
G.3
In the spin boxes From and To, specify which images are to
be included in the movie playback. In this way you can
exclude initial and final images of little interest.
You cannot change this setting while a movie is running.
0.0
G.326
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
G.3
G.3
G.3
Press the Esc key on the keyboard or click into the playback
segment with the left mouse button (a single click) to terminate Automatic Movie.
Or
G.3
G.3
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.327
Viewing
G.3
If you are working in study comparison mode you can play back
all loaded examinations and series simultaneously as movies
with Automatic Movie.
G.3
You can synchronize playback of these movies.
G.3
G.3
G.3
Call up Scroll > Link > Current Order to play back the movies synchronized in the sequence in which they appear in the
series.
The playback direction set for synchronization is decisive
even if only one film is played back. If you sorted the images
in decreasing chronological order and play them back with
Current Order, the film seems to play back backwards.
0.0
G.328
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
AS11 AS12
AS21 AS22
One segment is selected.
The movie contains all the images that belong to study S1.
G.3
AS11 AS12
AS21 AS22
Two segments are selected.
The movie contains all the images that belong to study S1 and
S2.
G.3
G.3
AS11 AS12
BS21 BS22
One segment is selected.
The movie contains all the images that belong to study S1.
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.329
Viewing
G.3
AS11 AS12
BS21 BS22
Two segments are selected, one movie for each segment. Each
movie contains all the images of that study.
G.3
G.3
S11
S12
S11
S21
Two stacks are selected, in each case one movie in the selected
segment.
G.3
0.0
G.330
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
S11
S21
S31
S41
S11
S21
S31
S41
Two stacks are selected, in each case one movie for each
selected stack.
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.331
Viewing
Selecting images
G.3
On the Viewing task card, you can not only view images, but
also process and evaluate them.
G.3
You must first select the images that you want to process.
G.3
G.3
G.3
0.0
G.332
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
The input focus shows the active segment of the image area. It
is marked by a broken line border, i.e. it is selected implicitly. G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.333
G.3
Viewing
When you load images onto the Viewing task card, the input
focus is in the default position in the top left segment of the
image area.
G.3
A1
A2
A3
A4
G.3
G.3
Click with the left mouse button into the segment of the
image area on which you want to place the input focus.
0.0
G.334
Operator Manual
Viewing
Examples:
G.3
G.3
You can also move the input focus using the keyboard.
Use the arrow keys.
G.3
Press the arrow key left or right to move the input focus to
the next column of the image area.
Or
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.335
Processing an image
G.3
Viewing
Selected image in
the background
G.3
If you cannot see an input focus in the image area, one or more
images are explicitly selected in the background.
G.3
A1
A2
A5
A3
A4
B1
A6
B2
No input focus in
the image area
0.0
G.336
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.337
Selecting images
individually
G.3
Viewing
You can explicitly select an image or more than one image one
after the other.
G.3
Press the Ctrl key and click on an image with the left mouse
button to select it explicitly.
Hold the Ctrl key down and click on further images if you
want to extend your selection.
You want to explicitly select the image displayed and all the following images of the series.
G.3
0.0
G.338
Operator Manual
Viewing
Explicitly selecting
complete series
G.3
The easiest way for you to select complete series (i.e. all
images contained in them) is with Select Series.
G.3
First select an image of the required series explicitly by clicking on it holding the Ctrl key down or place the input focus on
the image by clicking on it.
Call up Edit > Select Series from the main menu or Select
Series from the popup menu (right mouse button).
The whole series is now selected explicitly.
G.3
G.3
If you want to select more than one complete series, first select
an image from each series and then extend your selection to
the complete series.
G.3
G.3
Hold the Ctrl key down and click on individual images of the
required series.
Call up Edit > Select Series in the main menu or select
Select Series in the popup menu.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.339
Explicitly selecting
complete studies
G.3
Viewing
The easiest way for you to select complete studies (i.e. all
images contained in them) is with Select Study.
G.3
First select an image of the required Study explicitly by clicking on it holding the Ctrl key down or place the input focus on
the image by clicking on it.
Call up Edit > Select > Study from the main menu.
The whole study is now selected explicitly.
G.3
Explicitly selecting a
patient
G.3
G.3
0.0
G.340
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
G.3
Press the Ctrl key and click on the image that you want to
mark to select it.
Then call up Edit > Mark in the main menu or Mark in the
popup menu (right mouse button).
Or
G.3
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.341
Viewing
Once you have viewed all loaded images one after the other,
select all marked (or all unmarked) images at once.
G.3
Call up Edit > Select > Marked to select all marked images/
series explicitly.
Or
G.3
0.0
G.342
Operator Manual
Viewing
Deselecting images
G.3
G.3
Call up Edit > Deselect All in the main menu or Deselect All
in the popup menu to deselect all selected images.
After that, the standard input focus is set automatically, i.e.
the top left segment is active.
Or
G.3
G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.343
Viewing
G.3
G.3
If no images are explicitly selected, you can see the input focus
in the image area. The input focus is placed on the segment on
which you position the mouse cursor and perform image processing implicitly.
G.3
Place the mouse cursor on an image which is not selected
and process the image, for example, by zooming.
A1
A2
A3
A4
Windowing an image
with the mouse
A1
A2
A3
A4
0.0
G.344
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.3
Example:
The images A1 and A4 are selected explicitly. The position of
the mouse cursor defines the selection.
G.3
A1
A2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A3
A4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.345
Viewing
0.0
G.346
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.4
Processing Images
G.4
As soon as you have loaded all the series and/or images that
you want to view and process into the Viewing task card, you
can change the display parameters of individual images. In this
way, you can emphasize areas and image contents for subsequent evaluation or reporting especially clearly.
G.4
You can adapt the window values of the loaded images. The
images can be zoomed or ROIs can be drawn on them. You can
also rotate, flip or invert images for certain diagnostic problems.
G.4
N OT E
Extreme window values may reduce the image quality.
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.41
Processing Images
Viewing
Windowing images
G.4
0.0
G.42
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
You can see the window values set in the bottom right-hand corner of the images.
G.4
W = width (contrast)
C = center (brightness)
Window values
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.43
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
You will often need to window images several times until you
have found the optimum setting for your requirements. By defining a scope, you can assign new window values to several
images automatically and in a single action to simplify your
work.
G.4
Windowing with a scope only applies to images that are not
explicitly selected.
G.4
Windowing images up to
the end of series
G.4
With Windowing OnSucceeding On, you can define that windowing is to be applied to the image in the input focus (inclusive) or to the implicitly selected image and all the other following images up to the end of the series.
G.4
0.0
G.44
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
Set the required window values with the keyboard, the control box, or the main menu.
The new window values are assigned to all images from the
image in the input focus to the end of the series.
G.4
Or
G.4
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.45
Processing Images
Switching between
scopes
Viewing
G.4
G.4
Assign new window values to the image with the input focus
using the main menu, keyboard, or the control box.
The scope Windowing OnSucceeding On is not active.
You want to window all images up to the end of the series temporarily.
G.4
Press the Ctrl key and switch the scope to Windowing
OnSucceeding On while you are holding the Ctrl key down.
Then window all images up to the end of the series as
described above.
0.0
G.46
Operator Manual
Viewing
Windowing explicitly
selected images
Processing Images
G.4
G.4
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.47
Processing Images
Viewing
Examples:
G.4
G.4
A1
A2
A3
A6
A4
A5
A6
B2
B3
B1
B2
B3
A1
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B1
B2
B3
A1
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B1
B2
B3
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
A1
Window values
unchanged
Windowing in explicitly
selected images
A1
Window values
changed
0.0
G.48
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
Automatic windowing
G.4
With the Auto-Window option, you automatically assign optimized window values to the images.
G.4
Auto-Window on loading
G.4
Before you load images onto the Viewing task card, you can
define with what window values you want these images displayed:
G.4
With the window values with which they were stored.
With automatically optimized window values (Auto-Window).
Select Image > Auto-Windowing.
Every time you load images into the Viewing task card after
that, they are immediately loaded with the optimum window valG.4
ues for the study they belong to.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.49
Processing Images
Applying Auto-Window to
individual images
Viewing
G.4
G.4
G.4
0.0
G.410
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
A series of organ-specific, study-specific and user-specific window settings are stored in the Viewing task card.
G.4
Some of these window settings were made by Siemens Service. You can change them in Viewing Configuration and also
define a few new window settings of your own.
Page G.87, Organ- and user-specific window values
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.411
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
G.4
y
Contrast +
(width -)
Brightness (center +)
Contrast x (width +)
Brightness+
(center -)
0.0
G.412
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
For fine adjustment of the window values, you can also use the
keys on the symbol keypad of the keyboard.
G.4
Pay attention to the scope.
Page G.44, Setting the scope
Setting the contrast
G.4
G.4
G.4
G.4
G.4
NOTE
If a dialog box in the Viewing task card is open and active,
the keys of the symbol keypad might not function.
G.4
Click into the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or
close the dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.413
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
You can undo your changes to the window values at any time
and restore the old window settings with which you loaded the
images from the database.
G.4
G.4
You can save the series with the new window values.
G.4
0.0
G.414
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
G.4
The Viewing task card provides you with several ways of displaying enlarged or reduced images.
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.415
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
0.5
G.4
G.4
0.5
11
G.4
0.0
G.416
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
You can also increase or enlarge the size of images with an individual zoom factor.
G.4
You cannot zoom step by step in the Zoom Image dialog box.
The set factor is always applied to the original image.
Acquisition size
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.417
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
G.4
You usually select or deselect images and objects with the left
mouse button.
G.4
However, you can also switch over the function of the left mouse
button to perform zooming and panning.
G.4
G.4
Now place the mouse cursor close to the edge of the frame.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
G.4
Drag the mouse cursor up with the left mouse button pressed
to enlarge the image.
Or
G.4
Drag the mouse cursor down with the left mouse button
pressed to reduce the image.
0.0
G.418
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
Zooming
Enlarging
Reducing
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.419
Processing Images
Viewing
As soon as you release the mouse button, the new zoom factor
is applied to all the selected images or the selected scope of
action.
G.4
G.4
NOTE
Please remember the following when zooming images that
contain graphic objects:
G.4
First press on the mouse button and then move the
mouse cursor to the outer area of the image.
Now pull the mouse cursor up/down to enlarge/reduce
the image size.
In that way you can avoid accidentally selecting and editing
graphic elements rather than the image itself.
G.4
G.4
N OT E
When zooming, make sure you do not click on a graphic
element accidentally. Otherwise, you would pan the graphic
element and not the content of the image.
G.4
0.0
G.420
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
You can return to the zoom factor with which the images were
last stored in the database at any time.
G.4
G.4
You cannot restore images that have been imported into the
Patient Browser to their original size.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.421
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
G.4
0.0
G.422
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
Panning images
G.4
After you have zoomed the images, parts of the images might
extend beyond the edge of the image segments.
G.4
Therefore always pan the image so that the region of diagnostic
interest is in the center of the segment again before storing.
G.4
G.4
G.4
Now place the mouse cursor in the center part of the image.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
G.4
Drag the mouse up, down, right or left holding the left mouse
button down to pan the image.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.423
Processing Images
Viewing
up
Panning
down
left
Up
Down
Left
Right
right
Panning
0.0
G.424
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
You can see the result of your mouse movements in the image
on which the mouse cursor is located immediately.
G.4
As soon as you release the mouse button, the image content in
all the selected images or all images of the selected scope of
action have been panned.
G.4
G.4
NOTE
When panning, make sure you do not click on a graphic
element accidentally. Otherwise, you would pan the graphic
element and not the content of the image.
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.425
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
Like with zooming, when you have panned images, you can
restore the images as they were last stored in the database.
G.4
G.4
G.4
G.4
0.0
G.426
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.427
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
0.0
G.428
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
Rotating through 90
G.4
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.429
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
G.4
0.0
G.430
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
NOTE
Please note that any annotations and graphics you have
entered will be deleted when you rotate an image.
G.4
Orientation labels are rotated together with the image
(for CT and MR images only).
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.431
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
With the flip function, you can compare images of series that
were taken with a different patient position or direction of examination more easily.
G.4
G.4
G.4
G.4
0.0
G.432
Operator Manual
Viewing
Flipping images
horizontally
Processing Images
G.4
G.4
G.4
NOTE
Just like when you rotate images, when you flip them, all
annotations and graphics are deleted from the images. G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.433
Processing Images
Viewing
G.4
To reset the original view, call up Image > Invert Gray Scale
again.
0.0
G.434
Operator Manual
Viewing
Processing Images
G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.435
Processing Images
Viewing
0.0
G.436
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.5
2D Evaluation
G.5
On the Viewing task card, you have tools for region evaluation,
measuring distances, lengths, and angles, and for pixel evaluation.
G.5
You can also have a grid displayed in selected images, to allow
you to estimate sizes, distances, and angles more precisely. G.5
With a shutter, you can restrict the region of interest to what is
absolutely necessary excluding all irrelevant regions.
G.5
You can annotate images with image texts in order to document
your evaluation.
G.5
You can enter comment texts for the images in the database
and edit existing comment texts.
G.5
G.5
N OT E
For optimum results, perform quantitative analysis on
remapped (distortion-corrected) images only.
G.5
It is not possible to evaluate images with the image type Secondary Capture.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.51
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
Inactive
You will find the tools for drawing graphics and determine pixel
values in the Tools menu or on the Tools subtask card in the
control area.
G.5
Activate a graphic tool by selecting it in the menu, or click on
the button.
Active
G.5
You can now use the tool until you deactivate it again. For example, you can draw several regions or distances into your image
one after the other.
G.5
G.5
Or
Click on the button again.
Or
Active
Inactive
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.52
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
The graphic tools of the Viewing task card work implicitly, i.e.
you do not have to select the images in which you draw the
graphics explicitly. You can simply place the mouse cursor on
the image. The input focus is placed on this image.
G.5
If you want to produce a graphic element on more than one
image at once, you must first select these images explicitly. G.5
Page G.332, Selecting images
G.5
NOTE
Please look out for the following peculiarity when explicitly
selecting images of different matrices:
G.5
When you draw a graphic into an image, that graphic
is not displayed in exactly the same position and size in the
other images.
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.53
2D Evaluation
Viewing
Evaluating regions
G.5
You can mark anomalies in the images and then evaluate these
regions. To do this you draw a ROI graphic around the region of
particular interest to you. You can now evaluate the gray scales
within this ROI statistically (CT, MR only).
G.5
Circular
G.5
Freehand regions
or polygons
G.5
You can draw around the regions that are of special interest with
a rectangle or circle and evaluate them. First select the tool.
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.54
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.55
2D Evaluation
Resizing/moving regions
Viewing
G.5
G.5
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.56
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.57
2D Evaluation
Viewing
0.0
G.58
Operator Manual
Viewing
Enlarging/reducing a
region
2D Evaluation
G.5
Like the rectangles and circles, you can also enlarge or reduce
freehand regions or move them in the image.
G.5
Select the region by clicking on it.
Grab handles will now be displayed.
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.59
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
0.0
G.510
Operator Manual
Viewing
Moving a node
2D Evaluation
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.511
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
The size of the mouse cursor depends on how near you click
to the border of the polygon. For a precise definition, click
very close to the border, for example, to obtain a very small
circle.
G.5
Click on any point in the image with the left mouse button, but
not on the edge of the ROI.
The editing mode is closed, and the region is deselected.
G.5
0.0
G.512
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
Evaluating ROIs
G.5
(1) Min/Max
Highest and lowest gray scale value
(2) Mean/SD
Mean value and standard deviation of the gray scales
(3) Pixels
Number of pixels in the ROI
(4) Area
Area of the ROI in cm2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.513
2D Evaluation
Viewing
You can move the text block of the evaluation results to any
location in the image.
G.5
Click on the text block and move it with the mouse.
Showing/hiding statistical
evaluations
G.5
The display of evaluation results was set up by Siemens Service during configuration of your system. In Viewing Configuration, you can change these default settings.
Page G.82, Displaying evaluation results
G.5
0.0
G.514
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.515
2D Evaluation
Viewing
Calculating a histogram
G.5
You can have the distribution and frequency of gray scales calculated across the surface of a drawn in an active ROI.
G.5
Select the ROI.
Call up Tools > Histogram.
The histogram is placed over the image. Below the X axis label
you can see which ROI the histogram belongs to (e.g. Pixel Values of Region 1).
G.5
An image is always stored and filmed/printed out with the histogram(s) displayed on it.
0.0
G.516
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
You can measure and evaluate not only regions, but also distances and angles in images.
G.5
G.5
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Distance measurement in projected
images
G.5
Consequence: False diagnostics possible
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.517
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.518
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
(1) Center
Center of the line
(2) Distance
Distance between the beginning and end point
(3) Min/Max
Minimum/maximum gray scale value on the straight line
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.519
2D Evaluation
Viewing
Or
G.5
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.520
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
Showing/hiding statistical
evaluations
G.5
Like with regions, with distances, too, you can show or hide statistical values individually.
G.5
G.5
G.5
Select the evaluation results that you want displayed for your
distance line.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.521
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
You can measure not only the direct distance between two
points, but also the length of a structure, i.e. a blood vessel, by
drawing the shape with a freehand line.
G.5
Call up Tools > Freehand Distance.
G.5
Point to point
G.5
Place the mouse cursor in the segment and click on the starting point of your line with the left mouse button.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
Click on the first point at which you want your line to change
direction.
Then click on the next point etc. until you have drawn the
entire freehand line point by point.
Double-click on the end point.
0.0
G.522
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
Click on the starting point of your freehand line with the left
mouse button.
Draw the structure with the left mouse button pressed.
Double-click on the end point.
Like with a freehand ROI, you can change the shape of your
freehand distance line subsequently by editing its nodes.
For some applications, it might be necessary to draw a freehand line that consists of a polygon definition and a freehand
line.
G.5
As long as you have not double-clicked the end point, you can
mix the two methods, polygon definition and freehand line. G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.523
2D Evaluation
Viewing
After you have completed your freehand line, the following values are displayed.
G.5
(1) Distance
Length of the line
(2) Min/Max
Minimum and maximum gray scale value on the line
0.0
G.524
Operator Manual
Viewing
Showing/hiding statistical
evaluations
G.5
2D Evaluation
Select or deselect the evaluation results that you want displayed or not displayed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.525
2D Evaluation
Viewing
Calculating a profile
G.5
An image is always stored and filmed/printed out with the profile(s) displayed on it, if applicable.
0.0
G.526
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
Measuring an angle
G.5
You can define an angle by two lines, the legs of the angle, that
you draw on the image. The system then calculates the angle
between the two lines drawn in clockwise. If the angle is greater
than 180, the program subtracts 180.
G.5
A
A
A
B
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.527
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
Place the mouse cursor on a starting point for the first leg.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
Drag a line to the end point of the first leg holding the left
mouse button pressed.
Draw the second leg in the same way.
As soon as you start to draw the second leg, the angle size will
be calculated.
G.5
0.0
G.528
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
The two legs of an angle are assigned the same number so you
can distinguish several angles unambiguously.
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.529
2D Evaluation
Changing an angle
Viewing
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.530
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
You can also have the complementary angle displayed (180 angle measured).
G.5
Select the angle.
Call up the popup menu with the right mouse button and
select the entry Other Angle.
The angle is now measured counterclockwise and the new
value displayed.
G.5
Complementary angle
G.5
N OT E
If the angle approximates to 90, 180, 270, it is not clear
whether the angle between the legs or the supplementary
angle has been entered.
G.5
Label the angle with an annotation when you display the
supplementary angle.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.531
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
Angle in image 1
Angle in image 2
0.0
G.532
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
In radiation therapy preparation you display a crosshair to measure pixels. Using the crosshair you can determine the position
of pixels and angles with reference to a starting point and two
axes at right angles to each other in several images at the same
time.
G.5
Displaying a crosshair
G.5
G.5
Click one of the selected images and keep the mouse button
pressed.
Drag the crosshair to the desired position and release the
mouse button.
The crosshair is displayed in the selected images.
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.533
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
After the crosshair has been placed click on the points in the
image whose position you want to determine.
All measurement points you set in one image are displayed
simultaneously in all other selected images, whereas the first
measurement point you set is the center point of the crosshair
for the selected images that do not have a crosshair yet.
G.5
Depending on the setting, the coordinates of the point, or its distance from the origin and angle to the X axis are displayed. G.5
One after the other, click on all pixels you want to measure.
The crosshair and the measuring points are stored with the
image and can be filmed and/or printed with it.
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.534
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
G.5
Confirm your selection and close the dialog box with OK.
Now click on the other pixels to measure them by the new
method.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.535
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
Requirements for
reference image
G.5
0.0
G.536
Operator Manual
Viewing
Restrictions
2D Evaluation
G.5
NOTE
Do not copy pixel lens markers from one image to the next
because different image positions and orientations are
ignored.
G.5
The patient coordinates are not included in the copying
process. Instead, only the image coordinates in reference to
the upper left corner of the image are copied.
G.5
After copying, the image coordinates displayed are
unchanged but they refer to different patient coordinates. G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.537
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
The pixel lens function provides the following options for using
gray scale and coordinate values (pixel lens values for short): G.5
To display the values of the pixel lens at the cursor position, activate the pixel lens function.
G.5
Select Tools > Pixel Lens.
Or
G.5
0.0
G.538
Operator Manual
Viewing
Inserting a marker at
a fixed position
2D Evaluation
G.5
You are able to permanently display the gray scale value and
patient coordinates of a pixel of interest in the image.
G.5
Call the pixel lens function and proceed as follows:
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.539
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
NOTE
The circular marker of the pixel lens does not match the
area measured to determine the gray scale value but has a
constant size, regardless of the image zoom factor. G.5
The gray scale value is always determined by a 5 x 5 pixel
area.
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.540
Operator Manual
Viewing
Applications:
2D Evaluation
G.5
Example 1:
Patient coordinates are used to compare a transverse to a sagittal image. The patient coordinates from the transverse image
on the left are to be located in the second, sagittal image.
Procedure:
G.5
(1) Mark the vertebra in the first image with a mouse click while
the pixel lens function is active.
(2) Move the marker in the second image until the patient coordinates are the same as shown in the first image.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.541
2D Evaluation
Viewing
Example 2:
Two sagittal images of the same study but with a different FOV
are compared. The first image shows only part of the lumbar
vertebrae, the second image shows the entire length of the lumbar vertebrae.
Procedure:
G.5
(1) Mark the vertebra in the first image with a mouse click while
the pixel lens function is active.
(2) Move the marker in the second image until the same
patient coordinates are shown as in the first image.
0.0
G.542
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
Example 3:
Two sagittal images of the same study acquired at different
table positions are shown. The first image shows the upper section, the second image shows the lower section of the cervical
spine.
Procedure:
G.5
(1) Mark the vertebra in the first image with a mouse click while
the pixel lens function is active.
(2) Move the marker in the second image until the patient coordinates are the same in the first image.
G.5
G.5
NOTE
Please note the inaccuracies that may be displayed when
using this application.
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.543
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
G.5
When images are saved, the pixel lens markers in the images
are saved as superimposed graphics.
Chapter G.7, Saving and Documenting Images
G.5
The same applies to exporting and filming images.
G.5
0.0
G.544
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
Setting a shutter
G.5
You can hide irrelevant areas of the image. To do that, you place
a shutter over the image.
G.5
After that, only the area within the shutter is displayed and all
the surrounding areas are displayed black.
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.545
2D Evaluation
Viewing
When you release the mouse, the area outside the shutter is
displayed black.
G.5
To obtain the original view, select the border line of the shutter
and delete it.
0.0
G.546
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
G.5
Call up Edit > Select > All Shutters In Series if you have set
several shutters within a series.
Or
G.5
G.5
Press the Del key on your keyboard to show the entire series
in its original view again.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.547
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
Displaying a grid
G.5
0.0
G.548
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.549
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.550
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
Text in images
G.5
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.551
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
You cannot change the font size or the alignment of the text.
G.5
G.5
NOTE
Although the text can consist of more than one line, only the
line you are currently editing is displayed.
G.5
G.5
Moving text
G.5
G.5
Click on the text with the left mouse button, but not on the
grab handles.
Drag the text to the new position.
0.0
G.552
Operator Manual
Viewing
Changing text
2D Evaluation
G.5
Anchored annotation
text
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.553
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
G.5
G.5
0.0
G.554
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
G.5
You can select all graphics and annotation texts (except shutter)
that you have entered in evaluating the images either individually or altogether in order to delete them, or cut or copy and
insert them at a new position.
G.5
Selecting/deselecting all
graphics and texts
G.5
Call up Edit > Select > All Graphics to mark all graphic elements and image texts of all explicitly selected images.
Or
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.555
2D Evaluation
Viewing
G.5
Select one, more than one or all graphic and text elements in
an image.
Call up Edit > Copy or select Copy in the popup menu to
copy the selected graphic and text elements into the clipboard.
Or
G.5
Call up Edit > Cut or select Cut in the popup menu to cut out
the selected graphic and text elements and place them in the
clipboard.
Page A.218, Moving or copying objects
You can now insert the graphic and text elements from the clipboard into another image.
G.5
Select an image explicitly or place the input focus on the
image.
Call up Edit > Paste.
Or
G.5
Place the mouse cursor in the image into which you want to
insert the graphics.
Select Paste in the popup menu.
0.0
G.556
Operator Manual
Viewing
2D Evaluation
If the zoom factors of the original image and the target image
are different, the size of the graphics is adjusted in the new
image.
Deleting graphics
G.5
You can delete selected graphic and text elements when you no
longer require them.
G.5
Select individual, several or all graphic and text elements.
Call up Edit > Delete Graphics or select Delete in the popup
menu.
Or
G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.557
2D Evaluation
Viewing
0.0
G.558
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.6
Position Display
G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.61
Position Display
Viewing
Basics
G.6
Terms
G.6
When calculating the position display, it is important to understand the following terms:
G.6
Data image
Image whose position line will be displayed
Data series
Series containing the data image
Reference image
Image on which the position line of a data image will be displayed
Reference series
Series containing the reference image
0.0
G.62
Operator Manual
Viewing
Requirements
Position Display
G.6
Both data images and reference images must fulfill the following
conditions for successful calculation of position lines:
G.6
The images are MR images only.
The images are part of the current examination of the current
patient.
The images are part of the same series block.
Page F.339, Series block
The images have been measured using the same table position.
The following images cannot be used for the position display: G.6
Distortion-corrected images.
Page P.171, FOV compensation filter (large FOV)
Mosaic images.
Secondary capture images
e.g. alpha images of the BOLD evaluation.
Page L.411, Automatic calculation of the alpha images
Curved cuts of the 3D evaluation.
Page H.47, Generating curved slices
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.63
Position Display
Viewing
G.6
The images and series to be used as data images for the position display are already loaded on the Viewing task card.
G.6
You may define data images and reference images by selecting
them explicitly or implicitly.
G.6
The order in which you select them determines whether they
are used as a data or reference image.
G.6
N OT E
Calculation of the position display requires that the user has
full access rights to the patient data to be evaluated. G.6
Please refer to the information in,
Page B.16, Data Access and Groups
G.6
0.0
G.64
Operator Manual
Viewing
Position Display
G.6
NOTE
Prior to computing the slice positioning of series S1,
computation of the reference serie(s) R1, R2, etc. has to be
completed.
G.6
If the S1 series was planned using images from different reference R1 and R2 series, the sum R1 + R2 will be used as
the reference series in the position display.
The images of S1 will be mapped on to themselves if no reference series exists for S1 and if it is possible to calculate cut
lines.
G.6
All images from the series selected last (S3) (or all images from
the series to which the image last selected belongs) will be
used as reference images.
G.6
The images of series S1 and S2 will be used as data images.G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.65
Position Display
Viewing
Starting calculation
G.6
Single images or all images of one or more series may be displayed in the position display.
G.6
G.6
G.6
G.6
G.6
0.0
G.66
Operator Manual
Viewing
Position Display
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.67
Position Display
Viewing
G.6
G.6
This new series includes the reference images for which at least
one cut line can be calculated and displayed.
G.6
The image at the top of the stack in the new series is the image
with the greatest number of perpendicular (or nearly perpendicular) cuts.
G.6
All images of the new series are fitted to the segment size, even
if they had been zoomed or panned prior to calculating the position display.
G.6
You may edit images in the position display series.
Page G.415, Zooming and panning images
G.6
G.6
G.6
0.0
G.68
Operator Manual
Viewing
Position Display
G.6
The slice positions of the data images are drawn in the PosDisp images and labeled as cut lines.
G.6
The length of the cut lines does not always represent the spatial
extent. It may be cut off at the edges of the images to make
space for image text and cut line labels.
G.6
Display rules
G.6
G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.69
Position Display
Viewing
Labeling rules
G.6
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
G.6
0.0
G.610
Operator Manual
Viewing
Position Display
The cut lines are labeled with the number of the image if the
PosDisp series only shows images of one series.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images
G.6
If the PosDisp series shows images of several series, the cut
lines are labeled with a lower-case letter to identify the series
plus the number of the image. If cut lines coincide, the lowest
image number plus ... is shown.
G.6
The comment line of the PosDisp images (3) shows how many
data images are displayed as cut lines in the PosDisp.
G.6
G.6
N OT E
If you have configured the position display not to label all cut
lines, overlapping cut lines can cause incorrect assignment
between cut lines and invisible image numbers. In such
cases, select the labeling option All to be on the safe side.
Page G.616, Configuring the display of the cut lines G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.611
Position Display
Viewing
G.6
G.6
0.0
G.612
Operator Manual
Viewing
Example 2 (selection)
Position Display
G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.613
Position Display
Viewing
G.6
You can configure the number of slices to be drawn into the reference images, the location of cut lines labels, as well as how
many cut lines should be numbered.
G.6
G.6
To change the settings for the position display while no PosDisp series is loaded on the Viewing task card, open the Position Display dialog box via the menu.
G.6
Select Evaluation > Position Display > Settings.
If you want to change how the current PosDisp series is displayed, you can also open the Position Display dialog box with
the Position Display: Series and Position Display: Selection
buttons.
G.6
Place the input focus on the PosDisp series.
Click the Position Display: Series or Position Display:
Selection button on the Patient subtask card.
0.0
G.614
Operator Manual
Viewing
Position Display
G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.615
Position Display
Viewing
G.6
All
All cut lines are displayed.
First/Last
Only the first and last cut lines of a parallel line group are displayed.
Automatic
Cut lines that are too close to one another are automatically
hidden. Overlapping cut line labels are avoided.
Select an option under Slices.
G.6
N OT E
The system automatically switches from First/Last to
Automatic as soon as the first and last cut line of a group
can not be calculated.
G.6
This does not affect any other line groups.
G.6
0.0
G.616
Operator Manual
Viewing
Position Display
G.6
You may set a preferred position for the cut line labels in the
PosDisp image.
G.6
Click the appropriate button to place the labels on the left, on
the right, below, or above.
G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.617
Position Display
Viewing
G.6
You may save the configuration settings for the position display.
G.6
Click the Apply button in the Position Display dialog box.
The dialog box will stay open.
G.6
The position display settings will still apply the next time you
restart the system.
G.6
0.0
G.618
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.7
G.7
After image processing, when all the images have been displayed in an optimum way and have been evaluated, you can
save, store or transfer these images for further evaluation and
documentation or for 3D postprocessing.
G.7
After that, you can close the images of this patient and make
space in the Viewing task card for the images of the next
patient.
G.7
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably.
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.71
Viewing
Saving images
G.7
G.7
0.0
G.72
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.7
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Modifications in medical images are not
saved automatically in the same way as image comment.
Additionally, in case of a user switch where the new user
has no adequate access rights, modifications of the image
text may also be lost.
G.7
Consequence: Image modifications may be lost.
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.73
G.7
Viewing
G.7
0.0
G.74
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.7
You can save all selected images in a new series. The old series
remains unchanged. You can then easily compare processed
and evaluated images with the original study images.
G.7
If you no longer require the original series later on, you can
delete it in the Patient Browser.
Page D.616, Deleting data
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.75
Appending images to an
existing series
G.7
Viewing
If you do not want to create a new series for your processed and
evaluated images, you can append them to an existing series.
G.7
0.0
G.76
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.7
G.7
Call up the popup menu (right mouse key) and select Save
Window Values.
Or
G.7
G.7
Window values are only saved if the user has the update permission.
Saving of window values can be turned off by the modality.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.77
Viewing
G.7
Exporting images
G.7
With the function Export To..., you can save patient and examination data to local exchangeable data media (to CD).
Chapter J.2, Storing Data on an External Medium
G.7
Inserting a CD
G.7
0.0
G.78
Operator Manual
Viewing
Storing data on CD
G.7
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.79
Viewing
G.7
G.7
G.7
Or
G.7
G.7
G.7
0.0
G.710
Operator Manual
Viewing
Selecting a destination
G.7
G.7
G.7
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.711
Viewing
G.7
If you want to process or otherwise use images with other programs, you can export them to a specific directory on the system hard disk in several image formats (Export To Off-line).
Chapter J.4, Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk
G.7
0.0
G.712
Operator Manual
Viewing
Filming/printing images
G.7
You can also use the Viewing task card to select images and
copy them to Filming or Film Preview.
G.7
G.7
G.7
All the selected images are transferred to the virtual film sheet
(Filming task card or Film Preview window). There you activate the Auto Expose option and the images are exposed on
film or printed on paper as soon as the film sheet has been
filled, or they are first collected in a film job.
Chapter O.2, Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.713
Film preview
G.7
Viewing
Printing images/exposing
images on film
G.7
G.7
G.7
0.0
G.714
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.7
You can obtain an overview of all film jobs that have already
been transferred to the camera/printer and change the
sequence in which they are processed, for example.
Page O.53, Viewing and manipulating film jobs
G.7
Call up Patient > Film Task Status to display the Film Task
Status dialog box with a list of all the pending film jobs.
You can film and print multiframe images only from the Viewing
task card.
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.715
Viewing
Transferring images to 3D
G.7
G.7
If you select only one or two images, the entire series to which
the selected images belong are transferred, because 3D
requires a minimum number of images for processing. If you
select four or more images, only the selected images are
transferred.
0.0
G.716
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.7
From the Viewing task card, you can transfer images to Windows applications via the Windows XP Clipboard.
G.7
You can copy individual or several selected images and insert
them into a file of an image postprocessing program.
G.7
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.717
Viewing
G.7
Closing selected
images or series
G.7
0.0
G.718
Operator Manual
Viewing
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
B3
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
Clear documents
G.7
A1
A2
A3
A4
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
G.7
Closing patients
G.7
You can also close all images, series, and studies of the patient
whose images are currently displayed.
G.7
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.719
Viewing
0.0
G.720
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.8
G.8
G.8
In the Basics part of this manual you can read how to call up
and exit configuration windows, save changes, or reset settings back to the as-delivered state.
Chapter A.3, Configuring the User Interface
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.81
Viewing
G.8
When you draw ROIs and distance lines, the program evaluates
the areas and lines statistically.
Page G.54, Evaluating regions
Page G.517, Measuring distances and angles
G.8
On the Graphic Tools tab card, you can set what evaluation
results are to be displayed in the images for each ROI or line
type.
G.8
You can also make settings for the Scalegrid and Crosshair
evaluation tools on the Graphic Tools card.
G.8
Click the Graphic Tools tab card into the foreground.
0.0
G.82
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.8
G.8
Displaying evaluation
results
G.8
G.8
First select for which ROI or line type you want to change the
display of evaluation results.
G.8
G.8
G.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.83
G.8
Viewing
You can change all the settings for the various graphic tools not
only on the configuration platform but also directly on the Viewing task card.
G.8
Place the cursor on the icon button of the graphic tool whose
settings you want to change on the task card stack.
Call up Properties... in the popup menu (right mouse button).
A dialog box for defining the properties of this graphic tool is displayed. You can now change the settings for this graphic tool.
This setting will be used whenever you call this graphic tool in
the future.
G.8
G.8
NOTE
If, however, you select a drawing element in an image and
then call up Edit > Properties... (or Properties... in the
popup menu), the settings that you can make in the dialog
box now displayed apply to the selected
drawing element only.
G.8
0.0
G.84
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.85
Viewing
0.0
G.86
Operator Manual
Viewing
G.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.87
Selecting a name
Viewing
G.8
Enter a name in the combo box to create new organ- or userspecific window values.
Or
G.8
Select a name from the list edit window values or delete it.
G.8
0.0
G.88
Operator Manual
Viewing
Entering or changing
window values
G.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
G.89
Viewing
0.0
G.810
Operator Manual
PART
3D Evaluation
H.0
H.1 Introduction
3D evaluation method .................................................... H.12
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) .............................. H.13
Maximum (MIP) and minimum (MinIP)
intensity projection ..................................................... H.15
Surface shaded display (SSD) .................................. H.18
Volume rendering technique (VRT) ......................... H.110
The 3D task card .......................................................... H.111
H.3 Working in 3D
The patient coordinate system ....................................... H.32
Orientation aids in the image ..................................... H.35
Image representation in 3D ............................................ H.37
Image area in reference mode .................................. H.37
Image information ...................................................... H.39
Setting views in the volume data set............................ H.311
Setting the reference image .................................... H.311
Using the 3D cross hair ........................................... H.313
Paging with the dog ears ......................................... H.317
Shifting ..................................................................... H.318
Rotating the volume with the mouse ....................... H.319
Rotating around one axis (oblique cut planes) ........ H.320
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H1
Contents
3D Evaluation
H2
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H3
Contents
3D Evaluation
0.0
H4
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Contents
H.9 3D Editor
Functions of the 3D Editor ............................................. H.92
Calling up the 3D Editor ................................................. H.94
3D card in editor mode .............................................. H.95
Dialog box Object Editor ............................................ H.96
The Slab Editor .............................................................. H.97
Switching on the Slab Editor ...................................... H.98
Changing a 3D block ................................................. H.99
Block by block editing with the Slab Editor .............. H.912
Creating 3D objects ..................................................... H.913
Creating an object with threshold ............................ H.914
Creating an object with Region Growing ................. H.919
Working with the object list .......................................... H.924
Selecting objects ..................................................... H.926
Changing object properties ...................................... H.927
Displaying objects in the slab segment ................... H.928
Updating the display ................................................ H.931
Saving, adding, deleting objects .............................. H.932
Postprocessing objects ................................................ H.935
Cutting out structures .............................................. H.935
Morphological editing ............................................... H.942
Closing the 3D Editor ................................................... H.946
H.10 Fusion
Functions of Fusion ...................................................... H.102
Calling up Fusion ......................................................... H.103
Loading image data sets ......................................... H.104
3D card in Fusion mode .......................................... H.107
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H5
Contents
3D Evaluation
0.0
H6
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Contents
H.14 3D Configuration
Configuring image information ..................................... H.142
Configuring processing of series .................................. H.144
Configuring storage ................................................. H.145
Configuring filming ................................................... H.146
Configuring the orientation of the reference image . H.147
Configuring quality filter ........................................... H.148
Configuring resampling ............................................ H.149
Configuring Fly Through ............................................ H.1410
Updating changes .................................................. H.1411
Path representation ............................................... H.1412
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H7
Contents
3D Evaluation
0.0
H8
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.1
Introduction
H.1
(1)
(2)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.11
Introduction
3D Evaluation
3D evaluation method
H.1
Your system provides you with the following methods for combining two-dimensional images to form three-dimensional
views:
H.1
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) is used to place the slices
in various orientations through the region of interest. The
resulting images are two-dimensional.
You can use the maximum intensity projection (MIP) for the
display of contrast medium examinations or especially for
angiography.
You can use the minimum intensity projection (MinIP) especially to display the pulmonary tissue.
You can use the surface shaded display (SSD) method, for
example, to evaluate bone and vascular examinations that
you want to display with virtual three-dimensionality.
Volume rendering technique (VRT) is used, for example, to
differentiate between organs and tissue structures, and for
colored, three-dimensional display of bone, tissue, and
organs.
0.0
H.12
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Introduction
H.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Transversal/axial
Coronal
Paraxial
Sagittal
Paraxial
Sagittal
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.13
Introduction
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.14
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Introduction
H.1
In the selected view through the volume elements (called voxels) with the greatest/least intensity are determined and projected onto a surface irrespective of whether they are at the
front or further back in the stack. This gives you the maximum/
minimum intensity projection.
H.1
MIP
H.1
You can use this method, for example, to exploit the fact that
blood vessels are always displayed in the volume as the structures with the most intensive gray-scale values.
H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.15
Introduction
3D Evaluation
MinIP
H.1
You can use this method, for example, for examinations of the
lung as the structures with the least intensive gray-scale values.
H.1
In the MinIP image the voxels with the minimum intensity are
displayed.
H.1
In order to gain a three-dimensional impression you can generate several MIP/MinIP images from different viewing directions
or rotate the projection using the mouse or the 3D cross-hair. H.1
0.0
H.16
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Introduction
H.1
You can limit the volume for a projection to a partial area of the
volume data set. In the output type MIP Thin / MinIP Thin you
define which expansion the volume used for the projection
should have.
H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.17
Introduction
3D Evaluation
H.1
0.0
H.18
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Introduction
You can change the viewing direction in real time with the
mouse or 3D cross hair. You can also generate series of views
taken from different viewing angles.
H.1
You can, for example, cut out any structures to expose areas of
special interest.
H.1
The gray-scales that are shown on the display are no longer the
measured values. They are only intended to give a threedimensional impression.
H.1
A fine distinction in the density of the tissue is no longer possible, for example, calcification and contrast medium in the vessels can no longer be distinguished by their density in SSD. H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.19
Introduction
3D Evaluation
H.1
0.0
H.110
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Introduction
H.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.111
Introduction
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.112
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.2
Transferring Images to 3D
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.21
Transferring Images to 3D
3D Evaluation
Starting 3D evaluation
H.2
First select the images or series that you want to display in three
dimensions in the Patient Browser or on the Viewing task
card.
H.2
In this step, you can select more than one series of one patient
for 3D processing.
H.2
Selecting a 3D display
method
H.2
H.2
H.2
0.0
H.22
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Transferring Images to 3D
A selection of images that are to be displayed in three dimensions must at least fulfill the following criteria:
H.2
All images must originate from one patient and from one
study.
At least 3 images must have been loaded to process 3D.
All images must be parallel and be located on one axis.
If you have selected only one series which also fulfills all the
above criteria, the images will be transferred to the 3D task card
and you can start processing them immediately.
H.2
In that case, turn straight to
Page H.41, Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)
Page H.51, Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection
Page H.61, Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)
Page H.71, Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.23
Transferring Images to 3D
3D Evaluation
The last step is to select a series from the Series List and
transfer it to the 3D task card.
H.2
H.2
0.0
H.24
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Transferring Images to 3D
H.2
As soon as you have loaded images into the 3D task card you
may switch to other tasks and then return to the 3D task card to
continue processing the images.
H.2
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.25
Transferring Images to 3D
3D Evaluation
Series List
H.2
H.2
You can also open the Series List explicitly, for example, to load
another series into the 3D task card.
Page H.212, Other series from the Series List
H.2
Call Patient > Open Series List... in the main menu of the
3D task card.
0.0
H.26
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Transferring Images to 3D
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.27
Transferring Images to 3D
Invalid List
H.2
3D Evaluation
H.2
H.2
You can hide the Invalid Series list to keep the Series List dialog box clear.
H.2
Click on the Show invalid series list check box to remove
the checkmark and deselect the option.
The screen display is updated immediately, the Valid Series list
is displayed larger. The Invalid Series list is no longer displayed.
H.2
If none of the series you selected is suitable for 3D display, so
that the Valid Series list is empty, you cannot hide the Invalid
Series list.
0.0
H.28
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Transferring Images to 3D
Merging series
H.2
H.2
H.2
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.29
Transferring Images to 3D
3D Evaluation
Transferring series to 3D
H.2
If the list of Valid Series contains more than one series which is
suitable for 3D display, you have to decide which series you
want to display and evaluate in three dimensions.
H.2
You can only ever display and process one series at a time on
the 3D task card.
Only medical images can be transferred into the 3D task card.
Double-click in the list of Valid Series on the series that you
want to process first.
Or
H.2
H.2
H.2
H.2
Once you have transferred images to the Series List you can
stop processing, for example, processing images.
H.2
Click on Cancel to close the Series List dialog box.
You return to the Viewing task card or the Patient Browser.
H.2
0.0
H.210
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Transferring Images to 3D
H.2
H.2
Confirm with Yes to load the new series onto the 3D task
card and close the old series.
Or
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.211
Transferring Images to 3D
3D Evaluation
Or
H.2
H.2
H.2
At any time, you can also access the other series that you had
preselected for processing in the Series List from the 3D task
card.
H.2
Call up the Series List dialog box with Patient > Open
Series List....
Select another series and transfer it by clicking on the Select
button.
The series previously loaded is closed.
H.2
0.0
H.212
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.3
Working in 3D
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.31
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
0.0
H.32
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Directions
Working in 3D
H.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.33
Working in 3D
Anatomical standard
views
3D Evaluation
H.3
Viewing directions along one of the axes of the patient coordinate system are called anatomical standard views. The slices
which you look at in such views are designated:
H.3
0.0
H.34
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
For MR images, angle data is displayed that refers to the standard views (sagittal, transversal and coronal). If, for example,
you tip an image from the transversal viewing plane towards the
coronal plane, you can see by what angle you have rotated the
plane. You can also rotate the representation in a single plane.
If you rotate the image in the direction of the other viewing plane
(in this case sagittal), this angle of rotation, too, is indicated with
reference to the standard view.
H.3
The orientation description is also filmed and stored.
H.3
Orientation cube
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.35
Working in 3D
Orientation labels
3D Evaluation
H.3
When generating curved cuts or curved ranges, an orientation label in < > brackets is displayed.
Page H.410, Displaying images
0.0
H.36
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Image representation in 3D
H.3
The image area on the 3D task card is divided into four segments. The segments have different functions depending on the
mode you are currently working in.
H.3
H.3
H.3
Output segment
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.37
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
H.38
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Image information
H.3
(1)
(2)
(9)
(8)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.39
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.310
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
Once you have loaded the images into the 3D task card you can
move through the 3D model using the aids provided on this task
card.
H.3
First generate a view you require. You can use this view as reference image as the basis for further processing. For example,
you can reconstruct parallel slice images on it.
H.3
First generate a view you require.
Click on the reference segment of the required view.
You can use this view as a reference image as the basis for further processing. The segment is now displayed with a thick border.
H.3
For example, you can reconstruct parallel slice images on it.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.311
Working in 3D
Selecting a reference
image
3D Evaluation
H.3
Set the view in which you want to perform subsequent 3D evaluation in one of the three reference segments. This view is then
your reference image.
H.3
Click on the segment in question to select the image.
The image is displayed with a thick border. In the example
H.3
below, it is the top left-hand segment.
0.0
H.312
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
The lines through the cross hair (reference lines) indicate the
position of two slice planes that are perpendicular to each other
in the standard view (the lines represent the cut lines). The two
planes are displayed in the two other reference segments. H.3
You can recognize which slice image belongs to which cut lines
in the segment in question by the color of the reference lines
and the frame around the reference segments.
H.3
The top left-hand segment is surrounded by a red border. The
position of the corresponding image in the volume data set is
indicated in the two other reference segments by a red line.
Correspondingly, the position of the image in a blue border is
indicated by blue lines and that of the image in the green frame
by green lines.
H.3
The arrows indicate the viewing direction from which you view
a plane.
H.3
Broken lines indicate planes that are not perpendicular to the
view displayed.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.313
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
You can now move through the views of the reference segments
in any direction using the lines.
H.3
Click on a line and move it holding the left mouse button
down.
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.314
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Or
H.3
Select the entire reference image and click the target position with the left mouse button (no reference line selected).
Both lines are moved in such a way that the intersection is now
at the position you clicked.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.315
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.316
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
When you set the output types MPR, MPR Thick, MIP Thin or
MinIP Thin, you will see dog ears in the top right-hand corner of
the reference segments.
H.3
You can move slice by slice forwards or backwards through the
volume using the dog ears. The corresponding line of the cross
hair in another segment moves in parallel.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.317
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Shifting
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.318
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.319
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
For oblique slices, you rotate a slice around one axis of the
patient coordinate system starting from the standard view. H.3
The orientation is displayed in the image as a combination of
two orientation labels. This designation is comparable with the
designations used on a compass, e.g. NW for north-west.
H.3
One of the two reference lines in the image is now dotted. The
corresponding plane is therefore oblique in relation to the displayed image.
H.3
Two different directions of rotation (around an axis) exist for
each standard view, each of which are explained graphically in
the following examples.
H.3
In the following examples, the patient is positioned head first,
supine.
0.0
H.320
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Transversal slice
H.3
H Tra
Sag
RH
F
Sag
Tra
Tra
Cor
Cor Cor
F
H.3
H.3
H.3
RF
AH
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.321
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Sagittal slice
H.3
Tra
Sag
H
Tra
Cor
Cor
HL
AR
0.0
H.322
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Coronal slice
H.3
Sag
Tra
H
Sag
H
Cor
Cor
HA
Tra
RA
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.323
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
You obtain cut planes in two axes whenever you rotate one slice
around two different patient coordinate axes one after the other.
The plane is then no longer perpendicular to either of the coordinate axes. The image orientation is displayed as a combination of three orientation labels.
H.3
A
Sag
Tra
Sag
HRP
Cor
Cor
(1)
Tra
(2)
AR
(3)
0.0
H.324
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
A
A
A
H H.3
H
A H.3
A
R
R
R H.3
HH H.3
R H.3
R
R
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.325
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Automatic orientation
control
PH
H.3
If you rotate and tip an image from the sagittal plane towards
the transversal plane, for example, you eventually find yourself
in the transversal view. The program then rotates the image by
another 90 to display it in a preferred direction again, i.e. from
anterior-head to right-anterior.
H.3
AF
0.0
H.326
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
Transversal view
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.327
Working in 3D
Sagittal view
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
In the sagittal view, you view the patient from the side (from the
left or from the right).
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.328
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Coronal view
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
In the coronal view, you view the patient from the front or the
rear.
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.329
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.330
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
Active
H.3
Click on the active button Free Mode in the upper part of the
control area to deselect the option.
Not active
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.331
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.332
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
View perpendicular to
reference image
(Ortho Sync)
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
Click on the Ortho Sync button in the upper part of the control area.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.333
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.334
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Blow Up Segment
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.335
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
0.0
H.336
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Deactivating Blow Up
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.337
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Smart Select
H.3
H.3
Place the mouse cursor in the segment and keep the right
mouse button pressed.
A graphical popup menu is displayed.
H.3
Drag the mouse cursor onto one of the four menu items and
release the mouse button again.
You can now apply the selected mouse option in the usual way
with the left mouse button.
H.3
Move the mouse over the central frame and release the
mouse button.
The frame will be highlighted in blue and any of the four options
will be switched off.
H.3
Implicit mode
H.3
0.0
H.338
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
You can change the output type for a segment at any time, i.e.
from multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) to maximum (MIP) and
(MinIP) intensity projection, to surface shaded display (SSD), or
to volume rendering technique (VRT).
H.3
Depending on your working method, you will first generate a reference image, for example, in MPR in the desired view and then
switch to MIP, MinIP, SSD or VRT display.
H.3
Click on the segment for which you want to change the output type.
If you want to switch over all segments, you must select and
switch over each one separately, one after the other.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.339
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Setting MPR
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.340
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Setting MIP
H.3
The maximum intensity projection uses the most intensive grayscale values of the images for reconstruction. For example, in
contrast medium examinations, blood vessels are those structures with the most intensive values. The system considers
these voxels. The MIP display is therefore especially suitable for
vascular examinations.
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.341
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Or
H.3
0.0
H.342
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Setting MinIP
H.3
The minimum intensity projection uses the least intensive grayscale values of the images for reconstruction. The MinIP display
is therefore especially suitable for examinations of the lung. H.3
Call Type > MinIP.
The output type in the selected segment is switched over.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.343
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Setting SSD
H.3
After you have generated a reference image, you can also generate a surface structure in this view.
Page H.311, Setting the reference image
H.3
You can display both complete volume data sets and previously defined partial volumes (VOIs, volumes of interest) in
SSD display.
Page H.56, Extracting a volume of interest (VOI)
Call up Type > SSD.
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.344
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
There you can enter threshold values yourself and start SSD
extraction.
Page H.63, SSD reconstruction with changed thresholds H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.345
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Setting VRT
H.3
In the 3D card
H.3
H.3
In the Viewing or
Patient Browser card
H.3
0.0
H.346
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
You can set the three output types independently of each other
in the three reference segments.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.347
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Free View
H.3
With Free View you can isolate a part of the data set volume by
using clip planes and the clip box and, in that way, hide the area
you do not require.
H.3
H.3
You can call up Free View via main menu or via icon in the subtask card.
H.3
Select a segment.
Call up Settings > Free View in the main menu.
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.348
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.349
Working in 3D
Graphics
3D Evaluation
H.3
0.0
H.350
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
You can rotate, pan and zoom the volume displayed in the free
view segment.
H.3
Rotate Object
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.351
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
Move the mouse cursor over the center of the clipbox side
until the border frame of the clip box side becomes highlighted blue.
The cursor shape changes.
H.3
0.0
H.352
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Measurements in 3D
H.3
On the 3D task card, you have tools for region evaluation, measuring distances, lengths, and angles, and for pixel evaluation.H.3
You can annotate images with image texts in order to document
your evaluation.
H.3
H.3
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Measurements in projected images
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.353
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Measuring distances
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.354
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
(1) Center
Center of the line
(2) Distance
Distance between the beginning and end point
(3) Min/Max
Minimum/maximum gray scale value on the straight line
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.355
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.356
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
You can measure not only the direct distance between two
points, but also the length of a structure, i.e. a blood vessel, by
drawing the shape with a freehand line.
H.3
Place the mouse cursor in the segment and click on the starting point of your line with the left mouse button.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
H.3
Click on the first point at which you want your line to change
direction.
Then click on the next point etc. until you have drawn the
entire freehand line point by point.
Double-click on the end point.
The length of the line and the minimum and maximum gray
scale values are displayed.
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
Click on the starting point of your freehand line with the left
mouse button.
Draw the structure with the left mouse button pressed.
Double-click on the end point.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.357
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
After you have completed your freehand line, the following values are displayed.
H.3
(1) Distance
Length of the line
(2) Min/Max
Minimum and maximum gray scale value on the line
0.0
H.358
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Measuring angles
H.3
You can define an angle by two lines, that you draw on the
image. The system then calculates the angle between the two
lines drawn in clockwise direction. If the angle is greater than
180, the program subtracts 180.
H.3
A
A
A
(1)
(2)
B
(3)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.359
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.360
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
The two legs of an angle are assigned the same number so you
can distinguish several angles unambiguously.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.361
Working in 3D
Changing an angle
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
N OT E
If the angle approximates to 90, 180, 270, it is not clear
whether the angle between the legs or the supplementary
angle has been entered.
H.3
Label the angle with an annotation when you display the
supplementary angle.
0.0
H.362
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
Drawing ROIs
H.3
You can mark anomalies in the images and then evaluate these
regions. To do this you draw a ROI graphic around the region of
particular interest to you. You can now evaluate the gray scales
within this ROI statistically.
H.3
Rectangular and circular
ROIs
H.3
You can draw around the regions that are of special interest with
a rectangle or circle and evaluate them. First select the tool. H.3
Call up Tools > Circle or Tools > Rectangle.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.363
Working in 3D
Resizing/moving regions
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
You can move a small circle ROI easier by pressing the Alt
key.
The cursor then switches into the move mode automatically.
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.364
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.365
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
The program will connect the starting point and the end point
and display the freehand ROI.
H.3
You can also mix both kinds.
0.0
H.366
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Evaluating ROIs
Working in 3D
H.3
(1) Limits
Evaluated gray scale range. The limits are taken into
account in the following evaluations
(2) Min/Max
Highest and lowest gray scale value
(3) Mean/SD
Mean value and standard deviation of the gray scales
(4) Pixels
Number of pixels in the ROI
(5) Area
Area of the ROI in cm2
You can move the text block of the evaluation results to any
location in the image.
H.3
Click on the text block and move it with the mouse.
When evaluations are done on PET images, or fused images
with PET share, SUV values for quantitative measurements
are displayed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.367
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
With the pixel lens, you can display the average value of the
gray scales of a small area of 55 pixels.
H.3
Call up Tools > Pixel Lens.
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
The cursor changes shape. The pixel value at the position of the
cursor in the image is displayed.
H.3
H.3
You can have the values of pixels that are especially interesting
to you displayed permanently in the image.
H.3
Click on the image with the left mouse button.
The pixel is marked, the pixel value is displayed next to the
H.3
marker.
0.0
H.368
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
NOTE
This pixel has a constant size and is independent of the
zoom factor of the image.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.369
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Text in images
H.3
Anchored annotation
text
H.3
You can write text marked with an arrow, pull open an arrow
keeping the left mouse button pressed and then write your text
in the text input field (end position of the arrow).
H.3
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.370
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
You cannot change the font size or the alignment of the text.
H.3
Moving text
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.371
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
In most cases, the result of your 3D evaluation will be the reconstruction of entire series of images. To do that, first select a reference image in the view that you require.
Page H.312, Selecting a reference image
H.3
Depending on the output type you are using, the following
options will be available to you:
H.3
Series of parallel tomographic images
Series of the curved ranges
Radial series
Expanded ranges
0.0
H.372
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Series of parallel
tomographic images
Working in 3D
H.3
With this option you generate series of cut images that are parallel to one another and perpendicular to the reference image
for the output types MPR, MPR Thick and MIP Thin, MinIP Thin,
VRT Thin.
H.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.373
Working in 3D
Curved ranges
3D Evaluation
H.3
With this option you generate series of curved cut images that
are parallel to one another for the output types MPR, MPR
Thick, MIP Thin and MinIP Thin.
H.3
0.0
H.374
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Radial series
Working in 3D
H.3
For output types MPR, MPR Thick,MIP Thin, MinIP Thin and
VRT Thin you generate a series of cut images arranged in a star
shape. For output types MIP, MinIP, SSD and VRT you generate
a series of projections and views of the volume each rotated
around a defined angle.
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.375
Working in 3D
Expanded ranges
3D Evaluation
H.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
H.376
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.377
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
The lines in the output segment show the position of the individual images. The arrows indicate the viewing direction.
H.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
If the series is made up of many images, not all the lines are
displayed in the graphic. The inside lines are then displayed
in green.
0.0
H.378
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
Default parameter settings with individual designations for generating parallel series are stored in your system. You can
access these parameters with the selection button Presets and
call up a parameter setting adapted to your requirements.
H.3
If no parameter set exists that is suitable for your diagnostic
problem, load a similar parameter set and then edit it.
H.3
Select the parameter set you want from the selection list.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.379
Working in 3D
Changing a range
numerically
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Enter the slice thickness of the result image and confirm your
entry with the Return key.
Page H.43, Changing the slice thickness (MPR Thick)
Click on the Horizontal Ranges button.
This is how you generate a series whose intersection planes
are horizontal in the center of the reference image.
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
Click on the button Swap Range Order to reverse the existing image numbering of the series.
The graphic display of the series on the reference segment
changes according to your settings. A new preview image is
reconstructed in the output segment.
H.3
0.0
H.380
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.381
Working in 3D
Starting reconstruction
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
If all the settings are as you require them, you can start reconstruction.
H.3
Click on the Start button to create the series of parallel tomographic images.
A message box is displayed in which you are informed about
the progress of reconstruction. Each image is displayed in the
output segment as soon as it has been calculated.
H.3
Canceling reconstruction
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.382
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Terminating
reconstruction
Working in 3D
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.383
Working in 3D
Saving a series
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
If you want use the parameter set again in the future, we recommend that you store it in the system.
H.3
Enter a suitable name and confirm with the Return key.
Click on the Save button to save the parameter set.
Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets
The next time you load, the presets are assigned to the series
that contain the name entered as the first part of their name.
H.3
H.3
You can delete parameter sets that you no longer require for
editing parallel series from the selection list Presets.
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.384
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.385
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
0.0
H.386
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
In a series of curved parallel tomographic images, you generate images that are parallel and a defined distance apart.
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.387
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
The lines show the position of the individual images of the created series.
H.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
If the series is made up of many images, not all the lines are
displayed in the graphic. The inside lines are then displayed
in green.
0.0
H.388
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
Default parameter settings with individual designations for generating parallel series are stored in your system. You can
access these parameters with the selection button Presets and
call up a parameter setting adapted to your requirements.
H.3
If no parameter set exists that is suitable for your diagnostic
problem, load a similar parameter set and then edit it.
H.3
Select the parameter set you want from the selection list.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.389
Working in 3D
Changing a range
numerically
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Enter the slice thickness of the result image and confirm your
entry with the Return key.
Page H.43, Changing the slice thickness (MPR Thick)
Click on the button Swap Range Order to reverse the existing image numbering of the series.
The graphic display of the series on the reference segment
changes according to your settings. A new preview image is
reconstructed in the output segment.
H.3
0.0
H.390
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.391
Working in 3D
Starting reconstruction
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
If all the settings are as you require them, you can start reconstruction.
H.3
Click on the Start button to create the series of parallel tomographic images.
A message box is displayed in which you are informed about
the progress of reconstruction. Each image is displayed in the
output segment as soon as it has been calculated.
H.3
Canceling reconstruction
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.392
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Terminating
reconstruction
Working in 3D
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.393
Working in 3D
Saving a series
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
If you want use the parameter set again in the future, we recommend that you store it in the system.
H.3
Enter a suitable name and confirm with the Return key.
Click on the Save button to save the parameter set.
Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets
The next time you load, the presets are assigned to the series
that contain the name entered as the first part of their name.
H.3
H.3
You can delete parameter sets that you no longer require for
editing parallel series from the selection list Presets.
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.394
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.395
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
0.0
H.396
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.397
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.398
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
Enter the slice thickness in the input field (only possible for
MPR Thick, MIP Thin, MinIP Thin and VRT Thin) and confirm with the Return key.
The new reference image is displayed in the output segment.
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.399
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.3100
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3101
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
End line
Reference line
Starting line (marked by arrows)
Viewing direction arrow
Angle and thickness
0.0
H.3102
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
Default parameter settings with individual designations for generating radial series are stored in your system. You can access
these parameters with the selection button Presets and call up
a parameter setting adapted to your requirements.
H.3
If no parameter set exists that is suitable for your diagnostic
problem, load a similar parameter set and then edit it.
H.3
Select the parameter set you want from the selection list.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3103
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.3104
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
Click on the starting or end line and move the line holding the
left mouse button down.
The number of images changes accordingly (is increased or
decreased). The angle between the cut images remains the
same.
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3105
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Or
H.3
H.3
Move the entire range by moving the point of rotation with the
mouse button pressed.
The image corresponding to the line being processed is displayed in the output segment. The values in the Radial Ranges
dialog box change in accordance with the changes made to the
graphic display.
H.3
If you change the range by rotating the start or end line, the
number of images remains constant. Only the angle between
the images changes.
0.0
H.3106
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Starting reconstruction
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
If all the settings are as you require them, you can start reconstruction.
H.3
Click on the Start button to start reconstruction of the range.
A message box shows the progress of reconstruction and
H.3
allows you to cancel reconstruction.
The reconstructed images are displayed as a stack of images
in the output segment. The upper image corresponds to the end
line in the graphic display.
H.3
Using the dog ears in the top right-hand corner of the images,
you can page through the stack.
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3107
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
Or
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.3108
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Saving a series
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
If you want use the parameter set again in the future, we recommend that you store it in the system.
H.3
Enter a suitable name and confirm with the Return key.
Click on the Save button to save the parameter set.
Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets
The next time you load, the presets are assigned to the series
that contain the name entered as the first part of their name. H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3109
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
You can delete parameter sets that you no longer require for
editing radial series from the selection list Presets.
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
You can rotate the starting and end line of the range in order to
change the range and the angle between the result images. H.3
If you generate a new series by changing the values, a
prompt appears asking you whether you want to save or
reject the old series.
0.0
H.3110
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
H.3
The future position of the projections/views is displayed graphically by projection arrows on the reference image. The reconstructed images are at right angles to these arrows. The arrows
therefore indicate the direction in which you generate the projection. You can define the orientation of these arrows as follows:
H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3111
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
Or
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
0.0
H.3112
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Rotation point
Starting line
End line
Angle and thickness (depends on the image type)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3113
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
H.3
With the exception of the slice thickness, you now select all
other settings for the radial series in the dialog box Radial
Ranges or with the mouse in the reference image as you do for
the reconstruction of radial cuts.
Page H.3101, Generating radial images
H.3
0.0
H.3114
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Working in 3D
H.3
Linking presets
H.3
H.3
With this functionality the system offers a name taken from the
Series Description.
H.3
Click on the Link Preset button to get the suitable suggestion for the name.
The generated name is selected in the edit field.
H.3
H.3
H.3
H.3
From now on, all series of the same kind, i.e. having the same
series description, will be automatically linked with this preset.H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.3115
Working in 3D
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.3116
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.4
Multiplanar
Reconstruction (MPR)
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.41
3D Evaluation
Transfer as MPR to 3D
H.4
H.4
If you have already loaded images onto the 3D task card and
have only switched back to another application temporarily,
switch back to 3D by clicking the tab.
Page H.25, Calling the 3D task card
If you have finished processing your first 3D series and saved
it, you can load the next marked series directly from the
Series List (Patient > Open Series List...). If the last patient
to have been processed is in 3D, a dialog box appears in
which you can specify whether you wish to continue processing or load the new series.
Page H.212, Other series from the Series List
0.0
H.42
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.4
With the MPR for thick slices, you can define the thickness of
the original slice from which the image is to be reconstructed.
The program calculates an average from several gray-scale values and uses these averages to build up the image.
H.4
Call up Type > MPR Thick to set the output type MPR Thick.
Or
H.4
H.4
H.4
Click the MPR Thick button on the Type tool card with the
right mouse button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.43
3D Evaluation
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
0.0
H.44
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.4
With the facility to generate images with any interval and direction, you can simulate examinations independently of the scanning direction.
H.4
You can save images reconstructed in this way as new series
and, for example, transfer them to the Viewing task card for 2D
evaluation.
H.4
Parallel ranges
H.4
Radial ranges
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.45
Expanded ranges
H.4
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.46
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.47
3D Evaluation
Drawing curves
H.4
H.4
0.0
H.48
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
For some applications, it can be necessary to connect a polygon definition with a freehand line and vice versa.
H.4
As long as you have not double-clicked the end point, you can
mix the two methods, polygon definition and freehand line. H.4
The way the image is reconstructed depends on the direction
in which the line is drawn. For example, if you draw the spinal
canal starting from the top and moving downwards, the image
that you produce is different to the one you produce when you
draw the line from the bottom to the top (opposite way round).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.49
3D Evaluation
Displaying images
H.4
After you have completed your cut line, a new image is reconstructed in the output segment. In the reference image (working
segment), the starting point of this image is marked by an
arrow.
H.4
The orientation mark and the cutline are displayed as orientation aids.
An orientation label in < > brackets is displayed on the righthand side of the image segment.
H.4
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Using non-planar slice images for
diagnostic purposes
Consequence: Wrong diagnosis
H.4
H.4
0.0
H.410
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.4
If you have drawn a very long cut line, it might not be possible
to display the entire image in the output segment. Then, only
the first part of the line is used to generate an image. This part
is then highlighted in the working segment.
H.4
The starting point of the display is marked by an arrow.
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.411
H.4
3D Evaluation
Move the starting point in the working segment to display further parts of the cut line by moving the arrow along the line
with the mouse.
A new image is generated. In this way, you can draw the structures bit by bit over their entire extent.
H.4
0.0
H.412
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.4
H.4
H.4
Move the entire line holding the left mouse button down.
A new image is displayed in the output segment.
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.413
H.4
3D Evaluation
While drawing you can also move the cutline within the volume
data set layer by layer by paging with the dog ear of the working
segment.
H.4
Click on the outside field of the dog ear to move forwards.
Or
H.4
0.0
H.414
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Rotating images
H.4
H.4
H.4
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.415
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.416
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.5
H.5
The maximum intensity projection uses the most intensive grayscale values of the images for reconstruction. For example, in
contrast medium examinations, blood vessels are those structures that have the most intensive values. The MIP display is
therefore especially suitable for vascular examinations.
H.5
The minimum intensity projection uses the least intensive grayscale values of the images for reconstruction. Air-filled structures have the least intensive values, the MinIP display is therefore especially suitable for pulmonary examinations.
H.5
If other structures are obstructing the volumes of interest to you,
it is useful to extract a VOI (volume of interest).
H.5
You can also create radial series in maximum (MIP) and minimum (MinIP) intensity projection from the reference mode. H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.51
MIP
H.5
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.52
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
MinIP
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.53
3D Evaluation
Transfer as MIP to 3D
H.5
H.5
If you have already loaded images onto the 3D task card and
have only switched back to another application temporarily,
switch back to 3D by clicking the tab.
Page H.25, Calling the 3D task card
If you have finished processing your first 3D series and saved
it, you can load the next marked series directly from the
Series List (Patient > Open Series List...). If the last patient
to have been processed is in 3D, a dialog box appears in
which you can specify whether you wish to continue processing or load the new series.
Page H.212, Other series from the Series List
0.0
H.54
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.55
3D Evaluation
H.5
With a volume of interest (VOI), you extract a volume of diagnostic interest to you, thus limiting the volume to be reconstructed to a partial volume.
H.5
0.0
H.56
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.57
H.5
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
Select Settings > VOI Reset Clipbox from the main menu if
you want to reset the size of the clipbox to the initial values.
The reset is applied to all segments simultaneously.
H.5
0.0
H.58
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
You can change the default views in the three segments in any
possible way. This way you control the position of the VOI along
all three axes.
H.5
Select the result segment.
Select the required standard view using the buttons on the
Orientation tool card or in the Orientation menu.
Page H.327, Setting standard views
The views are perpendicular or parallel to the scan direction
of the data set, but might not be perpendicular to the patient
coordinate system.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.59
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
H.5
Move the mouse cursor holding the left mouse button down
and rotate the VOI.
Moving the mouse up or down tilts the object in 90-steps.
Moving the mouse to the left or right rotates the object in 90steps.
0.0
H.510
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
Once you have positioned and delimited the VOI using the VOI
Clipbox, switch to VOI Punch Mode.
H.5
H.5
The
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.511
3D Evaluation
The dialog box VOI Punch Mode appears in the output segment.
H.5
In this dialog box, you will find a number of buttons which you
can use to extract and process a freehand VOI.
H.5
The individual buttons perform the following functions (from left
to right):
H.5
Drawing a freehand VOI
Page H.514, Drawing a freehand line
Punching a freehand VOI
Page H.515, Punching a freehand VOI
Cutting out a freehand VOI
Page H.517, Cutting out a freehand VOI
Undoing last command
Page H.520, Undo Last Step
Undoing all
Page H.520, Undo All
0.0
H.512
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
If you have adapted the view and size of the rectangular VOI to
your requirements, you can draw a freehand curve (polygon) in
it. With this irregular VOI you can define the contours along
which you can cut out or reveal parts of images.
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.513
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
H.5
The starting and end point of the line are connected. The line
thus becomes a closed polygon definition and includes an area.
You can now select the curve and change its position and size.H.5
0.0
H.514
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.515
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.516
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
You can also proceed in the opposite manner and expose the
VOI by cutting out the uninteresting parts of the volume.
H.5
To do this, you will usually proceed in small steps, cutting out as
many small areas as necessary until only those structures
remain that are of interest to you.
H.5
Draw a freehand VOI around the area that you want to
remove.
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.517
3D Evaluation
H.5
(1) The freehand VOIs cut through the volume of the rectangular VOI in the viewing direction.
0.0
H.518
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
You can delete freehand lines that are not as you require
them.
H.5
Select the line by clicking on it.
Delete the line by pressing the Del key on your keyboard.
The program is switched back to drawing mode.
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.519
3D Evaluation
H.5
If you accidentally cut out too much when working on a VOI, you
can undo your processing steps (only Keep Inside and
Remove Inside).
H.5
Undo Last Step
H.5
H.5
Undo All
H.5
Click on the Undo Last Step button in the VOI Punch Mode
dialog box.
H.5
H.5
Click on the Undo All button in the VOI Punch Mode dialog
box.
The graphic is reset to the state in which you found it before processing.
H.5
All steps performed so for are undone.
H.5
0.0
H.520
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
When extracting VOIs, you can combine the output types MIP/
MinIP and SSD (surface shaded display) in different segments
to extract and reveal the volume of interest especially clearly. H.5
For example, select the MIP/MinIP display in the two left-hand
segments to define the size and position of your VOI in these
images and then have the result displayed in the top right-hand
segment in surface shaded display.
Page H.339, Defining output types
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.521
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.522
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.523
H.5
3D Evaluation
H.5
0.0
H.524
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.525
H.5
3D Evaluation
Also punch the structure you require in this second rectangular VOI in freehand technique.
Continue until you have processed the entire volume of interest to you.
Now resize the rectangle in the lower right image segment
out to a size suitable for your diagnostic problem again.
0.0
H.526
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.527
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
H.5
H.5
H.5
0.0
H.528
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.529
3D Evaluation
H.5
Selecting a reference
image
H.5
In the reference segment, you can define the view of your reference image.
H.5
First select a reference segment.
Change the position of the image until it meets your requirements.
0.0
H.530
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
You can set MIP Thin in one, two, or all three reference segments.
H.5
Call up Type > MIP Thin to set MIP Thin output type.
Or
H.5
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.531
Changing slice
thickness
H.5
Call up Type > MIP Thickness to display the MIP Thin dialog box to set the slice thickness.
Or
H.5
3D Evaluation
H.5
Click on the MIP Thin button on the Type subtask card with
the right mouse button.
Enter the thickness of the initial slice to be used for the projection in mm.
H.5
H.5
H.5
Click on Default to set the default value (10 mm) for Image
thickness.
The selected setting is applied to all displayed MIP thin slice
reconstructions.
0.0
H.532
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
The value for the MIP image thickness is always filmed and
stored with the image.
H.5
H.5
H.5
For the MIP Thin output type too, you can generate parallel,
radial, and expanded series of images. In this way, you divide
the volume data set into partial volumes with a predefined thickness. MIP Thin images are then reconstructed from these partial volumes.
H.5
H.5
The structures (bones) that might be an obstruction in a maximum intensity projection usually only extend over a small part
of the volume data set. With parallel MIP images, you can, for
example, ascertain where the obstructing structures end and
where you can generate usable MIP images in the volume data
set.
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.533
H.5
H.5
Generating an expanded
MIP Thin range
H.5
3D Evaluation
H.5
In MIP thin mode you can also generate curved slices. The procedure is the same as in MPR mode.
Page H.47, Generating curved slices
H.5
0.0
H.534
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
Selecting a reference
image
H.5
In the reference segment, you can define the view of your reference image.
H.5
First select a reference segment.
Change the position of the image until it meets your requirements.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.535
H.5
3D Evaluation
You can set MinIP Thin in one, two, or all three reference segments.
H.5
Call up Type > MinIP Thin to set MinIP Thin output type.
In the reference segment, a MinIP Thin display is shown with
the standard settings.
H.5
0.0
H.536
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.5
Enter the thickness of the initial slice to be used for the projection in mm.
Or
H.5
H.5
H.5
H.5
H.5
Click on Default to set the default value (10 mm) for Image
thickness.
The selected setting is applied to all displayed MinIP thin slice
reconstructions.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.537
3D Evaluation
The value for the MinIP image thickness is always filmed and
stored with the image.
H.5
H.5
H.5
For the MinIP Thin output type too, you can generate parallel,
radial, and expanded series of images. In this way, you divide
the volume data set into partial volumes with a predefined thickness. MinIP Thin images are then reconstructed from these
partial volumes.
H.5
H.5
0.0
H.538
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Generating an expanded
MinIP Thin range
H.5
H.5
H.5
In MinIP Thin mode you can also generate curved slices. The
procedure is the same as in MPR mode.
Page H.47, Generating curved slices
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.539
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.540
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.6
Reconstructing Surfaces
(SSD)
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.61
3D Evaluation
Transferring as SSD to 3D
H.6
H.6
If you have already loaded images onto the 3D task card and
have only switched back to another application temporarily,
switch back to 3D by clicking the tab.
Page H.25, Calling the 3D task card
If you have finished processing your first 3D series and saved
it, you can load the next marked series directly from the
Series List (Patient > Open Series List...). If the last patient
to have been processed is in 3D, a dialog box appears in
which you can specify whether you wish to continue processing or load the new series.
Page H.212, Other series from the Series List
0.0
H.62
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.6
SSD Definition
H.6
H.6
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.63
3D Evaluation
Areas within the set threshold values are marked in all images
of output type MPR, MIP or MinIP.
H.6
0.0
H.64
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.6
In the SSD Definition dialog box, the preset or last used threshold values are displayed for SSD extraction.
H.6
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.65
3D Evaluation
H.6
Drag the slider with the left mouse button to the right or to the
left to increase or reduce the threshold value.
Page A.234, Slider
The new threshold values are immediately applied whenever
they are changed with the slider or arrow keys and appear in the
High or Low value fields.
H.6
0.0
H.66
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Assigning threshold
values
H.6
H.6
You can see predefined lower and upper threshold values in the
Presets list.
H.6
Select the threshold value that is appropriate for your diagnostic problem by clicking on the entry in the list.
The values of the list entry are displayed in the Low and High
value fields. The pixels that are within the threshold values are
highlighted in color in the reference segments.
H.6
For how to generate predefined threshold values, see:
Page H.611, Creating and processing predefined threshold values
H.6
Click on the High Quality button after you have found the
desired threshold values.
The SSD display in the output segment is now recalculated. A
process indicator tells you how extraction is progressing.
H.6
When the procedure is complete an SSD image based on your
new threshold values is displayed in the output segment.
H.6
You can rotate and move the resulting image in any way you
wish.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.67
Light Source
H.6
H.6
3D Evaluation
You can set a light source to get a better display of the surface
condition of anatomical structures.
H.6
Click on the Light Source button.
The dialog box Light Source Definition - SSD is displayed.
H.6
H.6
0.0
H.68
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.69
H.6
3D Evaluation
H.6
Use the sliders to set the desired ambient light, diffuse reflection, specular reflection and shininess.
H.6
H.6
H.6
H.6
0.0
H.610
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Returning to reference
mode
H.6
H.6
If the new surface display is as you require it, close the Threshold dialog box and return to reference mode.
H.6
Click on the Close button.
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.611
H.6
3D Evaluation
The lower and upper threshold values are listed under their designation in the Presets list in the SSD Definition dialog box.
H.6
H.6
H.6
Now adapt the values with the sliders or the arrow keys for
the upper or lower threshold values.
Or
H.6
Enter the threshold values in the High and Low value value
input fields.
Confirm the numerical values you have entered by pressing
the Return key on your keyboard to check whether the values meet your requirements.
Save the new threshold values by clicking on the Save button.
Light source parameters will be saved together with the tresholds.
Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets
0.0
H.612
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Processing threshold
values
H.6
H.6
Enter the values in the Low and High value input fields.
Apply the settings by pressing the Return key.
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.613
Deleting a pair of
threshold values
H.6
3D Evaluation
You should delete lower and upper threshold values that you will
no longer require in future. In this way, you keep your threshold
value list down to a manageable size.
H.6
First select a pair of threshold values by clicking on it in the
Presets list in the SSD Definition dialog box.
H.6
H.6
0.0
H.614
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.6
H.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.615
Parallel tomographic
images and curved
sections
H.6
3D Evaluation
On the basis of the SSD display, you can also generate parallel
images and curved sections. However, the results are always
displayed as MPR images. Generation of parallel series and
curved sections is therefore described in the following chapters:
Page H.377, Generating parallel images
Page H.47, Generating curved slices
H.6
0.0
H.616
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.7
Volume Rendering
Technique (VRT)
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.71
3D Evaluation
Transferring to 3D as VRT
H.7
H.7
If you have already loaded images into the 3D task card and
had only switched to another application temporarily, you can
now switch back to 3D by clicking on the cards tab.
Page H.25, Calling the 3D task card
If you have completed processing and storage of your first 3D
series, you can load the next preregistered series directly
from the 3D task card (Patient > Open Series List...). If the
patient to have been processed last is still in 3D, a dialog box
is displayed. In it you can decide whether to go ahead with
processing or to load the new series.
Page H.212, Other series from the Series List
0.0
H.72
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.73
3D Evaluation
H.7
0.0
H.74
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
H.7
As soon as you load the images into VRT mode, the system will
look for a parameter set with the same name (e.g. head) in the
VRT Gallery. If a parameter set is found, the preset tissue
classes are transferred to the image.
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.75
3D Evaluation
H.7
H.7
H.7
Click on the VRT button on the Type subtask card with the
right mouse button.
The VRT Gallery dialog box is displayed. Within the VRT Gallery the parameter data sets are arranged alphabetically from
top left to bottom right.
H.7
0.0
H.76
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.77
Assigning a parameter
set
H.7
3D Evaluation
Click on a parameter set with the left mouse button to transfer the predefined tissue classes to the current VRT display.
0.0
H.78
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.79
3D Evaluation
H.7
H.7
H.7
Call up Type > VRT Definition... to switch to the VRT Definition dialog box.
You can have both dialog boxes VRT Definition and VRT
Gallery open at the same time.
Changes made in the VRT Definition are applied in the VRT
Gallery immediately.
Or
H.7
0.0
H.710
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
VRT Definition
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.711
H.7
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.712
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
H.7
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.713
3D Evaluation
H.7
You can edit the parameter set by setting the following properties for various tissue classes:
H.7
Transparency
Brightness
Color
Signal intensity values
Selecting a parameter
set
H.7
First select the parameter set that you want to edit or whose settings are very similar to the new parameter set you want to create.
H.7
Select a parameter set from the selection list.
Overwrite the name of the parameter set with another designation if you want to create a new parameter data set.
0.0
H.714
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
H.7
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.715
H.7
3D Evaluation
H.7
0.0
H.716
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Transparency
H.7
Set the transparency that you want the tissue to have using
the spin box.
You can enter values from 0% (transparent) to 100%
(opaque).
Or
H.7
Brightness
H.7
Use the spin box to set the brightness you want the tissue to
have.
The brightness control defines the gray scale value of the tissue displayed. It ranges from 0% (black) to 100% (white).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.717
Color
3D Evaluation
H.7
Click on the Color field in the numerical input area with the
left mouse button.
Or
H.7
Click into the trapezoid in the histogram with the right mouse
button.
The color palette is displayed.
H.7
H.7
H.7
0.0
H.718
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
Setting shading
H.7
H.7
H.7
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.719
3D Evaluation
H.7
If you want use the parameter set again in the future, we recommend that you store it in the system.
H.7
Shorten the Preset in a useful way in order to keep the
assignment general and confirm with the Return key.
Click on the button Save Preset to save the parameter set.
The next time you load, the presets are assigned to the series
that contain the name entered as the first part of their name.
Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets
H.7
0.0
H.720
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
You can remove each parameter set from the VRT Gallery.
H.7
H.7
After you have saved all the required settings in the dialog box
for VRT Definition, you can close the dialog box.
H.7
Click on Close to close the VRT Definition dialog window.
Or
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.721
3D Evaluation
H.7
Selecting a reference
image
H.7
In the reference segment, you can define the view of the reference image.
H.7
First select a reference segment.
Change the display of the image until it meets your requirements.
0.0
H.722
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.7
You can set VRT Thin in one, in two, or in all three reference
segments.
H.7
Call up Type > VRT Thin to set the output type VRT Thin.
Or
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.723
H.7
3D Evaluation
Call up the Type > VRT Thickness to display the VRT Thin
dialog box for setting the slice thickness.
Or
H.7
Click on the VRT Thin button on the Type subtask card with
the right mouse button.
Enter the thickness that you want to use for projection in mm.
Confirm your input with OK.
Or
H.7
Click on Default to set the default value (10 mm) for the
image thickness.
The selected setting is applied to all VRT Clip reconstructions.
Click on Set as default to store the displayed settings as
new default value.
When you load a new data set, the stored default value is
applied.
0.0
H.724
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Slice thickness 0 mm
H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.725
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.726
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.8
H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.81
3D Evaluation
H.8
You must first select the images or 3D graphics that you want to
process.
H.8
On the 3D task card, a distinction is made between images that
are displayed in the reference segments and series that are
located in the output segment.
H.8
H.8
H.8
0.0
H.82
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Selecting 3D graphics
H.8
H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.83
3D Evaluation
H.8
H.8
H.8
0.0
H.84
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Windowing images
H.8
When transferring the volume data set to the 3D task card, the
images are displayed with the window values with which they
were last stored.
H.8
In order to make diagnostically relevant details clearer, it is
often necessary to assign new window values to the images. H.8
On SSD images you can regulate the brightness and shadows on the surface.
For details about windowing, see also
Page G.42, Windowing images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.85
3D Evaluation
H.8
In the default setting, all images of the same output type e.g.
MPR are assigned the same window values.
H.8
If you want to assign window values only to individual images,
you must activate the Single Windowing option.
H.8
Windowing an image
H.8
H.8
Single
H.8
Multi
0.0
H.86
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.8
Rotate
H.8
H.8
H.8
H.8
By dragging the mouse along the segment edge you can rotate
the image plane around the centre of the image.
H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.87
Zoom/Pan
H.8
3D Evaluation
H.8
H.8
H.8
0.0
H.88
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.8
H.8
Select the original grey values or a color table from the Color
Lookup Table selection list.
H.8
H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.89
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.810
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.9
3D Editor
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.91
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
With the 3D Editor you can perform the following operations: H.9
Object generation with Region Growing
Object management in the object list
Object editing with Object Punching and Morphological
Operations
Region Growing
H.9
Normally in the first step you will generate one or more "objects"
from the volume data set originally loaded in 3D. By specifying
a limited voxel value range you extract only a section of the voxels from the original data set. In this way, you generate an object
in the result segment.
H.9
Instead of extracting globally from the entire volume data set
you can also proceed "slice by slice" (in 3D blocks) using the
Slab Editor.
H.9
You can also set Seed Points in the original data set, thus limiting the creation of an object to defined regions which are also
connected to one another in the specified voxel area.
H.9
0.0
H.92
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Object Punching
3D Editor
H.9
Like editing volume data sets in VOI mode, you can use the 3D
Editor, too. You are provided with tools for cutting out structures
from an object that you have previously generated.
H.9
Using the Slab Editor you can define your own cutting depth.
H.9
NOTE
With Morphological Operations you can eliminate small
structures and fill cavities but you will also change the
structures of the target object.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.93
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
You can edit the volume data set using the 3D Editor in the dialog box Object Editor which you call up as soon as you have
transferred the volume data set to the 3D card in any representation (MPR, MIP, MinIP, SSD, etc.).
H.9
Place the Settings subtask card in the foreground.
0.0
H.94
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
When you call up the 3D Editor, the image area of the 3D card
is subdivided into the following segments:
H.9
(1) Slab segment for defining the slice to be edited and representing the resulting series
(2) 3D editor window
(3) Working segment (MPR or MIP/MinIP Thin)
(4) Result segment (SSD)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.95
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
The dialog box Object Editor always appears in the bottom lefthand (empty) segment and does not therefore hide any of the
working or result segments.
H.9
It contains the following areas:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
H.9
Tool bar
Object list
Mode-specific tools
General buttons (close 3D editor)
0.0
H.96
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
When you call up the 3D Editor, the loaded series of the last
view to be set appears in the slab segment in the selected display mode. Usually you see a coronal MIP image in the slab
segment and a transversal MPR image in the working segment
whose position in the slab segment is indicated by a navigation
line.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.97
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
Select the area of interest from the loaded volume data set as
a 3D block. From this 3D block generate and edit the 3D objects
using the editor functions.
H.9
Click on the button Use Slab the tool bar of the dialog box
Object Editor to activate slab mode.
To deactivate slab mode, click again on the Use Slab button.
The block lines are displayed in the slab segment.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
H.9
0.0
H.98
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
Changing a 3D block
H.9
Enlarging/reducing a 3D
block
H.9
H.9
Drag the boundary line toward the center line to reduce the
size of the 3D block.
The same applies to moving the lower boundary line.
In each case, the center line is moved toward the new center of
the enlarged or reduced 3D block. The other boundary line
remains unchanged.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.99
3D Editor
Moving a 3D block
3D Evaluation
H.9
You can move the 3D block within the slab segment using the
center line.
H.9
Pull the center line at its center point to the desired position
keeping the mouse button pressed.
Rotating a 3D block
H.9
0.0
H.910
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
Or
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.911
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
When generating and postprocessing objects you can successively extract structures from blocks of the original data set. To
do that, you first define a 3D block and then position it at one
end of the volume. When you have extracted the voxels, move
the 3D block within the volume so that it joins on to the end position of the first block. Then start the next extraction and continue
in this way until you have covered the entire volume.
H.9
In this procedure you move the 3D block equidistantly up or
down by one block thickness
H.9
Click on the Move Block + button to move the 3D block in the
opposite direction to the slab arrow by the amount of its thickness.
Or
H.9
Click on the Move Block - button to move the 3D block equidistantly in the direction of the slab arrows.
Or
H.9
0.0
H.912
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
Creating 3D objects
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.913
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
H.9
H.9
H.9
0.0
H.914
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
The list of objects that have been created for the loaded volume
data set is displayed in the central area of the dialog box Object
Editor. When you edit the list for the first time it contains the
entry "new".
H.9
If objects have already been defined for the volume data set,
you can now select them from the object list and postprocess
them.
Page H.924, Working with the object list
Click on new to define a new object.
Setting a threshold
H.9
In the dialog box Object Editor you will first see the default or
last threshold values to have been used to reconstruct an
object. The associated areas are highlighted in color in the
working segment (top right).
H.9
You can use predefined threshold value pairs or define new
threshold value ranges to create new objects.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.915
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
Select the threshold value suitable for your diagnostic problem from the Presets list.
Or
H.9
Enter new threshold values in the spin box and confirm them
with the Enter key.
Or
H.9
H.9
0.0
H.916
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Displaying an object
3D Editor
H.9
As soon as you have set the threshold values start reconstruction of the object.
H.9
Click on the button Add to Object.
The reconstructed object appears in the result segment.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.917
3D Editor
Undo
3D Evaluation
H.9
You can undo the last task, e.g. Add to Object, if the entries
you have made are incorrect.
H.9
Click on the button Undo Last Step.
Saving presets
H.9
When you have found suitable threshold value pairs you can
store them under a new name in the preset list.
Page H.611, Creating and processing predefined threshold
values
H.9
Overwrite the original name with a name of your choice.
Store the new threshold values by clicking the button.
0.0
H.918
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
Once you have created an object by defining the threshold values, you limit the size of the object with the functions Define
Seed Points and Draw Blocker.
H.9
Selecting an object
H.9
H.9
In the working segment you can see the selected object within
the defined threshold values.
H.9
Click on the button Define Seed Points in the Region Growing window area.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.919
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
You can set any number of Seed Points and move them by
clicking on them and dragging them with the mouse.
Deleting seed points
H.9
If you have set too many Seed Points you can delete them
again.
H.9
Click with the left mouse button on the Seed Point and then
press the Del key on your keyboard.
0.0
H.920
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Setting a blocker
3D Editor
H.9
With blockers you can limit growing of the voxel areas starting
from the seed points. To do that you define boundary lines
beyond which the voxel areas are not allowed to grow.
H.9
Switch to MIP display in the working segment.
If necessary, use the Slab Editor.
Page H.97, The Slab Editor
Click on the button Draw Blocker in the window area
Region Growing.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
H.9
Click with the left mouse button on the required starting point
of the boundary line in the working segment.
Click on any other point in the image at which the direction of
the curve must change.
Or
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.921
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
You can draw one or several freehand curves into your working segment.
Removing a blocker
H.9
You can remove any freehand curves that you no longer need
at any time.
H.9
Click with the left mouse button on the Blocker that you want
to delete and then press the Del key.
0.0
H.922
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Displaying an object
3D Editor
H.9
Once you have set the Seed Points and drawn in any Blockers
you require you can start reconstruction of the object.
H.9
Click on the button Replace Object.
You can also set a threshold value range from the beginning
and use Seed Points and Blockers. You can generate a new
object with Add to Object.
The edited object appears in the result segment.
Undo
H.9
H.9
You can undo the last step, e.g. Replace Object, if entries are
incorrect.
H.9
Click on the button Undo Last Step.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.923
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
0.0
H.924
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.925
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
Selecting objects
H.9
When you open the dialog box Object Editor, the existing
objects of the loaded volume data set appear in the object list.
The list is updated every time an object is updated.
H.9
Individual object
H.9
H.9
The selected object does not appear in the slab segment until
you activate it in the object list via the check box.
Several objects
H.9
Check several objects one after the other while keeping the
Ctrl key pressed.
All the selected objects are displayed in the result segment in
the color assigned to them.
H.9
0.0
H.926
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
H.9
H.9
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.927
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
H.9
Enter a name for the new object via the keyboard and confirm it with the Return key.
H.9
H.9
0.0
H.928
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Hiding an object
3D Editor
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.929
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.930
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.931
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
You can manage existing objects or objects you have just created with the object list. It is recommended that you save intermediate versions while you are working which you can restore
whenever necessary. If you want to keep a particular version of
an object but want to continue working on it, simply create a
duplicate.
H.9
Delete any objects that you no longer require from the object
list. This keeps the object list and the database in which the
objects are stored to a manageable size.
H.9
Storing an intermediate
version of the object
H.9
With the mouse select the objects in the object list for which
you want to store an intermediate version.
Click on the button Save Selected Objects.
Restoring an object
version
H.9
0.0
H.932
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
N OT E
Any changes you have made to an object after you stored
an intermediate version of it are lost if you restore that
version.
H.9
Duplicating an object
H.9
H.9
Create a new object for each new extraction of voxels from the
volume data set.
H.9
Click on the button New Object.
A new object with the name new Object 1 (or new Object 2,
new Object 3,...) is appended to the end of the object list. H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.933
3D Editor
Deleting an object
3D Evaluation
H.9
You can remove any objects that you no longer require from the
object list.
H.9
With the mouse select the objects that you want to delete
from the object list.
0.0
H.934
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
Postprocessing objects
H.9
H.9
With Object Punching mode you can cut freely definable areas
out of the object.
H.9
Activating Object
Punching
Or
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.935
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
The tools of Object Punching mode are displayed in the bottom half of the dialog box Object Editor.
H.9
0.0
H.936
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
You can extend the cutting out of structures to the entire volume
data set or limit it to one 3D block (Slab). If you work in slab
mode, the cutting depth is limited by the size of the 3D block. H.9
Click on Use Slab to hide or reveal the 3D block in the slab
segment.
If necessary, set the required position, extent, and orientation of the 3D block.
Page H.97, The Slab Editor
H.9
Now draw a contour around the object structures that you want
to cut out in the result segment.
H.9
Click on the button Draw Contour.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.937
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
Or
H.9
0.0
H.938
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
H.9
You can lengthen, shorten, and move the cut lines that you have
drawn using handles.
H.9
Click on a cut line with the mouse to show the handles.
Change the length and orientation of the cut line using the
lateral handles.
Move the cut line using the center graphic marker.
H.9
If the contour that you have drawn does not meet your requirements, simply delete the line.
H.9
Click on the line with the mouse to mark it.
Press the Del key on your keyboard to delete the cut line.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.939
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
Once you have drawn in a contour and adapted its position and
extent, you can reveal or delete the structures in the contour. H.9
H.9
H.9
0.0
H.940
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
Or
H.9
H.9
With the tools Draw Contour and Remove Inside you can
successively remove structures from the object and gradually
adapt the object to its most important structures.
Undo
H.9
If you remove any structures accidentally you can undo the last
step.
H.9
Click on Undo Last Step.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.941
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
Morphological editing
H.9
Or
H.9
0.0
H.942
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Editor
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.943
3D Editor
Eroding an object
3D Evaluation
H.9
Enter the surface thickness via the spin box by which the
object is to be eroded or shrunk.
Then click on the Erode Object button.
The eroded object appears in the result segment.
H.9
If there are still structures concealing the object you can enter
a new surface thickness and erode the object again.
H.9
Undo
H.9
H.9
0.0
H.944
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Dilating an object
3D Editor
H.9
You have eroded the object so far that it no longer contains concealing structures. Now dilate, or blow up, the object to the
desired size.
H.9
Enter the surface thickness via the spin box by which the
object is to be dilated.
Then click on the Dilate Object button.
The object is displayed with the relevant areas in the result segment.
H.9
Use the Undo function if you have used the incorrect surface
thickness to dilate the object.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.945
3D Editor
3D Evaluation
H.9
Once you have defined and evaluated as objects all the structures to be displayed, you can close the 3D Editor.
H.9
When you close the 3D Editor the objects are saved to your
local database together with the original series.
H.9
Closing the 3D Editor
H.9
H.9
H.9
0.0
H.946
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.10
Fusion
H.10
The function Fusion allows you to combine the results of different acquisition techniques or acquisitions performed at different
times by overlaying them.
H.10
Two image series are loaded in 3D and then aligned spatially
and overlaid with Fusion. The initial data sets are merged to a
new data set. In this data set, matching image pairs from the
two loaded series are linked and can then be displayed for diagnostic purposes like two slides one on top of the other.
H.10
Options
H.10
H.10
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Using fused images for diagnosis.
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.101
Fusion
3D Evaluation
Functions of Fusion
H.10
H.10
In the first step you load two volume data sets in 3D, one reference series and one model series.
H.10
The reference series serves as an anchor for subsequent overlaying of the two image data sets.
H.10
The model series is aligned spatially on the reference series.H.10
Aligning
H.10
H.10
Once you have successfully aligned the image data sets you
can edit the display parameters in order to display them specific. You can window individual image series and color display
of the Fusion images. You can then apply the whole range of 3D
functions to the merged image data set.
Page H.339, Defining output types
H.10
0.0
H.102
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
Calling up Fusion
H.10
If you select a data set that has already been processed with
Fusion, it is loaded in 3D together with the previously stored
alignment. It is then not necessary to realign the overlaid
series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.103
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
In normal operation, you select the two image series for your
Fusion evaluation in the Patient Browser and transfer them
one after the other to the 3D task card.
H.10
If you had already processed the reference series in 3D with
another function (e.g. editor), you can load the missing model
series from the Patient Browser.
H.10
If you want to load image series of different patients, you have
to confirm a corresponding message. The overlay of images
of different patients is marked in the Image text.
H.10
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Loading unintentionally image data sets
of different patients.
H.10
Consequence: Mix-up of patients and incorrect diagnosis
possible.
H.10
Remedy: When loading reference and model series, take
care that you select the data of the correct patient. H.10
0.0
H.104
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.105
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
You have already loaded an image data into the 3D task card
and now want to overlay another image data set on top of it. H.10
Call up Patient Browser (Patient > Patient Browser).
Select the series that you want to use for the model images
in the navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Applications > 3D > Fusion from the main menu.
Or
H.10
0.0
H.106
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
The images of the loaded reference and model series are displayed overlaid in the first three segments.
H.10
In the fourth segment, a dialog box is displayed which supports
you with the alignment of the images in the reference and model
series.
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.107
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
0.0
H.108
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
Registration matrix
Lists all available matrices (user defined, the initial, and the
default matrix). After entering a new name here, you can
save your current registration as a new matrix or delete it.
Landmarks
Both loaded image series are made to match using suitable
reference points.
Visual Alignment
The two loaded image series are (manually) made to match
visually.
H.10
Automatic Registration
The two loaded series are automatically made to match.
Surface Matching
The two loaded image series are made to match on the basis
of preset threshold values specific of the tissue structure.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.109
Fusion
3D Evaluation
Registration Matrix
H.10
H.10
If the last alignment that you saved is unsuitable, you can return
to the initial position.
H.10
Choose the Initial matrix from the Registration matrix list.
Default
H.10
If you are working on a combination device (e.g. CT-PET scanner) you have an additional option: calling up a default alignment stored in the system and applying it to the alignment of a
reference and model series.
H.10
Choose the Default matrix from the Registration matrix list.
User Defined
H.10
After aligning the series (which modifies the matrix) and applying the Save Registration button, a matrix with the name "User
Defined" is stored for this registration (you can also change the
name of the matrix).
H.10
Later you can save further versions or update existing ones.
H.10
0.0
H.1010
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Re-use of Matrices
Fusion
H.10
The next time you load two series, the last used matrix is automatically applied. You can further modify this matrix, or make
changes and save it under another name.
H.10
It is possible to re-use a matrix for a registered series together
with another series, if these series are geometrically compatible.
Saving a Registration
Matrix
H.10
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1011
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
0.0
H.1012
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1013
Fusion
Processing images
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
Using Zoom/Pan and Rotate object you can find the most suitable position to start the alignment of the two series.
H.10
Activate the option zoom/pan via Smart Select.
Or
H.10
H.10
Click the Zoom/Pan icon button in the upper part of the control area.
Zoom or pan the image.
Activate the option rotate object via Smart Select.
Or
H.10
H.10
Click on the icon button in the upper part of the control area.
Rotate the image.
0.0
H.1014
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
H.10
H.10
Or
H.10
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1015
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
NOTE
Whenever you make an improvement by turning and
moving the images, you should save the new alignment to
the database. You can then return to a previous result if the
two series start to drift apart again.
H.10
0.0
H.1016
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
(1) Buttons
For setting and editing reference points.
(2) List of reference points
With deviation from the current alignment (when there are
at least three defined reference point pairs).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1017
Fusion
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.1018
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1019
Fusion
Displaying a reference
point
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
Click on the entry in the list that refers to the reference point.
Click on the Goto button.
Or
H.10
Repositioning a reference
point
H.10
H.10
0.0
H.1020
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1021
Fusion
3D Evaluation
Automatic Registration
H.10
It is important to roughly align the model series in the segments with the reference series.
Page H.1015, Moving a model series
Page H.1015, Rotating a model series
Select Precise registration for highly precise or Fast registration for fast overlaying.
H.10
0.0
H.1022
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
The two image series are now made to match and successively
aligned with each other. You can watch the progress of overlaying in the image area in the three orthogonal views.
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1023
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
Click on the Stop button if you are satisfied with the results
and do not want to wait until operation has been completed.
The alignment obtained so far is retained.
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
H.1024
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
Surface Matching
H.10
With Surface Matching you align the model images with the
reference images on the basis of threshold values corresponding to a specific tissue structure. You use this procedure in follow-up examinations to compare different data sets of the same
patient.
H.10
H.10
(1)
(2)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1025
Fusion
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.1026
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
Select a tissue structure for which you want to make the two
image series match (e.g. bone, skin).
Set modality-specific threshold values corresponding to this
tissue structure for the reference series.
Select the corresponding threshold values for the model
series.
The image areas inside the value range are highlighted in color
in the corresponding segments.
H.10
Starting overlaying
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1027
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
0.0
H.1028
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
Click on the Stop button if you are satisfied with the results
and do not want to wait until overlaying has been completed.
The alignment obtained so far is retained.
H.10
Changing threshold
values
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1029
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
H.1030
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
Closing alignment
H.10
Applying overlaying
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1031
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
Once you have aligned the image data sets and confirmed
overlaying, you can display the image data sets both next to one
another (Side-by-Side) and overlaid (Fusion).
H.10
Side-by-Side mode
H.10
H.10
0.0
H.1032
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
The left image area is used to display the reference images and
the right for the model images. To assist assignment in space,
two coupled mouse pointers are displayed that move across
both data sets synchronously. The coupled mouse pointer is
marked in a color.
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1033
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
0.0
H.1034
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
SSD
H.10
H.10
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1035
Fusion
3D Evaluation
Fusion mode
H.10
In fusion mode, both image data sets are displayed like two
slides placed on top of each other.
H.10
Call up Fusion > Fused MPR from the main menu.
Or
H.10
The two image data sets are displayed in different colors to help
you distinguish between them. The overlaid image data set is
displayed as it is for Visual Alignment in three orthogonal displays in three segments.
H.10
0.0
H.1036
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
In fusion mode you move through the image stack in each segment. You can change the view of the merged data set by one
of the following methods:
H.10
Paging
Page H.317, Paging with the dog ears
Rotating the volume with the mouse
Page H.319, Rotating the volume with the mouse
Setting standard views
Page H.327, Setting standard views
Using a crosshair
Page H.313, Using the 3D cross hair
H.10
N OT E
Creating curved cuts, 3D editor objects, and VOI punchings
affects the reference series only.
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1037
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
Once you have successfully overlaid your images, you can optimize the window values, the mixing ratio, and color display of
the images so that you can recognize the structures of individual image data sets more easily.
H.10
Call up Fusion > Fusion Definition from the main menu.
Or
H.10
Click on the Fused MPR button with the right mouse button.
The dialog box Fusion Definition is displayed.
H.10
0.0
H.1038
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Windowing in a segment
Fusion
H.10
H.10
H.10
H.10
Move the slider for the data set in question to change the window position (brightness).
Move the right or left edge of the slide to change the window
width (contrast).
Or
H.10
Enter the window values numerically into the edit fields and
confirm with the Enter key.
With nuclear medical images the slider determining the width
of the windowed area can also be moved beyond the limits of
the range displayed in the dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1039
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: SUV calculation is based on earliest
acquisition date and time within selected and loaded data
set and the first image (with earliest acquisition date and
time) is not within the selection.
H.10
Consequence: Incorrect SUV calculation.
H.10
Remedy: Make sure to select the first image of the data set
for correct calculation.
H.10
0.0
H.1040
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Mixing ratio
Fusion
H.10
Pull the slider with the left mouse button in the direction of the
data set whose intensity you want to increase.
Display
H.10
In order to delimit the reference and model series more precisely you can change the color marking of the image data
sets.
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1041
Fusion
Advanced
3D Evaluation
H.10
H.10
The Fusion Definition dialog box provides an advanced Masking section for hiding pixel ranges in the fused display.
H.10
Click on the Advanced >> button.
The Fusion Definition dialog box is enlarged so you can define
H.10
which pixel ranges are masked out.
If you want to hide the numerical setting area, simply click on
the Advanced << button again.
0.0
H.1042
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Masking
Fusion
H.10
With the masking function, you define individual visibility thresholds for the reference and for the model series. Only gray-scale
values that are within the thresholds are used for alpha-blending.
H.10
Resize a slider with the left or right side grip to change the
covered range of pixels.
Or
H.10
H.10
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1043
Fusion
3D Evaluation
H.10
You can save the resulting fusion images to the local database,
send them to a DICOM node, or copy them to the Filming task
card.
H.10
The images are saved as they are currently displayed.
Fusion mode
H.10
H.10
Side by Side
H.10
0.0
H.1044
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fusion
H.10
It is possible to save Fusion results for common viewing applications, such as the syngo Viewer or MagicView. These viewers are used to compare the original with the fused images. H.10
You have to store 2 or 3 different series of images with the correct position, thickness and orientation.
H.10
The first series consists of a 3D range from the reference
series.
The second series consists of a 3D range from the model
series.
The third series consists of a 3D range of images that have
been fused from the two series (optional).
There are two possibilities to generate these different series: H.10
Resampling data
Creating ranges explicitly
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1045
Fusion
Resampling data
3D Evaluation
H.10
Select Fusion > Resample Data from the main menu if you
want the data to be resampled.
Depending on the configuration three new series with the position, thickness, orientation and resolution of the reference
series are created and stored in the Local Database together
with the registration matrix:
H.10
the resampled data set of the model series: Resampled<Modality><#>"
the resampled data set of the fused images: Resampled<Modality of Reference><Modality of Model><#>
registration matrix: ResampledRegistration<#>
# starts from one and is incremented with each new recalculation.
See Page H.149, Configuring resampling for details on
the configuration.
During calculation, the result images will not be displayed.
The dialog 3D: Resample Data in Progress displays the
progress of the calculation.
0.0
H.1046
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Create Series
Fusion
H.10
Select the modality of the reference series, e.g. MR, from the
Output Type dropdown list.
Set the desired range parameters and click Start.
Save the calculated range.
Repeat the last two steps, without changing the range
parameters.
Select first the modality of the model series e.g. PET, calculate the range and save it.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1047
Fusion
3D Evaluation
NOTE
During these steps it is important not to change the range
parameters or the range graphic.
H.10
0.0
H.1048
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.11
Fly Through
H.11
Procedure
H.11
H.11
The so-called Fly View Volume (FVV) is displayed in the reference segments and represents the actual field of view of the virtual camera.
H.11
You can change the display in the Fly segment by changing
the properties and the position of the FVV.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.111
Fly Through
Legal Instructions
3D Evaluation
H.11
N OT E
Colors displayed are simulated and do not indicate actual
anatomic colors.
H.11
0.0
H.112
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
After having loaded the images in the 3D card, define the starting point of your visualization. Then start Fly Through.
H.11
Select a reference segment.
You should bear in mind that when the Fly mode is activated
the FVV in this segment is displayed perpendicularly to the
image plane.
Page H.1111, Fly View Volume (FVV)
Shift the point of intersection of the reference lines in the
selected reference segment to the cavity of interest.
Select Settings > Fly Through in the menu.
Or
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.113
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
The Fly view appears in the segment at the lower right in the
SSD (Surface Shaded Display) mode.
H.11
The FVV is displayed in the 3 reference segments.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
H.11
Sagittal view
Transverse view
Coronal view
Fly segment
0.0
H.114
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
H.11
The SSD (Fly view) mode is the standard setting of the Fly segment and corresponds to the SSD mode of 3D images.
H.11
Select the Fly segment.
Click the SSD button in the Type subtask card to enter the
SSD mode.
Right-click the SSD button of the Type subtask card to
change the SSD settings.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.115
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
0.0
H.116
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.117
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
The VRT (Fly view) mode of the Fly segment corresponds to the
VRT mode of 3D images.
H.11
Select the Fly segment.
Click the VRT button in the Type subtask card to enter the
VRT mode.
Select Type > VRT Definition in the main menu.
The VRT Definition - Fly View dialog box is displayed.
H.11
0.0
H.118
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.119
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
With the free movement in the Fly mode you can calculate a
perspective view in the Fly segment for any position within the
volume. For this purpose, shift the FVV displayed in the reference segments as if it were a virtual camera and orient it in the
desired viewing direction.
H.11
You can control these movements in the Fly segment via Smart
Select, via the buttons of the Image subtask card and via
mouse click.
Page H.338, Smart Select
H.11
All movements and changes in one of the segments are
updated in all of the other segments.
Processing of 3D images remains possible for the reference
segments without restriction.
(Only with the Rotate Images feature in the Fly mode, the
images are not rotated around the VOI Clip Box Center but
around the Viewing Point of the FVV).
H.11
0.0
H.1110
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
Viewing direction
H.11
Fly eye
Standing PointH.11
Viewing
Distance
Image Plane
H.11
Viewing Angle
Front Clip Plane
H.11
Viewing
Point
Viewing Plane
H.11
Viewing
Depth
Clipping Point
Back
Clip Plane
H.11
H.11
When the Fly mode is activated the FVV in the selected segment is displayed perpendicularly to the image plane.
H.11
Viewing planes
H.11
The area visualized in the Fly view is limited by Front and Back
Clip Plane.
H.11
All voxels between the Front and Back Clip Plane are displayed in the Fly view.
H.11
The Viewing Plane is the plane of intersection of the FVV with
the image plane and is perpendicular to the Viewing Direction.H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1111
Fly Through
Important points
3D Evaluation
H.11
Viewing distances
H.11
H.11
0.0
H.1112
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
You can change the display in the Fly segment via the properties and position of the FVV in the other segments.
H.11
Viewing point
H.11
Viewing direction
H.11
H.11
Shift the clipping point, rotating the FVV around the standing
point.
Viewing depth
H.11
Drag one side of the front clip plane to the standing point or
to the viewing point to zoom in or zoom out the visible foreground.
Drag one side of the back clip plane forward and backward
to zoom out or zoom in the visible background.
Viewing angle
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1113
Fly Through
Viewing distance
3D Evaluation
H.11
H.11
H.11
0.0
H.1114
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Presets
Fly Through
H.11
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1115
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
In the Fly segment, you can control the free movement within
the volume via Smart Select, via the Zoom/Pan button and via
Click Rotate.
H.11
Viewing point
H.11
The viewing point can be shifted within the image plane via Pan
and Click Rotate and perpendicularly to the image plane via
push/pull.
H.11
Click the Zoom/Pan button in the upper part of the control
area and drag the image center in the Fly segment to the
desired position.
Or
H.11
H.11
0.0
H.1116
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Viewing angle
Fly Through
H.11
H.11
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1117
Fly Through
Rotating
3D Evaluation
H.11
H.11
Reset values
H.11
Reference lines
H.11
0.0
H.1118
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Ortho Sync
Fly Through
H.11
You can display orthogonal views to the Fly segment in the reference segments via the Ortho Sync function.
H.11
Select the Fly segment.
Click the Ortho Sync button in the Orientation subtask
card.
The image plane of the Fly segment is displayed in the upper
left reference segment, the horizontal plane in the upper right
and the perpendicular plane in the lower left one.
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1119
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
Unlike the free movement within the volume, with defined movement you move along a predefined way.
H.11
In the Auto Navigation mode, you move along a way through
the cavity with the aid of the mouse buttons. This way is automatically calculated and continuously updated by the system.H.11
The virtual camera moves along a path which you create interactively or via the Fly Path Planning dialog box.
H.11
0.0
H.1120
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
Auto Navigation
H.11
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1121
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
H.11
H.11
0.0
H.1122
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
If a path exists from earlier examinations, this path is now displayed in the reference segments and in the dialog box.
H.11
(1) Path Visualization Line
Visualizing the stretched path with the stations of the
viewing point.
(2) Position Torch
The position of this torch at the Visualization Line represents the current position of the camera.
(3) Path Point
Stations of the viewing point along the path.
(4) Zoom Slider
If the point density is too high in a specific section, the path
line can be zoomed in.
Whether the length of the visualization line corresponds to the
actual length of the path or not depends on the configuration
setting.
Page H.1410, Configuring Fly Through
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1123
Fly Through
Insert Point
3D Evaluation
H.11
H.11
Click the Insert Point button of the Fly Path Planning dialog
box to add a new point to the path.
This point is inserted at the current position of the position torch
and is displayed both in the dialog box on the Path Visualization
Line and in the reference segments.
H.11
If you click an already existing point of the Path Visualization
Line, this point is replaced by a new one.
0.0
H.1124
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
When a path is created, the path points are numbered consecutively and used with this number in the Path Visualization Line.
You can replace this automatic path point designation with a
suitable designation.
H.11
Double-click the name of the point in the Fly Path Planning
dialog box.
Enter the desired designation and confirm with the Enter key.
Remove Point
H.11
H.11
Path Name
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1125
Fly Through
Save Path
3D Evaluation
H.11
Click Save Path if you want to save the current version of the
path.
H.11
N OT E
It is only possible to save one path. Any existing path will be
overwritten.
H.11
Clear Path
H.11
Click Clear Path if you want to delete all points of the path
already existing.
0.0
H.1126
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
Path representation
H.11
Hide Path
H.11
The points of the path are represented differently in the reference segments. Larger points are situated more closely to the
image plane, whereas smaller ones are further away. Unlike
points outside the image plane, points within the image plane
are transparent.
The path connecting the points is represented by a continuous
line above the image plane and by a broken line below the
image plane.
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1127
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
As soon as you have defined a path, you can move along this
path through the volume (camera flight).
H.11
Stop at the positions of interest to you and save the image in the
Fly segment or activate automatic saving to create an image
series of the camera flight.
H.11
You move along the path with the aid of the buttons in the dialog
box or via the position torch at the Path Visualization Line.
H.11
Step Size
H.11
Using the step size function you determine the distance along
the path at which a new image is to be created in the Fly segment.
H.11
Set the Step Size with the aid of the slider.
H.11
0.0
H.1128
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Forwards
Fly Through
H.11
H.11
H.11
Fly Backwards
H.11
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1129
Fly Through
Position torch
3D Evaluation
H.11
Click the arrow next to the torch to change the viewing direction of the FVV.
0.0
H.1130
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Fly Through
H.11
H.11
The position torch visualizes the position of the points you click
in the image area.
H.11
The position torch will change position if you click a point beside
the path.
H.11
You can dissolve the out-of-path state as follows:
H.11
Click on the torch to keep its relative position on the visualization line.
Drag the torch to move it to and along the visualization line.
Click on the path or on a point on the path to move the torch
to the clicked position.
The FVV reflects the new position of the torch.
H.11
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1131
Fly Through
3D Evaluation
H.11
When you have verified that all important images have been
saved, filmed or sent, close Fly Through.
H.11
For this purpose, select Settings > Fly Through in the main
menu.
Or
H.11
H.11
0.0
H.1132
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.12
H.12
You can store series of images or projections that you have generated on the 3D task card for documentation purposes.
H.12
You can either store the images quickly in a series that already
exists or store the images in new series.
H.12
You can store reconstructed series automatically as new series
after reconstruction.
H.12
H.12
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably.
H.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.121
3D Evaluation
H.12
H.12
If you want use the defaults when saving images or series, simply click on the Save button.
H.12
When you use the save button, the settings that you made in
the Save As dialog are valid.
Click on the output segment and select an image, several
images or an entire series.
Call up Patient > Save.
Or
H.12
H.12
Click on the Save button in the lower part of the control area.
0.0
H.122
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.12
The first time you save a reconstructed series you should first
make a few default settings.
H.12
Select an image in a reference segment or the images in the
output segment.
Call up Patient > Save As....
Or
H.12
H.12
H.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.123
Image information
H.12
3D Evaluation
You can see this image information in the upper part of the dialog box:
H.12
Patient name
Imaging method (modality)
Exam date
Number of images
3D output type (MIP, MIP Thin, MinIP, MinIP Thin, MPR, MPR
Thick, MPR Curved, MPR Thick Curved, MIP Thin Curved,
VRT, VRT Thin, SSD)
H.12
H.12
Comments
H.12
0.0
H.124
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
If you want to save all the images that you generate from a set
of volume data in one series, select the Save all images in one
series option.
H.12
All the images are now saved with the same series name in your
main database regardless of the 3D output type they were generated with (MPR, MPR Thick, MPR Curved, MPR Thick
Curved, MIP Thin Curved, MIP, MIP Thin, MinIP, MinIP Thin,
VRT, VRT Thin or SSD).
H.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.125
Grouping images by
output type
H.12
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.126
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
Example
H.12
You enter Name as the series name for your grouped images.
You then save 1 SSD image, 2 MPR images, 1 MIP image, 1
MPR Thick image, 1 MPR image, and another 1 SSD image
one after the other.
H.12
In this way, you generate four series:
H.12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
H.12
H.12
H.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.127
3D Evaluation
Saving 3D-series
H.12
You can also save images that you have reconstructed, for
example, as parallel images with a comment.
H.12
First select the series in the output segment.
Call up Patient > Save As....
Or
H.12
H.12
H.12
0.0
H.128
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.12
H.12
H.12
H.12
H.12
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.129
3D Evaluation
H.12
If you want to store the reconstructed series as quickly and easily as possible, you can have them stored automatically during
reconstruction.
H.12
Click on the Enable auto-store option on the Ranges subtask card in Configure 3D.
Page H.145, Activating automatic storage
All series are then automatically stored after reconstruction.
H.12
In Configure 3D you can define whether you want to additionally store the reference image of a series or not.
Page H.145, Storing the reference image
0.0
H.1210
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1211
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.1212
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.13
H.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.131
Filming 3D images
3D Evaluation
H.13
H.13
H.13
H.13
H.13
In Configure 3D, you can set whether you also want to film
the reference image of a series or not.
Page H.146, Configuring filming
0.0
H.132
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
H.13
H.13
H.13
The images are transferred to the Viewing task card and you
can process them there.
Page G.41, Processing Images
Page G.51, 2D Evaluation
H.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.133
3D Evaluation
H.13
If you want to send 3D images to another location in your hospital, you can do this directly from the 3D task card.
H.13
H.13
H.13
H.13
H.13
0.0
H.134
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
The Send To dialog box is only displayed if more than one network node has been configured.
H.13
H.13
With the Transfer menu item, you can access further functions for archiving and sending.
For detailed information, see:
Page J.15, Automatic Storing and Sending
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.135
3D Evaluation
0.0
H.136
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.14
3D Configuration
H.14
H.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.141
3D Configuration
3D Evaluation
H.14
0.0
H.142
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Configuration
H.14
H.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.143
3D Configuration
3D Evaluation
H.14
On the Ranges card, you can define the settings for storing and
filming series. In addition, you can configure the orientation of
the reference image when generating parallel and radial
ranges.
H.14
Click the Ranges subtask card into the foreground.
0.0
H.144
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Configuration
Configuring storage
H.14
Reconstructed series (ranges) can be stored completely automatically with or without the reference image.
H.14
Activating automatic
storage
H.14
H.14
H.14
Click on the option Include the reference image when saving ranges or curved cuts if you want to have the reference
image of the series stored, too.
Page H.372, Generating series from 3D images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.145
3D Configuration
3D Evaluation
Configuring filming
H.14
Click on the option Include the reference image when filming ranges or curved cuts if you want to have the reference
image of the series filmed, too.
0.0
H.146
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Configuration
H.14
When you generate parallel and radial series using the stored
defaults, you have the option of having reference image orientation set in the defaults called up automatically.
H.14
Just click on the Apply orientation saved in preset to reference image option.
When you call up the dialog for creating parallel and radial
series in future, the reference image is reoriented automatically.
The orientation is used that you set for the reference image
when you saved the default of the group of series in question.H.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.147
3D Configuration
3D Evaluation
H.14
For calculation of radial ranges you can use a special filter with
high resolution, to improve the image quality for filming. The
quality filter is applied during range calculation for matrix sizes
which do not exceed a specified limit.
H.14
Check on the option Use high quality filter MIP and MinIP
to enable high quality filtering.
Set the maximum matrix size for filtering via the spin box.
0.0
H.148
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Configuration
Configuring resampling
H.14
You can resample data with original resolution or with the fused
series.
H.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.149
3D Configuration
3D Evaluation
H.14
0.0
H.1410
Operator Manual
3D Evaluation
3D Configuration
Updating changes
H.14
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
H.1411
3D Configuration
3D Evaluation
Path representation
H.14
You can have the path displayed with path points in the Path
Planning dialog box as a function of the position of these points
(true to scale) or in respect of all properties of the FVV.
H.14
Click this option if you want to have the path displayed on the
basis of all properties linked with the individual points.
If two path points are at the same position, but have different
FVV properties (e.g. viewing direction) the distance between
these points is calculated from the total of differentiating properties.
H.14
0.0
H.1412
Operator Manual
Storing and
Data Exchange
PART
J
J.1
J.0
Introduction
Selecting data for transfer ............................................... J.16
Starting transfer .............................................................. J.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J1
Contents
0.0
J2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.1
Introduction
J.1
Please note that your system may not have all transfer
options. The drives and network links available to you depend
on how your system is configured and what options are
installed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.11
Introduction
J.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Misleading/misinterpretation of the
flags AC/SC. Flags AC/SC depict receipt and storage on
hard disk on the receiver side which may be not sufficient to
fulfill the regulatory requirements of long-term storing. J.1
Consequence: Loss of data within the required period for
retention.
J.1
Remedy: Sending data with the attributes AC, SC via
network indicates a safe data transfer but does not fulfill the
regulatory requirements of long-term storing. Objects with
the "committed" flag may be deleted by the user. Observe
the regulatory requirements regarding the storing
procedure.
J.1
0.0
J.12
Operator Manual
Introduction
J.1
NOTE
The storage of image data is subject to regulations and
statutes governing the duration of storage and data
availability, data security (data integrity, incorruptibility), and
recommendations for fire protection and protection from
water damage. The management of the archive is
responsible for observing these requirements.
J.1
J.1
NOTE
Because of constant technological progress and the
required storage duration, it may not be possible to perform
storage and retrieve with a single storage technology and a
single type of medium. Migration of data will therefore be
necessary to some extent and is the responsibility of the
management of the digital archive.
J.1
Security Privileges
J.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.13
Introduction
Storage on an external
medium
J.1
J.1
0.0
J.14
Operator Manual
Importing
J.1
Introduction
If stored data are required again later, they can just be imported
from external media (CD or MOD) again in the Patient
Browser.
Page D.231, Reading data from storing media
J.1
J.1
J.1
If you are editing or using images with other programs, you can
export them to a certain folder on the system hard disk in some
image formats (Export to File System).
J.1
Likewise, you can import images created or edited in other programs into the application (Import from File System).
Chapter J.4, Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk
J.1
J.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.15
Introduction
J.1
J.1
You can only store, export, or send objects that are listed in
the Patient Browser. If you want to transfer data from one
data medium to another, you must first import them into the
Patient Browser.
Selecting in the Patient
Browser
J.1
In most cases, you will be able to select the data in the Patient
Browser.
Chapter D.2, Searching for and Displaying Patient Data
J.1
Application cards
J.1
J.1
0.0
J.16
Operator Manual
Introduction
Starting transfer
J.1
Transfer menu
J.1
Some task cards and the Patient Browser window contain the
Transfer menu.
J.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.17
Introduction
Buttons
J.1
Depending on the configuration, you will find buttons in the control area of the task card with which you can start transfer
quickly and easily with a mouse click.
J.1
You will also find a number of button on the toolbar of the
Patient Browser with which you can start transfers.
J.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
J.1
J.1
You can use the Send to default node 1 key on the symbol key
pad or + on the numerical keypad of your keyboard to start
transfer to the first default network address.
J.1
0.0
J.18
Operator Manual
Introduction
C AU T I O N
When replacing image data generated with syngo MR or
the predecessor Numaris software, please remember the
following:
J.1
syngo MR and Numaris use different patient coordinate
systems. That means you must change the sign of the slice
position and slice orientation for double-oblique slices. J.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.19
Introduction
0.0
J.110
Operator Manual
Storing Data on an
External Medium
CHAPTER
J.2
J.2
J.2
Optional drives
J.2
When Security is activated, you can store data only if you are
authorized to do so.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.21
J.2
J.2
Inserting a CD
J.2
J.2
J.2
0.0
J.22
Operator Manual
Inserting a MOD
J.2
J.2
They can be written on both sides (sides A and B). Use the
MODs recommended by Siemens.
J.2
Make sure that the side from which you want to read data is
pointing upward.
Insert the MOD into the correct drive.
The tray with the MOD is drawn in.
J.2
Ejecting a medium
J.2
J.2
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.23
0.0
J.24
Operator Manual
Write protection
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.25
Storing data on CD
J.2
Single or multi-session
J.2
In single session mode, you will first collect data, and then write
them to CD.
J.2
For example, you can select examination data of a patient and
preselect them for storage on CD. You can then add the examination data of another patient or add preselected data with further images of the same patient.
J.2
NOTE
Minimize the risk of losing data by using only "medical"
quality CDs recommended by Siemens for storage.
J.2
0.0
J.26
Operator Manual
J.2
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.27
Labeling a CD
J.2
When you preselect data for a new CD for the first time, the
Enter Label dialog box opens.
J.2
Enter a unique name for the CD, for example, a serial number
and the date, or accept the suggested label.
The label must only consist of the letters A to Z, figures 0 to 9,
and underscores (lower case letters are automatically converted to upper case). This label must be between three and
eleven characters long.
Click OK to confirm your action.
0.0
J.28
Operator Manual
Viewing tool
J.2
When exporting images to a CD it is possible to record a viewing tool to the CD, too.
J.2
On the Enter Label dialog box there is a check box offering the
user the choice to decide whether he wants to have that viewing
tool on the medium or not.
J.2
CDs can even be used on systems without a DICOM viewer.
J.2
NOTE
Do not use the viewing tool for diagnostic purposes.
J.2
J.2
J.2
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.29
J.2
If you have selected Yes and there was no CD in the CD recorder a further dialog box will appear.
J.2
Insert a new CD, wait for a while, and then confirm with OK.
0.0
J.210
Operator Manual
J.2
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.211
Writing
J.2
The bar display shows how long the storage operation still has
to run.
J.2
Recording in the
background
J.2
Actual recording runs in the background. You can close the dialog box and, for example, postprocess images. An icon on the
status bar indicates that recording is in progress.
Page J.62, Display on the status bar
J.2
After completion of recording, you can remove the CD, label the
upper side of the CD using a soft permanent felt-tip pen, and
then store it or pass it on.
J.2
0.0
J.212
Operator Manual
Wrong CD
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.213
Storing on a multi-session CD
J.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Switching to multi session mode may
destroy data previously recorded on this medium.
J.2
Consequence: It is no longer possible to read the
previously recorded data.
J.2
J.2
0.0
J.214
Operator Manual
J.2
Wrong CD
J.2
Click Eject.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.215
Continuing with
another CD
J.2
Writing
J.2
0.0
J.216
Operator Manual
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.217
J.2
Note that the CD and the Local Job Status must be empty.
While recording, it is not possible to copy files to that directory.
Delete all recorded files from this directory after recording on
CD is completed.
0.0
J.218
Operator Manual
J.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Using other than configured directory
for CamTasia data files.
J.2
Consequence: Data disk is full and no further examination
possible. Files will not be deletable by the user.
J.2
Remedy: Use only the configured directory for saving the
CamTasia data files.
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.219
Transfer information
J.2
J.2
0.0
J.220
Operator Manual
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.221
J.2
Under certain circumstances, images which have been reimported from an external store medium or hard disk may be displayed with a reduced pixel matrix.
J.2
J.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Transferring manipulated non-square
matrices/viewing segments.
J.2
Consequence: Diagnostically relevant areas of images
may be lost.
J.2
Remedy: When manipulated images are exported or sent
to another workstation, the related original images should
be sent as well.
It is strongly recommended to base the final diagnosis
always on the original images and not only on modified or
manipulated images.
J.2
0.0
J.222
Operator Manual
Occurrence of behavior
J.2
Except for the 3D task card, this behavior occurs in all task
cards when exporting or sending modified images.
J.2
It is caused by a mismatch between the dimensions of the
image matrix and the display segment, e.g. display of a rectangular image matrix in a square viewing segment, or display of a
square image matrix in a rectangular viewing segment.
J.2
When images in a task card are manipulated by a zoom/pan
and/or rotation operation, the modified image is displayed correctly, e.g. the complete viewing segment is filled.
J.2
If, after saving the image (by using the function Save as), it is
then exported to offline and reimported, the visible pixel matrix
will be reduced. The image information at the edges of the
newly displayed image will be replaced by black margins.
J.2
If the image contains a ROI that is now partially covered by
those black margins, the statistical information refers to the
complete ROI and not to the part of the ROI which remains visible.
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.223
Example 1
J.2
J.2
J.2
J.2
0.0
J.224
Operator Manual
Example 3
J.2
J.2
J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.225
0.0
J.226
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.3
J.3
Please refer to the hints regarding display of images with rectangular matrix.
Page J.222, Displaying images with a rectangular pixel
matrix
When Security is activated, you can send data only if you are
authorized to do so.
J.3
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Storage attributes (S) set for the data
sent via network (the connected archive did not indicate a
safe storage).
J.3
Consequence: The stored data are stored only on hard
disk and may be deleted by an auto delete mechanism or
by another user.
J.3
Remedy: Before deleting data from your local database,
ensure that these data are safely stored in the intended
archive (SC).
J.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.31
J.3
NOTE
Sending data with the attributes SC via network is a safe
data transfer, but no long-term storing.
J.3
0.0
J.32
Operator Manual
Sending data
J.3
You can select patient and examination data in your local database and send them to other network users at any time.
For example, you may send single images of an examination to
another workstation for reporting. Or you can transfer complete
examination data of a patient to be stored centrally.
An image may only be sent to the same network node once,
even if the graphics and text it contains have been changed
since.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.33
J.3
J.3
J.3
NOTE
The Send to node 1 might not work if a dialog box is open
and active.
J.3
In that case, click the image area to deactivate the dialog box or just close the dialog box.
0.0
J.34
Operator Manual
J.3
J.3
The Send To dialog box will open with a list of all available
network addresses.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.35
J.3
J.3
J.3
0.0
J.36
Operator Manual
J.3
J.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.37
0.0
J.38
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.4
J.4
J.4
J.4
NOTE
Images in Windows bitmap and AVI format can be exported
but not imported.
J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.41
J.4
J.4
J.4
0.0
J.42
Operator Manual
Path
J.4
Select the drive and folder from the Path selection list.
Extend the path, if necessary.
If you want to select or create a subfolder, add the subfolder
to the path separated by a "\" (up to 8 folder levels are possible from the main folder).
You can also select a folder on another computer in the network. In that case, you must enter the path as "\\computer_
name\folder".
NOTE
Please make sure that the names of new directories and
subdirectories do not contain blanks.
Do not use any of the following characters: ^ = \.
J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.43
Image format
J.4
J.4
Decide whether you want to make the image text and graphics a permanent part of the images and export them, too
(default: without).
If you have selected DICOM format, the image text and
graphics will always be exported, because they are included
in the DICOM format, i.e. the export functions are not active.
0.0
J.44
Operator Manual
Export anonymously
J.4
J.4
J.4
J.4
J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.45
Filenames
J.4
J.4
J.4
Example:
Miller.CT.Liver.2.13.2000.04.10.15.35.13.123456.ima
J.4
0.0
J.46
Operator Manual
J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.47
Importing
J.4
Selecting file(s)
J.4
J.4
Select the drive and folder from the Path selection list or
enter the path and filename, if necessary.
You can use the Windows standard wildcard "*" to select several files at once.
0.0
J.48
Operator Manual
Or
J.4
J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.49
N OT E
Please make sure that the names of files imported from
directories do not contain blanks.
Do not use any of the following characters: ^ = \.
J.4
0.0
J.410
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.5
J.5
Automatic storing
J.5
Automatic sending
J.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.51
0.0
J.52
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.6
J.6
All data storage, sending, and export jobs are performed one
after the other.
J.6
You can find out at any time about which and how many jobs
have been completed, are in progress, or are waiting to be
started in the queue.
J.6
You can influences processing of the queue by marking jobs as
urgent, stopping jobs, repeating jobs, or deleting jobs.
J.6
J.6
The status bar shows whether you system is storing, importing, sending, or receiving data in the background.
J.6
The Local Job Status dialog box provides information about
jobs for data storage and export/import to/from your data
drives.
J.6
The Network Job Status dialog box provides information about
jobs for data exchange via the network.
J.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.61
J.6
operation
inactive
Storage/export
to data medium
No icon
Sending/storage
in the network
No icon
Recording a CD
No icon
Importing
J.6
No icon
Receiving
J.6
No icon
active
error
J.6
Error messages
J.6
0.0
J.62
Operator Manual
J.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.63
J.6
J.6
J.6
0.0
J.64
Operator Manual
J.6
J.6
J.6
J.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.65
J.6
The Local Job Status and Network Job Status dialog boxes
contain a joblist with the following information:
J.6
Status
Processing status of the jobs
Page J.68, Status of data transfer
Patient
Name of the patient whose data are transferred
Object
Type and scope of the data transferred
No. of images
Number of images to be transferred in the job
If your system is shut down while a job is in progress, the
number of images displayed in the job status windows may
not be correct after the next restart.
Source
Source address, i.e. name of the data medium or network
address or your local database
Destination
Destination address, i.e. name of the data medium or network address or your local database
0.0
J.66
Operator Manual
Posted
Time of day at which data transfer was initiated (for data
being received, the time is shown in parentheses).
Try (only in the Network Job Status window)
Number of attempts at reaching the send destination before
the job as been performed successfully.
Remain
Number of images that have not yet been transferred.
If your system is shut down while a job is in progress, the
number of images remaining displayed in the job status windows may not be correct after the next restart.
Urg (only in the Network Job Status window)
Classification as urgent.
Failed objects
Number of images that could not be transferred. A message
also appears on the status bar.
J.6
NOTE
If your system is shut down while a storage job is in
progress, the number of images remaining displayed in the
job status windows may not be correct after the next restart.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.67
J.6
The status of data transfer shows the extent to which the job
has already been completed:
J.6
Queued
The job is still waiting to be processed.
Active
The job is being processed.
Waiting
A network job is waiting for acknowledgement that the data
has arrived.
Stopping
The job is being stopped.
Stopped
Processing of the job has been stopped by the user.
Completed
The job has been processed. All data has been transferred
without error.
Failed
An error occurred while the job was being processed. That
has prevented it from being completed.
Recording possible
The job includes storage of a data set on CD, but it has not
yet been written to CD.
Page J.26, Storing data on CD
0.0
J.68
Operator Manual
Recording
The data is being written to CD.
Recording failed
An error has occurred during recording.
Retrying
An error occurred while sending to a network node. After a
configured period of time sending will be retried.
Receiving
Data is being received via the network as part of this job.
Received
Receiving via the network has been completed.
Spooling
The job is being prepared for transfer.
Error
It was not possible to prepare the job for transfer (spooling
error).
Deleting
Deletion of the job is ongoing.
Jobs with the status "error", "receiving" (or active import jobs)
or "spooling" are no longer displayed after a restart.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.69
J.6
You can select transfer jobs in the Local Job Status and Network Job Status dialog boxes and edit them using buttons. J.6
The status of a job tells you what processing steps you can perform and therefore what buttons are active.
J.6
Stopping jobs
J.6
J.6
You can stop jobs with "active", "retrying" and "queued" status
at any time, for example, if you want to store them on CD before
processing them.
J.6
Select one or more jobs with "queued" status and click Stop.
The selected jobs and all other queued jobs with the same destination address will now no longer be started automatically.
These jobs have first the "Stopping" status while stopping is in
progress and the "Stopped" status when stopping is completed.J.6
0.0
J.610
Operator Manual
Resuming jobs
J.6
J.6
J.6
J.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.611
Starting storage on CD
J.6
Jobs with "recording possible" status are data sets that you
have preselected for storage on CD.
J.6
Make sure you have either selected no job or a job with
"recording possible" status.
Click CD Progress.
All data sets preselected for storage on CD and having "record"
status are now written to the CD inserted in the drive.
J.6
While data is being written to CD, the Record CD dialog box is
displayed.
Page J.212, Writing
J.6
Deleting jobs
J.6
J.6
You can delete jobs listed in the job status windows if they do
not have "receiving", "recording", "spooling" or "waiting" status.
J.6
Select one or more jobs and click Delete.
These jobs will no longer be performed and will be removed
from the joblist and the status changes to "deleting".
J.6
0.0
J.612
Operator Manual
J.6
J.6
J.6
J.6
J.6
J.6
Click Close.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.613
0.0
J.614
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.7
J.7
J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.71
J.7
0.0
J.72
Operator Manual
J.7
The list on the Auto Transfer tab card informs you what data
with what work status will automatically be transferred by your
system to what destination.
J.7
Each line of this list contains a rule for automatic data transfer.
These rules consist of the following conditions:
J.7
Active
A checkmark in the first column indicates that this rule is currently active.
Workstate
The data preselected for transfer that have reached the work
status specified here are automatically stored or sent
through the network.
You will find information about the work status of patient and
examination data in the Patient Browser part.
Page D.62, Defining the work status
Processing Status
Data that have reached the status stated here are automatically stored or sent via the network.
Objects
This shows you the data volume to which the rule applies
(e.g. single images, series...).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.73
Destination
This column shows to which drive or network address the
data are automatically transferred.
Marked
A checkmark in this column indicates that only preselected
data are automatically transferred.
Filmed
A checkmark in this column indicates that only filmed data
are automatically transferred.
You will find information about preselecting patient and examination data in the Patient Browser part.
Page D.66, Marking examination data
0.0
J.74
Operator Manual
J.7
Input field below the list allow you to edit the existing rules for
automatic data transfer or to create new rules.
J.7
J.7
J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.75
Rules
J.7
With the first selection list you can define the conditions for
the work status. Only data in the work status stated are considered for automatic data transmission.
With the second selection list you can define the conditions
for the transfer processing step status.
Special entries:
J.7
0.0
J.76
Operator Manual
Please note that you can also assign the completed status
manually in the Patient Browser and in this way initiate automatic data transmission if necessary.
Define in the third selection list whether you want each individual image, complete series, or only whole studies to be
transmitted given the appropriate work status.
J.7
TIP
Automatic data transfer rules should be configured at the
series level.
J.7
J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.77
Infinite loop
J.7
J.7
J.7
0.0
J.78
Operator Manual
Deleting rules
J.7
You can delete rules that are no longer needed for data transmission in the future instead of just deactivating them.
J.7
Select the rule that you want to delete from the list.
Click Delete.
The rule is removed from the list.
J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.79
J.7
The Local Devices tab card allows you to define the default
settings for exporting data to data media.
J.7
You can set how the storage capacity date media will be used
on individual drives. You can also define rules for the work status.
J.7
Go to the Local Devices tab card.
0.0
J.710
Operator Manual
J.7
If you require several data media to export data, you can define
whether the data of one patient can be distributed over two data
media or not (if technically possible).
J.7
J.7
Click the Keep all objects... radio button to have the data of
one patient always stored contiguously.
Or
J.7
J.7
NOTE
The Option Keep all objects for one patient on one
medium is only valid for one job.
J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.711
J.7
Here you can select what work status patient and examination
data should reach before being stored. If this work status has
not been reached, a warning will be displayed before storage.
J.7
J.7
0.0
J.712
Operator Manual
J.7
On the Network Nodes tab card, you can define the default settings for sending data in the network. You can specify a quality
factor and rules for repeated send attempts and the work status
for the network address.
J.7
Click the Network Nodes tab card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
J.713
Setting retries
J.7
J.7
Here you can select what work status patient and examination
data must have reached in case of storing. If this work status is
not reached, a warning is displayed before storage.
J.7
J.7
With the radio buttons, define the work status required for
sending.
If you select the radio button Unspecific, storing is possible
in any work status without confirmation.
Select the checkbox Printed, too, if you want to film or print
the images at least once before they are sent.
0.0
J.714
Operator Manual
PART
Neuro 3D
K.0
K.1 Introduction
Starting Neuro 3D .......................................................... K.12
The Neuro 3D task card ................................................. K.13
Image segments ........................................................ K.14
Volume image segment ............................................. K.15
Plot segment .............................................................. K.16
Control area ............................................................... K.17
Closing Neuro 3D ........................................................... K.18
syngo MR 2006T
K1
Neuro 3D
0.0
K2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
K.1
Introduction
K.1
How to proceed
K.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.11
Introduction
Neuro 3D
Starting Neuro 3D
K.1
The Neuro 3D task card is started from one of the task cards or
from the Patient Browser.
K.1
Select Applications > Neuro 3D (MR) from the main menu.
The Neuro 3D task card opens.
K.1
You can also open the task card together with the anatomical
image data set to be loaded.
Page K.22, Loading anatomical images
0.0
K.12
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Introduction
K.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
K.1
Menu bar
Image segments 1 and 2
Plot segment / image segment 3
Volume segment
Control area
Status bar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.13
Introduction
Neuro 3D
Image segments
K.1
Reference lines
K.1
The image segments contain reference lines showing the section position and viewing direction of the two other orthogonal
MPRs.
K.1
0.0
K.14
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Introduction
K.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.15
Introduction
Neuro 3D
Plot segment
K.1
When you switch to analysis mode, the plot segment is displayed instead of the lower left image segment. It contains a
diagram showing the signal intensity of selected cerebral
regions over time.
K.1
Showing/hiding plot
segment
K.1
You can switch between the plot and image segment, if you
want to use the third sectional image in analysis mode.
K.1
Unselect the Display Plot option in the Analysis menu.
The sectional image is displayed.
K.1
K.1
0.0
K.16
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Introduction
Control area
K.1
The control area on the right of the task card contains the following groups with information and operating elements:
K.1
(1) Volume control providing information about the loaded
data and for unloading the data sets.
(2) Online/analysis control for controlling online and analysis
modes. The online functions are only available on the main
console if you have a license for them.
(3) General control functions for showing and hiding image
elements.
(4) View control with the subtask card View and Visual for
changing the image views.
(5) Input/output control with functions for saving and filming
images or the diagram.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.17
Introduction
Neuro 3D
Closing Neuro 3D
K.1
After completing the evaluation in Neuro 3D, exit from the application again.
K.1
Select Applications > Close Neuro 3D (MR).
The Neuro 3D task card will be closed. Another task card is
moved into foreground.
K.1
K.1
If you do not close individual applications but log off the system
(e.g. with the Options > End Session menu item), please note
the following.
K.1
K.1
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost permanently.
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
K.1
0.0
K.18
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
K.2
Loading Images
K.2
K.2
Neuro 3D lets you evaluate anatomical and functional information with software version 2002B and higher. Prior to loading
image data sets, the system checks their suitability for 3D evaluation with Neuro 3D.
K.2
BOLD data and the activation map can be loaded only in
mosaic format. When selecting anatomical data, please note:K.2
Only one anatomical series can be loaded and has to contain
at least two images.
A series in mosaic format cannot be loaded as an anatomical
image data set.
All images must be from the same study.
All images must be parallel and acquired along one axis.
No missing or duplicate images.
None of the images must have undergone distortion correction or compression.
If you try to select unsuitable images or series, the system displays a message.
K.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.21
Loading Images
Neuro 3D
K.2
K.2
Click the Neuro 3D (MR) button on the tool bar of the Patient
Browser.
Or
K.2
0.0
K.22
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Loading Images
K.2
After you have loaded the anatomical data set, you will add the
functional information to the image views. Load the relevant
BOLD series as a data source for the signal-time curve in the
plot segment.
K.2
The BOLD volume and activation map must be available as
mosaic images.
Loading an activation
map
K.2
Click the Neuro 3D (MR) button on the tool bar of the Patient
Browser.
Or
K.2
K.2
Select and load the required BOLD volume in the same way
(e.g. MoCoSeries or ep2d_bold...).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.23
Loading Images
Neuro 3D
K.2
If you have scanned the anatomical data set first and then the
BOLD images, the fieldmap with the functional information is
also automatically loaded ( Page K.42).
If no fieldmap is available, a message is displayed.
K.2
If you have performed the scans in a different sequence, you
must load the fieldmap manually.
K.2
Select the fieldmap from the Patient Browser and click the
Neuro 3D (MR) button on the toolbar.
Unloading a volume
K.2
The upper control area shows the data sets loaded. The relevant buttons are activated. You can also unload a single volume
using these buttons. However, you cannot unload the anatomy
while one of the other volumes is loaded.
K.2
Click the button of the volume you want to unload.
If you want to hide the activation map or fieldmap temporarily,
use the buttons in the center of the control area or the Display menu.
0.0
K.24
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
K.3
K.3
By individually setting the window values, you are able to optimize the display of the image segments. For volume images
with volume rendering technique (VRT), Neuro 3D provides a
number of predefined parameter sets for selection.
K.3
You are able to hide unwanted parts of the volume in the volume
segment using clip planes and rotating the volume image and
free images into position. The size of the view and the displayed
portion of the image can be changed as required in the image
segments.
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.31
Neuro 3D
Enlarging a segment
K.3
K.3
Select the segment to be enlarged and then View Properties > 1x1 Layout.
The segment is enlarged to full screen size. You can return to
the standard 2x2 layout view at any time via the menu.
K.3
0.0
K.32
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
For improved detail recognition, zoom images and pan the area
of interest into the center of the segment.
K.3
Select Modes > Zoom & Pan.
Or
K.3
Enlarging an image
K.3
Panning an image
K.3
Resetting
K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.33
Neuro 3D
K.3
The Anatomy Visual Gallery provides an overview of the available parameter sets. Choose a suitable one.
K.3
Select Visual Properties > Anatomy Visual Gallery.
Or
K.3
Click the Anatomy Visual Gallery button on the Visual subtask card of the control area.
The Anatomy Visual Gallery opens.
K.3
0.0
K.34
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.35
K.3
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
0.0
K.36
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Adjust the transparency, brightness, color, and signal intensity value of each tissue class.
To change the numerical values of parameters, show the
numerical setting area with the Advanced >> button.
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.37
Neuro 3D
N OT E
Do not delete or overwrite the parameter sets until they are
no longer required for other images or series.
K.3
0.0
K.38
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
You can rotate the volume image to any position using the
mouse.
K.3
In case the zoom/pan mode is active, switch it off again.
Grab the volume image with the mouse and drag it to the
desired location.
The orientation cube in the lower right part of the image shows
the viewing angle relative to the patient:
L = Viewed from the left
R = Viewed from the right
A = Front view (Anterior)
P = View from the back (Posterior)
H = Caudal view (Head)
F = Cranial view (Feet)
K.3
You can return the volume image to its original display at any
time or set one of the standard viewing angles.
Page K.329, Calling standard views
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.39
Neuro 3D
K.3
After loading an image series, the complete data set will be displayed. You have a choice of evaluating certain areas of interest
only with Neuro 3D. Set clip planes to expose these structures
behind concealing volume parts.
K.3
Six clip planes can be used to delimit the sides of the displayed
volume. You can use the clip planes by moving them between
the areas of interest and the hidden areas. Volume outside the
clip planes will be hidden. The interior, however, will be visible.K.3
Clip planes are only active in the volume image.
Activating/deactivating
clip planes
K.3
K.3
Click the Show / Hide Clip Plane button in the control area.
Or
K.3
0.0
K.310
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
You can define which of the six clip planes are available in the
Clip Plane Properties dialog box.
K.3
Select Display > Clip Plane Properties.
Or
K.3
K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.311
K.3
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
The frames indicate the position of the clip planes in the volume
and allows you to move them. You can hide the frames if they
are in the way during evaluation.
K.3
Click the Hide Frame button.
Frames are hidden and the text on the button changes to Show
Frame. This allows you to show the frames again at any time.
K.3
Click Close.
The Clip Plane Properties dialog box closes.
K.3
0.0
K.312
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
If you have activated the clip planes, the selected clip planes
are active in the volume segment and can be moved.
K.3
Activating edit mode
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.313
Moving
K.3
Neuro 3D
To hide unwanted outer parts of the volume, move the clip plane
into the volume.
K.3
Click a line of the frame and hold the mouse button down.
The frame line is highlighted in color.
K.3
K.3
Tilting
K.3
You can use the four frame points to tilt a clip plane about its
center in the volume image.
K.3
Click the point you want to use to tilt the plane.
The point and the frame line are highlighted in color.
K.3
0.0
K.314
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
At the four corners you can reduce or enlarge the frame of a clip
plane. This does not alter the clip plane itself.
K.3
Click the corner where you want to resize the frame.
The cube and the frame line are highlighted in color.
K.3
K.3
K.3
When the clip plane has reached the required position and size,
deactivate the edit mode again.
K.3
Click the frame line of the highlighted clip plane.
Or
K.3
Resetting
K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.315
Neuro 3D
K.3
After you have loaded the anatomical data set, the volume
image segment shows both the VRT volume image and the
orthogonal MPRs. This provides a better overview of the loaded
volume. To display images with a freely selectable image plane,
you may also display floating MPRs.
K.3
0.0
K.316
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
N OT E
Please remember that elements (MPR views, clip planes,
VRT image, frames) in the volume segment may hide each
other. This complicates the correct recognition of
structures.
K.3
Showing / hiding
orthogonal MPRs
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.317
Showing / hiding
floating MPRs
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
K.3
N OT E
If you show the VRT volume image, it will cover the floating
MPRs.
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
0.0
K.318
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.319
Neuro 3D
With the Shift slider, you can set the interval between the MPR
views and the surface of the volume:
K.3
Drag the handle of the slider to the right to increase the interval.
Or
K.3
Drag the handle of the slider to the left to reduce the interval.
K.3
0.0
K.320
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.321
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
K.3
0.0
K.322
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
To reduce (enlarge) the frame, move the cube inward (outward) holding the mouse button down.
It is not possible to resize orthogonal MPRs projected onto
the side areas.
K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.323
Neuro 3D
Windowing images
K.3
You are able to change the window values (brightness and contrast) of the images to optimize the anatomical display.
K.3
Single windowing
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
K.3
0.0
K.324
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
You can also use the keys on your keyboard to fine-tune the
window values.
K.3
To change window values, select the respective image segment.
Press the Pos+ or Pos- keys to increase or reduce the
brightness.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.325
Neuro 3D
K.3
K.3
K.3
Click a line of the frame and hold the mouse button down.
The frame line is highlighted in color.
K.3
K.3
K.3
0.0
K.326
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
Rotating
K.3
With the four points in the center of the frame, you can tilt the
image plane of a floating MPR in the volume image about its
center.
K.3
Click the point where you want to tilt the plane.
The point and the frame line are highlighted in color.
K.3
K.3
Once you have moved the image plane in the required position,
deactivate edit mode again.
K.3
Click the frame line of the highlighted image plane.
Or
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.327
Moving a plane of
intersection
K.3
Neuro 3D
A point of interest in the volume may be simultaneously displayed in all image segments by moving the plane of intersection of the orthogonal MPRs to this position.
K.3
Locate and click the position in the image.
Or
K.3
0.0
K.328
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.3
You are able to restore the original view of the loaded data set
at any time. You can also orient the volume view in one of the
standard viewing directions with the mouse.
K.3
K.3
K.3
Click the Undo All button on the View subtask card of the
control area.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.329
Resetting the
volume view
K.3
Neuro 3D
You can reset the volume view to its original size and front viewing direction.
K.3
Select View Properties > Home 3D.
Or
K.3
Volume view
Orienting
K.3
You can orient the volume view in one of the standard viewing
directions.
K.3
Select View Properties > 3D Orientation and select the
required setting from the submenu.
0.0
K.330
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Resetting orthogonal
MPRs
K.3
K.3
The image planes of floating MPRs have the same default position as orthogonal MPRs: mutually orthogonal at the center of
the volume, each parallel with one side of the volume.
K.3
Open the Floating MPR Properties dialog box with
Display > Floating MPR Properties.
Click this button.
The floating MPRs are updated.
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.331
Neuro 3D
0.0
K.332
Operator Manual
Displaying Functional
Information
CHAPTER
K.4
K.4
Activating/deactivating
the activation map
K.4
K.4
K.4
Interpolation
K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.41
Neuro 3D
K.4
0.0
K.42
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
The field map is automatically loaded with the functional information. A system messages informs you if no valid field map is
available.
K.4
N OT E
Without a field map, combined images may be
misinterpreted.
K.4
K.4
Deactivating masked
areas
Or
K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.43
K.4
Neuro 3D
K.4
An anatomical threshold is preset that ensures that the colored marking of masked areas is restricted to the head. You
can change this threshold.
Page K.45, Setting colors, thresholds, and the alpha value
0.0
K.44
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.4
K.4
K.4
K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.45
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Neuro 3D
0.0
K.46
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.4
K.4
Select the color palette you require for the positive activity
values from the Upper selection list.
Or
K.4
Select the color palette you require for the negative activity
values from the Lower selection list.
Or
K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.47
Neuro 3D
K.4
TIP
If you want to print combined images on a black-and-white
printer, select BrightGreyscale
as the color scale (black-and-white scale).
K.4
To rule out possible ambiguities in grayscale values,
window the grayscales values in the anatomical segment.K.4
K.4
K.4
You can define the activity values that are assigned a color. For
this purpose you may use sliders or numerical input fields.
Activity values without a color assigned to them do not appear
in the images.
K.4
The check box, which is activated by default, ensures that a
change in one of the two value ranges (positive or negative)
automatically affects the other value range accordingly (symmetry).
K.4
If you want to set the value ranges independently, deactivate
the Symmetry check box.
Enter the new value for the lower limit of the negative value
range in the far left input field.
Or
K.4
Drag the left handle of the slider to the required setting with
the mouse.
0.0
K.48
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Enter the new value for the upper limit of the negative value
range in the left center enter box.
Or
K.4
Drag the right handle of the slider to the required setting with
the mouse.
Setting a gap between the negative and positive value range
suppresses display of very low-intensity signals and therefore
also noise.
Set the positive value range in the same way as the negative
value range if you want to make changes asymmetrically.
The set color values are then assigned to the activity values
within the value ranges. All activity values outside the value
ranges will not appear.
K.4
The default setting is display interpolation activated. For more
info, see
Page K.41, Interpolation.
K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.49
Neuro 3D
K.4
K.4
K.4
0.0
K.410
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
K.4
Setting the cluster size is intended to suppress voxels accidentally contained in the activation map. For example, if you enter
a cluster size of 3, all activity clusters will appear whose volume
is smaller than 3 voxels.
K.4
The cluster size is set in the Filter group box of the Functional
Visual Properties dialog box.
K.4
Select the Clustering check box to apply the cluster size setting to the display of the activity data.
Enter the required cluster size in the Cluster Size enter box.
The image views are updated accordingly.
K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.411
Neuro 3D
K.4
K.4
Drag the left handle of the slider to the required setting with
the mouse.
It is not possible to change the upper limit.
Select the Activation Map check box to mask activity data
outside the displayed anatomy.
The image views are updated accordingly.
K.4
0.0
K.412
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
K.5
Neuro 3D Evaluation
Neuro 3D provides two evaluation modes:
K.5
K.5
Analysis mode is used for evaluating a completed examination. In this case, the function information is loaded from the
database.
Page K.23, Loading functional information
Online mode is used on the main console to receive and
evaluate functional information from a current examination.
In both modes, you select regions of interest in the brain by
drawing VOIs (volumes of interest) in the images. The signal
intensity within the VOIs is shown by the signal-time curve in the
plot segment.
K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.51
Neuro 3D Evaluation
Neuro 3D
K.5
K.5
0.0
K.52
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Neuro 3D Evaluation
K.5
K.5
K.5
K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.53
Neuro 3D Evaluation
Neuro 3D
K.5
You can resize the VOI at the four contour points shown in the
image.
K.5
Move the mouse pointer to the required position.
Drag the mouse point inward holding the mouse button down
to reduce the contour.
Or
K.5
K.5
Move the mouse pointer onto the VOI contour between the
resizing points.
Press the mouse button and move the mouse in the required
direction.
0.0
K.54
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Neuro 3D Evaluation
K.5
Displaying VOIs
K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.55
Neuro 3D Evaluation
Organizing VOI
Neuro 3D
K.5
The VOI Properties dialog box informs you about the VOIs
already created and provides functions for manipulating VOIs.K.5
Select Analysis > VOI Properties.
The VOI Properties dialog box opens.
K.5
K.5
0.0
K.56
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Neuro 3D Evaluation
To evaluate just the visible activation map in the VOI and not
the entire sphere, activate the Shrink VOI to Activation
check box.
In that case, the functional information that you hid using the
settings in the Functional Visual Properties dialog box is
not taken into account either .
Chapter K.4, Displaying Functional Information
Deleting VOIs
K.5
You can delete VOIs you no longer need from the list and therefore also from the images to keep the list uncluttered.
K.5
To delete a single VOI, select the VOI in the list and click
Delete.
To delete all VOIs, click Delete All.
Or
K.5
N OT E
All VOIs are automatically deleted when you terminate
analysis mode. A warning message is then displayed.
K.5
If you just end VOI mode, the VOIs you have created are
retained.
K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.57
Neuro 3D Evaluation
Neuro 3D
K.5
K.5
K.5
K.5
0.0
K.58
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Neuro 3D Evaluation
K.5
K.5
K.5
K.5
K.5
Optimizing display
K.5
Drawing VOIs
K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.59
Neuro 3D Evaluation
Neuro 3D
K.5
K.5
0.0
K.510
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
K.6
K.6
You can save the views of the image segments and the plot segments in the database at any time. You can decide whether to
append the image to be saved to an existing series or to save it
in a new series.
K.6
The export function available allows you to save the views in
BMP image files. You may reuse the image files using any multimedia player.
K.6
To film (copy) images, transfer them to the Filming task card
where you may send images to the camera or printer.
K.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.61
Neuro 3D
Saving images
K.6
If you want to check the save settings and change them select
the Save As dialog box. Otherwise, use the Save button to save
the selected image or diagram with the settings last made.
K.6
K.6
K.6
K.6
0.0
K.62
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
Use the Save all images in one series and Group all images
by type option buttons to set whether all images will be stored
in a single new series or in separate series for each display
mode.
K.6
The names of new series are entered in the associated combo
boxes.
Page H.123, Defining setting when saving
K.6
K.6
K.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.63
Neuro 3D
K.6
If you want to load a view from the Neuro 3D task card into
other applications, such as a text processing, network conferencing, or presentation program, export it as a BMP image file
first.
K.6
K.6
N OT E
If the security system is activated, the image export function
is only available to users with export privilege.
K.6
K.6
K.6
0.0
K.64
Operator Manual
Neuro 3D
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
K.65
Neuro 3D
Filming images
K.6
You can transfer the sectional views, the diagram in the plot
segment, or the volume image to the virtual film sheet or to a
printer at any time.
K.6
Select the segment view you want to transfer to the film
sheet.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet or click the button.
Or
K.6
0.0
K.66
Operator Manual
PART
Postprocessing
Images
L.0
syngo MR 2006T
L1
Contents
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L2
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Contents
syngo MR 2006T
L3
Contents
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L4
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L5
Contents
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L6
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.1
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.11
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic analysis requires that the user have full access rights
to the patient data to be evaluated.
L.1
Please observe the information given in the Safety Standards
chapters,
Page B.11, Introduction
L.1
0.0
L.12
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.13
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
L.1
The Viewing task card is used to view and edit images and
series.
L.1
Go to the Viewing task card.
Select the images or series that are relevant to you in the
image area of the Viewing task card.
0.0
L.14
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
The functions for dynamic analysis are started from the Patient
Browser and the Viewing task card.
L.1
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > ... from the
Patient Browser menu or from the menu of the Viewing
task card.
Or
L.1
Loading Images
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.15
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.16
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
The dialog box appears in two variations for different calculations. Each variation behaves differently.
L.1
Condition A: Calculation does not necessarily require
images with the same image position, slice thickness, etc.
Condition B: Calculation always requires images with the
same image position, slice thickness, etc.
Here are examples of conditions A and B with the same image
position.
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.17
Dynamic Analysis
Condition A
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.18
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Condition B
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
Calculation always requires images with the same image position or slice thickness, etc. Example: Image position
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.19
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
After you have transferred the selected images and series and
have called up an evaluation function, a function-specific dialog
box will be displayed.
L.1
L.1
The selected images and series are listed numerically in the list
of operands in the upper part of the dialog box.
L.1
The images/series are listed in chronological order of creation when loaded into the evaluation functions Subtraction
or Division.
L.1
Series description
Images to be evaluated
Image increment
1. operand
2. operand
The Image Range column shows the images marked for evaluation.
L.1
0.0
L.110
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
If you have not transferred all the images of a series, but only
every third or fourth one, for example, a display as shown below
will indicate the actual images forwarded. It is also possible for
you to select and transfer a range of images within a series. L.1
L.1
Image range
Selected images
3
2-5
4-< images. last image >
2, 5, 8
Image 3
Images 2, 3, 4, 5
image 4 to the end
images 2, 5, 8
L.1
Removing series
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.111
Dynamic Analysis
Adding/removing images
Postprocessing Images
L.1
You can set image intervals if, for example, you only want to use
part of a series for evaluation.
L.1
Because direct editing of entries under Image Range is not
possible, you must set the image intervals like this instead: L.1
First select only some of the images in the Patient Browser
or on the Viewing task card and start evaluation.
The dialog box shows you the selected images under Operands.
L.1
Select the next images in the Patient Browser and drag and
drop them into the dialog box of the evaluation function.
The entries under Image Range are updated. The series with
the appended images from the Patient Browser moves to the
top of the list of operands.
L.1
0.0
L.112
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Entering an increment
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
L.1
Enter an increment.
Or
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.113
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
If you evaluate images within series, only the images of the initial series will be used as operands for an evaluation function.
In this editing mode, you can generate a series with one or more
images from an initial series.
L.1
A1
A2
C1
A3
Result series
A4
Original series
0.0
L.114
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
You can evaluate images from different series. In this case, you
are generating result series from the individual images of the
original series by combining the ith image of each series with
the ith images of the other series.
L.1
The images in the series are sorted by slice position. If the slice
position is the same in several images, they are sorted by image
number.
L.1
A1
B1
C1
E1
A2
B2
C2
E2
A3
B3
C3
E3
A4
B4
C4
E4
The result series will contain the same number of images as the
smallest initial series.
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.115
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
0.0
L.116
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
The test area shows a test image with the associated histogram.
L.1
(1) Test image
(2) Histogram of the test image
(1)
(2)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.117
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
The Test Image selection list shows all possible test combinations of images.
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.118
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
You can limit the range displayed in the histogram to the relevant part by defining a lower and an upper threshold value. Only
the grayscale values that are within the threshold values will be
used for evaluation.
L.1
L.1
For the Subtraction and Division functions, click the Scaling button.
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.119
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
For scaling, select the range of the calculation result data that
is mapped onto the grayscale range (0-4095) or onto the range
stated on the lower x-axis.
L.1
Go to the x-Axis subtask card by clicking its tab.
L.1
=>Maximum = 3995
L.1
0.0
L.120
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
The interval that you define (upper X axis) is then mapped onto
the grayscale range of the lower X axis (usually 0 to 4095). L.1
(1)
(2)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.121
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
NOTE
Changes to the scaling of the histogram's y axis only affect
the histogram being displayed, not the results images. L.1
0.0
L.122
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
L.1
You can set a noise level for some functions. This threshold
value determines the pixels used for evaluation.
L.1
Enter a value in the Noise Level input field.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.123
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.124
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Selecting a result
series or image
L.1
At times when you select more than one series (e.g. Logarithm, Multiplication, Subtraction, and Division), you can
then use the selection list next to the Result series description input field to select series, check names, or change them,
if necessary.
L.1
L.1
L.1
The results are stored in the database under the name you
entered. When you have completed analysis, the results are
displayed on the Viewing task card in the background. Here,
you can further process the images.
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.125
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Adding images
L.1
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.126
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.127
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Mode
L.1
Starting evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.128
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Subtracting images
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.129
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.130
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Mode
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.131
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
You can change the order of the operands, for example, to subtract image 5 from image 4 instead of image 4 from image 5. L.1
Click the Exchange button.
Title bar now shows the new operation.
L.1
Example: You have loaded 10 series. To replace the subtrahend shown in the field under the list of operands, select the
series you want to use as the subtrahend from the list of operands and click the Exchange button.
Switching modes
L.1
0.0
L.132
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Scaling grayscales
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
You can scale the grayscale values of the result with the
selected values.
L.1
Click the Scaling button and enter values for the minimum
and maximum.
Rescaling images
L.1
Starting evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.133
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Multiplication
L.1
L.1
Images by a constant
A series by a constant
Two or more series by a constant
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
L.134
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
Mode
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.135
Dynamic Analysis
Performing grayscale
scaling
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Because this function does not generate a test image, it provides two options for scaling the result images.
L.1
Click the automatic option under Scaling if you want the
grayscale values to be scaled automatically.
Or
L.1
Click the none option if you want all grayscale values larger
than 4095 to be set to this value and the scaling of the result
images to correspond to that of the original images.
Start evaluation
L.1
0.0
L.136
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Division
You can divide:
Selecting images
L.1
L.1
L.1
A series/images by a constant
A series by a second series
A series by an image
An image by a second image
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.137
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.138
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Mode
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
If you have selected two images, you can divide one image by
the other or both images by a constant.
If you have selected two series with the same number of
images, you can divide the images of one series by the
images of the other series, or divide the images of both series
by a constant.
If you have selected two or more series, including one or
more with only one image, you can divide all other images by
this image.
Division across series
L.1
L.1
The display field for the divisor is not active if the constant or
within series mode is selected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.139
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
You can change the order of the operands, that is, swap round
the numerator and denominator of the division.
L.1
Click the Exchange button.
Title bar now shows the new operation.
L.1
Switching modes
L.1
0.0
L.140
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Scaling grayscales
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
You can scale the grayscale values of the result with the
selected values.
L.1
Click the Scaling button and enter values for the minimum
and maximum.
Starting division
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.141
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
L.142
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
Start evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.143
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Differentiation
L.1
Differentiation determines the intensity increase (slope) of grayscale values within a series. For example, it is possible to differentiate inflamed tissue from tumor tissue in mammography by
the different enrichment behavior of the contrast agent in the tissue.
L.1
You can only ever differentiate one series.
All images of this series must have the same slice position.
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
L.144
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.145
Dynamic Analysis
Starting differentiation
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.146
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
Integration of the grayscale values of a series provides information on enhancement when using contrast agent studies.
L.1
You can only integrate across images of one series.
These images must have been scanned at the same slice
position.
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.147
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
0.0
L.148
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Starting integration
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.149
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Arithmetic mean
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.150
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Mode
L.1
L.1
Starting evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.151
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Series must contain at least two images. Otherwise evaluation will not be possible.
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
L.152
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.153
Dynamic Analysis
Mode
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Start evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.154
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.155
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
0.0
L.156
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Mode
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
Starting evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.157
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
T-test evaluation
L.1
This special method is used to evaluate examinations performed with functional neuro imaging. These examinations usually consist of a native series (no functional brain activity) and
stimulated series (functional brain activity). With the t-test, you
can sort the series according to stimulated and non-stimulated
series and generate differential images of the mean values. The
differential images display only the active areas of the brain.
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.158
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
(1)
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
(2)
L.1
(3)
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.159
Dynamic Analysis
Grouping series
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
You can exclude any series from the evaluation that was
acquired at the beginning of the activity or during relaxation,
because they only show the time required to reach a steady
state (deoxygenation/oxygenation of blood).
L.1
Enter 2 in the top spin box to exclude the first two series from
evaluation.
You can also define how many series will remain in the groups
(Group 1 - Group 2).
L.1
0.0
L.160
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Check the series. Each of the lists should contain the same
number of stimulated and non-stimulated series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.161
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
The result images show the difference between the mean values of the stimulated and non-stimulated series. The unit of
grayscales of these images results from the standard deviation
of these mean values. The resulting t-test values are compared
with a threshold value. The values below the threshold value
appear black in the image. The threshold value is set to 0 by
default.
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.162
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Starting evaluation
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
N OT E
If you superimpose t-test images on non-EPI images,
compare these images with the superimposed EPI images
for safety reasons. Image distortion may occur with EPI
scans.
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.163
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Standard deviation
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
L.164
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.165
Dynamic Analysis
Mode
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Series must contain at least two images before you can perform evaluation within a series.
Starting evaluation
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.166
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Calculating T1 images
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.167
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
0.0
L.168
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
L.1
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.169
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
Calculating T2 images
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.170
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.171
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
Starting evaluation
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.172
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Time-to-peak evaluation
L.1
Time to peak evaluation shows the time up to maximum contrast agent enhancement.
L.1
You can either calculate a grayscale value minimum based on
T2 weighted EPI images or a grayscale value maximum based
on T1 weighted images.
L.1
Selecting images
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.173
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
0.0
L.174
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Mode
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.175
Dynamic Analysis
Starting evaluation
Postprocessing Images
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.176
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.177
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.0
L.178
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Status display
Dynamic Analysis
L.1
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.179
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
NOTE
If there is a change of operators in the status dialog during
evaluation and the new operator has no access to the data
of the image being calculated, the data will be hidden. L.1
The series name is replaced by the name of the user who
generated the image.
L.1
The new user can stop or resume evaluation but not delete
the job.
L.1
L.1
L.1
L.1
0.0
L.180
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Dynamic Analysis
Pausing evaluation
L.1
Resuming evaluation
L.1
To resume evaluation:
L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.181
Dynamic Analysis
Postprocessing Images
L.1
You can stop evaluation from the joblist, for example, if you find
that the evaluation does not meet your requirements.
L.1
However, you cannot delete the active evaluation. You must
stop it first.
L.1
Select the active evaluation from the list.
Click the Pause button to pause evaluation.
Click the Delete button to delete the selected jobs from the
list.
Jobs with "Aborted", "Waiting", or "Paused" status can be
deleted directly.
The canceled job is then deleted from the job list.
L.1
The images already calculated are stored and may be displayed on the Viewing task card.
0.0
L.182
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.21
Postprocessing Images
As you scroll, the ROIs drawn in one image will be applied to the
loaded images. You can select whether you want the ROIs to be
applied unchanged (static ROI) or changed in each image
(dynamic ROI).
L.2
You may select a reference image or a reference series if you
want to evaluate the change in grayscale values with respect to
a reference.
L.2
The evaluation results will be displayed as curves or tables. You
can scale the curves, insert comments, save, as well as film the
results.
L.2
0.0
L.22
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Loading Images
Page L.26
Define x-axis/sorting
Page L.213
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.23
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You can open the Mean Curve task card from any other task
card or from the Patient Browser.
L.2
Select Applications > Mean Curve from a task card or
Applications > Mean Curve from the Patient Browser.
The Mean Curve task card opens and is initially empty.
L.2
0.0
L.24
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Menu bar
First segment (evaluation segment)
Third segment
Status bar
Second segment (result segment)
Display of sort criteria
Control area with subtask cards
Fourth segment
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.25
Postprocessing Images
Loading images
L.2
N OT E
For Mean Curve evaluation the user has to have full access
rights to the patient data to be evaluated. You also require
the data save privilege.
L.2
Please refer to the information in,
Page B.31, Information for Users
L.2
0.0
L.26
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
Requirements
L.2
The images in the first segment must meet the following criteria
prior to mean curve evaluation.
L.2
If images do not meet one of these criteria, the images will not
be loaded into the task card.
L.2
The following criteria have to be met:
same slice position
same slice thickness
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.27
L.2
Postprocessing Images
You can load images and start the Mean Curve task card in one
step.
L.2
Open the Patient Browser and select one or more series.
Select Applications > Mean Curve.
Once the Mean Curve task card has been opened and is in
L.2
foreground:
Open the Patient Browser and select one or more series.
Select Applications > Mean Curve.
Or
L.2
Drag and drop the selected series into the first segment.
Or
L.2
0.0
L.28
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
The Viewer task card is in foreground. You can load images and
start the Mean Curve task card in one step.
L.2
Explicitly select images or series for the mean curve evaluation.
Select Applications > Mean Curve.
The Mean Curve task card opens.
L.2
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.29
Adding images
L.2
Postprocessing Images
You may load additional images into the first segment at any
time. All images in the first segment are sorted according to the
preset sort.
L.2
A Warning box will be displayed if you select images or series
from another examination or another patient and add them to
Mean Curve.
L.2
You may load "new" images and remove "old" images from segments at any time.
L.2
Simply click the Yes button.
You can stop loading new images.
L.2
0.0
L.210
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
The images in the third and fourth segment will not be taken into
account in the actual evaluation. However, the images have to
belong to the same patient and to the same examination as the
images in the first segment.
L.2
Images are always loaded into the third and fourth segment
using drag and drop.
Requirements
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.211
L.2
Postprocessing Images
The same display rules apply to the loaded images as in the first
segment.
L.2
Exception:
You have already loaded images or series in the first segment
and you are now in the process of loading another series into
the third segment. The third segment shows the image with the
same preset sort criteria as the current image in the first segment.
L.2
Moving images to
another segment
L.2
L.2
L.2
Click OK.
0.0
L.212
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Defining sorting
L.2
L.2
You define the sort order of the loaded images by selecting the
x axis.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.213
Evaluation across
series
L.2
Postprocessing Images
You define the sort order of the loaded images across the series
by selecting the x axis. You define the sort order within the
loaded series with a second sort criterion.
L.2
L.2
0.0
L.214
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.215
Postprocessing Images
Select one of the following parameters as the x axis by clicking on the appropriate option.
Ser / Ima No.
Image and series number
Trigger Time
Suitable for displaying physiologically triggered measurement, e.g., cardiac series
Echo Time
Suitable for displaying multi-echo sequences, e.g., multiecho spin echo sequences
Slice Pos. default
Normal Time
Excitation time, suitable for dynamic and motion studies
When evaluating Within, the Normal Time of an image is
the difference between the acquisition time of the image and
the shortest acquisition time in the series.
0.0
L.216
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
The sort criteria for Mean Curve evaluation across the series is
defined in the Scaling dialog box on the Sorting card.
L.2
Select the Sorting subtask card in the Scaling dialog box.
The Sort card is displayed only if you are evaluating across
L.2
series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.217
L.2
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
0.0
L.218
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
For each x value, you can decide whether the newest or oldest
image will be used for evaluation.
L.2
Click the Use all newest image or Use all oldest image button.
In general, the newest or oldest of all the images with the same
sort criterion can be used for evaluation.
L.2
Click the Use all newest image or Use all oldest image button.
You can undo the action for locating images with the same sort
size.
L.2
Just click Cancel.
Example:
You have loaded additional images into the first segment.
If you click Cancel in the Same sort size dialog dialog box, the
loaded images will be deleted again.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.219
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You can scroll through the loaded images and series to look for
a suitable image.
L.2
You can also load the reference images of the same examination into the fourth segment and scroll through them until you
find the optimal original image for evaluation.
L.2
You may change the way the loaded images are displayed.
L.2
0.0
L.220
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
N OT E
During scrolling, the Mean Curve task card, unlike the
Viewer task card, automatically transfers each change to all
images of the respective segment.
L.2
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.221
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
L.2
L.2
Images not used for evaluation because of the same sort criterion will not be displayed as you scroll.
L.2
Once you have loaded a series into the first as well as third segments and are scrolling through one of them, the other segment
will look for and display the corresponding image (identical to
within sort criterion).
L.2
0.0
L.222
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.223
Example
L.2
Postprocessing Images
If the preset sort applies, images with the same slice position
will be displayed as you scroll across series.
L.2
A series is placed last in the scrolling order and an empty segment is displayed along with a message, if an image with the
corresponding within sort criterion is missing in a series. This
series will then be ignored during evaluation.
L.2
0.0
L.224
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.225
Postprocessing Images
Scroll through the stack and look for another reference image
if the fourth segment does not show a cut line in the reference
image.
0.0
L.226
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.227
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You can draw ROIs after you have optimized image display and
located the image for evaluation in the first segment. ROIs
delineate the part of the image that will be evaluated.
L.2
You can draw ROIs in the first and third segment.
L.2
L.2
The following tools are available on the Mean Curve task card
for drawing ROIs:
L.2
Rectangle
Circle
Freehand ROI
Drawing and editing ROIs is described in detail in the Viewer
chapter.
Page G.54, Evaluating regions
L.2
0.0
L.228
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
NOTE
Ensure that the ROIs do not extend beyond the edge of the
image. If they do, you will not be able to perform
calculations.
L.2
If the ROI extends over the edge of the image,
'"???'" appears instead of numbers after Min/Max, Area,
Mean/SD.
L.2
Draw one or more ROIs in the original image in the first segment.
The ROIs in the first segment have different colors and line
styles. Each ROI is also identified by a number.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.229
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You may select whether the ROIs drawn in the image will apply
to all other images in the first segment (Static ROI) or whether
you want to adjust the ROIs for each image (Dynamic ROI). L.2
Select Tools > Static ROI or Dynamic ROI from the main
menu.
Click the Dynamic ROI button in the control area on the
Tools card.
Static ROI mode is the active default setting when you start
Mean Curve.
L.2
L.2
As you scroll, the ROIs drawn in the initial image will be applied
to all other images in the first segment.
L.2
If ROIs have already been defined in some images, they will be
overwritten by the static ROIs.
L.2
0.0
L.230
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
The ROIs drawn in the initial image will be copied to the next,
current image as you scroll. Existing ROIs will not be overwritten.
L.2
At this point, you are able to check how well ROIs match the
anatomy to be evaluated and change the ROIs, if necessary.
L.2
Example:
You have drawn four ROIs in the initial image. The next image
already contains regions 1 and 2. As you scroll, the image contains only regions 3 and 4 from the initial image.
L.2
Adjust region 2 to match the anatomy to be evaluated in the
next image. The next image does not include any ROIs. As you
continue scrolling, this image will contain all four ROIs from the
previous image and nothing from the initial image.
L.2
Deleting ROIs
L.2
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.231
L.2
Postprocessing Images
All images required for the current evaluation must have the
same number of ROIs.
L.2
Mean Curve adds missing ROIs automatically by copying them
from the nearest images.
L.2
Example:
ROIs will be copied from the previous images if you reload
images into the first segment after drawing ROIs.
L.2
L.2
0.0
L.232
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.233
L.2
Postprocessing Images
You may individually select and apply the ROIs in the third segment or apply all ROIs together to the first segment.
L.2
Explicitly select an ROI in the third segment.
Or
L.2
Put the input focus on the third segment and select Edit >
Select All Graphics from the main menu or Select All
Graphics from the context menu.
The ROIs in the third segment are then selected.
L.2
Select Edit > Apply ROI from the main menu or Apply ROI
from the context menu.
The ROIs will be applied to the first segment.
L.2
If the slice positions of the current images in the first and third
segment do not match, a message box appears.
L.2
Click Yes in the message box to transfer the ROIs.
Click No in the message box to cancel transfer.
0.0
L.234
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
N OT E
Please ensure that you do not exceed the maximum
number of four ROIs.
L.2
L.2
N OT E
If the matrix size of the images in the third segment differs
from that in the first segment, you are not able transfer ROIs
from the third segment to the first segment.
L.2
An error message is displayed.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.235
Postprocessing Images
L.2
Before you start the evaluation, define whether you want to perform an absolute or relative evaluation.
L.2
The signal intensity is plotted against the x axis during absolute
evaluation.
L.2
Relative evaluation generates two curves for each ROI. The difference between the signal intensity and a reference value as
well as the ratio of the difference to the reference value are
applied to the x axis.
L.2
L.2
I/IRef
L.2
L.2
0.0
L.236
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.237
Postprocessing Images
L.2
0.0
L.238
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Click OK.
The dialog box closes.
L.2
The selected reference is used for all subsequent evaluations. As soon as you switch evaluation modes (within or
across), the selected series is no longer valid.
Starting evaluation
L.2
L.2
L.2
Automatic recalculation
L.2
The results will be rejected and cleared from the second segment as soon as you add new images, delete images, manipulate ROIs, or change the sort criterion.
L.2
Go to the menu and
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.239
Postprocessing Images
L.2
TIP
You should deactivate the Auto Recalculation option if you
have loaded a large number of series into Mean Curve. L.2
If not, you will find that recalculation is too time consuming.L.2
L.2
When you scroll in the second segment, the graphics are displayed first and then the tables.
L.2
If you scroll to a table in the second segment, this table is displayed first after re-evaluation.
L.2
0.0
L.240
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
The diagram shows a curve for each ROI. Using the color and
line style, you can assign the ROIs in the first segment to the
corresponding curves in the diagram.
L.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Patient name
Number of the table or diagram
Comment line (can be changed)
Information about scaling
Mean values or the maximum values (for absolute evaluation only)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.241
Postprocessing Images
L.2
The far left column lists the values on the x axis, e.g. the serial
numbers.
L.2
Next to that you will find the mean value, standard deviation,
and area content of each ROI.
L.2
0.0
L.242
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You can use the following options for changing the display of the
results in the diagram:
L.2
L.2
For more precise evaluation of the curve, you can have the
intensity of the signal displayed for a defined x value.
L.2
For this purpose, you can shift the vertical line in the image.
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.243
Postprocessing Images
Click on the line and move it by holding down the left mouse
button.
The x value (Series No. 6 in the figure) and the mean values of
the intensities for each ROI are displayed above the curves.
L.2
0.0
L.244
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.245
Postprocessing Images
L.2
0.0
L.246
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.247
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.248
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
You are able to scale the grayscale values. The grayscale values will be changed. This function is useful if the grayscale values are proportional to a physiologically relevant value and the
proportionality factor is known (e.g. flow velocity of the blood).
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.249
Smoothing a curve
L.2
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
Smoothing
0.0
L.250
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You are able to change a comment line in the image text of the
curves and tables.
L.2
Double-click this line.
The comment line is selected.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.251
Image as a background
for the diagram
L.2
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.252
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost.
L.2
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.253
Saving results as
images
L.2
Postprocessing Images
(2) Save all results images and all relevant initial images without making a selection
Click the Save Evaluation button on the Patient card in the
control area.
Or
L.2
L.2
0.0
L.254
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.255
Saving results as an
ASCII file
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You may only store ASCII data onto diskette (diskette drive A:)
or in directories especially set up for import/export by Siemens
Service.
L.2
N OT E
The Save As ASCII menu item is dimmed if you do not have
the necessary EXPORT rights.
L.2
Please refer to the information in
Part B, Security Package
L.2
L.2
L.2
0.0
L.256
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
You can save the ASCII file on diskette or in directories especially set up for import/export by Siemens Service.
L.2
Choose a directory or diskette under File Name.
For security reasons, you are able to deactivate display of the
patient name in the first line of the ASCII file.
L.2
Select the Hide Patient Name option.
The ASCII data no longer contain any reference to the patient.
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.257
L.2
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.258
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Filming images
L.2
You can transfer the images, curves, and table of the mean
curve evaluation to the virtual film sheet for filming or printing as
follows:
L.2
(1) Select the images and results explicitly and transfer them
to film sheet
Explicitly select the images and results from all four segments.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet.
(2) Transfer the two current images from the first and second
segment to the film sheet without making a selection
Select Patient > Film Evaluation or click Film Evaluation
button in the control area on the Patient card.
The images are transferred to the virtual film sheet and from
there they are sent to the camera either immediately or after a
delay depending on the setting (Auto Expose on/off).
L.2
You will find a detailed description of the film function in:
Chapter O.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.259
L.2
Postprocessing Images
L.2
0.0
L.260
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.2
L.2
L.2
N OT E
If you close the patient but not MeanCurve, all settings, e.g.
evaluation mode or scaling, are retained.
L.2
L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.261
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.262
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.3
L.3
You can use a filter to post-process images or images with visible noise. The ContextVision Filter is an adaptive filter that
searches for conspicuous structures in the image. Subsequently, the filter checks if these are either random or part of
other structures.
L.3
The ContextVision Filter takes into account the local distribution
of signal intensity and the continuity of local tissue structures.L.3
The images selected in the Patient Browser or the Viewing
task card are used for calculation.
L.3
Three predefined filters are available (Smooth, Medium,
Sharp). These allow for individual adjustments to suit your
requirements.
L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.31
Postprocessing Images
L.3
Image or series that you want to post-process with the ContextVision filter should not have been edited with another filter.
L.3
Selecting images
L.3
Use the filter on the Patient Browser or the Viewing task card
to select images for postprocessing.
L.3
Selecting via the Patient
Browser
L.3
L.3
L.3
L.3
0.0
L.32
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.3
L.3
L.3
L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.33
Postprocessing Images
L.3
L.3
0.0
L.34
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.3
For each of the three options, you may assign a filter strength
of group 1-10 or group 11-20. We recommend saving the filters
with names that indicate their strength. For example, you could
save a smooth filter as Smooth.
L.3
L.3
The filter strengths you enter are saved and will be applied
every time you select that option.
L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.35
L.3
Postprocessing Images
Filter settings 11-20 are optimized for matrix size 512. However,
you may apply it to other image sizes as well. The higher the
value, the more the signal is enhanced and the less noise is
suppressed.
L.3
Recommended: Filter strengths 11 and 12 result in good
noise suppression and low signal enhancement (e.g. for use
on the spinal column and liver). Strength 19 and 20 filters
have the lowest filter effect.
Select an option.
Enter a value in the Filtervalue spin box.
Confirm your entry with Adopt.
Change the filter strength of the other two options in the
same way.
The modified filter values are updated and displayed next to the
filter options.
L.3
The filter strengths you enter are saved and will be applied
every time you select that option.
L.3
0.0
L.36
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.3
L.3
Select the next option and reset it to the default value in the
same way.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.37
Postprocessing Images
L.3
L.3
L.3
0.0
L.38
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Selecting a result
series or image
L.3
If you have selected multiple series, you can use the selection
list next to the Result Series Description input field to check
the names and change them, if necessary.
L.3
Starting filtering
L.3
After you have selected your filters, you can start processing
images.
L.3
Click OK.
The ContextVision Parameter dialog box closes. The filtering
process runs in the background.
L.3
An icon in the status bar indicates that the filtering process is
active.
L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.39
Postprocessing Images
Monitoring filtering
L.3
You can monitor the progress of filtering in the Calculation Status dialog box. You can interrupt or cancel filtering and delete
filter jobs from the list.
L.3
The icon for the calculation status disappears after the jobs
have been processed. The result images are then available for
display.
L.3
L.3
All filtered images and series are available for viewing after the
last image has been processed.
L.3
The images are loaded onto the Viewing task card after calculation of the last image or a series.
L.3
0.0
L.310
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.3
Cause
L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.311
Remedies
L.3
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.312
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.3
L.3
Selecting images
L.3
Starting calculation
L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.313
Postprocessing Images
Click the Close button in the Organize Image Postprocessing Jobs dialog box when the image postprocessing job has
been completed.
Results
L.3
L.3
You have selected three images from series S1, four images
from series S2, and two images from series S3 for distortion
correction.
L.3
Three new result series are created: Series E1 with three
images, series E2 with four images, and series E3 with two
images.
L.3
You can recognize distortion-corrected images because of their
image type DIS2D.
Page P.210, List of image types
L.3
0.0
L.314
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.4
L.4
Parameter images
L.4
t-test images
L.4
Alpha image
L.4
Overlay image (magnitude image) created by combining a currently displayed anatomical image with a currently displayed
parameter image. This requires an identical slice position.
L.4
It is not possible to window alpha images or to use them for
additional analysis.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.41
Access authorization
to the task card
L.4
Postprocessing Images
L.4
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost.
L.4
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
L.4
0.0
L.42
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Menu bar
Segment 1 (anatomical segment)
Segment 2 (parameter image segment)
Segment 3 (alpha image segment) contains only one
image
(5) Segment 4 (currently not used)
(6) Control area
(7) Status bar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.43
Loading images
Postprocessing Images
L.4
Restrictions
L.4
0.0
L.44
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
NOTE
A message appears when an operator without access
authorization to the data currently loaded takes over.
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.45
Postprocessing Images
L.4
Selecting images/series
L.4
Transferring images
L.4
L.4
Drag and drop the required anatomical series into the image
area of the BOLD task card.
Or
L.4
0.0
L.46
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
The anatomical series will be transferred to the anatomical segment of the BOLD task card. The parameter image series will
be transferred to the parameter image segment.
L.4
If the series contains images without a clearly defined slice
plane, these images will also be loaded into the first segment
and appended to the end of the series.
If the anatomical images are not from EPI measurements,
certain restrictions apply.
Page L.424, Activating/Deactivating blocking areas.
The segments show the first image of the first series. If the conditions for an alpha image are met, the alpha image segment
will show a single alpha image.
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.47
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
Drag and drop the required anatomical series into the image
area of the BOLD task card.
Or
L.4
0.0
L.48
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
If you have selected series from another study, a dialog box will
be displayed. The dialog box gives you the choice of transferring the new series to the BOLD task card.
L.4
If yes, the series currently on the BOLD task card will be
deleted.
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.49
Postprocessing Images
L.4
You are able to transfer mosaic images to the BOLD task card
as well.
L.4
L.4
N OT E
BOLD imaging generates thousands of images. For simpler
handling and to maintain performance, there are special
sequences that create mosaic images.
L.4
A mosaic image combines the slices scanned within a TR
interval. The matrix of the mosaic is defined by the number
of slices.
L.4
The images are sorted in anatomical order starting top left
of the matrix.
Page D.37, Splitting mosaic images into single imagesL.4
0.0
L.410
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.411
Postprocessing Images
The image text of the alpha text provides the slice position and
the magnitude of the threshold value (upper low range, lower
up range) from the color scale, e.g. SP H 29.7 |t| > 4.0. This
also applies to mosaic images. In this case, the slice position of
the first mosaic image is used.
L.4
L.4
0.0
L.412
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
The BOLD task card provides options for scrolling image-byimage through the series:
L.4
Use the dog ears in the top right corner of the image segments.
Page G.32, Scrolling.
Or
L.4
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.413
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.414
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.415
Postprocessing Images
Processing images
L.4
The BOLD task card lets you edit images and change image
display. A number of functions is available, depending on the
type of image.
L.4
Image type
Editing/display change
Anatomical image
Windowing images
Parameter image
Deactivating interpolation
Editing a color scale
Alpha image
L.4
L.4
0.0
L.416
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
The pixels of images from EPI scans are clearly visible due to
the small image matrix used. To improve image impression,
these images are interpolated by default with a bicubic algorithm.
L.4
This interpolation can be deactivated if necessary.
L.4
Scroll to the image you require in the image segment for the
parameter images.
Deactivate the function View > Interpolation On in the main
menu.
Both the alpha image and the parameter image are displayed
without the bicubic algorithm. The pixels are clearly visible. L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.417
Postprocessing Images
L.4
The pixels of the parameter images contain functional information only. A value of the color scale is assigned to each pixel. L.4
You may change the color display of the parameter and alpha
images.
L.4
0.0
L.418
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
If the parameter image has positive values only, the lower color
palette is not required for display. You can therefore deselect
this color palette.
L.4
Select the none setting from the Lower Palette selection list.
The lower color scale is hidden.
L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Upper Palette selection list.
The color display of the parameter and alpha image is adjusted
to the new color scale. Only positive correlates (0 to 40.95) will
be taken into account.
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.419
L.4
Postprocessing Images
L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Lower Palette selection list.
The color display of the parameter and alpha image is adjusted
to the new color scale. Only negative values (40.95 to 0) will
be taken into account.
L.4
L.4
TIP
If you want to expose alpha images and have a black-andwhite printer, select Grayscale as the color scale (blackand-white scale).
L.4
To rule out possible ambiguities in grayscale values,
window the grayscales values in the anatomical segment.L.4
0.0
L.420
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
You may define the range of the color scale for displaying
parameter images.
L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Lower Palette and/or
Upper Palette selection list.
Enter the new values in the Lower Range and/or Upper
Range spin boxes.
Or
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.421
L.4
Postprocessing Images
Threshold
If you are only using one color scale, you may exclude a range
either ascending (for positive correlates) or descending (for
negative correlates).
L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Lower Palette and/or
Upper Palette selection list.
L.4
0.0
L.422
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Or
L.4
L.4
Either
Or
L.4
L.4
You can define the threshold value for pixel intensity in the anatomical image. As a result, you are able to hide alpha image pixels below a certain threshold. The default threshold is 0.10. This
corresponds to 10% of the mean value of all pixels in the anatomical image.
L.4
Enter the desired threshold value in the Anatomical
Threshold spin-box.
The alpha image is recalculated and shown in the bottom left
image segment.
L.4
The setting is retained when scrolling from image to image.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.423
Postprocessing Images
L.4
0.0
L.424
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Deactivating blocking
areas
L.4
Activating blocking
areas
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.425
Postprocessing Images
L.4
The alpha value defines the degree of overlay, i.e. the weighting
used to overlay the anatomical image with the parameter
image. The higher the alpha value, the greater the number of
brightness values taken from the parameter image. At an alpha
value of zero, the alpha image will only show the anatomical
image.
L.4
The default value is 1.00.
L.4
L.4
0.0
L.426
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.427
Postprocessing Images
Saving images
L.4
You can save new or changed images on the BOLD task card.
The following images may be stored:
L.4
whenever their slice positions match, all alpha images of the
anatomical and parameter images are loaded
current parameter image with associated color palette
current alpha image as a color image
The above save options let you decide whether to append the
saved images to an existing series or to save them as a new
series.
L.4
L.4
You can have all alpha images of the loaded anatomical images
and parameter images calculated and saved with or without a
superimposed field map.
L.4
Opening the save
dialog box
Select Patient > Save All Alpha As... from the main menu.
L.4
Or
L.4
0.0
L.428
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
When you select saving, the number of alpha images is determined that have to be calculated. If the number is greater than
30, you will be asked whether you want to continue saving. If
necessary, you can cancel saving the alpha images by clicking the No button. Saving is continued by clicking on the Yes
button.
The Save As dialog box opens.
L.4
The save dialog lets you define how the calculated alpha
images will be saved:
L.4
You can save the images as a new series.
You can append the images to an existing series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.429
L.4
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.430
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
NOTE
If an operator without access authorization to the program
or the loaded data takes over during saving the data will be
hidden on the task card.
L.4
Saving is completed in the background. All data are then
unloaded from the task card and the task card is closed. L.4
L.4
Appending images to an
existing series
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.431
Postprocessing Images
L.4
You can save both a selected parameter image with the associated color palette and a selected alpha image.
L.4
Select the required parameter image or alpha image in the
2nd or 3rd image segment.
Select Patient > Save As... from the main menu.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
L.4
The saving dialog lets you set whether the image will be
appended to an existing series or saved as a new series.
L.4
0.0
L.432
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.433
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
L.4
The series must meet the following criteria before they can be
post-processed:
L.4
same study
same slice position
same table position
same number of images
0.0
L.434
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
(1)
(2)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.435
Postprocessing Images
The selected series are checked to see whether they fulfill the
above criteria.
Page L.434, Suitable series.
L.4
The Evaluation Controller Dialog will indicate if they do not
meet the criteria. Unsuitable series will be highlighted in color
and have to be removed from the list.
L.4
0.0
L.436
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Deleting additional
series
L.4
Selecting another
postprocessing
protocol
L.4
L.4
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.437
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
The first image is transferred to the BOLD task card. The Evaluation Controller Dialog box will be closed. The calculation
runs in background.
L.4
The icon for image postprocessing jobs in the status bar shows
you the calculation in progress.
L.4
After calculation has been successfully completed, the calculated parameter images are displayed as mosaic images in the
parameter image segment of the BOLD task card.
L.4
Additionally, the alpha image is calculated and displayed. Calculation is identified as "completed" in the Postprocessing
Queue dialog box.
L.4
Unsuccessful calculations are identified as "failed" in the Postprocessing Queue dialog box.
L.4
0.0
L.438
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Tracking postprocessing
L.4
L.4
You can stop the calculation of individual series if they are identified with the "active" status.
L.4
Select a calculation.
Click the Delete Job button.
Calculation will be stopped and deleted from the job list. No
images will be calculated.
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.439
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
3D motion correction
L.4
t-test
L.4
N OT E
Only experienced users should edit the postprocessing
protocol.
L.4
The postprocessing protocol itself contains instructions on
how to edit.
L.4
0.0
L.440
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Starting the
protocol editor
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.441
Postprocessing Images
L.4
L.4
0.0
L.442
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Closing BOLD
L.4
L.4
L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.443
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.444
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.5
L.5
The Perfusion evaluation function allows the display and evaluation of perfusion-weighted images, for example, for tumor
diagnosis.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.51
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
You can open the Perf MR task card from any other task card
or from the Patient Browser.
L.5
Select Applications > Perfusion (MR) from a task card or
Applications > Perfusion (MR) from the Patient Browser.
The Perf MR task card opens.
L.5
L.5
L.5
L.5
0.0
L.52
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Menu bar
Base image segment
Viewing area
Parameter map segment (TTP and relMTT)
Control area
Status bar
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.53
Postprocessing Images
Loading images
L.5
You will select images and series in the Patient Browser that
you want to display or evaluate on the Perf MR task card.
L.5
You can choose single images as well as a series or complete
studies.
L.5
It is not possible to load images of different studies onto the Perf
MR task card.
L.5
L.5
N OT E
Perfusion analysis requires that the user have full access
rights to the patient data to be evaluated.
L.5
Please refer to the information in,
Part B, Security Package
L.5
0.0
L.54
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
The analysis is typically performed using time-series of T2*weighted or T2-weighted single-shot echo-planar images. This
base image series may contain several hundred images
acquired in quick succession to provide a dynamic display (1
scan every 1 to 2 seconds over 1 to 2 minutes).
L.5
Requirements
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.55
Postprocessing Images
L.5
Drag and drop the required series into the processing area
of the Perf MR task card.
Or
L.5
The images are transferred to the Perf MR task card and automatically sorted into the segments of the processing area. L.5
Top left segment (base image segment)
anatomical images
Bottom left segment (parameter image segment)
TTP images and relMTT images
If you have already loaded these images into the viewing
area, a dialog box will let you decide whether to move these
images into the processing area.
0.0
L.56
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
For example, you are able to load the diffusion images of the
study in the top right segment to view and compare the anatomy being evaluated.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.57
Postprocessing Images
Viewing images
L.5
L.5
The image sort that applies in the Patient Browser does not
apply on the Perf MR task card.
L.5
On the Perf MR task card, images in the basic image segment
are sorted differently than in the other three segments.
L.5
0.0
L.58
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
L.5
L.5
L.5
Series number
Image number
Time of image generation for image copies
The following applies to series-by-series scrolling:
L.5
Image number
Series number
Time of image generation for image copies
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.59
L.5
Postprocessing Images
You can load additional images onto the Perf MR task card
even though it already contains images.
L.5
These images are correctly sorted in the segments by image
type, subsequently series, and image number.
L.5
L.5
L.5
Scrolling image by image allows you to look for the slice position
that provides the best view of the anatomy to be evaluated. L.5
Use the dog ears in the top right corner of the image segments.
Page G.32, Scrolling.
Or
L.5
L.5
0.0
L.510
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Scrolling series
by series
L.5
The image with the "best" slice position is in foreground. Scrolling series by series always shows the image with this slice position.
L.5
Scrolling series by series allows you to look for the scan time
with maximum vessel contrast in the bolus (vessel dark).
L.5
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.511
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
0.0
L.512
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
You determine the arterial input function (AIF) and set the time
ranges for evaluation.
L.5
You start the post-processing protocol.
L.5
You can assign suitable color coding to the calculated parameter images and optimize the window values.
L.5
Experienced users can edit the post-processing protocols.
L.5
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.513
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
Arterial Input
Function (AIF)
L.5
The AIF is calculated from the time curve of the CA concentration. The measurement method used is the same as for the CA
concentration in tissue. The AIF is measured simultaneously
with the tissue concentration. It is calculated either in the same
slice as the CA concentration in the tissue or in a certain slice
of the block if two or more slices are used. This slice should contain sufficiently large vessels to prevent partial volume effects.L.5
Calculation of the relMTT involves deconvolution with the signal
time curve selected for the AIF. Reduced SNR of the basic
images will adversely affect the process maps and the AIF.
L.5
L.5
R E C O M M E N DAT I O N
Please do not use the relMTT images for diagnosis, basic
images are too low and/or head movements of the patient
are clearly visible.
L.5
0.0
L.514
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
You determine the mean AIF curve from the individual AIF
curves within an ROI (region of interest).
L.5
Look for a suitable basic image for positioning the AIF-ROI in
the top left segment.
Page L.510, Scrolling images and series
Click the Define AIF button in the control area.
Or
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.515
Postprocessing Images
Intensity
The AIF curves represent the change over time in the signal
intensity for each pixel in the AIF ROI. All AIF curves have the
same scaling and are therefore comparable.
Time
L.5
0.0
L.516
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
N OT E
Only personnel trained in perfusion diagnostics should
position the AIF-ROI and select suitable AIF curves to
calculate the mean AIF.
L.5
L.5
L.5
Left-click the AIF ROI and drag it to its new position in the
basic image.
The associated AIF curves are displayed in the viewing area
when you release the mouse button.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.517
L.5
Postprocessing Images
L.5
AIF curves with a very low signal minimum may have a distorted
shape if the SNR of the associated pixel in the basic image is
too low. Do not use such AIF curves for evaluation.
L.5
The selection of AIF curves is retained until you move the AIF
ROI to another point in the basic image or until you select an
image outside the time series displayed.
0.0
L.518
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
The mean AIF is enlarged. The Global Bolus Plot (GBP) is also
displayed.
L.5
You define the time range to be used for perfusion analysis. The
image range corresponds to the basic images to be used.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.519
Postprocessing Images
Left-click on the right line and drag it to the end of the first
pass.
Left-click on the center line and drag it to the end of the base
line.
Left-click on the left line and drag it to the beginning of the
base line.
Observe the GBP curve. The bolus arrives in the tissue later
than in the vessel. Do not define the end of the first pass to
far left. The bolus in the tissue could be cut off.
Select the Confirm Time Ranges check box to confirm the
time range.
The Run protocol button in the lower control area is activated.
You are now ready to start the post-processing protocol.
L.5
0.0
L.520
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Starting calculation
L.5
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.521
(1)
Postprocessing Images
(2)
0.0
L.522
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Tracking post-processing
L.5
L.5
You can stop the calculation of individual series if they are identified with the "active" status.
L.5
Select a job.
Click the Delete Job button.
Calculation will be stopped and deleted from the job list. No
images will be calculated.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.523
Postprocessing Images
L.5
0.0
L.524
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Windowing color
parameter images
L.5
TIP
If optimal windowing is a problem in color parameter
images:
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.525
Postprocessing Images
L.5
0.0
L.526
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
The selected images are stored with the color palette in a new
series or appended to an existing series.
Page G.72, Saving images
L.5
Enter a unique name for the new series.
L.5
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost.
L.5
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.527
Postprocessing Images
0.0
L.528
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Filming results
L.5
You may copy images to the film sheet, define film layouts, start
filming, and organize film jobs on the Perf MR task card.
Part O, Filming
L.5
Select the images you would like to transfer to the film sheet.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.529
Postprocessing Images
L.5
N OT E
Only experienced users should edit the
post-processing protocol.
L.5
0.0
L.530
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.531
L.5
Postprocessing Images
L.5
L.5
0.0
L.532
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.6
Soft Tissue
Evaluation MR
L.6
The Soft Tissue Evaluation (MR) dialog box provides the following options:
L.6
You can calculate new result images by combining loaded
images. This allows you to generate parameter images or
combined images.
You can edit the protocol parameters to suit your needs and
save them in the protocols used to calculate the parameter
images and combined images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.61
Postprocessing Images
Introduction
L.6
Definitions
L.6
0.0
L.62
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Access authorization to
the evaluation dialog box
L.6
L.6
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost.
L.6
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.63
Postprocessing Images
L.6
Call the Soft Tissue Evaluation (MR) dialog box from the
Patient Browser.
L.6
The dialog box will open only if at least one series containing
anatomical images and/or parameter images is selected in
the Patient Browser.
Procedure for selecting the evaluation dialog box:
L.6
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.64
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Selecting data
L.6
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.65
L.6
Postprocessing Images
Image type
Anatomical images
Parameter images
NOTE
Only series containing magnitude images are taken into
account in anatomical series. Other series (e.g. other
modalities or compressed images) are automatically
filtered out when the dialog box starts.
L.6
They are not displayed in the list of anatomical series of the
Calculate Parameter Map subtask card. A message
indicates this when the dialog box starts.
L.6
0.0
L.66
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
Because only one image type can be calculated in the evaluation dialog box, you have to decide which evaluation you want
to give priority to. Load the images with the Anatomical or
Parameter Map buttons.
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.67
Postprocessing Images
L.6
The layout of the two subtask cards is identical in the Soft Tissue Evaluation (MR) dialog box. Example: Calculate Parameter Map subtask card.
L.6
0.0
L.68
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.69
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.610
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.611
Postprocessing Images
You can use the preselected images for calculation. You also
have the following options:
L.6
You can deselect single series out of a preselection if you do
not want to include them in the calculation.
You can select completely new series. These have to have
the same number of usable images.
L.6
Hold the Ctrl key down and unselect series you do not
require by clicking them.
The series no longer needed are shown marked in the list of
series.
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.612
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.613
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.614
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Wash - In
L.6
Parameters
Explanation
Color table
First measurement
Last measurement
Highest value
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.615
Wash - Out
L.6
Postprocessing Images
In the Wash - Out setting area, you can change the parameters
for signal change in the end range of the dynamic measurement
series.
L.6
L.6
Parameters
Explanation
Color table
L.6
In the TTP, PEI, and MIP - time setting areas, you can assign
color tables to the appropriate TTP, PEI, or MIP images.
L.6
Set a color table in the above setting areas using the corresponding combo box.
0.0
L.616
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
Siemens protocols:
Changes may only be saved as new customer protocols.
Customer protocols:
Changes may be saved in the current protocol. The previous
settings are overwritten. You may also save the changes in
new customer protocols.
L.6
NOTE
If you do not save the data before a change in operators, a
message indicating that data have not been saved will
appear if the new user does not have the required read
rights. You may then decide whether to continue or cancel
the action.
L.6
Caution: If you go through with the action, the evaluation
dialog box will close and all settings made so far will be
lost.
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.617
Postprocessing Images
L.6
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost.
L.6
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
L.6
L.6
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.618
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
Enter a name in the text input field or overwrite the suggested name.
Click the Save button.
The postprocessing protocol is stored as a new customer protocol.
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.619
Overwriting an existing
customer protocol
L.6
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
NOTE
If you do not want to start calculation with the set protocol
parameters, you can close the dialog box with Cancel. L.6
0.0
L.620
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.621
Postprocessing Images
Performing a calculation
L.6
After you have made all the necessary settings on the Calculate Parameter Map subtask card, you may start with the calculation.
L.6
Click the Evaluate button.
With the Cancel button, you can reject the changes made in
the dialog box and close the dialog box.
Calculation starts and the evaluation dialog box closes. The status of postprocessing is indicated on the status bar.
L.6
If protocol data are still unsaved when you start calculation, a
query asks if you want to save these data before the dialog
box closes.
L.6
TIP
While image calculation is in progress, you may define and
start further calculations. This requires selection in the
Patient Browser again. The individual calculations are
processed sequentially.
L.6
0.0
L.622
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
After completing the calculations, the result images are automatically stored in the database and loaded onto the Viewing
task card.
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.623
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
L.6
NOTE
Combinations are based on Wash - In, Wash - Out, TTP,
MIP, and PEI parameter images only.
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.624
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.625
Postprocessing Images
L.6
Hold the Ctrl key down and unselect series you do not
require by clicking them.
The series no longer needed are shown marked in the list of
series.
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.626
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.627
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
L.6
Add Wash-In
Add Wash-Out
Add TTP
Add PEI
Add MIP
0.0
L.628
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
NOTE
You may only change main parameters whose image series
is marked in the list of series.
L.6
Example: If no TTP image series is selected in the list, the
main parameter Add TTP is not shown on the parameter
card and settings are not possible.
L.6
For each main parameter you can set the following single
parameters separately:
L.6
L.6
Parameters
Weight
Center
Window
L.6
Click with the left mouse button on the arrows of the spin box
to increase the value (up-arrow) or decrease the value
(down-arrow).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.629
L.6
Postprocessing Images
The lower part of the setting area contains the Combine color
table selection list. This selection list is used to select the color
table to assign to the combined image.
L.6
Select the color table.
0.0
L.630
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
Siemens protocols:
Changes may only be saved as new customer protocols.
Customer protocols:
Changes may be saved in the current protocol. The previous
settings are overwritten. You may also save the changes in
new customer protocols.
L.6
NOTE
If you do not save the data before a change in operators, a
message indicating that data have not been saved will
appear if the new user does not have the required read
rights. You may then decide whether to continue or cancel
the action.
L.6
Caution: If you go through with the action, the evaluation
dialog box will close and all settings made so far will be
lost.
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.631
Postprocessing Images
L.6
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost.
L.6
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
L.6
L.6
0.0
L.632
Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images
L.6
L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
L.633
Postprocessing Images
Performing a calculation
L.6
After you have made all the necessary settings on the Calculate Combined Image subtask card, you may start with the calculation.
L.6
Click the Evaluate button.
With the Cancel button, you can reject the changes made in
the dialog box and close the dialog box.
Calculation starts and the evaluation dialog box closes. The status of postprocessing is indicated on the status bar.
L.6
If protocol data are still unsaved when you start calculation, a
query asks if you want to save these data before the dialog
box closes.
L.6
TIP
While image calculation is in progress, you may define and
start further calculations. This requires selection in the
Patient Browser again. The individual calculations are
processed sequentially.
L.6
0.0
L.634
Operator Manual
PART
Vessel View
M.0
M.1 Introduction
Calling Vessel View ....................................................... M.13
Vessel View task card .................................................... M.14
Volume image segment ............................................. M.15
Slice image segments ............................................... M.17
Control area ............................................................... M.18
Evaluation area .......................................................... M.19
Context menu .......................................................... M.110
Closing Vessel View .................................................... M.112
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M1
Contents
Vessel View
0.0
M2
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M3
Contents
Vessel View
0.0
M4
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
M.1
Introduction
M.1
M.1
After you have started Vessel View and loaded the images,
select a suitable VRT parameter set to display the 3D volume
image. Subsequently obtain a general view of the data set using
either the freely rotatable volume image or three orthogonal
slice images views.
M.1
You can remove unwanted parts of the image from the volume
display by cutting out a Volume of Interest (VOI) and using clip
planes.
M.1
You can determine the centerline (path) of blood vessels to
accurately define them. Subsequently, you may use the Vessel
Navigator to prepare and analyze a longitudinal section through
the blood vessel. Evaluation of the stenoses is supported by the
vessel navigator through the use of special flags. You can generate a series of axial vessel section images to document a vessel or vessel segment and store them in the database.
M.1
For distance measurements (e.g. diameter), area measurements (e.g. cross-sections) or angle measurements, the Vessel
View functions provide you with the most suitable images. M.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.11
Introduction
Vessel View
You can store the relevant images from your evaluation in the
database and send them to the Filming, Viewing, or Exam
task cards for further processing (e.g., graphic slice positioning). You can store automatic rotation of the volume or vessel
navigator view as a sequence of images. Vessel View also lets
you record sequences of actions in the volume segment. For
image documentation, the report generator prepares a table
of all objects created.
M.1
0.0
M.12
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Introduction
M.1
The Vessel View task card is started from one of the task cards
or from the Patient Browser.
M.1
Select Applications > Vessel View from the main menu.
The Vessel View task card will be displayed. At this point, no
images are loaded.
M.1
Sometimes it may not be possible to use Vessel View while
another task card is open. You are asked if you want to close
the other application.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.13
Introduction
Vessel View
M.1
The Vessel View task card is divided into the following areas:M.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Menu bar
Slice image segments
Volume image segment
Control area
Evaluation area
Status bar
0.0
M.14
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Introduction
M.1
The volume image segment shows the data in VRT or MIP display.
M.1
VRT display
M.1
MIP display
M.1
M.1
You may swap the volume image segment with one of the
slice image segments, as required.
Page M.212, Enlarging the window
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.15
Introduction
Orientation aids
Vessel View
M.1
In the volume image segment, you are able to move through the
volume as well as orient it, as desired. To this end, use one of
the following orientation aids:
M.1
(1) Bounding box: Edges of the loaded volume data set. You
can use the Configure menu to show and hide the delimitation (bounding box).
(2) Focus pointer: Marks the object or position last selected
in the volume. You can use the Configure menu to set the
size of the marking arrow.
(3) Orientation cube: Shows the current orientation of the volume data set and allows for rotation about the standard
axes.
0.0
M.16
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Introduction
M.1
The three slice image segments to the left in the task card show
slice images in the MPR display. As an alternative, you may
switch the display to MIP, MIP thin slice, and MPR thick slice. In
the standard orientation, you will find the sagittal view in the
upper segment, the coronal view in the center segment, and the
axial view in the lower segment.
M.1
As an alternative, you may want to temporarily display a magnified slice image segment instead of the volume image segment.
Page M.212, Enlarging the window
Orientation aids
M.1
The slice image segments provide the following tools for positioning and orientation in the volume:
M.1
(1) Reference lines: Show the position and the viewing direction of the other two slice images.
(2) Orientation cube: Shows the current orientation of the
slice in the volume. (It is not possible to change the orientation with this orientation cube).
You can hide the reference lines by clicking a button if it is in
the way during evaluation.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.17
Introduction
Vessel View
Control area
M.1
The control area to the right in the task card contains the input
fields for selecting functions:
M.1
(1) General functions: Rotating images, undoing all steps performed, vessel orthogonal orientation, showing/hiding the
reference lines, zooming/panning images, segment
enlargement.
(2) Subtask card stack for setting the display mode (Type), orientation (Orientation), and view (Image) in the image segments.
(3) Subtask card stack for defining a volume of interest (VOI),
for using clip planes (Clip), and for replaying image
sequences and recording sequences of actions (Movie).
(4) Documentation functions for storing evaluation results, for
generating axial vessel section images and reports, and for
transferring images to the Filming (virtual film sheet) and
Viewing task cards.
0.0
M.18
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Introduction
Evaluation area
M.1
The lower part of the task card contains two subtask cards with
tools for defining and evaluating vessels.
M.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.19
Introduction
Vessel View
Context menu
M.1
The pop-up menu of Vessel View for the active segment is displayed when you right-click into an image segment. Depending
on the situation, the following menu items may be available:
M.1
Edit Path
Switches path edit mode on or off if a vessel path is selected.
Page M.318, Changing the course of a path
Zoom/Pan
Switches zoom/pan mode on or off.
Page M.218, Zooming and panning images
MIP Mode
Switches the MIP mode on/off for the volume image.
Page M.28, Switching to MIP display
Translucent
Starts transparent display of the vessels defined in the volume image.
Page M.317, Processing paths
0.0
M.110
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Introduction
Accept Contour
Accepts a contour suggestion in the lower slice image segment for area measurement.
This menu item is inactive if the slice image does not contain
a contour.
Page M.427, Measuring vessel cross-section
Edit Contour
Switches contour edit mode in the lower slice images segment on or off.
This menu item is inactive if the slice image does not contain
a contour.
Page M.413, Post-processing a contour
Freehand ROI
Switches draw mode in the lower slice images segment on
or off.
Page M.412, Draw contour
Send to GSP
Sends the image coordinates for graphic slice positioning.
Page M.58, Sending image data for graphic slice positioning (GSP)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.111
Introduction
Vessel View
M.1
If you do not close individual applications but log off the system
(e.g. with the Options > End Session menu item), please note
the following.
M.1
M.1
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost permanently.
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
M.1
0.0
M.112
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
M.2
M.2
First load the required volume data set from the Patient
Browser to Vessel View.
M.2
You can optimize the views by setting individual windowing values. For 3D display with Volume Rendering Technique (VRT),
Vessel View provides a number of predefined parameter sets
for selection.
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.21
Vessel View
Loading images
M.2
M.2
Drag and drop this selection into the Vessel View window.
Or
M.2
Click the Vessel View button on the tool bar of the Patient
Browser.
Or
M.2
Select Patient > Vessel View on the menu bar of the Patient
Browser.
If Vessel View is not open, the application will start automatically when you load the images.
M.2
0.0
M.22
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Requirements
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.23
Vessel View
Volume display
M.2
If you have loaded images onto the Vessel View task card, the
complete data set is initially shown as a 3D volume image in the
VRT display.
M.2
You can modify this view as required by assigning different VRT
parameter sets, or by switching to MIP display.
M.2
M.2
M.2
0.0
M.24
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.25
M.2
Vessel View
Adjust the transparency, brightness, color, and signal intensity value of each tissue class.
0.0
M.26
Operator Manual
Vessel View
You may change the position and inclination of the left edge
of the marked trapezoid by moving the mouse pointer in the
VRT volume image. For this purpose hold down the center
mouse button and move it up/down and/or to the left or right.
Page M.219, Windowing images
Save your changes as a new parameter set or overwrite the
current parameter set.
To delete a parameter set from the VRT gallery, select it from
the Preset list and click the Delete Preset button.
M.2
N OT E
Do not delete or overwrite the parameter sets until they are
no longer required for other images or series. Remember
that the VRT gallery is also used for the 3D task card. M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.27
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
M.2
Click the MIP button on the Type subtask card of the control
area
The current settings of the VRT view will be saved and available
when you return to the VRT mode.
M.2
M.2
M.2
Click the VRT button on the Type subtask card of the control
area
You are returning to VRT display. The saved settings of the VRT
view will be restored.
M.2
0.0
M.28
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
Automatic rotation
M.2
Grab the volume image with the mouse and drag it to the
desired location.
Automatic rotation continuously rotates the volume about its
vertical axis at a set rate.
M.2
Display the Movie subtask card in the control area.
Click this button to start automatic rotation.
M.2
You can export the image sequence of a 360 rotation by creating a movie file.
Page M.511, Saving rotation of the view as a movie
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.29
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
You can also use the orientation cube to rotate an image into
the front view with the original size.
M.2
Double-click in the orientation cube.
0.0
M.210
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Slice images
M.2
As a rule you can use the MPR display in the slice segments of
Vessel View. Depending on your requirements, you can switch
to another display: MPR thick slice, MIP, or MIP thin slice.
M.2
You can optimize the views in the slice images segments for
your evaluation using the functions in the control area.
M.2
M.2
You can set the display mode segment by segment on the Type
subtask card in the control area.
M.2
Select the respective slice image segment.
Select Type > MPR Thick from the main menu or click on
the button in the control area to switch to MPR Thick display.
Or
M.2
Select Type > MIP from the main menu or click the button in
the control area to switch to MIP display.
Or
M.2
Select Type > MIP Thin from the main menu or click the button in the control area to switch to MIP Thin display.
The slice image in the selected segment is recalculated.
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.211
Slice thickness
M.2
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
0.0
M.212
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
Only MPR, MPR Thick, and MIP Thin image stacks allow you to
scroll with the dog ears.
M.2
Click on the dog ear in the image stack to scroll back image
by image.
Or
M.2
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.213
M.2
Vessel View
Moving a plane of
intersection
M.2
M.2
0.0
M.214
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
You can rotate or tilt the image planes away from the standard
orientations.
M.2
Rotating and tilting slice image planes is not possible in vessel orthogonal orientation.
Page M.42, Setting vessel orthogonal orientation
Checking the preferred
orientation
M.2
You can ensure that the preferred orientation does not change
when you tilt and rotate the slice image planes.
Page H.325, Controlling image orientation
M.2
Click the Preferred orientation button on the Orientation
subtask card to activate the orientation check.
You can deactivate orientation control at any time.
Tilting
M.2
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.215
Rotating
M.2
Vessel View
M.2
0.0
M.216
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
You may return all three slice image planes to standard orientations (sagittal, coronal, axial) via the mouse; you may also
return the images to standard orientation one at a time.
M.2
Returning to standard
orientation
M.2
M.2
M.2
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.217
Vessel View
M.2
For improved detail recognition, zoom images and pan the area
of interest into the center of the segment.
M.2
Select Image > Zoom/Pan from the main menu or Zoom/
Pan from the pop-up menu.
Or
M.2
Enlarging an image
M.2
Panning an image
M.2
0.0
M.218
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Windowing images
M.2
Prior to starting the evaluation, you can change the window values of MPR and MIP images to an optimal display of the structures.
M.2
Single windowing
M.2
M.2
M.2
Automatic windowing
M.2
You can call up window values stored for images with a button.M.2
Click the Window 1 or Window 2 button on the Image subtask card of the control area.
The image is displayed with the selected window setting.
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.219
M.2
Vessel View
Click the image with the center mouse button and hold the
button down.
The mouse pointer disappears.
M.2
M.2
Drag the mouse pointer to the right or left to change the contrast (window width).
When you move the mouse pointer up/down or right/left in the
VRT volume image while holding the center mouse button
down, you are changing the individual parameters of the VRT
settings.
Page M.25, Edit the parameter set
Windowing using the
keyboard
M.2
You can also use the keys on your keyboard to fine-tune the
window values.
M.2
To change window values, select the respective image segment.
Press the Pos+ or Pos- keys to increase or reduce the
brightness.
0.0
M.220
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
M.2
Activate/deactivate image
elements
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.221
Vessel View
Volume limits
If the Show Bounding Box mode is activated, the red
boundary lines are visible in the VRT volume image.
Slice images in the VRT volume images
If Show MPR in VRT mode is activated, the three MPR slice
images will be displayed at the appropriate positions in the
VRT volume image.
Flat ribbon MPR
If Show Ribbons in VRT is activated, a flat ribbon MPR is
displayed for each path in the VRT volume image.
Image text
If Show Image Text mode is activated, any existing image
texts will be displayed in the image segments.
Profile curve
If Show Profile Curve mode is activated, the profile curve is
shown in the axial slice image when working with the vessel
navigator. For a detailed description of the profile curve, see
Page M.422, Profile curve
To show or hide one of the image elements, select or unselect the appropriate option from the Configure menu.
0.0
M.222
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
M.2
For area measurement, the object list displays not only the
cross-sectional area but also the minimum and maximum diameter, the equivalent diameter, and the average intensity. Additionally, the degree of stenosis is shown together with the relevant diameter ratio.
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.223
Defining a stenosis
curve
M.2
Vessel View
Select the Vessel Navigator Curves option from the Configure menu and the required setting from the submenu.
Or
M.2
M.2
0.0
M.224
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.2
You can save the current status of the image series you have
been working on (including the objects and VRT settings made
so far) in the database and restore it later.
M.2
M.2
M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.225
M.2
Vessel View
M.2
Restoring a session
M.2
M.2
Select the session you want to restore from the list and click
Load.
Vessel View returns to the status when the session was
saved.
M.2
Session data are restored only by loading the corresponding
image series.
Deleting a session
M.2
You can delete sessions you no longer need from the series in
the Patient Browser.
M.2
0.0
M.226
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
M.3
Defining Vessels
M.3
After loading an image series, the complete data set will be displayed. You have a choice of evaluating certain areas of interest
only.
M.3
Vessel View provides tools that allow you to either remove
unwanted parts or enhance vessels. The resulting image information provides for efficient and reliable diagnosis.
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.31
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
Defining a VOI
M.3
You can remove three-dimensional areas from the loaded volume using the VOI cutting tools on the VOI subtask card. The
shape of the volume is freely-selectable.
M.3
The MIP mode is especially suitable for defining VOIs.
0.0
M.32
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
VOI contour
M.3
You begin by drawing the shape of the VOI in the volume image.
The base shape will be punched through the volume in the
viewing direction when you complete the VOI.
M.3
It is not possible to draw a VOI contour in the slice image segments.
Orient the volume image for easiest tracing.
Click the Draw contour button to activate the Draw mode.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.33
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
Hold down the mouse button and draw the boundaries of the
desired volume.
Double-click to complete the contour.
M.3
Click the Include button to remove all voxels outside the contour.
Or
M.3
Click the Exclude button to remove all voxels inside the contour.
The VOI is cut out and draw mode deactivated.
M.3
0.0
M.34
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
M.3
Six clip planes can be used to delimit the sides of the displayed
volume. You can use the clip planes by moving them between
the areas for evaluation and the hidden areas. Volume outside
the clip planes will be hidden. The interior, however, will be visible.
M.3
Clip planes are only active in the volume image.
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.35
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
0.0
M.36
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Panning
Defining Vessels
M.3
To hide unwanted outer parts of the volume, just move the clip
plane into the volume.
M.3
Click in the required clip plane in the volume image and hold
the mouse button down.
To move the selected plane upward or farther away, drag the
mouse pointer up.
Or
M.3
M.3
You can use the four edge points to tilt a clip plane about its center.
M.3
Drag the edge point selected to tilt the plane in the desired
direction.
You can tilt all visible clip planes as a group by moving the
mouse while holding the Ctrl key down.
Rotating
M.3
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.37
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
N OT E
All clip planes are still active. The effect of clip planes on the
volume image depends on their position only, not on
whether they are visible or not.
M.3
M.3
Resetting
M.3
0.0
M.38
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
Creating paths
M.3
Lines, known as paths, trace the blood vessels for display and
evaluation.
M.3
Paths can be created in different ways:
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.39
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
M.3
Click on the arrow of the first button and select the Semi
Auto Segmentation item from the menu that opens.
The dialog box for controlling semiautomatic path creation
opens.
M.3
0.0
M.310
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Landmarks Setting
Defining Vessels
M.3
M.3
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.311
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
Fader
M.3
0.0
M.312
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Repeated segmentation
Defining Vessels
M.3
You can use semiautomatic path creation on a previously segmented data set. In this case, the volume defined by the latest
segmentation is added to the volume parts already defined. All
volume parts hidden by vessel segmentation are temporarily reshown while you set the landmarks.
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.313
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
Fully automatic path creation defines the entire vessel tree. The
automatic segmentation algorithm can only be applied to MR
Data Sets.
M.3
Limit the volume to be evaluated to one VOI to increase the
efficiency of fully automatic segmentation.
Display the Measurements subtask card in the evaluation
area.
Click the Automatic Segmentation button.
Or, if another tool is in the first position:
M.3
Click on the arrow of the first button and select the Automatic Segmentation item from the menu that then opens.
Segmentation will run completely automatically. Paths are created along the vessel tree and tissue that is not part of the vessel tree is hidden.
M.3
After segmentation, the transparency is set to 85% (translucent
mode) in the VRT settings to make the paths more visible in the
volume image.
For how to activate and deactivate this mode manually, see
Page M.317, Translucent.
M.3
0.0
M.314
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
M.3
For manual path creation, you need to set all path points by
hand. How well the path represents the actual course of the
blood vessel depends on the number as well as accuracy used
in positioning the path points.
M.3
Manual path creation is not connected with a segmentation
algorithm. No volume parts are hidden.
Display the Measurements subtask card in the evaluation
area.
Click the Manual Path Creation button.
Or, if another tool is in the first position:
M.3
Click on the arrow of the first button and select the Manual
Path Creation item from the menu that then opens.
The dialog box for controlling manual path creation opens.
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.315
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
You can use all image segments for setting path points.
M.3
Set your path points at the beginning of the vessel and wherever the vessel changes course.
The path line will be drawn in immediately. Based on the characteristics of the tissue, the program automatically calculates
the depth of a point set in the volume.
M.3
To complete path creation, click on the Apply button.
Create a tube-shaped VOI to expose the vessel with the path.
Page M.322, Defining vessels
Switch to translucent mode to make the path more visible in
the volume image.
Page M.317, Translucent
Managing paths
M.3
0.0
M.316
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
Processing paths
M.3
Translucent
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.317
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
Activate the editing mode when you want the course of a path.
You can change the position of the path by moving, inserting, or
removing path points.
M.3
M.3
M.3
Select the Edit path option from the pop-up menu for the
selected path.
The path points are now visible.
M.3
0.0
M.318
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
M.3
M.3
Adding path points increases the number of changes in direction. This allows you to adapt the path even more precisely to
the vessel curvature.
M.3
Set a new path point at the appropriate position in the image
with a mouse click.
The path line opens between the two closest points and is
recalculated accordingly.
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.319
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
M.3
Click directly on the path point in the volume image and drag
it to the desired position using the mouse.
Or
M.3
M.3
Hold the mouse button down and drag the point to the new
position.
The path line will be adjusted automatically.
M.3
M.3
0.0
M.320
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
Connecting paths
M.3
You first have to link the paths before you can evaluate a vessel
comprising different paths. The result is a new continuous path
that does not affect the original paths.
M.3
Using the new path, you can apply single path functions to the
entire course of the vessel.
M.3
The paths to be linked do not have to be contiguous.
Selecting paths
M.3
Connecting
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.321
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
Defining vessels
M.3
After you have defined the course of the vessel with paths, you
can either define or remove vessels as a tubular VOI. For that
purpose, define the tube radius required for calculating the tube
with the path as the center line.
M.3
The vessel tube will be displayed with a semi-transparent surface in the volume image. The tube is not visible in the slice
image segments.
M.3
Example
M.3
M.3
0.0
M.322
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Defining Vessels
M.3
M.3
You can select any radius between 0 and 50 mm for the vessel
tube.
M.3
Set the required radius using the arrow buttons.
Or
M.3
M.3
M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.323
Defining Vessels
Vessel View
0.0
M.324
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
M.4
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
Measurements
M.4
M.4
Annotations
M.4
Vessel navigator
M.4
The Vessel Navigator displays and evaluates longitudinal sections of blood vessels. The vessel navigator supports evaluation
of stenosis using special flags.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.41
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
M.4
0.0
M.42
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
Select the path of the vessel from the object list or the volume
image.
Click the Axial Cuts button in the lower section of the control
area.
The Axial Cuts dialog box is opened with default settings. A
symbolic preview of the section image series is shown in the
volume image: Small borders along the vessel path identify the
positions of each section images.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.43
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
(1) Starting: Path position from which the section images will
be generated.
(2) End: Path position up to which the section images will be
generated.
(3) Interval between images: Fixed interval between adjacent section images.
0.0
M.44
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Changing settings
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
If the defaults for the starting position, end position, and image
interval are not suitable for your diagnostic problem, change the
settings in the Axial Cuts dialog box before generating the sectional images series. The starting and end position are defined
in millimeters from the beginning of the path.
M.4
Drag the left slider handle to the required start position.
Drag the right slider handle to the required end position.
If you want to change the starting and end position by the
same amount, move the slider using the middle handle.
Type the interval between images.
The graphic display of the section image planes in the volume
image is updated. The number of images automatically results
from the distance between the starting and end position and the
image interval.
M.4
Check the section image positions on the symbolic preview
in the volume image and correct the settings, if necessary.
M.4
Click Start.
The axial MPR section images are calculated and stored in the
database as a series. The dialog box closes and the symbolic
preview disappears from the volume image.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.45
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
Measurements
M.4
Selecting the
measurements subtask
card
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.0
M.46
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
Measuring distances
M.4
As a first step, set the start and end points of the distance to be
measured in a slice image or in the volume image.
M.4
The vessel navigator is especially suitable for measuring vessel diameters.
Page M.425, Measuring vessel diameter
Click the Straight Distance Measurement button on the
Measurements subtask card.
Distance measurement mode is activated.
M.4
After you have successfully completed a distance measurement, the mode will be deactivated automatically. As an alternative, you can manually deactivate the mode by clicking the
button again or by selecting another tool.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.47
Evaluating Vessels
Entering measurement
points
Vessel View
M.4
M.4
M.4
Post-processing a distance
measurement
M.4
M.4
M.4
0.0
M.48
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
Measuring curves
M.4
Activating curve
measurement
M.4
Setting measurement
points
M.4
Click the starting point of the curve measurement in the volume image.
Click the end point of the curve measurement.
The shortest distance between the two points is calculated. The
curve measurement is put in the object list and shown in the volume image. Measurement mode remains active for a follow-on
curve measurement.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.49
Evaluating Vessels
Follow-on curve
measurement
Vessel View
M.4
You can continue the curve measurement from the measurement point last entered:
M.4
Click the end point for the next measurement.
The new curve measurement is put in the object list and shown
in the volume image.
M.4
Ending curve
measurement
M.4
Post-processing a curve
measurement
M.4
M.4
M.4
0.0
M.410
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
Measuring areas
M.4
Measurement values
The following measurement values are calculated and displayed in the image together with the contour:
M.4
Area content,
Minimum diameter,
Maximum diameter,
Average intensity.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.411
Evaluating Vessels
Draw contour
Vessel View
M.4
M.4
M.4
0.0
M.412
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Post-processing a contourM.4
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
M.4
Click on the slice image next to the contour (inside or outside), drag the tool to the contour with the mouse button
pressed, moving the line into position.
Or
M.4
Click the contour point to be changed and move it into position with the mouse button pressed.
Click the Accept Contour button to finish editing.
The measured values are updated and editing mode is deactivated.
M.4
If you deactivated the contour edit mode manually, editing is
canceled and the changes are not accepted.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.413
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
Measuring angles
M.4
M.4
After you have successfully completed an angle measurement, the mode will be deactivated automatically. As an alternative, you can manually deactivate the mode by clicking the
button again or by selecting another tool.
Setting measurement
points
M.4
You can set the measurement points in different image segments. First set a suitable image view.
M.4
Click the end point for the first side.
Click the apex.
Click the end point for the second side.
The angle is calculated and the angle measurement is put in the
object list. The legs and the angle measurements are displayed
in the VRT volume image.
M.4
0.0
M.414
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Post-processing angle
measurement
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
M.4
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.415
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
Object list
M.4
M.4
0.0
M.416
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Object types
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
Newly created objects are put in the object list with a objecttype-identifying symbol and name.
M.4
M.4
Object type
Meas. value(s)
PathXY
Path
Path length in mm
Normal A,
Minimum
Normal B
Flag
RatioXY
Degree of stenosis
DistanceXY
Distance
measurement
Distance in mm
CurvedXY
Curve measurement
Curve length in mm
AreaXY
Area measurement
Area in mm,
Min. / max. area diameter in mm,
Diameter of the equivalent circular area in mm,
Mean intensity in HU, if applicable
AngleXY
Angle measurement
Angle size in
AnnotationXY
Annotation text
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.417
Evaluating Vessels
Renaming an object
Vessel View
M.4
Notes
M.4
M.4
Enter the new text via the keyboard and press the Enter key.
Notes cannot be entered for individual measured values.
Deleting an object
M.4
0.0
M.418
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel navigator
M.4
M.4
MIP view
M.4
Instead of the flat ribbon MPR, you can also display an MIP
image of the vessel. This MIP image is acquired perpendicular
to the flat ribbon to provide a view that takes account of the curvature and torsion of the vessel.
M.4
M.4
Select the path of the vessel from the object list or the volume
image.
Display the Vessel Navigator subtask card in the evaluation
area.
The flat ribbon MPR will be calculated and displayed.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.419
Evaluating Vessels
Functions
Vessel View
M.4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
You can zoom, pan, and window the view in the Vessel Navigator identical to the views in the slice image segments.
Page M.218, Zooming and panning images
Page M.219, Windowing images
0.0
M.420
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Stenosis curve
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
M.4
Select the Vessel Navigator Curves option from the Configure menu and the required setting from the submenu.
If you deselect both submenu items, no stenosis curve is displayed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.421
Evaluating Vessels
Profile curve
Vessel View
M.4
When working with the Vessel Navigator, you can display the
profile curve in the axial slice image:
M.4
Select the Profile Curve option from the Configure menu.
The cut line of the flat ribbon with the image plane shows the
position of the flat ribbon in the vessel. The profile curve shows
the signal intensities along this cut line. The larger the interval
between the curve point and the line, the higher the signal
intensity.
M.4
M.4
You can change the width between the upper and lower edge of
the flat ribbon to adjust the vessel view to your requirements. To
hide superfluous vessel surroundings, reduce the width. If less
then the full vessel width or too little of the vessel surroundings
are shown, increase the width.
M.4
Overwrite the current width in the input box and confirm it
with the Enter key.
The view is updated.
M.4
0.0
M.422
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
M.4
Manual rotation
M.4
Using the rotator, you can rotate the image plane manually in 5
increments for MPR view and in 45 increments for MIP view.M.4
Turn the wheel up or down with the mouse until the correct
view is set.
The current angle of rotation is displayed next to the rotator.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.423
Evaluating Vessels
Automatic rotation
Vessel View
M.4
M.4
You can export the image sequence of a 360 rotation by creating a movie file.
Page M.511, Saving rotation of the view as a movie
0.0
M.424
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
Tracing a longitudinal
section
M.4
M.4
M.4
Measuring vessel
diameter
M.4
The vessel navigator allows you to measure distances perpendicular to the vessel axis, for example, the diameter of a vessel.M.4
Click the Straight Distance Measurement button.
Click the start point of the distance to be measured, drag the
mouse to the end point, and release the mouse button.
A perpendicular line will be drawn. The measured value is displayed next to the line and entered in the object list.
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.425
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
M.4
M.4
Drag a line from the starting point to the end point of the
measurement with the mouse.
The length of the corresponding path segment is calculated and
put in the object list as a curve measurement. Measurement
mode remains active. You can continue the curve measurement
from the measurement point last entered.
M.4
Click the end point for the next measurement.
The new curve measurement is put in the object list.
M.4
0.0
M.426
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.427
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
M.4
M.4
The vessel navigator lets you define how many flags will be set
on the path:
M.4
no flag if you do not want to perform a stenosis evaluation for
a vessel,
two flags (minimum flag and flag A) or
three flags.
Click the arrow of the Flags button and select the required
item in the list that opens.
0.0
M.428
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Moving flags
Evaluating Vessels
M.4
M.4
M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.429
Evaluating Vessels
Vessel View
M.4
If you have configured this option under Configure > Measurement list, the object list also shows the ratios of min./
max. diameters and the ratio of the equivalent diameters in
the object list.
In the vessel navigator view, you can recognize the evaluated
flags by their rectangular marking. The degree of stenosis is
shown at the stenosis.
M.4
M.4
Evaluating further
stenosis
M.4
Displaying stenosis
M.4
Once all flags have been entered, the object list is shown with
the measurement results on the Measurements subtask card.
The flags are released again immediately. You can use them to
evaluate further stenosis of the vessel.
M.4
If you select a degree of stenosis in the object list, the flags
return to their position at the time of measurement. That allows
you to re-display the measured values on which the degree of
stenosis is based.
M.4
0.0
M.430
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
M.5
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.51
Vessel View
Saving images
M.5
M.5
Use the Save button to store images and series together with
their default values.
M.5
The settings made by you the last time under the Save As
dialog box are still valid.
Select the respective image segment view.
Select Patient > Save As from the main menu.
Or
M.5
M.5
0.0
M.52
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.5
To check the storage settings before each save and make any
necessary changes, proceed as follows:
M.5
Select the respective image segment view.
Select Patient > Save As... from the main menu.
Or
M.5
M.5
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.53
Saving images
Vessel View
M.5
Use the Save all images in one series and Group all images
by type option buttons to set whether all images will be stored
in a single new series or in separate series for each display
mode.
M.5
The names of new series are entered in the associated combo
boxes.
Page H.123, Defining setting when saving
M.5
Additional information
M.5
0.0
M.54
Operator Manual
Vessel View
Generating a report
M.5
The report generator outputs all measurement data as a synoptic table. This provides you with an overview of all paths and
measurements generated by you.
M.5
Table overview
M.5
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.55
Vessel View
Filming images
M.5
You can transfer the current slice images, the volume image, or
the view in the Vessel Navigator to the virtual film sheet or to a
printer at any time.
M.5
If you want to film or print images of a measurement, select
the measurement from the object list. It will then be displayed
in all image segments.
Select the image segment view you want to transfer to the
film sheet.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet from the main menu or
click the respective button.
Or
M.5
0.0
M.56
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.5
After Vessel View, you can transfer images to the Viewer for
2D-processing or evaluation.
M.5
Select the image segment whose view you want to transfer
to the Viewer.
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.57
Vessel View
M.5
Vessel View lets you transfer image data to the Exam task card
for graphic slice positioning. The transferred coordinates are
then automatically used for scanning the next slice.
M.5
It is only possible to transfer coordinates of MPR images.
Example
M.5
M.5
M.5
M.5
0.0
M.58
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.5
You can document procedures by recording the actions performed in a volume segment. This creates an avi movie file that
you can play back outside Vessel View on any multimedia software.
M.5
Set the required starting view in the volume segment.
Open the Movie subtask card in the control area.
M.5
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.59
Vessel View
Select the Record VRT interaction to AVI file item from the
Save as selection list.
Click Save.
The dialog box closes and recording starts.
M.5
M.5
0.0
M.510
Operator Manual
Vessel View
M.5
Determining movie
content
Or
M.5
M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
M.511
Vessel View
M.5
M.5
M.5
Select the Save 360 rotation to AVI file item from the Save
As selection list.
M.5
0.0
M.512
Operator Manual
PART
Composing
N.0
N.1 Introduction
Starting and quitting composing ..................................... N.13
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N1
Contents
Composing
N.4 Evaluations
Notes .............................................................................. N.42
Availability of graphics functions ................................ N.42
Format of the composite images ................................ N.42
Special evaluations ........................................................ N.43
Graphics functions .......................................................... N.44
Annotating images ..................................................... N.45
Drawing circles and lines/polygons ............................ N.49
Drawing arrows ........................................................ N.410
Additional graphics functions ................................... N.411
Evaluations for the spine and pelvis ............................. N.412
Important notes ........................................................ N.412
Determining spinal curvature
(scoliosis angle according to Cobb) ......................... N.414
0.0
N2
Operator Manual
Composing
Contents
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N3
Contents
Composing
0.0
N4
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
N.1
Introduction
N.1
N.1
Reconstruction
N.1
Visualization
N.1
Measurements
N.1
N.1
Once you have started Composing, load the series with the
Patient Browser. The overview images are reconstructed
(composed).
N.1
The Composing task card allows you to display the original,
detail, and reconstruction images in various layouts, compare
two reconstruction images for evaluation of dynamic processes,
and film the results in various layouts.
N.1
You can then perform measurements:
N.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.11
Introduction
Composing
WA R N I N G
The overviews obtained with the Composing task card
cannot be used for therapy planning (e.g. surgical interventions) or diagnosis (e.g. segmental instabilities).
N.1
Danger of incorrect diagnoses
N.1
N.1
N OT E
You, the user, are responsible for correct selection of the
original images for reconstruction and, if necessary, manual
adjustment of the image edges.
N.1
Reconstructed images differ from the original images with
respect to image information, especially at the image
transitions. For this reason, reconstructed images of bones
and vascular structures are not always suitable for
diagnosis.
N.1
When transmitting one or several reconstructed images
through the network or on a data medium, please inform the
recipients of the above facts.
N.1
0.0
N.12
Operator Manual
Composing
Introduction
N.1
N.1
Calling Composing
N.1
The Composing task card is started from one of the task cards
or from the Patient Browser.
N.1
You can only start up the Composing application if you have
purchased and installed the license.
In the main menu, select Applications and then the menu
item Composing.
The Composing task card opens.
N.1
N.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.13
Introduction
Composing
0.0
N.14
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
N.2
N.2
N.2
If in exceptional cases the slice images are not correctly composed, manually position the images in a slice position or the
slices relative to each other.
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.21
Composing
N.2
Selecting a study
N.2
Selecting a series
N.2
Confirming selection
N.2
As soon as you have selected the series, transfer it to the Composing task card.
N.2
Select Applications > Composing from the menu of the
Patient Browser.
Or
N.2
Drag the selection with the mouse into the image area of the
Composing task card (drag&drop).
0.0
N.22
Operator Manual
Composing
Reconstruction
N.2
N.2
N.2
Criterion
Description
Image type
Database storage
Slice thickness
Slice distance
Series block
Image orientation
If the images are acquired in the coronal direction (main direction), only an
inclination from coronal to axial is permitted
(max. 5 for MR images, max. 45 for SC images).
Images with an inclination from coronal to sagittal with reference to the first
volume are rejected (max. tolerance 1).
If the images are acquired in the sagittal direction (main direction), only an
inclination from sagittal to axial is permitted
(max. 5 for MR images, max. 45 for SC images).
Images with an inclination from coronal to sagittal with reference to the first
volume are rejected (max. tolerance 1).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.23
Test of image
orientation
N.2
Composing
Distortion correction
N.2
Before images are composed, they may have to be geometrically corrected. The images are first checked to see if they are
already corrected.
N.2
If they are not, they are corrected now. In this case, a relevant
message is shown in the status bar.
N.2
The corrected images are stored in a new series each time.
N.2
0.0
N.24
Operator Manual
Composing
N.2
Automatic alignment
N.2
Manual alignment
N.2
In the rare cases when transition areas have not been optimally
reconstructed by the computer, you can adjust them manually.
Proceed by shifting the image part below the transition edge relative to the image part above the transition edge until the best
alignment is achieved in the overlapping area.
N.2
The first time you perform manual alignment, a dialog box
appears with a warning.
Original images
N.2
In certain cases, for example, when diagnosing bone structures, it will be necessary to use the original image information.
For this purpose, you may use either the single images or a special display mode, the Cut mode (Hard image transitions).
With the latter, the images are joined at the cut lines without
overlapping. This displays an overall image with the unchanged
information of the single images.
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.25
Composing
Image 1
Image 1
Image 2
Interpolated
areas
Image 3
Blend mode
(Soft image transitions)
Example
Image 2
Image 3
Cut mode
(Hard image transitions)
N.2
0.0
N.26
Operator Manual
Composing
Hardcopy
N.2
Important notes
N.2
N OT E
Before using a composite image to support a diagnosis,
visually verify the image match using the original images
with an appropriate resolution. No matter how reliable the
match between the single images may appear, only visual
verification by the physician using the original images can
ensure diagnostic accuracy of the image positions relative
to one another. Use the View > Single with Original
function to compare the composite image with the original
images.
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.27
N.2
Composing
Volumes that do
not overlap
N.2
Selecting volumes that do not overlap will result in reconstruction "gaps". Reconstruction is performed. Missing areas are
shown in black in the composite images.
N.2
Select overlapping volumes for reconstruction.
Manual alignment of the image edges is no longer possible.
N.2
0.0
N.28
Operator Manual
Composing
Transition does
not match
N.2
If one or more transition areas between images are not correctly recognized by the reconstruction algorithm, a message
appears after reconstruction.
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.29
N.2
Composing
N OT E
The text Insufficient match! is an image text that can be
hidden.
N.2
Make sure that the image text is displayed for diagnoses.
If you are transferring or passing on one or several composite images through the network or on data medium,
inform the recipient that the image text has to be displayed.
User change
N.2
If the new user has access rights to the images loaded in Composing, Composing remains fully available.
N.2
If reconstruction is in progress when the user changes, Composing is blocked for the new user until reconstruction has
been completed.
N.2
If the new user does not have rights for the current patient, the
images are automatically unloaded.
N.2
If Composing is busy with reconstruction on a user change, the
content of the Composing task card is blacked out (i.e. the task
card is black).
N.2
The new user must close Composing and start it again to continue working.
Page B.263, Setting up the Privileges for a Role or a UserN.2
0.0
N.210
Operator Manual
Composing
Reconstruction
N.2
Reconstruction starts with the transfer of the series to the Composing task card.
N.2
The Composing task card is placed in foreground.
N.2
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.211
Composing
N.2
N OT E
If you make manual changes and therefore modify the
reference parameters, you may find that graphics drawn in
the composite image are no longer valid and have to be
redrawn.
N.2
N OT E
As the user, you are responsible for correct manual
adjustment of the reconstruction and the conclusions for
diagnosis drawn from it.
N.2
0.0
N.212
Operator Manual
Composing
Tools
N.2
(1)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.213
Composing
N.2
N.2
N.2
0.0
N.214
Operator Manual
Composing
N.2
You can now shift the image identified with the orientation mark.
The image is shifted, as well as all subsequent images relative
to the images above the marked image.
N.2
The topmost image cannot be shifted.
N.2
N OT E
The shift should be performed in Cut mode (hard image
transitions) because the pixel shift is easier to see in this
mode.
Page N.323, Switching between blend mode and cut
mode.
N.2
Moving up/down
N.2
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.215
Moving left/right
Composing
N.2
N.2
N.2
N.2
N.2
0.0
N.216
Operator Manual
Composing
N.2
You can move the depth of the slices of the composed volume
relative to each other.
N.2
Selecting a slice
N.2
N.2
N.2
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.217
Composing
Display
N.2
N OT E
When defining the film layout after manual correction in
Composing, ensure that All text is selected for the Image
Text selection so that the message Manual adjustment
performed! is exposed to the film.
Page A.37, Configuring image text
N.2
0.0
N.218
Operator Manual
Composing
N.2
N.2
N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.219
Composing
0.0
N.220
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
N.3
Viewing images
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.31
Viewing images
Composing
(5 (6)
(5)
(2)
(3)
N.3
(4)
(1)
0.0
N.32
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.33
Viewing images
Composing
Image segments
N.3
0.0
N.34
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.35
Viewing images
Composing
Displays in images
N.3
Image element
Description
N.3
N.3
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
N.36
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
Image element
Description
N.3
Cobb angle
N.3
N.3
Kyphosis angle
N.3
N.3
N.3
Height Difference
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.37
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
0.0
N.38
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.39
Viewing images
Composing
Control area
N.3
The control area to the right in the task card contains the input
fields for selecting functions:
N.3
(1) Display and keys for scrolling among different composite
images
(2) Subtask card stack for switching the View, for Manual correction of image transitions, and for setting the window values (Window)
(3) Subtask card stack for selecting evaluation functions
(Ortho I and Tools)
(4) Functions for storing and documenting
0.0
N.310
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
N.3
N OT E
You can only load images of one patient into the
Composing task card.
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.311
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
N OT E
In the case of a composite image/volume that has been
stored and reloaded, you can change the position of single
images relative to each other only if:
N.3
all original images are available
the images are not a canceled reconstruction
the composed image or original images have not been
altered outside the Composing task card or provided
with an electronic shutter
0.0
N.312
Operator Manual
Composing
Loading a volume
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
Drag the series with the mouse into the image area of the
Composing task card (drag&drop).
Or
N.3
N.3
For a volume that has just been composed, the center image is
the result volume. The focus is on the center volume.
N.3
An already composite image is displayed as it was when it was
last saved.
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.313
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
The tools for image display are located on the View subtask
card or in the View menu.
N.3
Notes
N.3
0.0
N.314
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
Layouts
N.3
N.3
Detailed image or
comparison
N.3
On the Composing task card you can choose from three different image layouts (for on-screen display, but not film layouts): N.3
Single Layout (standard setting)
Only the composite image is displayed. In this display you
will see a composite image, if necessary with an overview
reduced in size.
Page N.319, Selecting single layout
Single with original
The composite image and the original image (if present) containing the original image information are displayed one
below the other. This display mode can be used for checking
the reconstruction and performing diagnoses.
Page N.320, Selecting single with original
Double Layout
Two reconstructed images are displayed next to each other.
This display can be used to compare composed images/volume, for example, to assess the course of an illness.
Page N.321, Selecting double layout
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.315
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
N.316
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
N.3
Or
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.317
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
Or
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
N.318
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.319
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
The original image should be used for diagnosis. For this purpose the composite image and an original image can be displayed simultaneously and compared. For that purpose, select
the Single with original.
N.3
Single with original with Show Overview (left) and Hide Overview (right)
N.3
(1) Detailed image
(2) Overview
(3) Original image
Click this icon on the View subtask card.
Or
N.3
0.0
N.320
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.321
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
0.0
N.322
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.323
N.3
Viewing images
Switching
Composing
N.3
Or
N.3
N.3
0.0
N.324
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N OT E
When Blend mode is used, there are transition areas
between the single images that were interpolated from two
images. Although the Blend mode image may appear more
pleasing to the eye, only the original images (Single with
Original or Cut mode display) may be used for diagnosing
bone structures.
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.325
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
Click + or -.
Or
N.3
0.0
N.326
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
You can also "scroll" among single volumes within a reconstructed volume.
N.3
Click the required image segment.
This segment is identified with a blue (light) border.
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.327
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
N.3
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
N.328
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
N.3
Enlarging/shifting the
image (Zoom/Pan)
N.3
N.3
Select Image > Zoom & Pan on from the main menu.
Click and drag in the detailed image.
The detailed image is displayed accordingly.
N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.329
Viewing images
Moving an image
section
Composing
N.3
You can move this border as well as the entire image section.N.3
Move the mouse pointer onto the green line.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
N.3
0.0
N.330
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
WA R N I N G
Image text and/or graphics off
N.3
N.3
N.3
The next time you select the menu item, a checkmark will have
been set in front of Image text On or a previously set checkmark will be removed.
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.331
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
N.3
All graphical elements drawn in the image (lines, circles, distance, etc.)
The image segment markings and image position numbers
Special marking of transitions (for example, red triangles for
a non-matching transition or M for a manually adjusted
transition)
N.3
N.3
Or
N.3
0.0
N.332
Operator Manual
Composing
Switching graphics
back on
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
Or
N.3
The next time you select the menu, the item Image Graphics
On will be marked with a checkmark again.
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.333
Viewing images
Composing
N.3
You can set the window values on the Composing task card.N.3
During scrolling, window values are automatically applied to
other composite images.
Setting window values
N.3
The window values are set in the image area using the
mouse (center button).
Page G.42, Windowing images
Or
N.3
N.3
N.3
0.0
N.334
Operator Manual
Composing
Viewing images
N.3
N.3
N.3
Inverting grayscale
values
N.3
N.3
Editing graphics
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.335
Viewing images
Composing
0.0
N.336
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
N.4
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
You will find the relevant tools on the Ortho I and Tools subtask
cards.
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.41
Evaluations
Composing
Notes
N.4
N.4
N.4
Tolerance max. 5
N.4
N.4
N.4
Tolerance max. 45
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.42
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
Special evaluations
N.4
Depending on the type of reconstruction performed, the following special evaluations may be performed with composite
images:
N.4
Scoliosis angle according to Cobb
Measuring one or more curvature angles of the spine.
Page N.414, Determining spinal curvature (scoliosis
angle according to Cobb)
Kyphosis angle
Measuring the angle of the vertebral base tangents relative
to the vertical.
Page N.419, Determining the kyphosis angle of a vertebra
Vertical alignment
Measuring the deviation of the spine from the vertical.
Page N.422, Measuring deviation of the spinal column
from the vertical
Height difference
Measuring the difference in height, for example between the
left and right side of the pelvis.
Page N.427, Measuring the difference in height
These may be selected on the Ortho I subtask card or via the
Tools menu.
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.43
Evaluations
Composing
Graphics functions
N.4
N.4
N OT E
Graphics elements may be drawn in the detailed image
only, not in the overview.
N.4
0.0
N.44
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
Annotating images
N.4
You may use predefined text or enter text freely on the Composing task card:
N.4
Click the text icon.
The Annotation dialog box is displayed.
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.45
Evaluations
Entering a text
Composing
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.46
Operator Manual
Composing
Positioning text
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.47
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
Click Close.
If you want to edit several images, you do not have to deselect
the function.
Simply select the next image.
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.48
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
In the same way as you draw circles, you can also draw circles
with a center.
N.4
You cannot select the cross hair in the circle (but you can
select the circle line).
Using this method you can easily perform distance measurements starting from the center of the circle, e.g. the center of
a ball-and-socket joint.
Drawing lines/polygons
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.49
Evaluations
Composing
Drawing arrows
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
Click one of the two end points of the arrow, keep the mouse
button pressed, and drag the arrow (larger or smaller).
Release the mouse button.
0.0
N.410
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
Distance line
N.4
N.4
Angles
N.4
N.4
Manual calibration
N.4
Editing graphics
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.411
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
Important notes
Angle measurements
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.412
Operator Manual
Composing
Distance measurements
Evaluations
N.4
N OT E
Only measure within each images (between the
transitions), if possible.
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.413
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
Scoliosis angle
N: neutral vertebra
S: apical vertebra
N.4
N.4
1. Zilch, H.; Weber, U.: Orthopdie mit Repetitorium. Berlin: de Gruyter, 1989
0.0
N.414
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.415
Evaluations
First tangent
Composing
N.4
Set the mouse pointer to the starting point for the first tangent.
Hold the left mouse button while drawing a line up to the end
point of the first tangent.
Release the mouse button there.
The tangent is drawn.
N.4
Second tangent
N.4
Further tangents
N.4
0.0
N.416
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.417
Evaluations
Changing angles or
tangents
Composing
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.418
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
A kyphosis angle is the angle between a vertebra and the vertical in a lateral exposure:
N.4
45
55
N.4
Example
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.419
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
N.4
N.4
Drawing an angle
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.420
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
Click and drag one of the corner points to the required new
position.
The relevant kyphosis angle is updated.
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.421
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
0.0
N.422
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
Drawing lines
N.4
N.4
N.4
Vertical line
N.4
N.4
N.4
Click the image and drag a short line up or down via the
mouse.
As soon as you move the mouse, a line is displayed.
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.423
Evaluations
Reference point
Composing
N.4
0.0
N.424
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
Changing a line
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.425
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
The annotation displayed (distance) can be moved if, for example, it hides important details:
N.4
Click the annotation to be moved.
The characters are marked with a small square.
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.426
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
HD1=0.2cm
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.427
Evaluations
Composing
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
N.428
Operator Manual
Composing
Evaluations
N.4
N.4
N.4
N.4
Click and drag one of the corner points to the required new
position.
The relevant line is updated.
N.4
N.4
N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.429
Evaluations
Composing
0.0
N.430
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
N.5
N.5
N OT E
The work status (com/p/a/s/r/H) in the Patient Browser is
not set/changed by the Composing application.
N.5
N.5
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost permanently. N.5
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off.
N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.51
Composing
Saving images
N.5
Selecting a volume
N.5
N.5
Select Patient > Save All As ... from the main menu.
All images of the composed volume are saved.
N.5
Selecting an image
N.5
N.5
N.5
0.0
N.52
Operator Manual
Composing
Entering a name
N.5
N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.53
As a new series
N.5
Composing
Click on Save images as new series if required (automatically active the first time you select Save As).
Enter a name for the series.
Confirm with OK.
The images are saved as a new series.
N.5
Appending to a series
N.5
N.5
0.0
N.54
Operator Manual
Composing
N.5
N OT E
Images pasted from the clipboard are not suitable for
diagnosis!
N.5
N.5
N OT E
The image text can be configured to render images copied
via the clipboard anonymous.
Page A.37, Configuring image text
N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.55
Composing
N OT E
You can copy images to the clipboard only if you have the
necessary Export right.
Page B.263, Setting up the Privileges for a Role or a
User
N.5
Selecting a volume
N.5
Selecting an image
N.5
Selecting an image
segment
N.5
Copying an image
N.5
0.0
N.56
Operator Manual
Composing
Filming images
N.5
Selecting a volume
N.5
N.5
Select Patient > Copy All to Film Sheet from the main
menu.
All images of the composed volume are transferred to the virtual film sheet.
N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.57
Selecting an image
N.5
Composing
Filming a composite
image
N.5
N.5
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet from the main menu.
Only the currently displayed composite image is transferred to
N.5
the virtual film sheet.
0.0
N.58
Operator Manual
Composing
Sending images
N.5
N.5
WA R N I N G
Sending zoomed non-square images from the Viewing
task card.
N.5
It is possible that not all the image information displayed will be sent.
N.5
Send non-square images unzoomed only.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.59
Selecting a volume
N.5
Selecting an image
N.5
Selecting an image
segment
N.5
Composing
Sending a composite
image
N.5
N.5
0.0
N.510
Operator Manual
Composing
N.5
N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
N.511
Composing
0.0
N.512
Operator Manual
PART
Filming
O.0
O.1 Introduction
Procedure for Filming ..................................................... O.12
Terms ............................................................................. O.15
Layouts and settings ...................................................... O.17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O1
Contents
Filming
0.0
O2
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.1
Introduction
O.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Use of paper printouts for diagnosis of
AX, CT and MR images.
O.1
Consequence: Wrong diagnosis possible.
O.1
Security - Privileges
O.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.11
Introduction
Filming
O.1
0.0
O.12
Operator Manual
Filming
Introduction
O.1
Examination
Filming
(Virtual film sheet)
Manual
Camera/Printer
Automatic
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.13
Introduction
Manual filming
Filming
O.1
You can initiate transfer of images to the virtual film sheet and
onto a camera or printer manually. In this way, you can divide up
the work in an optimum way and only film or print those images
that you really need for the diagnosis.
O.1
Exam
Filming
(Virtual film sheet)
3D
Camera/Printer
Viewing
Patient Browser
Manual
Manual
0.0
O.14
Operator Manual
Filming
Introduction
Terms
O.1
Film job
O.1
Selected images, series and studies that you have sent for filming are managed and executed by the system as film jobs.
O.1
O.1
Usually, the images of different patients are processed in different film jobs. However, you can permit images of different
patients to be grouped together to form a multiple film job. The
images are then processed as follows, for example:
O.1
Film sheet 1
Film sheet 2
Film sheet 3
A1
A2
A3
A10
A11
A12
B6
B7
B8
A4
A5
A6
A13
B1
B2
B9
B10
B11
A7
A8
A9
B3
B4
B5
B12
Patient 1
Patient 2
Multiple film job
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.15
Introduction
Filming
O.1
You can also obtain information about the extent to which film
jobs in the camera/printer queue have been executed in the
Film Task Status dialog box and intervene in the sequence of
execution.
O.1
O.1
0.0
O.16
Operator Manual
Filming
Introduction
O.1
All film settings such as the layout of the film sheet or the
selected camera/printer are defined in so called film layouts.
O.1
Standard layout
O.1
If you do not make any changes to the default film settings, you
are always working with the so called general default layout
defined by the Siemens Service during installation of your system.
O.1
O.1
If you are not satisfied with the default film settings (standard
layout), then you change individual film settings in the Filming
task card. The current film job is then processed with your new
settings. On the next film job, the system again accesses the
defaults.
O.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.17
Introduction
Print modes
Filming
O.1
O.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: By scaling down the image in scalable
page mode the resulting image quality might no longer be
sufficient.
O.1
Consequence: Wrong diagnosis possible.
O.1
0.0
O.18
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.2
Semi-automatic/Manual
Filming
O.2
As explained in the introduction, filming and printing examination images is performed in two steps:
O.2
Transfer of images to the virtual film sheet.
Passing on the images from the virtual film sheet to a camera
or printer where they will be exposed on film or printed on
paper.
The second step can be made to run automatically. This is
advisable if large volumes of data resulting from a high patient
throughput have to be dealt with and therefore large volumes of
image material have to be made available for reporting as
quickly as possible.
O.2
As an alternative, you can control filming completely manually.
In this way, you can make sure that only those images are
printed or being exposed on film that you really need for diagnosis or documentation.
O.2
O.2
NOTE
Please note if you want to control filming manually
completely or partially:
O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.21
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Filming
O.2
In the first step, you decide on the task cards Exam, Viewing,
3D or in the Patient Browser window which images you want
to transfer to the virtual film sheet.
O.2
O.2
From the Exam task card, you can pass on images to the virtual
film sheet individually and manually.
O.2
Camera/Printer
Examination
Filming
(Virtual film sheet)
Copy to Film Sheet
0.0
O.22
Operator Manual
Filming
Manual filming
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
If you only want to film or print individual images, you can transfer them to the virtual film sheet manually.
O.2
Select the images one after the other in the image display
segment of the Exam task card.
Call up Patient > Copy to Film Sheet for each one.
Or
O.2
O.2
O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.23
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Filming
O.2
You can film or print images stored in your local database from
the Patient Browser or from the 3D or Viewing task cards. In
this way, you can also send images for filming that you have
evaluated with the Viewing card or generated in 3D.
O.2
3D
Filming
(Virtual film sheet)
Camera/Printer
Viewing
Patient Browser
0.0
O.24
Operator Manual
Filming
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
Or
O.2
O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.25
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
Filming
O.2
0.0
O.26
Operator Manual
Filming
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
Exam
Camera/Printer
3D
Viewing
Filming
(Virtual film sheet)
Patient Browser
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.27
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Auto Expose
Filming
O.2
O.2
O.2
Activate the option via the Auto Expose button on the Filming task card or in the Film Preview window.
The film sheets of the opened film job and all following film jobs
which are filled are automatically sent to the camera or printer
and exposed or printed.
O.2
If the last film sheet is only partially filled, it is only sent for
filming when a new patient has been registered or a new film
job transferred to the virtual film sheet.
0.0
O.28
Operator Manual
Filming
Deactivating Auto
Expose
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
O.2
Click on the button on the Filming task card or the film preview again.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.29
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Interrupting Auto
Expose
O.2
Filming
If errors occur during automatic filming, or you notice that defective images have been filmed/printed, you can interrupt automatic filming at any time.
O.2
O.2
0.0
O.210
Operator Manual
Filming
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
When Security is activated, you can send data only if you are
authorized to do so.
O.2
Call up Film > Expose Film Task o transfer all images of this
film job to the camera/printer.
Or
O.2
O.2
O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.211
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
Filming
If more than one patient is loaded in the task card Filming you
can select the task you want to expose from the list displayed in
the Select Film Job dialog.
O.2
Call up Patient > Expose Film Task or use the shortcut
Ctrl + P.
The Select Film Job dialog box is opened in which you can
select the job that you want to transfer to a preselected camera/
printer.
O.2
O.2
Or
O.2
0.0
O.212
Operator Manual
Filming
Exposing/printing a film
sheet
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
O.2
If a film size which your camera does not support is set for the
film sheet waiting to be exposed on film, the Incorrect Film
Size dialog box is displayed.
O.2
No corresponding error message is displayed when a paper
printer is used.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.213
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Filming
O.2
0.0
O.214
Operator Manual
Filming
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.215
Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Filming
Or
O.2
O.2
Or
O.2
0.0
O.216
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.3
O.3
During manual filming, i.e. when you have deactivated the Auto
Expose option, you can view and process the film sheets again
before finally printing them or exposing them on film.
Page O.28, Auto Expose
O.3
Film preview
O.3
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.31
Filming
Film Preview
O.3
In the Film Preview, you can obtain information about how the
images of the current film job are arranged on the film sheets.
Here, you can also call up some important functions to do with
filming without having to switch to the Filming task card.
O.3
O.3
O.3
O.3
0.0
O.32
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
After you have called up the Film Preview, the Film Preview
window will appear in front of the application you are currently
working on.
O.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.33
Film jobs
O.3
Filming
Here you can see all the film jobs listed that are in the virtual film
sheet for transfer to a camera/printer. To process one film job or
check the arrangement of images, you first have to open the film
job.
O.3
Click on a film job to open it.
Film sheets
O.3
In the display area for the film sheets, you can see the first film
sheet of the film job which is open.
O.3
With the dog ears in the top right hand corner, you can page
through all the film sheets of the film job. The film sheet is subdivided into segments in which the series and image numbers
of the images to be exposed or printed are displayed.
O.3
Forward
Click on the top of the dog ear once to page forward by one
film sheet.
Or
Backward
O.3
0.0
O.34
Operator Manual
Filming
Control area
O.3
Click on this button to open the Film Task Status dialog box
or call up Patient > Film Task Status.
There you can see the queue with the film jobs waiting to be
transferred to the camera/printer.
Page O.51, Checking Film Jobs
O.3
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.35
Filming
O.3
By default a layout has already been defined for every film job
in the virtual film sheet and a camera or printer has been
selected.
O.3
You can change these default settings in the Film Preview dialog box or in the Filming task card itself.
O.3
To change settings in the Film Preview, proceed as follows:
O.3
Selecting a camera or
printer
O.3
Call up Film > Change Camera... if you want to have the film
job or film sheet displayed exposed with another camera or
printed on another printer.
A dialog box is opened in which you can select a new camera/
printer.
Page O.42, Selecting a camera or printer
O.3
Changing film
properties
O.3
O.3
Select the film job to change the film settings for the entire
film job.
0.0
O.36
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
O.3
In the Film Preview, a series of functions is available for reorganizing film sheets. These can be useful if you have opened
the Film Preview from the Exam, 3D, or Viewing task card or
the Patient Browser.
O.3
Deleting images
O.3
If you can see that one of the images in the Viewing task card
is useless (e.g. an image with motion artifacts), click on this
image in the Film Preview. (You can identify the image by its
image number.)
O.3
Click on the delete button in the control area to delete the
selected image.
The following images move up so that no empty segments are
left behind.
O.3
Or
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.37
Filming
Adding images
O.3
If you have opened the Film Preview from the Patient Browser
window, you can add further images to a film job.
O.3
In this way, for example, you can also film images of earlier
studies of a patient for comparison.
O.3
Call up Film > New Film Sheet to add an empty film sheet
to the end of the film job.
Now fill this film sheet with selected images from the Patient
Browser by drag & drop.
Or
O.3
O.3
0.0
O.38
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.39
Filming
O.3
You can process the film sheets of current film jobs on the Filming task card.
O.3
O.3
O.3
O.3
0.0
O.310
Operator Manual
Filming
The Filming task card is subdivided into the following areas: O.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.311
Filming
O.3
By the patient folders in the upper part of the control area, you
can see which film jobs are currently waiting to be transferred
to a camera/printer.
O.3
Designations
O.3
O.3
Patient name
A film job that contains the images of a patient.
Multiple
A film job that contains the images of several patients.
Page O.16, Virtual film sheet
If there is no film job in the virtual film sheet, a patient folder
with the designation New is displayed.
O.3
0.0
O.312
Operator Manual
Filming
Selecting an entire
film job
O.3
If you want to process all the film sheets and images of a film
job, you not only have to open this job but also select it explicitly.
O.3
Click again on the opened film job to select all the film sheets
with all images of this job.
The folder icon is now highlighted (blue), and all the images of
this job will be shown with a bold border in the film sheet display
and are therefore selected.
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.313
Filming
O.3
O.3
Select the number of copies with the spin box or enter the
required number with the keyboard.
0.0
O.314
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
After you have opened a film job, its images are displayed in the
left-hand part of the Filming task card.
O.3
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.315
Paging
O.3
Filming
O.3
O.3
O.3
O.3
0.0
O.316
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
Click on the border of the film sheet to select all the images
it contains.
All the segments of the film sheet are now shown with a bold
border.
O.3
O.3
Click outside the film sheet with the left mouse button.
Or
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.317
Multiple selection
O.3
Filming
You can also select more than one film sheet at once.
O.3
Click on the border of the first film sheet of your choice holding the Ctrl key down.
Page to another film sheet.
Hold the Ctrl key pressed to extend your selection by a single film sheet.
Or
O.3
Hold the Shift key pressed to select all the film sheets
between the two film sheets including all their images.
When you have selected a film sheet, all images have a broken line border.
0.0
O.318
Operator Manual
Filming
Selecting segments
O.3
You can not only select whole film sheets, but also individual
images of a film job.
O.3
The Input Focus indicates the active segment of the image
area. It is indicated by a broken line border and is shown so that
it is always clear which image is being processed.
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.319
Filming
O.3
Move the input focus using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Page G.333, Working in the input focus
The image is marked by a broken line border.
O.3
0.0
O.320
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
You can select images explicitly one after the other like film
sheets.
O.3
Click into a segment holding the Ctrl key down.
The segment is marked with a broken line border.
O.3
Like film sheets, you can also expand your selection for segments by clicking on further segments holding the Ctrl or
Shift key down.
Page O.318, Multiple selection
Selecting images
explicitly up to the
end of a series
You want to select the image displayed and all the following
images explicitly.
O.3
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.321
Filming
The simplest way for you to select entire series (e.g. all the
images contained in them) is with Select Series.
O.3
Click on the image of the series that you want to select holding the Ctrl key down or use the input focus.
Call up Edit > Select Series in the main menu or Select
Series in the popup menu.
The entire series is now selected explicitly.
O.3
Deselecting images
O.3
If the explicit selection does not contain the set of images that
you require, you can deselect images individually or altogether.
O.3
Hold the Ctrl key down and click on an explicitly selected
image again. It is now deselected.
Or
O.3
Call up Edit > Deselect All in the main menu to deselect all
selected images again.
After that, the default input focus is set automatically, i.e. the top
left segment is the destination of the next action.
O.3
0.0
O.322
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
Using the Filming task card, you can reorganize film jobs in
such a way that only those images are exposed or printed that
you really need for a diagnosis.
O.3
O.3
Put the input focus on an image of the series that you want
to select.
Select Edit > Select Series from the main menu or Select
Series from the pop-up menu.
Delete the selected series from the film job.
Page O.324, Deleting images or film sheets
Change the sorting of the images in the Patient Browser.
Page D.219, Sorting data
Load the series onto the Filming task card again.
Chapter O.3
The images are displayed in a new sort order.
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.323
O.3
Filming
You can delete image material that is useless for reporting from
a film job.
O.3
Select one or more images or film sheets or use the input
focus.
Call up Edit > Delete in the main menu.
Or
O.3
Or
O.3
0.0
O.324
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
12
13
15
16
7
10
14
13
16
11
10
11
12
Repack
14
15
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.325
Filming
12
13
15
16
7
10
14
12
13
15
16
11
10
11
Repack
14
0.0
O.326
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
O.3
Now select the image in front of which you want to insert the
copies.
O.3
Call up Edit > Paste in the main menu or Paste in the popup
menu.
Or
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.327
O.3
Filming
You can move images within a film job or from one film job to
another by first cutting them and then pasting them at a new
position.
O.3
Select the image or the images that you want to move or
work in the input focus.
Call up Edit > Cut in the main menu or Cut in the popup
menu.
Or
O.3
0.0
O.328
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
O.3
O.3
If you only want to move images within a film sheet, you can
also do that very easily by drag & drop. Empty segments may
result which can be filled with Repack.
If the last film sheet of your job is already full and you want to
copy or move images to the end of your film job, you must first
append a new film sheet.
O.3
Call up Film > New Film Sheet at any point in the film job.
A new (empty) film sheet is appended to the end of the film job.
Then insert the copied or cut images into this sheet.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.329
O.3
Filming
O.3
From the task cards Viewing and 3D, you can only transfer
images to Filming with Patient > Copy to Film Sheet.
O.3
If you transfer the images of the same patient to the virtual film
sheet, they are always appended to the same film job. If you
copy images of different patients onto the virtual film sheet, a
new film job is created for each patient, unless your system has
been configured to allow so-called multiple film jobs.
Page O.67, One patient or more than one patient per film jobO.3
0.0
O.330
Operator Manual
Filming
Processing images
O.3
O.3
On the Filming task card, images are loaded with the window
values with which they were last saved. If you have transferred
images from the Viewing task card, the images are displayed
with the window values last used in the Viewing card.
O.3
In Filming, you can change these window values before exposure.
O.3
For color images, the window values are not displayed in the
segment. Windowing of color images is not possible.
You have the following options:
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.331
Window 1 or Window 2
Filming
O.3
NOTE
This application is not available for MR-images. The buttons
are only active when working with double windows is
possible (e.g. CT-images).
O.3
Auto-Windowing
O.3
With the Auto-Window option, you automatically assign optimized window values to the images, either on loading or after
loading to individual images.
O.3
Click on the Auto-Windowing button.
Or
O.3
O.3
0.0
O.332
Operator Manual
Filming
O.3
For fine adjustment of the windowing values, you can also use
the keys on the symbol keypad of the keyboard.
O.3
Setting the contrast
Press the Width+ (Num -) or Width- (Num *) key to increase
or reduce the contrast.
O.3
Place the mouse cursor in the image and move the mouse
holding the center mouse button pressed.
y
Contrast +
(width -)
Brightness (center +)
Contrast x (width +)
Brightness+
(center -)
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.333
O.3
Filming
O.3
Zooming/panning with
the mouse
O.3
0.0
O.334
Operator Manual
Filming
Or
O.3
Click on the center of the image and pan the image holding
the left mouse button down.
Deselect Image > Zoom & Pan On or click on the button
again to make the left mouse button available for selecting
film objects again.
For more information about zooming/panning images, see
Page G.415, Zooming and panning images
O.3
O.3
O.3
You can return to the zoom factor with which the images were
last stored in the database at any time.
O.3
O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.335
Filming
0.0
O.336
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.4
O.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.41
Filming
O.4
If you do not want to expose or print your current film job with
the default camera, then select another camera/printer for this
job.
O.4
Click the Camera subtask card on the Filming task card into
the foreground.
0.0
O.42
Operator Manual
Filming
Or
O.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.43
Filming
O.4
With the layout of the film sheet, you can define the size of each
image.
O.4
Switch, for example, to a larger format with fewer images per
film sheet, if you want to see diagnostic details on the exposed/
printed images.
O.4
Set the film sheet layout for selected images of a film job.
O.4
O.4
Select an entire film job to change the layout for all sheets of
this job.
Or
O.4
O.4
Select individual images or you work in the input focus to display only these images in a larger or smaller format on the
same film sheet.
0.0
O.44
Operator Manual
Filming
O.4
Click the Layout subtask card on the Filming task card into
the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.45
Filming
Or
O.4
Call up Film > Properties... in the main menu or Properties... in the popup menu.
The Film Properties dialog box is opened.
O.4
0.0
O.46
Operator Manual
Filming
Example
O.4
The selected images or film sheets are displayed in the new format. The remaining images of the film job are still displayed in
the old layout.
O.4
10
11
12
19
13
14
15
22
16
17
18
13
14
16
18
19
20
10
12
21
22
11
15
20
21
17
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.47
Filming
O.4
The layout of the film sheet defines the number and size of the
segments on a film sheet. With the Film Preview window and
the Filming task card, you can change the aspect ratio of individual images in your segments and define whether and how
text and graphics are to be printed or exposed on film, too.
O.4
Click the Images subtask card on the Filming task card into
the foreground.
Or
O.4
0.0
O.48
Operator Manual
Filming
Fit to segment
O.4
O.4
Select the entire film job if you want to change the aspect
ratio of all images.
Click on the Fit to segment button on the Images subtask
card.
Or
O.4
Select the option Fit to segment in the Film Properties dialog box.
The images are displayed as large as possible in the segment
without any parts of the image being cut off.
O.4
Clip document
O.4
O.4
Select the Clip document option in the Film Properties dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.49
Original image
O.4
Filming
O.4
Select the Original Image option in the Film Properties dialog box.
0.0
O.410
Operator Manual
Filming
Fit to segment
Clip Document
Original image
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.411
O.4
Filming
O.4
Select the All text option in the Film Properties dialog box.
O.4
0.0
O.412
Operator Manual
Filming
O.4
In the Film Properties dialog box, you can now select which
text information is to be displayed if the Customized text option
is selected.
O.4
Click on the check box with the mouse to have each item of
information either displayed or hidden.
All text
Customized text
No text
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.413
Displaying/hiding
graphics and annotations
O.4
Filming
O.4
O.4
Show Graphics
Hide Graphics
0.0
O.414
Operator Manual
Filming
O.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.415
Filming
0.0
O.416
Operator Manual
Filming
O.4
To have the position of the image (Child) displayed in the reference image (Mother), the mother and child must fulfill the same
preconditions as the reference images.
Page F.34, Requirements
O.4
Similar rules apply to display of the cut line as to graphic slice
positioning:
O.4
A perpendicular cut is displayed as a continuous line.
An oblique cut is displayed as a dashed line.
If the angle between the mother and child is smaller than 30,
no cut line is displayed.
O.4
You can use any other image from the same examination as the
mother instead of the reference image being displayed, as long
as it was acquired at the same table position.
O.4
Deactivate the Reference image option and select the position of the reference image.
Call up the Patient Browser.
Drag and drop a suitable image to the film sheet.
If further images from the series to which the child belongs
are loaded on the film sheet, the new reference image is displayed there automatically.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.417
Windowing a reference
image subsequently
O.4
Filming
Sometimes the small reference image is displayed with unfavorable window values on the film sheet.
O.4
You cannot load the small reference image directly onto the film
sheet. Proceed as follows instead:
O.4
Load the reference image onto the Viewing task card.
Window the reference image and close the patient.
The new window values will now be used for the reference
images from now on.
O.4
Drag and drop the changed reference image from the
Patient browser to the film sheet.
0.0
O.418
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.5
O.5
If you transfer film jobs from the virtual film sheet to a camera
or printer, a queue of jobs waiting to be executed will be formed
for each camera and printer.
O.5
You can obtain information about which and how many film jobs
are currently being executed, are waiting to be executed or have
been completed at any time. You can stop the entire queue, or
repeat or delete individual film jobs and thus intervene in the
execution of the queue.
O.5
In the Film Task Status dialog box, you can obtain information
about film jobs that are waiting to be executed in the queues for
each camera and printer.
O.5
On the status bar below the control area, you can see whether
your system is currently exposing images on film in the background and whether exposure is progressing without error. O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.51
Filming
O.5
Camera in operation
O.5
O.5
O.5
O.5
0.0
O.52
Operator Manual
Filming
O.5
O.5
O.5
Regardless of whether your system is currently printing/exposing films or not, you can call up the Film Task Status window
via the Patient main menu or a button at any time and from any
task card. There, you can obtain information about the film jobs
in the queues.
O.5
Once film exposure in the background has started, you can also
display the dialog box by clicking on the icons in the status bar.
That is useful if transmission errors occur. You can then immediately see which film job and which camera are affected and
take appropriate action.
O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.53
Filming
O.5
Call up Patient > Film Task Status... menu item in any task
card, or in the Patient Browser.
Or
O.5
O.5
0.0
O.54
Operator Manual
Filming
Camera
O.5
In the upper part of the dialog box, all the cameras and printers
are displayed that are connected to your system.
O.5
O.5
O.5
Printer
Click on one of the other camera icons if you want to view the
queue for another camera.
O.5
Click on one of the printer icons if you want to view the queue
for the respective printer.
The Windows XP print job control box is displayed. Here you
can manipulate the print jobs for the selected printer by using
the menu entries of the Windows XP operating system.
O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.55
Filming
O.5
O.5
0.0
O.56
Operator Manual
Filming
O.5
The Film Task Status dialog box contains a job list with the following information:
O.5
O.5
Name of the film job (patient name, if a film job contains the images of only one patient, or multiple, if the job contains images
of more than one patient).
O.5
Status
O.5
O.5
Printed
The job is completed, all images have been sent to the camera.
Printing
The job is currently being sent to the camera.
Queued
The job is in the queue and will be sent to the camera as
soon as it is free.
Stopped
The job has been stopped.
Aborted
The job was aborted and is treated as completed. Is has the
same work status as Printed.
No. of Sheets
O.5
O.5
The sheet number and the total number of film sheets the film
job contains are displayed on the printout.
No. of Copies
O.5
Number of copies
O.5
Urgent
O.5
O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.57
Filming
If the list contains more film jobs than can be displayed in the
content window, you can page through the queue of film jobs
using the scroll bar. When you open the window, the first job
with Active status (or Queued) is displayed in the list.
O.5
Scroll the display up to view jobs already exposed on film
(Printed).
O.5
In the Film Task Status dialog box, you can select film jobs and
influence them by clicking buttons.
O.5
The status of a job determines how you can influence its execution and therefore what buttons are active.
O.5
Only film jobs sent to a camera can be modified in the Film
Task Status dialog box.
0.0
O.58
Operator Manual
Filming
Stopping jobs
O.5
You can stop jobs with the status Queued or Printed at any
time, for example to insert a new film.
O.5
Click on the Stop button.
All film jobs of this queue are stopped (status Stopped). In the
job which is being exposed, a sheet which has been started is
first completed. All the following film sheets are then no longer
processed.
O.5
Resuming jobs
O.5
Repeating jobs
O.5
You can repeat a film job that has already been exposed and is
therefore completed as long as it is still in the queue.
O.5
Select the film job already exposed on film (status Printed).
O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.59
Deleting jobs
Filming
O.5
You can delete film jobs that are listed in a queue regardless of
their status.
O.5
Select the job(s) that you want to delete (multiple selection
using the Ctrl or Shift key).
Or
O.5
Click on Select All if you want to delete all the jobs in the
queue.
Click on the Delete button to delete the selected job(s).
If you delete a job that is being exposed, the sheet that has
been started will be completed. All the following sheets will
not be exposed on film.
Set the film jobs that you want to process first as urgent.
O.5
O.5
O.5
Select one or more film jobs with the Queued status and
click on Urgent.
This job moves to the first position amongst the jobs with the
Queued status.
O.5
If more than one job is classified as urgent, they are executed
in the order in which they are listed.
O.5
0.0
O.510
Operator Manual
Filming
Selecting another
camera
You can select a new camera for one or more film jobs.
O.5
O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.511
Filming
O.5
If one of your cameras is defective or switched off this is indicated by a crossed-out camera icon in the header bar of the
Film Task Status dialog box.
O.5
You can redirect the queue or even individual film jobs for this
camera to another camera.
O.5
O.5
All film jobs whose film size is not supported by the destination
camera remain in the queue for the original camera. These jobs
are assigned the status queued, but do not block the following
film jobs so that these can be redirected to another camera.
You can send these film jobs again when the fault has been
remedied or you can redirect them to a camera that supports
the required film sizes.
O.5
0.0
O.512
Operator Manual
Filming
O.5
O.5
Reactivating a queue
after system restart
O.5
O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.513
Filming
0.0
O.514
Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.6
Configuring Filming
O.6
You can adapt the filming and printing of images to your requirements in a flexible and individual way.
O.6
The NUMARIS/4 Configuration Panel contains a configuration window for setting up the film function.
O.6
O.6
O.6
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.61
Configuring Filming
Filming
O.6
You can change and create film layouts using the Film Task
and the Series tab cards in the Filming Layout window.
O.6
0.0
O.62
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.63
Configuring Filming
Defining a study-specific
layout
Filming
O.6
O.6
NOTE
Your system can manage up to 100 layouts. If you attempt
to create a 101st layout, an error message is displayed.
You must then delete an existing layout.
O.6
0.0
O.64
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.65
Configuring Filming
Filming
O.6
On the Film Task tab card, you can define all the settings that
determine the structure and execution of a film job.
O.6
Click the Film Task tab card into the foreground, if necessary.
0.0
O.66
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
Click the New film job by patient option if you want a film
job only to contain the images of a patient.
Or
O.6
Deselect the New film job by patient option to permit multiple film jobs.
Page O.15, Multiple film job
O.6
O.6
O.6
O.6
O.6
Click on the New row of images by option if you want to permit empty fields in the film sheet.
Here you define whether a new line is to be started in the film
sheet for each patient, each study, or each series.
Or
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.67
Configuring Filming
Filming a partial
selection
Filming
O.6
O.6
Use the spin buttons to set whether every nth image or all
images (n=1) of a film job are to be copied in the virtual film
sheet and therefore exposed/printed.
Number of copies
O.6
Film size
O.6
O.6
O.6
Page number
O.6
Select Page number on print out if you want the page number to be added to the printout.
0.0
O.68
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
On the Series tab card, you define with what settings a film
sheet is exposed or printed.
O.6
You can only print/expose film sheets in portrait format.
Click the Series tab card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.69
Configuring Filming
Filming
O.6
O.6
Define in the Layout divisions selection list how many columns and rows a film sheet has.
The division is shown in a diagram in the display window.
O.6
Portrait/landscape
O.6
0.0
O.610
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
O.6
Reference image
O.6
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.611
Configuring Filming
Filming
O.6
O.6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A1
A2
A3
A4
A1
S1
A2
S2
A5
A6
A7
A8
A5
A6
A7
A8
A3
S3
A4
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
A5
S5
A6
S6
S5
S6
S7
S8
A7
S7
A8
S8
O.6
If you have created the film job by drag & drop, no copies of
the series are created.
0.0
O.612
Operator Manual
Filming
Aspect Ratio
Configuring Filming
O.6
O.6
Define the size with which you want the images to be displayed in the segments:
Keep visible part: The image is displayed in the segment
with maximum size, without being cropped. This is the
default.
Page O.49, Fit to segment
Original Image: The image is displayed in its original size.
Depending on the original size, the image might be cropped
or displayed too small in the segment.
Page O.410, Original image
Clip document: The image is enlarged so that it fills the
entire segment. The overlapping edges are cropped accordingly.
Page O.49, Clip document
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.613
Configuring Filming
Filming
O.6
0.0
O.614
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
You can only assign one specific layout to each study or series.
This layout is then automatically used for filming the images. O.6
You can assign a layout by selecting a study or series stored on
your system and the layout required and then linking the two. O.6
If a layout other than the standard layout is already assigned
to a study or series, you must first cancel this link before you
can assign a new study-specific layout.
Page O.618, Canceling a layout assignment
In the Film layouts selection list, you will find a list of the available layouts.
O.6
O.6
O.6
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.615
Configuring Filming
Selecting a study/series
Filming
O.6
O.6
In the Available Studies area, you can see a list of the studies
with their series.
O.6
Click on the + - symbol in front of a study to display the
series associated with it.
You can only select entire studies if they are not subdivided
into series. In such cases, the + - or - - symbol in front of
the entry is missing.
O.6
O.6
0.0
O.616
Operator Manual
Filming
Configuring Filming
O.6
As soon as you have assigned a study-specific layout, the corresponding study or series is entered in the Studies/Series
linked to selected layout list.
O.6
Here you can see for what studies or series the displayed layout
is set.
O.6
In the Currently linked layout column in the Available Studies area, you can see which layout is linked with a certain
study.
O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
O.617
Configuring Filming
Filming
O.6
Deleting a layout
O.6
Your system can store and manage up to 100 layouts. Therefore you should regularly delete those film layouts that you no
longer require to make space for new study-specific layouts that
you create in the Filming Layout window.
O.6
Select a layout that you no longer require from the Film layouts selection list.
O.6
O.6
0.0
O.618
Operator Manual
APPENDIX
References
P.0
syngo MR 2006T
P1
References
syngo MR
Position
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.122
Orientation
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.122
Rotation
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.123
FoV phase
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.123
FoV read
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.123
Thickness
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.123
Resp. control
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.124
Scout mode
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.126
Scout duration
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.126
Scout TR
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.126
Accept window
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.127
Position accept window
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.128
Accept. position (green)
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.128
Accept. position
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.128
Search window
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.129
Search position (red)
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.129
Store profile images
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.129
0.0
P2
Operator Manual
syngo MR
References
Tracking factor
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.130
Chronological Position
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.130
Excitation sequence of slices ....................................... P.131
Multi-slice mode
Geometry Common, Sequence Part 1 ............... P.131
Series
Geometry Common ............................................ P.133
Concatenations
Routine, Geometry Common,
Physio Signal1, Physio PACE .................................. P.134
Image numbering
System Miscellaneous ........................................ P.135
Image contrast and resolution ...................................... P.137
Repetition time (TR)
Routine, Contrast, Geometry Common,
Physio Signal1 ......................................................... P.137
Echo time (TE)
Routine, Contrast ................................................ P.138
Inversion time (TI)
Contrast, Physio Cardiac .................................... P.139
Delay time (TD)
Contrast .............................................................. P.139
Averages
Routine, Contrast ................................................ P.140
Flip angle
Contrast, ToF ...................................................... P.140
Magn. preparation
Contrast, Physio Cardiac .................................... P.141
Reconstruction
Contrast .............................................................. P.142
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P3
References
syngo MR
Fat suppression
Contrast, Geometry Saturation,
Physio Cardiac ......................................................... P.143
Fat sat. mode
Contrast, Geometry Saturation ........................... P.144
Water suppression
Contrast, Geometry Saturation ........................... P.145
Restore Magn.
Contrast, Geometry Saturation ........................... P.146
Magnetization transfer (MTC)
Contrast, Angio Common .................................... P.146
FoV read, FoV phase
Routine, Geometry Common,
Resolution Common................................................. P.147
Base resolution
Resolution Common ............................................ P.150
Phase resolution
Resolution Common ............................................ P.151
Interpolation
Resolution Common ............................................ P.153
Slice resolution
Resolution Common ............................................ P.154
Phase partial Fourier
Resolution Common ............................................ P.156
Slice partial Fourier
Routine, Resolution Common ............................. P.157
PAT mode
Resolution iPAT ................................................... P.158
Accel. Factor PE
Resolution iPAT ................................................... P.160
Max. recomm. Factor PE
Resolution iPAT ................................................... P.160
Ref. lines PE
Resolution iPAT ................................................... P.161
0.0
P4
Operator Manual
syngo MR
References
Accel. Factor 3D
Resolution PAT .................................................... P.162
Max. recomm. Factor 3D
Resolution PAT .................................................... P.163
Ref. lines 3D
Resolution PAT .................................................... P.164
Matrix coil mode
Resolution iPAT ................................................... P.165
Filter
Routine, Resolution Common ................................. P.168
Parameters for dynamic scanning ............................... P.177
Infinite measurement
Contrast, BOLD ................................................. P.177
Measurements
Contrast, BOLD, Perf, Inline Breast,
Inline Common ........................................................ P.177
Pause after meas.
Contrast, BOLD, Inline Breast ............................. P.178
Delay in TR
Contrast, BOLD .................................................. P.179
Multiple series
Contrast, BOLD, Perf. ......................................... P.180
Position of the scan region ........................................... P.181
Combining array images
System Miscellaneous ........................................ P.182
Scan at current table position
System Miscellaneous ........................................ P.182
Scan Region Position
System Miscellaneous ........................................ P.183
Scan region Memory
System Miscellaneous ........................................ P.184
Coils and coil elements
Routine, System Coils ............................................. P.185
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P5
References
syngo MR
0.0
P6
Operator Manual
syngo MR
References
Segments
Sequence Part 2, Physio Signal1 ....................... P.196
Combined echoes
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.197
RF Pulse Type
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.197
Gradient mode
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.198
Excitation
Sequence Part 2 ............................................... P.1100
RF spoiling
Sequence Part 2 ............................................... P.1100
Application-specific parameters ................................. P.1101
Inflow
Angio Common ................................................. P.1102
Flow direction
Angio Common ................................................. P.1102
3D centr. reordering
Angio Common ................................................. P.1103
Time to Center
Angio Common ................................................. P.1103
Flow mode
Angio Common ................................................. P.1104
Flow velocity
Angio Common ................................................. P.1105
Velocity enc.
Angio Common ................................................. P.1105
Direction
Angio Common ................................................. P.1105
Rephased images
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
Magnitude images
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P7
References
syngo MR
Magnitude sum
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
Phase images
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
Diffusion mode
Diff ..................................................................... P.1107
Diff. weightings
Diff ..................................................................... P.1108
b-value
Diff ..................................................................... P.1109
Diffusion-weighted images
Diff ..................................................................... P.1109
Trace-weighted images
Diff ..................................................................... P.1110
Average ADC maps
Diff ..................................................................... P.1110
Individual ADC maps
Diff ..................................................................... P.1111
Noise level
Diff ..................................................................... P.1111
Diffusion moment
Diff ..................................................................... P.1111
Diff. directions ........................................................ P.1112
Original images
Perf .................................................................... P.1113
Time-to-Peak-Map (TTP)
Perf, Inline Breast .............................................. P.1113
Percentage of Baseline at Peak map (PBP)
Perf .................................................................... P.1114
Global Bolus Plot (GBP)
Perf .................................................................... P.1114
Wash - In
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1114
0.0
P8
Operator Manual
syngo MR
References
Color table
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
First measurement
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
Last measurement
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
Highest value
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
Wash - Out
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1116
PEI
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1116
Starting ignore meas
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1116
Motion correction
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1117
Interpolation
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1118
Spatial filter
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1119
Filter setting
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1119
t-Test
BOLD ................................................................ P.1120
Dynamic t-cards
BOLD ................................................................ P.1120
Threshold
BOLD ................................................................ P.1121
Window
BOLD ................................................................ P.1121
Paradigm size
BOLD ................................................................ P.1121
Paradigm table
BOLD ................................................................ P.1122
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P9
References
syngo MR
Dark blood
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1123
Tagging
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1123
Distance
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1124
Angle
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1124
Parameters for image evaluation ............................... P.1125
Subtract
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1125
Saving images
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1126
Autoscaling
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1126
Scaling factor
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1127
Offset
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1127
Subtrahend
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1128
Std-Dev-Sag
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1129
Std-Dev-Cor
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1129
Std-Dev-Tra
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1130
Std-Dev-Time
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1130
MIP-Sag
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1131
MIP-Cor
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1131
0.0
P10
Operator Manual
syngo MR
References
MIP-Tra
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1132
MIP-Time
Inline Common, Angio Inline, Inline Breast ....... P.1132
Save original images
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1133
Parameters for physiologically triggered scanning .... P.1134
1st Signal/Mode
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1134
Average cycle
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1136
Acquisition window
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1136
Trigger pulse
Physio Signal 1, Physio PACE .......................... P.1137
Trigger delay
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1137
Phases
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1138
Calculated phases
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1138
Threshold
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1139
Respiratory phase
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1139
Slices / respiratory cycle
Physio PACE ..................................................... P.1140
Cardiac trigger / respiratory cycle
Physio PACE ..................................................... P.1140
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P11
References
syngo MR
0.0
P12
Operator Manual
APPENDIX
P.1
Measurement
Parameters
P.1
This section provides a detailed description of the measurement parameters that allow value modifications within various
scan protocols in syngo MR.
P.1
These measurement parameters are combined into comprehensive groups of topics.
P.1
Each parameter description includes a reference to the parameter cards of the exam task card where the parameter may be
entered or modified.
P.1
The Exam part of this user manual provides instructions on how
to work with the parameter cards including the input tools available.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters
P.1
The Managing and adjusting the system part of this user
manual contains a detailed description of the parameters used
for system adjustment.
Page C.21, Adjusting the System
P.1
The Spectroscopy Manual provides information regarding measurement parameters relevant only for spectroscopy scans. P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.11
Measurement Parameters
References
Slice parameters
P.1
By entering slice parameters, you control the position, orientation, and extent of the slice to be measured.
P.1
The parameters available for editing in the parameter cards
vary depending on whether the current scan protocol is used for
a 2D or 3D scan. Measurement parameters with the same
name may have different characteristics for 2D and 3D scans.
P.1
0.0
P.12
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
The slices or slabs to be scanned within a protocol are combined into groups.
P.1
The number of the slice group currently displayed is indicated.
All slice parameters currently listed on the Routine or Geometry card refer to this slice or slab group.
P.1
Displaying parameters of
another group
P.1
The selection list of the Slice group or Slab group field shows
how many slice or slab groups are planned in the current scan
protocol.
P.1
This list allows you to select another group and check and
change its parameters.
P.1
P.1
The Plus button next to the Slice or Slab group selection list
lets you create a new group.
P.1
The new slice/slab group is added to the selected reference
image. To avoid overlapping, it is slightly offset compared to the
existing group to the far side.
P.1
Deleting a group
P.1
You can use the Minus button to delete the current group.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.13
Measurement Parameters
References
Slices/slabs
Routine, Geometry Common
P.1
P.1
The number of slices or slabs defines the extent of the examination region in the slice selection direction.
P.1
The larger the number of slices to be scanned, the longer the
scanning time for sequential multislice scans.
P.1
The number of slices or slabs possible with interleaved multiple
slice measurements depends on the repetition time TR. Therefore, the number of slices or slabs for a constant repetition time
can be increased only within the range limits. If the limit is
exceeded, the TR is automatically adjusted by the system. The
Confirm Parameter Changes message box notifies you of
parameter adjustments.
Page F.572
P.1
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the Slices or
Slabs field, a tool tip displays the number of slices or slabs
planned in the scan protocol.
P.1
0.0
P.14
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Dist. factor
Routine, Geometry Common
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.15
Measurement Parameters
References
Slice thickness
Routine, Geometry Common, Resolution Common
P.1
P.1
Together with the number of slices, the slice thickness determines the extent of the scan region in the slice-selection direction.
P.1
2D scans
P.1
3D scans
P.1
0.0
P.16
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
The Slices per slab parameter shows the number of slices per
slab. The slab thickness is adjusted after each change because
the thickness is calculated from the number of slices and the
slice thickness. In addition, absolute slice oversampling
changes since it is defined as a percentage of the slab thickness.
P.1
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the spin box,
a tool tip displays the resulting slab thickness in millimeters.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.17
Measurement Parameters
References
Orientation
Routine, Geometry Common
P.1
Selecting a main
orientation
P.1
R
F
0.0
P.18
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
Clicking this button next to the selection list opens the Orientation dialog box where you can select oblique or double-oblique
orientation for your current slice/slab group.
P.1
P.1
Sagittal slice
Coronal slice
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.19
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
Sagittal slice
Transverse slice
Coronal slice
0.0
P.110
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Position
Routine, Geometry Common
P.1
The Position field shows the position of the center of the slice
or slab group.
P.1
If the position matches the isocenter, the input field is grayed
out.
Displaying the slice
position
P.1
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the Position
field, a tool tip indicates the slice position.
P.1
Phase Offcenter
shows the offset in the phase-encoding direction
Read Offcenter
shows the offset in the readout direction
Slice Shift
shows the offset in the slice selection direction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.111
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
The Position selection list lets you move the current slice and
slab group into the magnet isocenter.
P.1
Or
P.1
Click this button next to the selection list to display the Position dialog box.
This window allows you to position your slice/slab group with a
precision of 0.1 mm.
P.1
If necessary, select the Position mode.
L-P-H
This mode allows you to enter the shift based on the patient
coordinate system.
L - to the left (negative value: shift to the right),
P - to posterior (negative value: to anterior),
H - in direction of the head (negative value: in direction of the
feet).
Offcenter shift
This mode allows you to enter the shift in the gradient directions:
Phase - offcenter in phase-encoding direction
Read - offcenter in readout direction
Shift - shift in slice selection direction
The selected Position mode is maintained after the current
slice positioning procedure. When you open the Position dialog box the next time (even from another protocol), the position mode previously selected continues to apply.
0.0
P.112
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
The current phase-encoding direction (direction of the phaseencoding gradient) is indicated in the main orientations of the
patient coordinate system.
P.1
You can change the phase-encoding direction. This will swap
the phase-encoding and readout direction.
P.1
Using this method allows you to prevent aliasing artifacts in the
phase-encoding direction or change the direction of flow and
motion artifacts.
P.1
The selection list Phase enc. dir. on the parameter cards contains only options relevant to the current slice/3D slab orientation.
P.1
Phase-encoding direction
Slice orientation
transverse
Slice
orientation
transverse
Readout direction
Phase-encoding direction
Readout direction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.113
Measurement Parameters
References
Phase oversampling
Routine, Geometry Common
P.1
Phase oversampling increases the phase-encoded area symmetrically on both sides of the field of view (FoV). This extended
FoV area is not displayed in the reconstructed image.
P.1
Phase oversampling is used to prevent overfolding artifacts.
Aliasing artifacts occur when the excited body regions are
larger than the field of view (FoV) in the phase-encoding direction. These regions are visibly "folded" on the opposite side of
the image.
P.1
Phase oversampling increases the scan time. The signal-tonoise ratio is improved.
P.1
0.0
P.114
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Oversampling is automatically applied in the readout direction because it does not increase the scan time.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.115
Measurement Parameters
References
Slice oversampling
Routine, Geometry Common
P.1
Slice oversampling increases the phase-encoded area symmetrically on both sides of the slab in the slice selection direction.
P.1
This creates slices that are reconstructed but not displayed in
the image. Using this method allows you to prevent aliasing artifacts in the slice-selection direction for 3D scans.
P.1
Slice oversampling is indicated as a percentage of the slab
thickness.
P.1
Slice oversampling on both
sides of the slab
Slab
0.0
P.116
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Saturation
P.1
Saturation mode
Geometry Saturation
P.1
The Saturation mode selection list allows you to select the frequency for transmitting saturation pulses.
P.1
Standard
Saturation pulses are transmitted before each scan.
Quick
Saturation pulses are not transmitted before each scan.
Selecting the Quick saturation mode lets you reduce the scan
time with fat/water saturation and regional saturation (regular
and parallel saturation regions). During runtime, the sequence
calculates the frequency for transmitting the saturation pulses.P.1
Quick mode can be used e.g. for breath-hold studies to
reduce scan time.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.117
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
P.1
freely position standard saturation regions using their Orientation and Position.
The procedure is similar to the positioning of slice and slab
groups.
Page P.18, Page P.111
change the thickness of standard saturation regions.
P.1
The Plus button next to the saturation region field lets you add
new saturation regions to the scan protocol.
P.1
Deleting a saturation
region
P.1
The Minus button lets you delete the current saturation region.P.1
0.0
P.118
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
The Special sat. selection list lets you select a parallel or tracking saturation region.
Special saturators can be applied only if there is just one slice/
slab.
P.1
Tracking saturation regions are excited before the scanning
of each slice at the specified distance either "before" or "after"
the slice and in the specified thickness. In this way, they are
tracking the slice currently scanned within the slice group.
P.1
Parallel saturation regions are positioned either on one side
or on both sides parallel to the slice group. These saturation
regions do not move along with the slice, but rather remain at
the specified distance "before" or "after" or on both sides of the
slice group.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.119
Measurement Parameters
References
The setting "before" or "after" the slice or slice group is displayed in the main orientation of the slice group:
P.1
For transverse main orientation: H ("before")/F ("behind")
For sagittal main orientation: L ("before")/R ("behind")
For coronal main orientation: P ("before")/A ("behind")
"Before" means that the saturation region tracks ahead and
"behind" that the saturation region tracks behind.
P.1
The Thickness spin box allows you to enter the slice thickness
of the saturation regions.
P.1
The Gap spin box allows you to enter the distance from the corresponding slice or slab group.
P.1
0.0
P.120
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Navigator objects
P.1
Navigator
Geometry Navigator
P.1
This is where you select the type of the navigator object currently displayed. All parameters currently displayed on the
Geometry Navigator card refer to this navigator object.
P.1
You position the navigator exactly on the dome of the diaphragm. Use coronal as well as transverse images for optimal
positioning.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.121
Measurement Parameters
References
Position
Geometry Navigator
P.1
P.1
Orientation
Geometry Navigator
P.1
The Orientation field lets you select the position of the navigator object in the patient coordinate system.
Page P.18, Selecting a main orientation
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.122
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Rotation
Geometry Navigator
P.1
FoV phase
Geometry Navigator
P.1
The FoV phase field lets you enter the extent of the navigator
object in the phase-encoding direction in millimeters.
P.1
FoV read
Geometry Navigator
P.1
The FoV read field lets you enter the extent of the navigator
object in the readout direction in millimeters.
P.1
Thickness
Geometry Navigator
P.1
The Thickness field allows you to enter the extent of the navigator slice in millimeters.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.123
Measurement Parameters
References
Resp. control
Physio PACE
P.1
The Resp. control field lets you select a method for suppressing respiratory artifacts.
P.1
Off
Navigator control is switched off.
Breath-hold
The slices of a concatenation will be scanned as soon as you
press the Scan Breathhold button on the inline display. The
number of manual starts required for the complete scan
equals the number of concatenations set.
Breath-hold & Monitor
Similar to Breath-hold. However, in addition, the respiratory
curve of the patient before the first breathhold as well as during pauses between breathhold intervals is monitored using
the Navigator.
Breath-hold & Follow
Similar to Breath-hold & Monitor. In addition, however, the
calculated offset of the diaphragm position between breathhold intervals is used to adjust the positions of the slices to
be scanned in real time.
0.0
P.124
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Gate
The image data are only accepted if the diaphragm position
is within the acceptance window.
Gate & Follow
If the navigator result is within the acceptance window, the
positions of the slices to be scanned are offset in accordance
with the navigator result and scanning is resumed with the
next iteration of the loop structure. Otherwise, the current
loop is repeated.
Trigger
Respiratory triggering reduces motion artifacts by synchronizing measurement of the image data with the respiratory
cycle of the patient.
A block of image data is acquired as soon as the sequence
of scanned diaphragm positions shows the end of the expiration phase.
Trigger & Follow
Similar to Trigger. However, in addition, the positions of the
slices to be scanned are offset in accordance with the navigator result.
Monitor only
The navigator signals are calculated and displayed in the
usual way, however, they are not used for controlling the
scan.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.125
Measurement Parameters
References
Scout mode
Physio PACE
P.1
Scout duration
Physio PACE
P.1
If you select the Scout mode checkbox, you can enter the duration of the preparation phase under Scout duration.
P.1
Scout TR
Physio PACE
P.1
The Scout TR field allows you to enter the repetition time for the
navigator pulses.
P.1
0.0
P.126
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Accept window
Physio PACE
P.1
This parameter is available if you select the Breathhold & Follow, Gate, Gate & Follow, Trigger, or Trigger &
Follow option under Resp. control.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.127
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
P.1
Accept. position
Physio PACE
P.1
With this parameter, you can set the center of the acceptance
window for Trigger and Trigger & Follow.The following
applies:
0 % of the center position correspond to the center position at
the end of expiration during the learning phase and 100 % corresponds to the center position at the end of inspiration during
the learning phase.
P.1
0.0
P.128
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Search window
Physio PACE
P.1
For Gate or Gate & Follow, you can enter the size of the window in millimeters in the Search window field.
P.1
The search window is displayed as a red box surrounding the
tolerance center in the Inline Display.
P.1
P.1
For Gate or Gate & Follow, you can enter the centering position of the search window in millimeters in the Search window
(red) field.
P.1
P.1
The temporal change of the navigator signal is displayed graphically in the Inline Display. These images can be saved in a
separate series.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.129
Measurement Parameters
References
Tracking factor
Physio PACE
P.1
This parameter is available if you select the Breathhold & Follow, Trigger & Follow, or Gate & Follow option
under Resp. control.
P.1
The Tracking factor establishes the correlation between the
movement of the diaphragm and the resulting shift of the anatomy to be measured.
P.1
Chronological Position
Physio PACE
P.1
The Chronological Position field lets you select the time for
triggering the navigator signal (with Gate or Gate & Follow). P.1
Before the echo train of the image
After the echo train of the image
If you have selected Gate & Follow under respiratory control, the After the echo train of the image option is not available.
Before and after the echo train of the image
If you have selected Gate & Follow under respiratory control, the slice sequence algorithm based on the first navigator
signal and the gating algorithm based on the second navigator signal will change.
0.0
P.130
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
Multi-slice mode
Geometry Common, Sequence Part 1
P.1
P.1
This parameter allows you to select a scan method for multislice scanning:
P.1
Sequential - scanning slice by slice
All lines (phase-encoding steps) of the first slice are scanned
in sequence first, followed by all lines of the second slice etc.
Interleaved - scanning by lines
All the first lines (phase-encoding steps) of all slices within a
concatenation are scanned in sequence in one repetition
time TR first, followed by all second lines etc.
Single Shot - special mode for fast sequences
All lines (phase encoding steps) of one slice are scanned in
one go after excitation. Then all lines of the second slice in
one go etc.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.131
Measurement Parameters
References
The Sequential multislice mode is necessary for a tracking saturation region. If you are planning a tracking saturation region
while Interleaved mode is set, the system automatically
switches to Sequential mode. The Confirm Parameter
Changes message box notifies you of parameter adjustment.P.1
The Interleaved multislice mode lets you reduce the scan time.
The individual lines of different slices can be excited in quicker
succession within a repetition time TR without affecting the signals of adjacent lines.
P.1
The Single shot multislice mode is available for very fast
sequences only (e.g. epi, haste, Turboflash). These sequences
do not offer any other modes.
P.1
0.0
P.132
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Series
Geometry Common
P.1
P.1
Ascending
The slices are excited starting at the beginning of the slice or
slab group (start -> end).
Descending
The slices are excited starting at the end of the slice or slab
group (end -> start).
Interleaved
Ascending
Interleaved
5
5
4
4
3
2
1
1
Descending
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.133
Measurement Parameters
References
Interl. in B.-h.
If you select Interl. in B.-h. (interleaved in breath-hold interval), the slices are scanned separately for each breath-hold
interval of a multiple breath-hold scan, similar to Interleaved
mode (see Application Manual).
The Interl. in B.-h. option is available only if you are planning
a scan in multiple breath-hold mode after selecting either
Breath-hold, Breath-hold & Monitor, or Breath-hold & Follow under Resp. control on the Physio PACE parameter
card.
Concatenations
Routine, Geometry Common, Physio Signal1,
Physio PACE
P.1
0.0
P.134
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Image numbering
System Miscellaneous
P.1
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.135
Measurement Parameters
References
0.0
P.136
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
P.1
The repetition time is the time that elapses between two consecutive excitations.
P.1
P.1
Short repetition times of about 400 ms produce good T1 contrast for spin-echo sequences.
Long repetition times of about 2000 ms produce good T2
contrast for spin-echo sequences.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.137
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
The echo time is the time between the RF excitation pulse and
the resulting echo that is measured.
P.1
For some sequences, the echo time cannot be changed. In this
case, the input field is grayed out.
P.1
You may enter several echo times for multi-echo sequences.
You can then scroll through the echo times using the arrow
keys. When you change a given echo time, the following echo
times will be adjusted accordingly.
P.1
For gradient echo sequences, a tool tip indicates the in-phase
and opposed-phase condition of the fat/water spin.
0.0
P.138
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
P.1
Using the delay time, you can insert a pause between concatenations, for example, to give breath holding instructions during
measurements with breath holding.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.139
Measurement Parameters
References
Averages
Routine, Contrast
P.1
Flip angle
Contrast, ToF
P.1
The flip angle specifies by what angle the longitudinal (z) magnetization should be rotated into the xy plane by the RF pulse. P.1
The flip angle directly affects image contrast.
P.1
With a 90 excitation pulse, for example, the longitudinal magnetization is rotated completely out of the z direction. If a
smaller flip angle is used, the magnetization returns to equilibrium more quickly allowing you to reduce the repetition time TR
(for gradient echo sequences).
P.1
For spin echo sequences, you can enhance the T1 contrast by
reducing the flip angle.
P.1
0.0
P.140
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Magn. preparation
Contrast, Physio Cardiac
P.1
P.1
P.1
Consider whether your current sequence is an inversion recovery sequence (IR) or a saturation recovery sequence (SR). P.1
The following options are available in the Magn. preparation
selection list:
P.1
Slice-sel./Slab-sel. (IR or SR)
The scans are performed slice by slice.
Non-sel. (IR or SR)
The RF pulses excite the entire volume irrespective of the
current slice position of the scan sequence.
None
No inversion pulse is transmitted.
If you select the None option from the Magn. preparation
list, the TI parameter is not available on the Contrast card.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.141
Measurement Parameters
References
Reconstruction
Contrast
P.1
You can select the image type(s) for reconstruction from the
Reconstruction selection list:
P.1
Magnitude - magnitude images
Phase - phase images
Real - real images
Magnitude/Phase - magnitude and phase images
Real/Phase - real and phase images
Real images can be selected only if an inversion pulse is
selected.
0.0
P.142
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Fat suppression
Contrast, Geometry Saturation, Physio Cardiac
P.1
P.1
Fat sat.
Suppresses the fat signal and does not affect TE; however,
TR is increased substantially resulting in longer scan times.
Water excit. (normal)
Suppresses the fat signal; leads to a moderate increase in
TE and TR.
Water excit. (fast)
Suppresses the fat signal; leads to a moderate increase of
TE and TR, however, the effectiveness of fat saturation is
somewhat lower than in Water excit. (normal) mode.
None
Does not suppress the fat component in the MR signal.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.143
Measurement Parameters
Fat saturation
References
P.1
You can reduce the scan time by selecting the Quick saturation
mode when applying fat saturation. Please note that not all
sequences support the Quick saturation mode.
Page P.117
P.1
P.1
Via the selection list Fat sat. mode you can set the type of fat
suppression.
P.1
Weak
Weak saturation
Strong
Strong saturation
0.0
P.144
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Water suppression
Contrast, Geometry Saturation
P.1
P.1
You can reduce the scan time by selecting the Quick saturation
mode when applying fat saturation. Please note that not all
sequences support the Quick saturation mode.
Page P.117
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.145
Measurement Parameters
References
Restore Magn.
Contrast, Geometry Saturation
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.146
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
The field of view (FoV) defines the anatomical region to be displayed (extent of scan in the readout and phase-encoding direction) and its resolution (pixel size).
P.1
The FoV in the phase-encoding direction (FoV phase) is
defined as a percentage of the FoV in the readout direction
(FoV read).
P.1
Square field of
view (FoV)
P.1
With the FoV phase set to 100 %, the system will scan a
square FoV. In other words, the same number of pixels is
scanned in the readout direction as in the phase-encoding
direction.
P.1
Phase-encoding
direction 4 steps
Readout direction
4 steps
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.147
Measurement Parameters
Rectangular
Field of view (FOV)
References
P.1
Phase-encoding
direction
Readout direction
P.1
0.0
P.148
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.149
Measurement Parameters
References
Base resolution
Resolution Common
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.150
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Phase resolution
Resolution Common
P.1
Phase resolution is the resolution of slices in the phase-encoding direction expressed as a percentage value of the base resolution.
P.1
If phase resolution is 100%, the resolution in the readout and
phase-encoding directions will have the same value and the
pixels are square. At 75%, the pixels are oblong and the resolution decreases.
P.1
If you reduce the FoV in the phase-encoding direction, the number of pixels has to be reduced as well to keep the resolution
ratio constant. As a result, the number of phase-encoding steps
are reduced.
P.1
If you hold the mouse pointer over the Phase resolution
parameter, a tool tip will be displayed together with the matrix.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.151
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
P.1
Field of view
phase (%)
Phase resolution
(%)
Matrix size
Pixels (mm)
256
100
100
256 256
11
256
75
100
192 256
11
256
100
75
192 256
1,33 1
256
75
75
144 256
1,33 1
P.1
The pixel size is determined by both the base resolution and the
phase resolution, as well as by the FoV in the readout direction.
The base resolution determines the number of pixels in the
readout direction, and the phase resolution determines the
aspect ratio of the pixels (square or rectangular).
P.1
Changing the FoV in the readout direction changes the pixel
size, but not the aspect ratio. For very large pixels, the resolution of the reconstructed images decreases because the signal
is averaged across a larger area.
P.1
0.0
P.152
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Interpolation
Resolution Common
P.1
NOTE
Interpolation doubles the size of the image matrix in the
readout and phase-encoding directions. No interpolation is
performed in the slice-selection direction.
P.1
If you increase the base resolution, interpolation is
deactivated automatically.
Otherwise, reconstruction time
would increase considerably
You can activate interpolation at any time.
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.153
Measurement Parameters
References
Slice resolution
Resolution Common
P.1
Slice selection
direction
Field of view
0.0
P.154
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.155
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
If partial Fourier matrices are used for 2D scans, only part (at
least half) of the phase-encoding steps are acquired.
P.1
Phase partial Fourier allows you to reduce the scanning time
while maintaining the spatial resolution via asymmetric sampling of the k space in the phase-encoding direction.
P.1
This reduces the scan time and worsens the signal-to-noise
ratio.
P.1
Possible settings:
P.1
0.0
P.156
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
With 3D scans, you can change the image matrix and therefore
the scan time not only via the phase-encoding direction and
readout direction but also via the slice-selection direction.
P.1
Identical to phase partial Fourier, slice partial Fourier only
acquires a part of the raw data space acquired in the sliceselection direction (asymmetric sampling of the k space in sliceselection direction).
P.1
The signal-to-noise ratio decreases, however, resolution in the
slice-selection direction remains the same.
P.1
Possible settings:
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.157
Measurement Parameters
References
PAT mode
Resolution iPAT
P.1
The PAT mode selection list allows you to choose a PAT reconstruction mode.
P.1
This parameter is dimmed. The default is set to None in case
there are not enough coil elements or RF receive channels.
To use the PAT algorithm, at least two coil elements and/or
RF receive channels have to be used.
When opening a protocol and the selected matrix coils have
to be adjusted to the matrix coil mode, resulting in an insufficient number of RF receive channels, the PAT mode value
will be set to None (at least two RF receive channels have to
be used for applying a PAT algorithm).
Page P.165
0.0
P.158
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
N OT E
The number of RF receive channels used depends on the
coils selected. For Matrix coils, the Matrix coil mode has to
be considered as well.
P.1
In the Matrix coil mode CP, one RF receive channel per
selected Matrix coil element cluster is allocated, in the Dual
mode, two RF receive channel are allocated, and in the
Triple mode, three RF receive channels per selected Matrix
coil element cluster are allocated.
P.1
P.1
None
The PAT reconstruction method is not used.
GRAPPA
PAT reconstruction mode based on the GRAPPA algorithm.
mSENSE
PAT reconstruction mode based on the mSENSE algorithm.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.159
Measurement Parameters
References
Accel. Factor PE
Resolution iPAT
P.1
Via the spin box Accel. factor PE the acceleration factor is set
in phase encoding direction for PAT reconstruction.
P.1
The acceleration factor in the phase-encoding direction may
correspond to the max. number of receive channels used.
P.1
N OT E
Values higher than the max. recommended Accel. factor
PE may have a negative effect on image quality.
P.1
0.0
P.160
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Ref. lines PE
Resolution iPAT
P.1
The Ref. lines PE spin box allows you to set the number of reference lines in the phase-encoding direction for a PAT reconstruction.
P.1
The number of reference lines in the phase-encoding direction cannot exceed the number of lines in the phase-encoding
direction.
P.1
N OT E
The max. number of Ref. lines is dynamically provided in
accord with the sequence and protocol parameters. P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.161
Measurement Parameters
References
Accel. Factor 3D
Resolution PAT
P.1
N OT E
When changing the parameter Accel. factor 3D, slice
oversampling may have to be slightly adjusted depending
on the number of selected slices (adjustment is automatic
via the Scan Assistant dialog)
P.1
0.0
P.162
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
N OT E
Values higher than the max. recommended Accel. factor
3D may have a negative effect on image quality.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.163
Measurement Parameters
References
Ref. lines 3D
Resolution PAT
P.1
N OT E
The max. number of Ref. lines is dynamically provided
depending on the sequence and protocol parameters. P.1
0.0
P.164
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
P.1
Dual: The three coil elements of the coil cluster act like two
CP coil elements. The coil cluster is read via two RF receive
channels.
Triple: The three coil elements of the coil cluster act like
three individual CP coil elements. The coil cluster is read via
three RF receive channels.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.165
Measurement Parameters
References
CP Mode
Lowest data volume
One RF receive
channel per coil
cluster
Dual Mode
Triple Mode
Two RF receive
channels per coil
cluster
Three RF receive
channels per coil cluster
P.1
0.0
P.166
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
The Matrix coil mode is not available for installations with Tim
[32x8] systems. All Matrix coils are operated in the CP mode.
P.1
N OT E
Applies to Matrix coils only - other coil elements are not
affected.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.167
Measurement Parameters
References
Filter
Routine, Resolution Common
P.1
To improve image quality, you can use filters for image reconstruction.
P.1
You can select any of the following filters:
P.1
You are able to either apply just one filter or combine several filters and use them simultaneously. However, please note a
number of filters are mutually exclusive (e.g. Raw data filter or
Elliptical filter).
P.1
0.0
P.168
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
The outer rows of the raw data matrix contain the edge information (i.e. high spatial frequency) of an image. You can weight
specific lines with the raw data filter, for example, to suppress
edge oscillation.
P.1
P.1
Select On.
The raw data filter is now active.
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.169
Measurement Parameters
References
0.0
P.170
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
P.1
Select On.
The FoV compensation filter is now active.
P.1
P.1
N OT E
If you use the FoV compensation filter, you are no longer
able to use the reconstructed images as reference images
for graphic slice positioning in a new examination.
P.1
P.1
Prescan normalization
filter
P.1
You are able to compensate for inhomogeneous image brightness with the Prescan normalization filter. The procedure is
similar to the "standard" (auto-calibrated) normalization filter.
However, the data for homogenization are determined via the
Prescan (max. possible FoV volume is imaged with a lower resolution than the preceding adjustment measurement) as compared to the measured image data used with the normalization
filter.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.171
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
N OT E
Use the "standard" normalization filter in place of the
Prescan filter whenever:
P.1
P.1
Select On.
The prescan normalization filter is now active.
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.172
Operator Manual
References
Normalization filter
Measurement Parameters
P.1
If you are using surface coils, the area in the vicinity of the coil
will appear lighter in the images and darker the areas farther
from the coil. The signal intensity is greater in the vicinity of the
coil.
P.1
Use the normalization filter to reduce the brightness of areas in
the vicinity of the coil and increase the brightness in areas farther away from the coil.
P.1
P.1
Select On.
The normalization filter is now active.
P.1
N OT E
The Filter properties dialog box is not available for the
normalization filter if you are planning a scan with the Body
Coil.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.173
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
Cut off shows the level of pixel brightness that excludes pixels
from image reconstruction.
P.1
This limit is expressed as a percentage of the maximum
intensity profile. If you set 20, for example, pixels whose intensity profile is below 20% of the maximum value will only be
corrected by a factor of 5 (=1/20%).
0.0
P.174
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
If you have selected Free from the Intensity selection list, you
are able to define the bandwidth of the filter and the limit for
pixel brightness yourself.
P.1
NOTE
Use of the normalization filter may lead to a loss of contrast
and an increase in background noise.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.175
Measurement Parameters
Elliptical filter
References
P.1
With the elliptical filter, you will only use the center of the raw
data space (the corners are set to 0).
P.1
That improves the signal-to-noise ratio up to 10% (without loss
of resolution).
P.1
P.1
Select On.
The elliptical filter is now active.
P.1
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.176
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
Infinite measurement
Contrast, BOLD
P.1
Measurements
Contrast, BOLD, Perf, Inline Breast, Inline Common
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.177
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
The Pause after meas. field is used for defining pauses (in seconds) for dynamic scans between individual scans. You are
able to enter individual pauses after each scan.
P.1
Click the horizontal arrow buttons below the input field of the
spin box to access a specific pause parameter.
Enter a value for the pause time in the spin box and change
the displayed value with the vertical spin buttons on the right
of the spin box.
If you hover the mouse pointer over the Pause after Meas.
parameter name, a tool tip will be displayed with the pause
time.
If you hold the mouse pointer over an input field of the spin
box, a tool tip will appear stating the starting and ending time
of the first 10 scans.
P.1
NOTE
In theory, you may define up to 64 separate pauses.
However, in most cases you set one pause that is the same
between all scans or you set the pause to zero.
If you increase the number of scans to 66, only the
automatic pause time can be set.
P.1
0.0
P.178
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Delay in TR
Contrast, BOLD
P.1
NOTE
You can only set one delay time which is the same for all
scans.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.179
Measurement Parameters
References
Multiple series
Contrast, BOLD, Perf.
P.1
When you have planned several scan runs, you have a choice
to:
P.1
Click the Multiple series option to save the generated
images in separate series for each scan.
Or
P.1
0.0
P.180
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.181
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
P.1
The Scan at current TP option specifies whether the protocol will be run at the current table position.
If the GPS of the online protocol editor contains reference
images at the time of switch on, the user is alerted via the
Scan Assistant Dialog and asked to unload the reference
images.
0.0
P.182
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
This parameter is visible only, when the parameter Scan at current TP is deactivated.
This parameter shows the position of the scan protocol where it
is scanned. The parameter is entered in series block coordinate
system.
P.1
P.1
(1) A protocol is opened. Images are loaded into the GSP and
the position of the scan region is taken from the reference
images. No Scan Assistant Dialog is displayed.
(2) The user is able to edit the position of the scan region. The
direction is determined via H (Head) or F (Feet) (selection
box); the position is defined in the value input field. If
images are in the GSP at this point in time, the user has to
decide whether to transfer the position from the protocol,
unloading the images from the GSP, or whether to transfer
the position of the images to the open protocol (displayed
in Scan Assistant Dialog).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.183
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
N OT E
When the image area of the task card Exam includes
images, all positions in the selection list Scan Region
Memory that do not correspond to the position of the scan
region of the loaded images, are set in square brackets. P.1
When selecting this type of position, the Scan Assistant
Dialog is displayed.
You have to decide whether to remove the loaded images
from the image area (use OK), so that you can apply the
selected scan region position or whether the scan region
position of the loaded images will be retained (use Undo).P.1
0.0
P.184
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
You can select the coils you want to use for your examination in
the right half of the System Coil parameter card. The parameter system coil card is divided into an upper and lower area via
a stylized patient. The location of the patient visualizes patient
positioning.
P.1
Head left--> Head- first
Head right--> Feet- first
Page F.539, Matrix coil mode
P.1
There are:
P.1
N OT E
Prior to a scan, detection of coil positioning may be
performed. This will be performed, when, e.g., the table was
moved changing the position of the scan region.
When coil positions are detected, the coils are shown in the
lower area of the system coil card.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.185
Measurement Parameters
Local coils
References
P.1
P.1
N OT E
Select the coil elements that are inside the region under
examination.
Coil elements outside this region degrade image quality. P.1
0.0
P.186
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.187
Measurement Parameters
References
Sequence-specific parameters
P.1
Introduction
Sequence Part 1
P.1
You may want to inform the patient about the start of the scan
via short knocking noises from the gradient system. These
noises inform the patient that scanning is about to begin.
P.1
0.0
P.188
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Dimension
Sequence Part 1
P.1
NOTE
You cannot switch the dimension for all sequences. In such
cases this parameter is displayed dimmed or is not offered.P.1
P.1
Elliptical scanning
Sequence Part 1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.189
Measurement Parameters
References
Phase stabilization
Sequence Part 1
P.1
Compensate T2 decay
Sequence Part 1
P.1
0.0
P.190
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Averaging mode
Sequence Part 1
P.1
If you are performing several scans, you can select a method for
averaging the scans:
P.1
Short term
gives a better signal-to-noise ratio while maintaining the best
resolution.
Long term
gives a better signal-to-noise ratio with optimized suppression of motion artifacts.
Sorting
Sequence Part 1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.191
Measurement Parameters
References
Asymmetric echo
Sequence Part 1
P.1
Contrasts
Sequence Part 1
P.1
0.0
P.192
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Bandwidth
Sequence Part 1
P.1
Allowed delay
Sequence Part 1
P.1
Here you can define a maximum delay time after the end of
measurement. This parameter defines the earliest time you
may restart scanning.
P.1
The delay time is used to reduce the specific absorption rate
(SAR). The required delay time is automatically calculated by
the system and ranges between 0 seconds and the maximum
delay time.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.193
Measurement Parameters
References
Flow compensation
Sequence Part 1
P.1
P.1
Yes
Compensation in readout and in slice-encoding direction
Read
In readout direction only
Slice
In slice-encoding direction only
No
No flow compensation
0.0
P.194
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Echo spacing
Sequence Part 1
P.1
P.1
P.1
NOTE
Excessive echo spacing may cause increased distortion in
EPI sequences due to susceptibility.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.195
Measurement Parameters
References
Turbo factor
Sequence Part 2
P.1
The Turbo factor specifies the number of refocused spin echoes per RF excitation that help generate an image.
P.1
It therefore determines the gain in scan time over a conventional spin echo sequence with comparable parameters.
P.1
EPI factor
Sequence Part 2
P.1
The EPI factor specifies the number of refocused gradient echoes per RF excitation involved in image generation.
P.1
In single-shot EPI sequences, the number of lines to be measured is used as the EPI factor.
Segments
Sequence Part 2, Physio Signal1
P.1
With the segments, you may define the number of rows in the k
space that are measured for an image during a TR interval. P.1
The Segments parameter is especially suitable for physiological imaging.
0.0
P.196
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Combined echoes
Sequence Part 2
P.1
RF Pulse Type
Sequence Part 2
P.1
RF pulse type defines the length and the envelope of the radio
frequency pulses.
P.1
The following settings are possible:
P.1
Fast
short RF pulse, which may cause cross-talk between the
slices/slabs. This setting is therefore only recommended for
fast scans with medium distance factors (for example,
breath-holding techniques)
Normal
RF pulse with a good slice profile, allowing for scans with a
small distance factor and little "cross-talk"
Low SAR
extended RF pulse with a good slice profile and reduced specific absorption rate
You can select this setting to reduce SAR. This reduces scan
performance.
Optimized
optimized RF pulse for reducing slice cross-talk
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.197
Measurement Parameters
References
Gradient mode
Sequence Part 2
P.1
Here you define the rise time and maximum gradient strength
the gradients can be switched during the sequence.
P.1
The possible settings depend on the gradient system:
P.1
Fast
The gradient rise time and strength are utilized to the full.
This mode may cause peripheral nerve stimulation in the
patient. The fast option is only available on Quantum and
Sonata systems.
Normal
For many sequences this setting is a good compromise
between performance and noise.
Whisper
Guarantees quietest gradients possible at an acceptable
performance level.
0.0
P.198
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.199
Measurement Parameters
References
Excitation
Sequence Part 2
P.1
P.1
slice-selective or slab-selective
non-selective
If you have selected the non-selective option, aliasing artifacts may occur in the slice-selection direction.
RF spoiling
Sequence Part 2
P.1
0.0
P.1100
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Application-specific parameters
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1101
Measurement Parameters
References
Inflow
Angio Common
P.1
The shape of the RF pulse is adapted to the velocity and direction of the blood flow (slow, medium, fast) to prevent saturation
effects of the blood when it passes through a slice or slab. P.1
In this way, even signal distribution of the blood vessels of a slab
is achieved.
P.1
TONE method = Tilted, Optimized, Nonsaturating Excitation
Flow direction
Angio Common
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.1102
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
3D centr. reordering
Angio Common
P.1
Time to Center
Angio Common
P.1
The Time to Center field shows the scan time required until the
scan has reached the k space center.
P.1
This information is required for timing the contrast agent bolus
in contrast agent enhanced angiography.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1103
Measurement Parameters
References
Flow mode
Angio Common
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.1104
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Flow velocity
Angio Common
P.1
P.1
Velocity enc.
Angio Common
P.1
P.1
Direction
Angio Common
Flow-sensitive axis for each flow sensitivity entered.
P.1
P.1
Through plane
The flow-sensitive axis is perpendicular to the image plane.
Only flow moving perpendicular to the image plane is
detected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1105
Measurement Parameters
References
Rephased images
Angio Common
P.1
Magnitude images
Angio Common
P.1
Magnitude sum
Angio Common
P.1
P.1
Phase images
Angio Common
P.1
0.0
P.1106
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Diffusion mode
Diff
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1107
Measurement Parameters
References
Read
One image is acquired per slice position and b-value, the diffusion weighting is in the readout direction.
Diagonal
In the HASTE sequence with a diffusion weighting, the diffusion weighting points in the direction of the spatial diagonal.
MDDW
MDDW stands for multi-directional diffusion weighting. One
diffusion-weighted images is acquired per slice position, per
b-value, and (for b> 0) per diffusion encoding direction. The
number of directions is defined with the Diff. Directions
parameter.
In MDDW mode it is not possible to calculate ADC maps or
other parameter images. This mode is mainly for customers
who have their own image post-processing system.
Diff. weightings
Diff
P.1
0.0
P.1108
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
b-value
Diff
P.1
P.1
Diffusion-weighted images
Diff
P.1
Here you can define the reconstruction settings for inline reconstruction of the diffusion:
P.1
When you click Diff. weighted images, you obtain original
images with diffusion weighting. These images contain T1, T2,
and diffusion-weighted portions.
P.1
Diffusion weighting is performed in the direction set with the Diffusion mode parameter (e.g. if it is Slice in the slice-selection
direction).
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1109
Measurement Parameters
References
Trace-weighted images
Diff
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.1110
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
Individual ADC maps show the ADC along the gradient axis.P.1
The option can only be selected if at least two b values are
set.
Noise level
Diff
P.1
Diffusion moment
Diff
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1111
Measurement Parameters
References
Diff. directions
P.1
Diff
P.1
If you have selected the MDDW mode, you can enter the number of diffusion encoding directions under Diff. directions. P.1
You can set 6 or 12 directions.
P.1
0.0
P.1112
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Original images
Perf
P.1
In perfusion scans, the original images are always reconstructed and stored. You can use them for additional postprocessing functions.
P.1
Time-to-Peak-Map (TTP)
Perf, Inline Breast
P.1
If the TTP option is activated, a time-to-peak image will be calculated for each slice. The pixel intensity value in the image
shows the time (in seconds) that elapsed before the signal peak
was reached.
P.1
The brighter the areas in the grayscale image, the longer the
time until signal peak. For this reason, arrival of the contrast
agent is delayed.
P.1
If you have set fewer than 15 measurements, you cannot activate the TTP option. On the Inline Breast card, the option is not
activated for fewer than 2 measurements.
P.1
In color perfusion images, the TTP display depends on the
selected color scale.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1113
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
P.1
Wash - In
Inline Breast
P.1
Here you can define whether the parameters for signal change
in the starting range of the dynamic measurement series will be
enabled.
P.1
0.0
P.1114
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Color table
Inline Breast
P.1
First measurement
Inline Breast
P.1
Last measurement
Inline Breast
P.1
Highest value
Inline Breast
P.1
You are not using the value of the last measurement but rather
the highest value in the range between the first and last measurement for calculating the Wash - In parameter image.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1115
Measurement Parameters
References
Wash - Out
Inline Breast
P.1
Here you can define whether the parameter card for signal
change will be calculated in the end range of the dynamic measurement series and the parameters enabled.
P.1
P.1
PEI
Inline Breast
P.1
P.1
P.1
The Starting ignore meas spin box is used to define the number of first scans that are not used for evaluation (contrast has
stabilized).
P.1
0.0
P.1116
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Motion correction
Perf, BOLD
P.1
P.1
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1117
Measurement Parameters
References
Interpolation
Perf, BOLD
P.1
0.0
P.1118
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Spatial filter
Perf, BOLD
P.1
Filter setting
Perf, BOLD
P.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
P.1
No filtering
Weak (2.0)
Medium (1.0)
Strong (0.5)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1119
Measurement Parameters
References
t-Test
BOLD
P.1
Dynamic t-cards
BOLD
P.1
If the Dynamic t-cards option is activated, the t-cards generated during scanning are stored. This permits real-time operation of the Neuro 3D-task card.
P.1
A "StartFMRI" series is also created at the start of scanning.
P.1
0.0
P.1120
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Threshold
BOLD
P.1
Window
BOLD
P.1
Paradigm size
BOLD
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1121
Measurement Parameters
References
Paradigm table
BOLD
P.1
This table can only be edited if t-test is selected. You can make
one of the following settings for each scan here:
P.1
Baseline
The scan is performed as a functional scan without stimulation.
Active
The scan is performed as a functional scan with stimulation.
Ignore
The scan is not used for evaluation.
You may edit the cells in the right column of the paradigm table.
Just click them with the mouse. The selection list appears and
you can select one of the three settings listed above:
P.1
0.0
P.1122
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Dark blood
Physio Cardiac
P.1
Tagging
Physio Cardiac
P.1
It is possible to excite tagging lines in the image plane. This provides for clearly visible differences in heart wall thickness.
P.1
Possible settings:
P.1
Grid Tag
Grid of lines as orientation aid. For visualizing regional and
global heart wall movements.
Line Tag
Parallel lines as orientation aids. For visualizing heart wall
movements in the long main axis view or four-chamber view.
None
No orientation aids
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1123
Measurement Parameters
References
Distance
Physio Cardiac
P.1
Angle
Physio Cardiac
P.1
If you have selected Line Tag as auxiliary lines, you can also
enter the angle between the orientation lines (tags) and the
phase-encoding direction.
P.1
0.0
P.1124
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
Subtract
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
If the Subtract option is activated, subtraction evaluation is performed with a series of current scans.
P.1
This generates images showing, for example, changes after
contrast agent administration.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1125
Measurement Parameters
References
Saving images
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
Autoscaling
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
0.0
P.1126
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Scaling factor
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
Offset
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
The Offset spin box is used for entering an offset for the lower
and upper threshold of the display area of the calculated subtraction values.
P.1
The Offset parameter is only displayed, if the Subtract option
is activated and the Autoscaling option is deactivated.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1127
Measurement Parameters
References
Subtrahend
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
0.0
P.1128
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Std-Dev-Sag
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
Std-Dev-Cor
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1129
Measurement Parameters
References
Std-Dev-Tra
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
Std-Dev-Time
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
0.0
P.1130
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
MIP-Sag
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
If the MIP-Sag option is activated, MIP images with sagittal orientation are calculated from the acquired slabs of the current
protocol.
P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Sag parameter if it is a 3D
scan and the number of slices in the slabs is at least 4.
MIP-Cor
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
If the MIP-Cor option is activated, MIP images with coronal orientation are calculated from the acquired slabs of the current
protocol.
P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Cor parameter if it is a 3D
scan and the number of slices in the slabs is at least 4.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1131
Measurement Parameters
References
MIP-Tra
Inline Common, Angio Inline
P.1
MIP-Time
Inline Common, Angio Inline, Inline Breast
P.1
If the MIP-Time option is activated, MIP images with the orientation of the acquired slice groups or slabs are calculated from
the acquired slice groups or slabs of the current protocol. In the
calculation, the highest pixel value along the time axis is taken
into account.
P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Time option if there is at
least one scan repetition or, in the case of triggered scans, at
least 2 phases are scanned.
0.0
P.1132
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1133
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
Physiologically triggered scan synchronize physiological signals sensed on the patient's body with scans. This avoids
motion artifacts caused by the heartbeat or respiration.
P.1
You may also retrospectively assign acquired image data to
physiological signal curves.
P.1
You will find measurement parameters specifically for physiologically triggered scan on the Physio parameter card.
P.1
1st Signal/Mode
Physio Signal 1
P.1
The 1st Signal/Mode selection list allows you to select a physiological signal and a scan mode.
P.1
ECG signal
P.1
0.0
P.1134
Operator Manual
References
Pulse signal
Measurement Parameters
P.1
External signal
P.1
You can input an external, digital triggering signal via the PMU
strip at the foot end of the patient table.
P.1
You use an external triggering signal, for example, for functional
scans (bold imaging) to trigger scanning of a series.
P.1
The rising edge of the signal is used to start the scan.
Respiratory signal
P.1
P.1
ECG/Retro, Pulse/Retro,
Ext/Retro
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1135
Measurement Parameters
References
Average cycle
Physio Signal 1
P.1
Acquisition window
Physio Signal 1
P.1
In the field Acquisition window you can enter the data acquisition time, that is, the time that is used for the scan after a trigger pulse in the physiologically triggered scan.
P.1
In this way you define the scan acquisition window.
P.1
0.0
P.1136
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Trigger pulse
Physio Signal 1, Physio PACE
P.1
In the Trigger pulse field, you define whether you want to use
every trigger event or only every nth event to trigger scanning.P.1
The value 1 means that every trigger signal starts a scan.
P.1
Trigger delay
Physio Signal 1
P.1
You can acquire images at any time during the signal cycle. Just
enter a delay time for the ECG/trigger signal into the Trigger
delay field.
P.1
The value entered corresponds to the time (grey bar) planned
between the trigger signal and the start of the measurement. P.1
For an adult patient with a pulse frequency of 70/min, you
require, for example, a delay time of 0 ms to acquire an image
of the end diastole. For an image of the systole, you need a
delay time of 250 - 350 ms.
P.1
Only for ECG, pulse and external trigger signal.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1137
Measurement Parameters
References
Phases
Physio Signal 1
P.1
Calculated phases
Physio Signal 1
P.1
0.0
P.1138
Operator Manual
References
Measurement Parameters
Threshold
Physio Signal 1
P.1
Respiratory phase
Physio Signal 1
P.1
Here, you select whether Inspiration (breathing in) or Expiration (breathing out) will be used for triggering.
P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.1139
Measurement Parameters
References
P.1
P.1
0.0
P.1140
Operator Manual
APPENDIX
P.2
Text Annotations in
Medical Images
P.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.21
References
P.2
The top left corner shows the patient and examination data.
P.2
P.2
Image text
Example
Patient name
Description
Peter Patient
Patient ID
02081948
*11.11.1970; 30Y
Examination number
STUDY 1
Date acquired
17.10.01
Time acquired
13:47:46.78
2 IMA 5/7
P.2
P.2
At the lower edge next to the scan and image parameters, the
data about contrast medium administration as well as an image
comment are provided.
P.2
P.2
Image text
Contrast agent/time after injection in
sec
Image comment
Example
Description
GADOLINIUM 1.1
0.0
P.22
Operator Manual
References
(3) Plant-specific
information and patient
position
P.2
The top right corner contains the name of your hospital or practice, the system name, the software version, patient position,
and direction of viewing.
P.2
P.2
Image text
Abbreviation
Example
Institution
System name
Magnetom Symphony
Software version
MR 2006T
Coordinate system
Referring physician
Phase-encoding direction
+LPH
Dr. Mustermann
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.23
P.2
References
In the bottom left corner you can see the parameters used to
generate the image.
P.2
Abbreviation
Example
MF
CQ as a percentage
MF 1.51/CQ 80
Trigger time
TT in msec
TT 50
Inversion time
TI in msec
TI 50
Repetition time
TR in msec
TR 600
Echo time
TE in msec
TE 30
TA
HH:MM:SS (hours range); MM:SS (minutes range);
SS.HS (seconds range)
TA 02:36*4
BW in hertz/pixels
BW 1000.0
Magnification factor/compression
Pixel bandwidth
Image type
p2 M/MIP
RG - Respiratory Gating
CG - Cardiac Gating
RT - Respiratory Trigger
CT - Cardiac Trigger
EXT - External trigger
RG/CT
A4/FS/SAT1/MT
0.0
P.24
Operator Manual
References
Image text
Coil information
Abbreviation
Example
NE1;SP1
*TS2_23 80
P.2
P.2
The bottom right corner shows data about the position, orientation, and thickness of the acquired slice, about the extent (FoV),
and about the window values.
P.2
P.2
Image text
Abbreviation
Example
D - Door open
I - Interpolation
R - Raw data filter
E - Elliptical filter
D\I
TP
H/F in mm
TP H300
SP in mm
SP L8.7
Slice thickness
Slice thickness interpolated
SL in mm
SL i in mm
SL 4.0
SL 4.0 i
FoV in mm
p - partial Fourier
s - swap
I - Interpolation
192p 256s I
192p 256s
Tra>Cor(-20)>Sag(-30)
Sequence mask
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.25
Image text
References
Abbreviation
Example
Flow-encoding direction
v150_inplane_fh
W -100
C -200
0.0
P.26
Operator Manual
References
P.2
The coils and coil elements used are shown in the lower left
image text.
P.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.27
References
P.2
P.2
Image text
Coil name
BO1, BO2
Body Matrix
BRL, BRR
CP Breast Array
DLL
DLR
EN
Endorectal
EX
CP Extremity
FL
CP Flex Large
FLL
FLS
FS
CP Flex Small
HE
Head Matrix
HRH
KN
HR Knee
NE1, NE2
Neck Matrix
H PA Matrix
F PA Matrix (CP PA Array)
SH
Shoulder Array
Spine Matrix
0.0
P.28
Operator Manual
References
P.2
P.2
Image text
Coil name
BL, BR
BO1, BO2
Body Matrix
EX
CP Extremity
HE
TxRx Head
Head Matrix
KN
NE1, NE2
Neck Matrix
PL1, ...,PL4
PR1, ...,PR4
H PA Matrix
F PA Matrix (CP PA Array)
SH
Shoulder Array
SHL
SHS
Spine Matrix
WR
CP Wrist
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.29
References
P.2
P.2
An image may include more than one image type, e.g. after several post-processing steps. These are concatenated, and separated by a slash (/). If the maximum line length is exceeded,
the last image types are omitted.
P.2
Example
P.2
P.2
P.2
P.2
0.0
P.210
Operator Manual
References
Inline reconstruction
Flow quantification
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
Real image
Abbreviation
Image type
ADC
TTP
SCM
TCS
PBP
GBP
RELMTT
WI
Wash In image
WO
PEI
MITP
COMB
Combination image
P.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.211
Functional imaging
Inline post-processing
References
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
MAG
Magnitude image
MSUM
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
GSP
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
MEAN
TTEST
MOSAIC
Mosaic image
COR
Correlation image
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
MIP
MIP_SAG
MIP_COR
MIP_TRA
TMIP
TMIP_SAG
TMIP_COR
TMIP_TRA
TSTDDEV
0.0
P.212
Operator Manual
References
Abbreviation
Image type
STDDEV_SAG
STDDEV_COR
STDDEV_TRA
DIS2D
DIS3D
ND
RETRO
Retro-Gating image
NORM
PROJECTION
IMAGE
Projection image
FIL
MOCO
FILTERED
P.2
Import/export
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
OTHER
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.213
References
Post-processing
3D reconstruction
Dynamic analysis
P.2
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
CSA MPR
CSA MIP
CSA SSD
CSA SUBTRACT
Subtraction image
CSA 3D EDITOR
CSA 3D FUSION
Fusion image
CSA VRT
CSA AVERAGE
VRT image
CSA RESAMPLED
Zooming/panning image
Graphic image
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
ADD
An addition
MEAN
COR
Correlation image
DIFFER
Differentiation image
DIFFUS
DIV
Division image
0.0
P.214
Operator Manual
References
Mean Curve
Position display
Abbreviation
Image type
SDEV
INT
Integration image
MULT
Multiplication image
SLOPE
SUB
Subtraction image
T1
T1 image
T2
T2 image
PDT1
PDT2
TTP
TTEST
LOG
CVxx
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
POSDISP
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
P.215
Image composing
Spectroscopy
References
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
COMPOSED
Composed images
P.2
P.2
Abbreviation
Image type
SPEC
Spectrum
0.0
P.216
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
P.2
A
Acceleration factor PE P.160
Acceleration factor 3D P.162
Accept. Location P.128
Access authorization
Soft tissue evaluation L.63
Access authorization to the BOLD task card L.42
Access control B.22, B.244, B.32
Access rights L.54
Acquiring diagnostic information C.124
Acquisition sequence for lines of raw data P.191
Acquisition window F.1520, F.1528, P.1136
Activating
Blocking areas (BOLD) L.424
Clip planes K.310
Activating first level mode F.1415
Activating/deactivating
Scan program option archive F.1629
Scan program option visibility F.1630
Activation map
Hiding K.41
Loading K.23
Setting colors K.47
Setting the cluster size K.411
Setting value ranges K.48
ADC images (apparent diffusion coefficient) P.1110
Noise level P.1111
Adding
Slab group F.576
Slice group F.576
Addition
Starting L.128
Adjusting protocols
Scanning with AutoAlign Scout F.198
Adjustment C.21, C.214
Closing C.263
Displaying the results C.270
Frequency adjustment C.223
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX1
Index
IX2
syngo MR
Annotating
Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1625
Annotations G.551, H.370
Application program A.22
Applications
User-defined D.312
Applying parameter changes F.584
Archive node J.37
Archive option for scan programs F.1629
Archiving
Errors J.220
Archiving media D.13
Areas
Measuring M.411
Arithmetic mean
Selecting the mode L.151
Starting L.151
Array coils P.185
Saving images uncombined P.182
Arrows
In Composing N.410
Arterial Input Function (AIF) L.514
Assigning
Assigning a region to a body region F.1632
Asymmetric echo P.192
Asymmetrical k space scanning P.156
Audit Trail B.320
Configuring the General Security Parameters B.277
Defining the events to be recorded B.288
Open Event Configuration B.286
Overview B.271
Storing and deleting log files B.294
Storing Configuration B.275
Viewer B.286
Viewing log files B.291
Auto Expose O.28
Deactivating O.29
Interrupting O.210
Auto Filming O.22
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
B
b value P.1109
Backup B.47
Bandwidth P.193
Base resolution P.150
Basics
AutoAlign F.192
Basics of reporting D.83
Bitmap
Format J.41
Blend mode N.323
Blocking areas
Activating/deactivating (BOLD) L.424
Blood flow
Direction P.1102
Body Coil P.186
Body region F.1634
Changing F.93
Deleting F.94
Bold vessels
Defining M.31
BOLD (Blood Oxygen Level Dependent Contrast) F.551
Paradigm size P.1121
Paradigm table P.1122
T-test P.1120
Box mode F.423
Breast biopsy F.181
Checking the marker position F.1828
Performing a biopsy examination F.1828
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX3
Index
IX4
syngo MR
C
Calculated phases P.1138
Calculating
Alpha images in BOLD automatically L.411
Combined images (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.624
Parameter images subsequently (BOLD) L.434
Parameter maps (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.610
Calculating T1 images L.169
Calculating T2 Images
Generating a test image L.172, L.175
Starting L.172
Calling
Composing N.13
MRNeuro K.12
Print dialog box for protocols F.132
Print preview of protocols F.138
Print preview of the report D.824
Soft tissue evaluation L.64
Vessel View M.13
Calling standard views K.329
Calling the 3D task card H.25
Camera O.55
Defective O.512
Error exposing film O.52
Selecting O.36, O.42, O.511
Captured cycle F.1519
Cardiac trigger per respiratory phase P.1140
CARE bolus P.1103
CARE Bolus scan F.1025
Caution
Back up your system before starting
the security configuration B.219
CamTasia directory J.219
Diagnostically relevant areas of images
may be lost. J.222
Impermissible manipulations A.11
Incorrect diagnosis H.101
Incorrect SUV calculation H.1040
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX5
Index
Cluster size
Changing (BOLD) L.427
Of the activation map K.411
Cobb
Scoliosis angle N.414
Coil abbreviations P.27
Coil elements F.434
Coil selection F.539
Coils
Information C.127, C.129
Selecting virtual coils F.1657
Coils and coil elements P.185
Color palette
Deselecting (BOLD) L.419, L.420
Color range
Changing in BOLD L.421
Excluding (BOLD) L.422
Color scale
Editing with parameter images L.418
Setting for parameter images in BOLD L.419
Colors of the activation map K.47
Combined echoes P.197
Combined images
Calculating (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.624
Combining rotate and shift functions F.451
Combo box A.233
Comment L.251
Entering a comment about a scan pause F.1221
Entering a comment about a scan protocol F.124
Comments G.551
Compensation T2 decay P.190
Composed volumes
Scrolling N.326
Composing
Calling N.13
Closing N.13
Control area N.310
Image text N.38
Task card N.32
IX6
syngo MR
Composite image
Loading into Composing N.312
Concatenations F.1522, F.1529, P.134
Configuration
Creating a encoding scheme for reports D.841
Creating or changing diagnostic codes
for reports D.838
Enter general settings D.833
Installing a user logo for reporting D.834
Of a report D.831
Of Audit Trail B.286, B.288
Of the MR system A.48
Opening Audit Trail Storing Configuration B.275
Predefining a diagnostic code D.836
Predefining a encoding scheme for reports D.837
Saving settings for reports D.842
Security system B.22
Setting the language of a report D.833
Configuration of Audit Trail B.294
Configuration of security system
Access control (overview) B.244
Audit Trail B.271, B.277, B.291
Changing password of user account B.231
Configuration of group accounts (Overview) B.235
Deleting user accounts B.234
Managing data protections B.248
Managing group accounts B.236
Managing groups B.243
Managing groups and roles B.242
Managing user accounts B.227, B.231
Opening configuration dialog B.222
Setting up the default protections B.259
Setting up the privileges B.263
User account B.225
Configuring
Movie display F.1732
User-defined applications D.718
Vessel View M.221
Configuring film sheets O.69
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX7
Index
IX8
syngo MR
D
Dark blood P.1123
Data
Correcting patient data D.42
Data levels D.14
Data tree D.22
Deleting D.616
Exporting to the file system D.56
Filtering data D.211
History of changes D.414
Image data D.15
Importing D.233
Instance level D.15
Marking D.66
Merging D.410
Patient data D.15
Protecting data from deletion D.621
Raw data D.15
Rearranging D.410
Selecting from archive media D.233
Sending via network D.53, G.710, J.33
Series data D.15
Storing on CD D.52
Study data D.15
Unmarking D.67
Work status D.62
Data formats K.21
Supported K.21
Data image/data series G.62
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX9
Index
Diffusion
b value P.1109
Diffusion coefficient
Selecting the mode L.157
Starting L.157
Diffusion mode P.1107
Diffusion Moment P.1111
Diffusion-weighted images P.1109
Diffusion-weighted scans F.554
Diff. weightings P.1108
Dimension (2D or 3D) P.189
Directing image processing G.344
Direction (flow encoding) P.1105
Display
Manual positioning N.218
Display of Navigator Objects F.427
Display order
Movie display F.1723
Displaying
Data tree D.22
Value of pixel lens at cursor position G.538
Displaying patents C.135
Distance P.1124
Distance line G.518
Changing G.520, H.356
Moving G.520, H.356
Distance measurements
Notes N.413
Distances
Measuring M.47
Distortion artifacts L.311
Cause L.311
Remedies L.312
Distortion correction
For composing N.24
Requirements L.313
Results L.314
Selecting images L.313
Starting calculation L.313
IX10
syngo MR
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Selection L.110
Setting a noise level L.123
Slope of linear regression L.152
Standard deviation L.164
Starting image analysis L.15
Starting the next job L.180
Status display L.179
Stopping evaluation L.182
Subtraction L.129
Test area for preview images L.117
T-test L.158
Dynamic scans
Multiple series P.180
Pause after measurement P.178
E
ECG signal F.1517, P.1134
Selecting a lead F.1510
ECG triggering F.1515
ECG/Retro, Pulse/Retro, Ext/Retro P.1135
Echo spacing P.195
Echo time (TE) P.138
Long echo trains P.190
Shortening by asymmetric echo P.192
Editing
Color scale parameter images (BOLD) L.418
Deactivating interpolation for parameter images in
BOLD L.417
Diagnostic code of a report D.836
Diagnostics and comments in the report D.814
Editing in the Protocol Editor F.1655
Images in BOLD L.416
Pause properties F.1219
Post-processing protocol (BOLD) L.440
Protocol parameters in
Soft tissue evaluation L.614, L.628
Protocol properties F.122
Report D.87, D.812
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX11
Index
IX12
syngo MR
F
Fader M.312
Fat suppression P.143
Field Map (Multi Angle Projection) C.239
Displaying C.244
Field of view (FOV) F.47, P.147
Changes via the mouse F.477
Rectangular FoV P.148
Square FoV P.147
Fieldmap K.42
File format
EDX F.1673
Filenames
Exported images J.46
Film job O.15
Adding images from Browser O.330
Adding images from Viewing O.330
Adding images from 3D O.330
Appending a new film sheet O.329
Changing priority O.510
Checking O.53
Deleting O.216, O.510
Designation O.312
Displaying O.34
Inserting O.328
Manipulating O.58
Merging O.216
Number of copies O.314
Opening O.312
Reactivating queue O.513
Redirecting O.512
Repeating O.59
Resuming O.59
Selecting O.313
Sending to camera/printer O.212
Several film sheets O.315
Status O.54
Stopping O.59
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Urgent O.510
Film layout
Changing for current job O.17
Standard O.17
Film preview
Adding images O.38
Calling up O.32
Changing film properties O.36
Closing O.32
Control area O.35
Deleting images O.37
Film job O.34
Paging through film sheets O.34
Selecting camera/printer O.36
Film properties O.36
Film sheet
Copying O.327
Deleting image O.324
Deselecting O.317
Dog-ears O.34
Layout O.45
Moving O.328
Multi-select O.318
Paging O.316
Repacking O.38, O.325
Selecting O.317
Selecting segment O.319
Film sheet division O.610
Film size O.68
Filming K.66
Auto Expose O.28
Control area O.311
Exposing a film job O.211
Exposing a film sheet O.213
Film job O.15
Film sheet display O.311
Film sheet full O.214
Film task selection O.212
From Browser window O.24
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX13
Index
IX14
syngo MR
Frequency C.223
Accepted for the measurement system C.232
Entering C.225
Transferring C.230
Frequency adjustment
Acceptance without successful adjustment C.232
Amplitude C.226
Graphic display of the results C.230
Numeric results C.229
Performing C.225
Preparing C.223
Search range C.227
Selecting the gain C.228
Selecting the receive channel C.232
Starting C.228
Vertical marker C.230
Full screen K.32, M.212
Fully automatic path creation M.314
Functional Privileges B.263
Fusion H.1019, H.1032
Calling up H.103
Changing the display H.1038
Landmark H.1017
Loading a new series H.105
Visual alignment H.1012
Fusion mode H.1036
G
Gathering diagnostic information C.125
Generate service password B.317
Geometry F.523
Common F.524
Navigator F.532
Saturation F.529
Global Bolus Plot (GBP) P.1114
Gradient mode P.198
Graphic tools G.52
In Composing N.41
Operator Manual
syngo MR
H
Handles
Extent handles F.439
FOV handle F.439
Pivot handle F.439
Hanning filter P.169
Height difference N.427
Help A.28
Hide Path H.1127
Index
Hiding
Activation map K.41
Clip planes K.310
Floating MPRs K.318
Orthogonal MPRs in the volume segment K.317
Plot segment K.16
Reference lines K.14
Unwanted volume parts K.310
VRT volume image K.318
Hip joint
Height difference N.427
HIPAA (Health Insurance Portability
and Accountability Act) B.11
Histogram G.516, L.117
History of changes D.41
HIS/RIS E.12
Patient search E.315
Worklist D.12, D.24
I
Icon button A.235
Icons
Identifying protocols F.65
Identification of a report in the Patient Browser D.82
Image
Clipping document O.49
Copying to the clipboard N.55
Creating a new scan protocol from an image F.1650
Displaying text O.412
Filming from Composing N.57
Fitting to segment O.49
Image stamps D.116
Loading into Composing N.312
Original image O.410
Rotating in 3D H.319
Sending from Composing N.59
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX15
Index
IX16
syngo MR
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
Information
About coils C.127, C.129
About databases C.130
About drives C.130
About hardware options C.129
About software options C.129
About the hardware C.127
About the network C.133
About the system C.127
For Administrators B.21
For service technicians B.111, B.41
For standard user B.31
SAR monitoring F.1420
Stimulation monitoring F.1440
Information area D.18
Inhomogeneity of the magnetic field C.239
Inline adjustment
Confirming the frequency spectrum C.265
Entering the frequency C.268
Graphic display of the results C.267
Selecting the receive channel C.269
Inline Display
Automatic image storage F.1016
CARE Bolus scan F.1025
Copying the image position F.1019
Ending F.1031
Image text F.1015
Manual image storage F.1018
Modifying display F.1011
Navigator signal F.1027
Pausing F.109
Real-time mode F.1022
Removing an image F.1015
Restarting F.1010
Selective image display F.1021
Spectroscopy time signal F.1030
Starting F.102
Starting multiple breath-hold scans F.1026
Tips on real-time scans F.1033
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX17
Index
IX18
syngo MR
K
Keyboard A.27
Keyboard focus F.319
Keyboard operation F.582
Keypad
Numeric A.211
Symbol A.211
Knocking sounds P.188
Kyphosis angle N.419
L
Landmark H.1017
Layout
Double N.321
Single N.319
Single with original N.320
LED display F.1726
License for Security system B.212
Light Source H.719
Lightening icon F.630
Line
Calculating a profile G.526
In Composing N.49
Line mode F.424
Loading
Activation map K.23
BOLD volume K.23
First series into BOLD L.46
Images in BOLD L.44
Images in MRNeuro K.22
Images in Vessel View M.22
Loading acquired images/series
automatically F.1210
Loading additional series into BOLD L.48
Mosaic images into BOLD L.410
Loading automatically
Into GSP segment F.1212
Operator Manual
syngo MR
M
Maestro layout F.39, F.172
Changing the arrangement of series F.1710
Loading series F.174
Navigating in the stamp segments F.177
Magnetic field inhomogeneity C.239
Magnetization transfer (MTC) P.146
Magnitude image 3D Shim C.245
Magnitude images P.142, P.1106
Magnitude sum images P.1106
Magn. preparation P.141
Index
Main menu
View > Info Area D.112
View > Tool Bar D.112
View > Tree D.112
Making
Diagnostics and comments in the report D.814
Report D.86
Manage
Audit Trail Events B.286
Groups and Roles B.236, B.242
User accounts B.231
Manual echo spacing P.195
Manual path creation M.315
Manual positioning
Display N.218
In a slice N.215
Slice relative to each other N.217
Manual start (scan protocol) F.127
Running a protocol once/more than once F.128
Manually deactivating AutoAlign F.1911
Marking arrow M.16
Marking data items D.66
Masked areas K.42
Mean curve (statistical evaluation) L.21
Changing image display L.221
Defining sorting L.213
Defining the x axis L.215
Drawing ROIs in the first segment L.228
Drawing ROIs in the third segment L.232
Evaluation across series L.214
Evaluation within the series L.213
Filming images L.259
Image as a background for the diagram L.252
Image text and comments L.251
Loading images into the third and
fourth segments L.211
Loading images of the first segment L.27
Mean Curve task card L.24
Overview L.23
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX19
Index
Requirements L.27
Result display in the diagram L.241
Result display in the table L.242
Saving results as an ASCII file L.256
Saving results as images L.254
Scaling the x axis L.245
Scaling the y axis L.247
Scrolling across series L.223
Scrolling with dynamic ROIs L.231
Searching for an original images by scrolling in the
fourth segment L.225
Set relative evaluation L.237
Setting absolute evaluation L.236
Smoothing curves L.250
Sorting in Across mode L.217
Start evaluation L.239
Static ROI L.230
Using vertical scan line L.243
Measurement parameters
Applying the settings F.584
Changing because of SAR monitoring F.1411
Copying F.585
Copying a parameter group F.585
Slice group/slab group P.13
Measurement time
Reduce by slice partial Fourier P.157
Reduction by elliptical sampling P.189
Reduction of partial Fourier matrices P.156
Reduction with PAT P.158
Measuring
Angle G.527, H.359
Angles M.414
Applying a contour M.427
Areas M.411
Closing routine examinations F.618
Complete protocols F.611
Completing a patient F.620
Completing and running a protocol F.612
Curvature of the spine N.414
IX20
syngo MR
Curves M.49
Defining a new center position F.636
Deviation from the vertical N.422
Distance G.518, G.522
Distances M.47
Freehand contour M.412
Height difference N.427
Interrupting the measurement F.629
Kyphosis angle N.419
Pixels with crosshair G.533
Repeating a canceled protocol F.634
Repeating scans F.634
Scanning open protocols more than once F.637
Starting the next scan F.626
With a countdown F.627
Measuring vessel cross-section M.427
Menu
Dropdown A.243
Menu bar A.243
Options A.244
Popup A.246
Submenu A.245
Merging film job O.216
MinIP thin series H.538
MinIP (minimum intensity projection) H.15
MIP display
Volume image M.15
MIP mode
Closing M.28
Setting M.28, M.211
MIP thin H.530
Series H.533
MIP thin slice
Setting the mode M.211
MIP (maximum intensity projection) H.15, H.54
Radial range H.529, H.530
Reconstructing coronal MIP images inline P.1131
Reconstructing sagittal MIP images inline P.1131
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX21
Index
N
Name
Correcting data D.42
Name of sequence F.564
Navigating
In the stamp segments F.177
Movie display F.1727
Navigating in the Exam Explorer F.1612
Navigation area D.18, F.165
Navigator cuboid
Rotating F.450
Navigator object
FoV phase P.123
FoV read P.123
IX22
syngo MR
Location P.122
Orientation P.122
Rotation P.123
Setting TR of the navigator pulses P.126
Slice thickness P.123
Navigator Objects F.415, P.121
Display F.428
Parameters F.415
Navigator signal F.1027
Correlation between diaphragm movement and
anatomy to be scanned P.130
Defining the time P.130
Deviation of the position of the diaphragm from the
tolerance center P.127
Planning the preparation phase P.126
Saving temporal changes as images P.129
Network information C.133
New film sheet O.38
ngio F.546
Noise level
ADC maps P.1111
Dynamic analysis L.123
Noise suppression with the ContextVision filter L.36
Normal mode F.142
Normalization filter P.173
Number of pixels
Setting for shift N.214
Number of readout steps P.150
Numbering of the reconstructed images F.667
Numeric keypad A.211
O
Object list M.416
Deleting an object M.418
Displaying an object M.417
Renaming an object M.418
Storing notes M.418
Oblique cut planes H.320
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
P
Package mode F.424
Paging G.37
Using keyboard G.38
Using scroll bar G.310
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX23
Index
IX24
syngo MR
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX25
Index
Properties F.1220
Renaming F.1625
Pause properties
Editing F.1219
Percentage of Baseline at Peak map (PBP) P.1114
Performance report D.68
Perfusion F.556
Automatic sorting of images L.58
Calculating parameter images L.513
Color display of parameter images L.524
GBP curve P.1114
Loading Images L.54
Original images P.1113
PBP image P.1114
Positioning an AIF ROI L.517
Scrolling images and series L.510
Selecting a post-processing protocol L.513
Setting the time range L.519
Settling P.1116
Starting calculation L.521
Storing and filming results L.526
Suitable images L.55
TTP image P.1113
Permission B.244
To access data B.22
Phase contrast angiography F.549
Phase errors P.190
Phase images P.142, P.1106
3D Shim C.245
Phase oversampling F.432, P.114
Changes via the mouse F.480
Phase partial Fourier P.156
Phase stabilization P.190
Phase-encoding direction P.113
Phases F.1529, P.1125, P.1138
Resolution P.151
Phoenix F.337, F.658, F.1650
AutoAlign F.1923
IX26
syngo MR
Physiological display
Contact F.1510
Display of trigger information F.1512
Graphic display of time ranges F.1511
Physiological effects F.141
Physiological scan
Acquisition window F.1520, F.1528
Performing F.155
Preparing F.153
Sensors F.153
Starting F.1534
Physiological signal
Monitoring F.155
Pixel coordinates F.334
Pixel lens H.368
Deleting the marker G.544
Display value at cursor position G.538
Displaying values permanently H.368
Inserting a marker at a fixed position G.539
Requirement for reference image G.536
Restrictions G.537
Saving the marker with the image G.544
Selecting and moving the marker G.540
Using G.538
Pixel lense G.536
Planning
Contrast agent pause F.1223
Planning oblique and double-oblique slices P.19
Playback
Patient instructions manually F.115
Voice output for patient instructions F.113
Plot segment
Showing/hiding K.16
PMU display F.153
Polygon
In Composing N.49
Position accept window P.128
Position display
Basics G.62
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Configuring G.614
Data and reference image G.62
Defining data and reference images G.64
Display rules G.69
Displaying some images G.66
Displaying whole series G.66
Example G.612, G.613
Labeling rules G.610
Name and number of the new series G.68
Requirements G.63
Position nose H.1130
Position toolbar F.44
Positioning the patient table F.82
Post-processing L.434
Preparing (BOLD) L.434
Saving protocol changes (BOLD) L.442
Starting the protocol editor L.441
Starting (BOLD) L.438
Tracing (BOLD) L.439
Tracking jobs L.523
Post-processing protocol L.513
Editing (perfusion) L.530
Processing (BOLD) L.440
Preferred orientation
Checking M.215
Preparations for Security B.212
Preparing
Post-processing (BOLD) L.434
Preregistration E.21, E.224
Presets H.1115
Preview images L.117
Print dialog box
Calling up F.132
Print preview of protocols F.138
Print range
Setting F.135
Setting the print scope F.135
Index
Print scope
Setting page numbering F.137
Setting print options F.136
Printer O.55
Error while printing O.52
Selecting O.36, O.42
Setting F.134
Printer a list of contents F.136
Printing
Protocols and lists of contents F.131, F.136
Protocols print preview F.138
Report D.824
Printing protocols
Exam Explorer F.1681
Privileges B.244, B.263
To access application functions B.22
Procedure step
Cancel F.910
Completing F.911
Deleting F.912
Inserting F.96
Profile G.526
Save P.129
Profile curve M.422
Program F.167
Commenting F.1625
Copying F.1621, F.1623
Creating new F.1638
Cutting F.1622
Delete F.1624
Inserting F.1623
Moving F.1619
Renaming F.1625
Program control F.212
Completing a procedure step F.619
Display of AutoAlign F.194
Examination with AutoAlign F.195
Opening the next protocol for editing F.640
Planning mode (AutoAlign) F.1929
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX27
Index
Queue F.64
Transferring scan program
from the Exam Explorer F.1666
Program instructions F.16, F.167
Adding to a scan program F.1639
Delete F.663
Finding F.1640
Skipping F.633
Transferring individually F.210
Projection areas F.417
Projection display F.436
Properties
Defining the floating MPRs K.321
Defining the orthogonal MPRs K.319
Protections on data B.244, B.248, B.259
Protocol F.16, F.167
Changing the display of the print preview F.1310
Close the print preview F.1311
Commenting F.1625
Completing F.639
Copy reference for multiple target protocols F.651
Copying F.1621, F.1623
Copying parameters F.643
Cutting F.1622
Delete F.1624
Editing for stimulation monitoring F.1437
Export settings F.1314
Exporting data F.1313
Generating a protocol from acquired images
(Phoenix) F.658
Inserting F.1623
Making a source protocol complete F.652
Moving F.1619
Multiple scans F.624
Opening it for slice positioning F.42
Opening the print dialog box F.132
Opening the print preview F.138
Printing F.131, F.132
Printing from the print preview F.1311
IX28
syngo MR
Q
Quality measurement
Performing F.201
Query & Retrieve Configuration D.244
Queue
Accepting parameter settings F.643
Changing the scan sequence F.660
Cutting / copying and pasting a
program instruction F.661
Deleting completely F.664
Deleting program instructions F.663
Displaying in the program control F.64
Operator Manual
syngo MR
R
Radial range
Changing H.3105
Generating H.3101, H.3112, H.615
Graphic display H.3102
Moving H.3106
Settings H.3103, H.3114
Radio button A.232
Range markers
Adding a work step F.96
Body region F.93, F.94
Canceling a procedure step F.910
Changing the body region F.93
Changing the image comment F.916
Completing a procedure step F.911
Deleting a body region F.94
Deleting an image comment F.917
Deleting the procedure step F.912
Image comment F.915
Inserting an image comment F.915
Procedure step F.95
Procedure step being processed F.97
Procedure step completed F.911
Work step canceled F.910
Raw data D.15
Image stamps D.116
Raw data (Hanning filter) P.169
Readout bandwidth P.193
Real images P.142
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX29
Index
IX30
syngo MR
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
Reporting D.81
Basics D.83
Codes in the report D.85
Configuration D.831
Content items D.84
Diagnostic codes D.85
Editing a report D.87, D.812
Making a Report D.86
Navigating in the report D.810
Opening a report D.88
Printing a report D.824
Relationship between content items D.84
Saving a report D.822
Sending a report D.829
Structure of a Report D.84
Representative image F.310
Requirements
AutoAlign F.193
For composing N.23
For MRNeuro K.21
For Vessel View M.23
Resetting
All views K.329
Clip planes K.315
Floating MPRs K.331
Orthogonal MPRs K.331
Volume view K.330
Resolution F.517
Respiratory control F.1026, P.124
Respiratory phases F.1529, P.1139
Respiratory signal F.1526, P.1135
Restore image display G.426
Restore Magn. P.146
Restoring
Session in Vessel View M.226
Restoring a session
In Vessel View M.226
Result images L.124
Result series L.124
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX31
Index
IX32
syngo MR
S
Safety standards
Introduction B.11
Sagittal view H.328
SAR information F.1420
SAR limit values F.143
Exceeding F.1410
Stimulation models F.143
SAR monitoring
Automatic F.146
Changing measurement parameters F.1411
On other task cards F.1419
Relevant patient data F.1426
Skipping a scan protocol F.1417
SAR status F.1425
SAR values F.1422
Reduction of delay time P.193
Relative F.1423
Saturation mode F.529, P.117
Saturation region F.530, P.117
Location F.577
Orientation F.577
Parallel sat P.119
Standard sat P.118
Tracking sat P.119
Saturation regions
Adding in the center of the image F.466
Display F.426
Parallel F.411
Positioning freely F.467
Regular F.410
Rotating F.450
Tracking F.413
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Save
Path H.1126
Saving scan data automatically F.1210
Scan program F.1661
Saving
Additional information M.54
All alpha images (BOLD) L.428
Configuration settings for reports D.842
Images G.74, K.63, M.52
Images (BOLD) L.428
Marker of the pixel lens with the image. G.544
Mean curve results L.254
Mean curve results as an ASCII file L.256
New images K.62, M.53
Protocol data in Soft tissue evaluation L.617, L.631
Report D.822, M.55
Session in Vessel View M.225
Single alpha images (BOLD) L.432
Single parameter images (BOLD) L.432
VRT parameters K.38, K.57, M.27
Windowing values G.77
Saving as a BMP image file K.64
Saving images (Inline-Subtraction) P.1126
Saving the session
In Vessel View M.225
Saving uncombined P.182
Scaling factor (Inline-Subtraction) P.1127
Scan P.177
Displaying M.417
Performing physiologically controlled scans F.155
Scan procedure for a routine examination F.610
Skipping F.1433, F.1437
Skipping because of SAR monitoring F.1417
Starting F.1534
Scan at current table position P.182
Scan pause F.167
Adding to a scan program F.1639
Defining as a contrast agent pause F.1223
Entering a comment F.1221
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX33
Index
Scan region
Location P.183
Scan region Memory P.184
Scan time F.22
Scheduler D.12
Updating D.24
Scoliosis angle
According to Cobb N.414
Scout
Duration P.126
Mode P.126
TR P.126
Scroll bar A.228, G.310
Scrolling G.32
Composed volumes N.326
From series to series (BOLD) L.415
Image by image (BOLD) L.413
Mean Curve L.225
Page by page G.37
Patients G.317
Series to series G.312
Slice image stack N.328
Studies G.314
Through images and series (BOLD) L.413
Through the slice image stacks M.213
Using the dog-ears G.35, M.213, N.328
With reference lines M.214
Scrolling series by series (BOLD) L.415
Search position P.129
Search window P.129
Searching patient data E.34
Section planes
Moving an intersection point K.328
Panning K.326
Rotating K.327
Sectional images
Windowing K.324
Security in syngo MR B.11
IX34
syngo MR
Security system
Access control (overview) B.244
Audit Trail B.271, B.277, B.288, B.291, B.294
Changing password of user account B.231
Configuration B.22
Configuration of group accounts (Overview) B.235
Configuration of user accounts B.225
Deleting user accounts B.234
Enabling B.219
Managing data protections B.248
Managing group accounts B.236
Managing groups B.243
Managing groups and roles B.242
Managing user accounts B.227, B.231
Opening Audit Trail Archiving Configuration B.275
Opening configuration dialog B.222
Overview B.31
Setting up the default protections B.259
Setting up the privileges B.263
Setting up workflow B.216
Setting up (preparations) B.212
Segment
Enlarging K.32
Segment height F.329
Segment size F.328
Segmentation
Fully automatic M.314
Semiautomatic M.310
Segments F.1522, P.196
Selecting
Anatomical series in Soft tissue evaluation L.611
Annotation texts G.555
Camera O.511
Camera/printer O.36, O.42
Clip planes K.312
Combined protocol in Soft tissue evaluation L.627
Contrast agent from the catalog F.1224
Data for Soft tissue Evaluation L.65
Explicit selection F.439
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
Sequence of actions
Saving to a movie file M.59
Sequence variant F.564
Series P.133
Creating a new scan protocol from a series F.1650
Loading into BOLD L.48
Loading the first into BOLD L.46
Selecting for reconstruction N.22
Series block F.339
Series icon F.32
Service
Local service A.44
Maintenance A.42
Remote service A.45
Service access B.315, B.42, B.45
Rights B.41
Service password B.317
Setting
Color scale in BOLD L.419
Completion status in the report D.812
Diagnostic code in the report D.815
Diagnostic code of a report D.836
Encoding scheme for reports D.837
Language of a report in the configuration D.833
Page number in the print scope F.137
Print options in the print scope F.136
Print range F.135
Printer F.134
Verification status in the report D.813
Setting MinIP H.343
Setting the width of the flat ribbon M.422
Settings for spin preparation F.513
Settling P.1116
Shadow lines F.438
Shadow protocol F.337
Shift
Setting the number of pixels N.214
Shift key A.217
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX35
Index
IX36
syngo MR
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Index
Spectroscopy
Inline Display F.1030
Speed of Movie display F.1724
Spin box A.233
Spin preparation F.513
Spinal column
Deviation from the vertical N.422
SSD (Fly view) H.115
SSD (surface shaded display) H.18, H.61
Changing thresholds H.63
Generating images H.62
Starting extraction H.67
Stack G.218
Stamp segments F.172
Changing the arrangement of series F.1710
Navigating F.177
Repeating the measurement F.176
Standard deviation
Calculated image from 3D blocks P.1129, P.1130
Calculating L.166
Selecting the mode L.166
Standard film layout O.17
Standard saturation regions P.118
Standard view
Coronal H.34, H.329
Restoring H.330
Sagittal H.34, H.328
Transversal H.34, H.327
Start options (scan protocol) F.125
Starting
Application program C.19
Default setting for manual starting of a
scan protocol F.127
Export of protocol data F.1316
MRNeuro K.12
Parameter image calculation L.622
Post-processing (BOLD) L.438
Printing a report D.827
Printing protocols F.1312
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX37
Index
IX38
syngo MR
Statistics
Showing/hiding G.514, G.521, G.525
Status
Movie display F.1717
Status bar A.247
Data transfer J.62
Stenosis curve M.421
Step Size H.1128
Stimulation F.141
Automatic monitoring F.1431
Editing the protocol F.1437
Information F.1440
Limit reached F.1434
Threshold exceeded F.1432
Stimulation models F.143
Stimulation monitoring
Calculating new parameters F.1435
On other task cards F.1438
Storage
Configuring J.71
Icons on the status bar J.62
In the network J.37
Storage Comittment D.616, J.31
Storing
Audit Trail Configuration B.277
Automatic J.15
On a multi-session CD J.214
On a single session CD J.27
Storing data on an external medium J.14
Storing data J.21
Storing notes M.418
Stripe G.216
Structure
Report D.84
Study comparison mode G.214
Study report
Image stamps D.116
Subtask card A.240, G.18
dB/dt F.1442
Operator Manual
syngo MR
SAFE F.1440
Subtracting P.1125
Subtraction
Starting L.133
Subtrahend (Inline-Subtraction) P.1128
Surface coils P.185
Surface Matching H.1025
Swapping the phase direction F.452
Switch user B.35
Switching modes F.462
Switching off
Blocking areas (BOLD) L.424
Interpolation parameter images L.417
Symbol keypad A.211, D.32
syngo MR
Changing your password C.114
Closing C.16
Closing an application program C.19
Locking the computer C.111
Logging off C.112
Logging on a new user C.113
Shutting down and rebooting components C.117
Starting C.16
Starting an application program C.19
Switching the Power Supply to Standby C.121
Syringe icon F.71
System
Forced reboot C.18
Forced shutdown C.18
System acquisition window P.1136
System information C.127
T
Tab A.236
Tab card A.236
Table
Results in mean curve L.242
Table movement P.181
Index
syngo MR 2006T
IX39
Index
IX40
syngo MR
U
Undo
All steps M.18
Unlicensed scan programs F.1610
Unloading
Single volume K.24
Unselecting
Color palette in BOLD L.419, L.420
Upgrade info (scan protocol) F.1216
User account B.32
Change password B.231
Configuration (Overview) B.225
Creating a new user account B.227
Deleting B.234
Enabling/disabling B.231
Properties B.231
Selecting for editing B.231
Special accounts B.25
User change during composing N.210
Operator Manual
syngo MR
V
Value ranges of the activation map K.48
Varying magnetic fields F.141
Velocity encoding P.1105
Vertical scan line L.243
Vessel navigator
Calling M.419
Evaluating a longitudinal section M.425
MIP view M.419, M.423
MPR view M.419
Profile curve M.422
Rotating the longitudinal section M.423
Setting the width of the flat ribbon M.422
Stenosis curve M.421
Vessel orthogonal orientation M.42
Vessel section images
Creating axial cuts M.43
Vessel View
Calling M.13
Closing M.112
Configuring M.221
Requirements M.23
Vessel View task card
Overview M.14
Vessels
Defining M.31
View
Changed data C.126
Databases C.132
Drives C.131
Index
Patents C.135
Protocol parameters in the protocol view F.1644
Unlicensed scan programs F.1610
Upgrade info of a scan protocol F.1216
View options
Defining M.221
Viewing
Closing images G.718
Closing series G.718
Closing the patient G.719
Copying, cutting and pasting graphics G.556
Display mode G.212
Drag & drop images from Browser G.24
Graphics tools G.51
Images, text, graphics G.15
Layout of the image area G.14, G.220
Loading images from Browser G.22
Loading multiframe images G.27
Movie G.318
Patient information G.17
Regions of interest (ROIs) G.54
Scroll bar G.310
Subtask cards G.18
Text blocks G.225
Transferring images to 3D task card G.716
Viewing distance H.1114
Viewing point H.1112, H.1113, H.1116
Virtual coils
Selecting F.1657
Virtual film sheet O.16
Film sheet full O.214
Visibility-Irrespective of licensing F.1630
Visual alignment H.1012
VOI
Deleting K.57
Drawing a contour K.53
Editing a contour K.54
Organizing K.56
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX41
Index
IX42
syngo MR
W
Water suppression C.256, P.145
Acceptance without successful adjustment C.262
Accepting the correction factor C.262
Entering the correction factor C.258
Entering the transmitter increment C.258
Graphic display of the results C.261
Numeric results C.260
Preparing C.256
Selecting the gain C.259
Selecting the receive channel C.262
Starting the measurement C.259
Wildcards E.35
Window
Active A.229
Border A.223
Closing A.225
Configuration window A.32
Controlling the window display A.223
Maximizing A.225
Menu bar A.223
Menu for window commands A.223
Minimizing A.225
Moving A.227
Resizing A.226
Restoring size A.225
Scroll bar A.223
Operator Manual
syngo MR
Scrolling A.228
Status bar A.223
Switching between windows A.229
Title bar A.223
Tool bar A.223
Workspace A.223
Window center G.43
Window values G.77
Setting N.334
Window width G.43
Window (BOLD) P.1121
Windowing G.42, K.324, O.331
Anatomical images in BOLD L.416
Auto window G.49
In Composing N.334
Organ-specific window settings G.411
Parameter images L.525
Restoring window values G.414
Setting the scope G.44
Window 1 / Window 2 O.332
With the mouse G.412
Windows XP A.21
Work status
Abbreviations D.62
Entering D.65
Workflow for configuration of security system B.216
Working in 3D
Restoring original view H.330
Showing/Hiding graphics H.84
Switching to MIP H.341
Switching to MPR H.340
Switching to SSD H.344
Write protection J.25
X
x axis scaling L.245
Index
Y
y axis scaling L.247
Yo-yo F.1722
Z
Zoom factor G.417
Zooming G.415
Images K.33
Restoring zoom factor G.421
With the mouse G.418
Symbols
+GSP toolbar F.44
Numerics
1st Signal/Mode P.1134
3 point mode F.463
3D
Auto-storing H.1210
Configuration H.141
Control area H.111
Data checked for suitability H.23
Filming images H.132
Grouping images by output type H.126
Image area H.111
Image information H.39
MIP thin H.530
MIP (maximum intensity projection) H.54
MPR thick H.43
MPR (multiplanar reconstruction) H.41
Orientation cube H.35
Orientation description H.35
Orientation markers H.36
Output segment H.38
Reference image H.311
0.0
syngo MR 2006T
IX43
Index
syngo MR
IX44
Operator Manual